Volvo 2016 XC90 T8 Twin Engine Plug In Hybrid Owner's Manual XC90T8 Plugin Owners V1

User Manual: Volvo 2016 XC90 T8 Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid Owner's Manual 2016 Volvo XC90 Owners Manual Transmission | Owner's Manual Pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 546

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

WEB EDITION

OWNER'S MANUAL

VÄLKOMMEN!
We trust that you will enjoy many years of safe driving in your Volvo, an
automobile designed with your safety and comfort in mind. We encourage you to familiarize yourself with the equipment descriptions and operating instructions in this manual.
We also urge you and your passengers to wear seat belts at all times in
this (or any other) vehicle. And, of course, please do not operate a vehi-

cle if you may be affected by alcohol, medication or any impairment that
could hinder your ability to drive.
Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable federal safety and emission standards. If you have any questions regarding your vehicle, please
contact your Volvo retailer or see the article "Contacting Volvo" for information on getting in touch with Volvo in the United States and Canada.

CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
14

Using the center display

General safety information

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance

Using the owner's manual

Occupant safety

Additional information about your vehicle

On-board digital owner's manual

Reporting safety defects

General information about the XC90
T8 Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid

Navigating in the digital owner's manual

Recall information

Volvo and the environment

Glass

Safety during pregnancy

Owner's manual and the environment

Technician certification

Whiplash protection system

IntelliSafe—driver support

Seat belts

Sensus

Seat belt pretensioners

Owner's manual in mobile devices

Buckling and unbuckling seat belts

Options, accessories and the Onboard Diagnostic (OBDII) socket

Door and seat belt reminders

Child safety

Child restraints

Infant seats

Convertible seats

Booster cushions

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors

Lower child seat attachment points

Owner's information
Driver distraction
Volvo Structural Parts Statement
Crash event data
Volvo ID
Center display overview
Changing center display settings

27
28
29
30
31
32
34

Top tether anchors

80
81

Using the center display keyboard

Integrated booster cushion*

Function view buttons

Raising the integrated booster cushion*

Navigating in the center display's views

Stowing the integrated booster cushion*

Symbols in the center display status bar

Occupant weight sensor

Safety mode

Changing settings in different types
of apps

SAFETY

Contacting Volvo

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Starting or moving a vehicle in safety
mode

Airbag system

Driver/passenger side airbags

Inflatable curtains

Side impact airbags

Trip computer

Voice control

120

Displaying trip computer information

Using voice commands

121

Displaying trip statistics

Voice control for cell phones

122

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

Voice control for radio and media

122

Programming the HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

100

Climate system voice commands

123

Navigation system voice commands

124

Instruments and controls

103

Voice control settings

125

Adjusting the power door mirrors

105

Indicator symbols in the instrument panel

125

Laminated panoramic roof*

106

Instrument panel

127

Operating the laminated panoramic roof*

107

Instrument panel App menu

129

Power windows

109

130

Operating the power windows

109

Hybrid-related information in the
instrument panel

Rearview mirror

110

Instrument panel licenses

132

Warning symbols in the instrument panel

137

Compass

139

Calibrating the compass

139

Lighting panel and controls

140

Low beam headlights

142

Using sun shades
Settings view
Categories in Settings view

111
111
112

Changing system settings in Settings view

114

Changing settings in apps

115

Daytime Running Lights (DRL)

142

Resetting the settings view

115

High and low beam headlights

143

Resetting user data when the vehicle
changes owners

116

Active Bending Lights*

145

Ambient temperature sensor

116

Brake lights

146

Clock

117

Rear fog lights

146

Head-up display (HUD)*

117

Hazard warning flashers

147

Parking lights

147
3

CLIMATE

Approach lighting

148

Home safe lighting

148

Adjusting function settings in the
multifunctional front seats*

166

Climate control system

178

Perceived temperature

Rear seats

169

178

Easy access to and from the driver seat

Climate system sensors

169

179

Adjusting the second row head restraints

Parking climate (preconditioning)

170

179

Adjusting the second row backrest tilt

171

Activating/deactivating the parking
climate timer

181

Activating/deactivating the climate
comfort retaining function*

181

Preconditioning timer

182

Passenger compartment lighting

148

Using turn signals

151

Messages in the instrument panel
and center display

151

Handling messages in the instrument panel and center display

153

Folding the second row backrests

172

Handling messages stored from the
instrument panel and center display

154

Moving the second row seats forward/rearward

174

Using the instrument panel App menu

156

Getting into and out of the third row
of seats

174

Setting the parking climate (preconditioning) timer

182

Using the windshield wipers

156

Folding the third row backrests

175

Starting and stopping preconditioning

184

Activating/deactivating the rain sensor

157

Preconditioning symbols and messages

185

Windshield and headlight washers

158

Air quality

186

Tailgate window wiper and washer

159

Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*

186

Steering wheel

160

Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)*

186

Adjusting the steering wheel

161

Passenger compartment air filter

187

Seats

161

Automatic climate control

187

Manually operated front seats

162

Climate system controls

188

Power front seats*

163

189

Adjusting power front seats*

163

Climate system controls in the center
display

Adjusting the passenger's seat from
the driver's seat*

164

Rear climate system controls on the
tunnel console

190

Using the power seat memory function*

164

Setting the blower speed

191

Multifunctional front seats*

165

Setting the temperature

192

Turning recirculation on and off

194

LOADING AND STORAGE

LOCKS AND ALARM

Defrosting windows and mirrors

195

Cargo space

208

Locks and remote keys

226

Turning steering wheel heating* on
and off

197

Passenger compartment storage spaces

208

Alarm

226

Air conditioning

Using the glove compartment
198

209

228

Tunnel console

Turning seat heating* on and off

199

210

Automatically arming/disarming the
alarm

Sun visors

211

200

Deactivating the alarm without a
functioning remote key

228

Turning front seat ventilation* on and off

Electrical sockets

Air distribution

212

201

Child safety locks

228

Opening/closing/directing air vents

215

202

230

Grocery bag holder

Adjusting air distribution

217

Antenna locations for the start and
lock system

202

Cargo net

217

Start and lock system type designations

230

Air distribution table

204

Steel cargo grid*

219

Immobilizer

231

220

Changing the remote key's battery

232

221

Remote key's range

235

Remote key

235

Load anchoring eyelets
Cargo compartment cover*

Detachable key blade

237

Foot movement tailgate operation*

238

Locking and unlocking confirmation

240

Locking/unlocking from inside the
vehicle

242

Locking/unlocking from outside the
vehicle

243

Locking/unlocking the tailgate

244

Power tailgate*

246

Locking/unlocking with the detachable key blade

248

DRIVER SUPPORT
Driver support systems

252

Pilot Assist auto-hold brake function

279

Driver support system camera

252

Pilot Assist limitations

280

Camera limitations

254

Driver support system radar unit

257

Other Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
functions

Radar sensor limitations

258

Cruise Control (CC)

261

301

282

Changing tolerance for the
Automatic Speed Limiter

302

Radar sensor

283

Deactivating/reactivating the Speed
Limiter*

303

Radar sensor - type approval

284

Turning the Speed Limiter* off

Adaptive cruise control passing
assistance

304

284

Road Sign Information (RSI)*

304

Starting and activating Cruise Control

261

Changing Cruise Control speed

262
263

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) - fault
tracing

285

Deactivating/resuming Cruise
Control (CC)

264

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) symbols and messages

286

Turning Cruise Control off
Switching between Cruise Control
(CC) and Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

265

City Safety™

287

City Safety warning level settings

289

Detecting cyclists and pedestrians
with City Safety

290

City Safety in crossing traffic

291

Rear Collision Warning (RCW)

292

City Safety limitations

293

City Safety™ troubleshooting

295

City Safety symbols and messages

297

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Activating/deactivating the
Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)*

266

Starting and activating Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)

268

Deactivating/resuming Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)

269

Changing Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) speed

271

Setting an Adaptive Cruise Control
time interval

272

Pilot Assist*

273

Starting and activating Pilot Assist

276

Deactivating/resuming Pilot Assist

277

Setting a Pilot Assist time interval

278

Speed limiter (SL)*

298

Starting and activating the Speed
Limiter (SL)*

299

Changing a Speed Limiter (SL)*
maximum speed

299

Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)*

300

Road Sign Assistance (RSI)* operation

305

Road Sign Assistance (RSI)* limitations

306

Park Assist*

306

Activating/deactivating Park Assist

308

Park Assist limitations

308

Park assist symbols and messages

310

Park Assist Camera (PAC)*

311

Park Assist Camera (PAC)* trajectory
lines and fields

313

Starting the Park Assist Camera (PAC)*

315

Park Assist Camera (PAC)* limitations

316

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)*

316

Using Park Assist Pilot (PAP)*

318

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* limitations

320

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* symbols and
messages

322

Adjustable steering force*

323

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

323

STARTING AND DRIVING
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
sport mode

324

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
symbols and messages

325

Roll stability control (RSC)
Driver Alert Control (DAC)
Driver Alert Control limitations
Using Driver Alert Control (DAC)
Distance Alert*
Using Distance Alert*
Distance Alert* limitations
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*

Starting and driving

346

Brakes

346

Brake functions

348

327

Auto-hold brake function

349

327

Brake assist system

349

328

Braking effect after a collision

350

328

Emergency brake lights

350

329

Hill Descent Control (HDC)

350

Hill Start Assist

351

Parking brake

352

Using the parking brake

352

Parking brake malfunctions

354

Before a long distance trip

355

Driving economically

355

Driving through standing water

357

Overheating the engine and transmission

357

329
330
330

Driving lane assistance symbols and
messages

342

Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* On/Off

332

Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* limitations

332

Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)*

333

Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic
Alert (CTA)*

334

Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* limitations

335

Winter driving

358

Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* with
Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* symbols
and messages

337

Towing eyelet

359

Towing recommendations

360

Driving lane assistance

338

Fuel

361

Activating/deactivating Lane
Departure Warning (LDW)

340

Octane rating

362

Opening/closing the fuel filler door

363

Activating/deactivating Lane
Keeping Aid (LKA)*

340

Emission controls

364

Jump starting

365

INFOTAINMENT
Driving with a trailer

367

Shiftlock

396

The infotainment system

404

Detachable trailer hitch

368

Gear shift indicator

396

Sound settings

404

Trailer Stability Assist (TSA)

369

Gear selector positions

396

Radio

405

Ignition modes

370

Steering wheel paddles*

398

Radio settings

405

Battery drain

372

Low Speed Control (LSC)

399

RBDS radio

406

Starting the engine

372

All Wheel Drive (AWD)

400

406

Turning the engine off

374

Suspension and leveling control*

400

Changing and searching for radio
stations

Driving systems

374

HD Radio™reception

407

Hybrid battery charging cable

375

Switching HD Radio on and off

409

Hybrid charging cable circuit breaker

377

HD Radio sub-channels

409

Hybrid-related symbols and messages

378

Preparations for charging the hybrid
battery

380

Stopping hybrid battery charging

410

SiriusXM®

411

Satellite radio*

Using SiriusXM® Satellite radio radio*

412

381

SiriusXM® Satellite radio* settings

413

Initiating hybrid battery charging

382

Phone

414

Charging the hybrid battery

383

Pairing a cell phone

415

Hybrid battery charge status

385

Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone

416

Charger status indicators

387

Handling phone calls

417

Hybrid battery charging current

387

Handling text messages

418

Long-term storage of a vehicle with
a hybrid battery

388

Phone settings

419

Using the electric motor in city driving

389

Drive modes

HD Radio limitations

390

Text message settings
Connecting a

Bluetooth®

420
device

ECO drive mode

394

Connecting a device via the
AUX/USB socket

Automatic transmission

395

Media player

420
420
421

WHEELS AND TIRES
Apple CarPlay

422

Tires

444

Apple CarPlay settings

423

Tire sidewall designations

445

CD (media) player*

424

Wheel (rim) designations

447

Playing media

424

Tire terminology

447

Media searches

426

Tire direction of rotation

448

Playing media through the
AUX/USB sockets

427

Tread wear indicator

449

Streaming media through a Bluetooth connection

Loading specifications
427

449

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

450

Snow tires and chains

451

Checking tire inflation pressure

451

Changing tires

453

Tools in the cargo compartment

453

Jack

453

Wheel bolts

454

Removing a wheel

454

Installing a wheel

456

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

457

Checking inflation pressure

458

Reinflating tires equipped with the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

459

Calibrating the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)

460

Media sound settings
Gracenote
Video
Media player technical data
Internet connected vehicle
Connecting to the Internet
Apps (applications)
Bluetooth settings

428
428
429
429
431
431
433
433

Terms, conditions and confidentiality

441

Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps

434

Internet connection troubleshooting

435

Tethering (Wi-Fi sharing)

435

Deleting Wi-Fi networks

436

Wi-Fi technology and security

436

Vehicle modem settings

437

Tire Pressure Monitoring System
type approval

461

Infotainment system license information

437

Tire sealing system

461

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Using the tire sealing system

463

Volvo's service program

472

Engine compartment overview

505

Inflating a tire with the tire sealing
system compressor

467

System updates

474

Engine oil

506

Refilling coolant

Remote updates
468

475

Checking and refilling engine oil

507

Vehicle status

475

Windshield wipers in the service position

508

Booking service and repairs

475

Replacing wiper blades

509

Wi-Fi connection to a workshop

478

511

Climate system service

479

Refilling the windshield washer fluid
reservoir

Start battery

479

Cleaning the exterior

511

Hybrid battery

481

Cleaning the interior

513

Battery symbols

482

Cleaning the center display

515

Fuses

483

Corrosion protection

516

Replacing fuses

483

Paint damage

516

Fuses in the engine compartment

484

Touching up paint damage

517

Fuses in the passenger compartment

489

Polishing and waxing

518

Fuses in the cargo compartment

493

Replacing bulbs

496

Removing the rectangular headlight
cover

498

Replacing low beam headlight bulbs

498

Replacing High Beam headlight bulbs

499

Replacing parking light bulbs

500

Replacing front turn signal bulbs

500

Bulb specifications

501

Hoisting the vehicle

502

Opening and closing the hood

504

SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX

Label information

520

Dimensions

523

Weights

525

Air conditioning refrigerant

527

Hybrid battery specifications

527

Brake fluid specification and volume

528

Coolant specifications and volumes

528

Engine specifications

529

Engine oil specifications and volume

530

Fuel tank volume

530

Tire inflation pressure table

531

Transmission fluid specification and
volume

532

Index

533

INTRODUCTION

Contacting Volvo

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance

Use the following contact information if you
would like to get in touch with Volvo in the United States or Canada.

Your new Volvo comes with a four year ON
CALL roadside assistance.

In the USA:
Volvo Cars of North America, LLC
Customer Care Center
1 Volvo Drive,
P.O. Box 914
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647
1-800-458-1552
www.volvocars.com/us
In Canada:
Volvo Cars of Canada
National Customer Service
9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9
1-800-663-8255
www.volvocars.com/ca

Additional information, features, and benefits of
this program are described in a separate information package in your glove compartment.
If you require assistance, dial:
In the U.S. 1-800-638-6586 (1-800-63VOLVO)

Additional information about your
vehicle
Volvo Cars' website and support site provide
additional information about your vehicle.

Support on the Internet
Go to support.volvocars.com or use the QR code
below to visit the site, which is available in most
markets.

In Canada 1-800-263-0475

NOTE
Some vehicles may be equipped with
Volvo On Call with Sensus Connect, which
will allow access to the call center and additional features directly from the vehicle. This
is in addition to the Volvo On Call Roadside
Assistance program mentioned above.
Volvo On Call with Sensus Connect will be
a customer pay subscription offer after an initial complimentary trial period.

QR code to the support site

The information on the support site is searchable
and is grouped into different categories. It
includes support for e.g., Internet-based services
and functions, Volvo On Call (VOC), the navigation system and apps. Video and step-by-step
instructions explain various procedures such as
how to connect the vehicle to the Internet via a
cell phone.

Downloadable information
Maps
Sensus Navigation system maps can be downloaded from the support site.

INTRODUCTION
Mobile apps
For certain model year 2014 and 2015 Volvos,
the owner's manual is available in the form of an
app. The VOC app can also be found here.
Owner's manuals for earlier model Volvos
Owner's manuals for earlier model Volvos are
available in PDF format. Quick Guides and supplements can also be found on the support site.
Select a model and a model year and download
the desired information.

Contact
Contact information for customer support and the
nearest Volvo retailer are available on the site.

Related information

•
•
•

Using the owner's manual (p. 53)
On-board digital owner's manual (p. 55)
Volvo ID (p. 31)

INTRODUCTION

General information about the
XC90 T8 Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid
The XC90 T8 Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid is
driven like any other vehicle but it has certain

functionality that differs from a vehicle powered
exclusively by a gasoline engine. The electric
motor powers the vehicle primarily at low

speeds; the gasoline engine is used at higher
speeds or during more active driving.

INTRODUCTION

Overview

}}
17

INTRODUCTION
||

Electrical current for charging the hybrid battery
Electric motor for powering the rear wheels
Hybrid battery
Drive modes (change in the center display or
by using the drive mode control in the tunnel
console)
Instrument panel showing unique hybrid-related information

WARNING
Please be aware that there is no sound from
the engine when the vehicle is being powered
by the electric motor and it may be difficult to
detect by children, pedestrians, cyclists and
animals. This is especially true at low speeds.

High-voltage electrical current

WARNING
A number of electrical components in the
XC90 T8 Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid use
high-voltage current and can be extremely
dangerous if handled incorrectly. These components and any orange wiring in the vehicle
may only be handled by trained and qualified
Volvo service technicians.

Charging the hybrid battery
CAUTION
Never connect the charging cable if there is a
risk of thunderstorms/lightning.

Hybrid-unique functions
Drive modes
Different drive modes can be selected while driving, e.g., electric power only or a combination of
electric and gasoline power. The vehicle calculates the optimal combination of drivability, driving
experience, environmental impact and fuel economy for the selected drive mode. See also the
article "Drive modes" for additional information.
Instrument panel
In certain driving situations, hybrid-unique information may be displayed in the instrument panel,
such as: a hybrid battery gauge (current charge
level), the current drive mode, a symbol that illuminates when the gasoline engine is being used,
a Hybrid Guide and the level of energy regeneration.
Preconditioning
In order to function optimally, the hybrid battery
(and its related electrical systems) and the gasoline engine (and its drive systems) should be at
the correct operating temperature. The hybrid
battery's capacity is reduced considerably if it is

too cold or hot. Preconditioning prepares the
vehicle's drive systems and passenger compartment before the vehicle is driven to help reduce
wear and energy consumption.

The XC90 T8 Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid uses a
lithium-ion battery that can be charged in several
ways:

•

A charging cable can be connected from the
vehicle to a 110-volt AC socket. Charging
time depends on the strength of the current.

•

When the brakes are applied lightly, the electric motor is used for engine braking, during
which the vehicle's kinetic energy is converted into electric current that is used to help
recharge the hybrid battery.

•

The hybrid battery is also recharged to a certain extent when the gasoline engine is in
operation.

Related information

•
•

•

Drive modes (p. 390)
Hybrid-related information in the instrument
panel (p. 130)
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 383)

INTRODUCTION

•

Preparations for charging the hybrid battery
(p. 380)

•

Starting the engine (p. 372)

INTRODUCTION

Volvo and the environment
Volvo is committed to the well-being of its customers. As a natural part of this commitment, we
care about the environment in which we all live.
Concern for the environment means an everyday
involvement in reducing our environmental
impact.
Volvo's environmental activities are based on a
holistic view, which means we consider the overall environmental impact of a product throughout
its complete life cycle. In this context, design, production, product use, and recycling are all important considerations. In production, Volvo has
partly or completely phased out several chemicals
including CFCs, lead chromates, asbestos, and
cadmium; and reduced the number of chemicals
used in our plants 50% since 1991.
Volvo was the first in the world to introduce into
production a three-way catalytic converter with a
Lambda sond, now called the heated oxygen sensor, in 1976. The current version of this highly
efficient system reduces emissions of harmful
substances (CO, HC, NOx) from the exhaust pipe
by approximately 95 – 99% and the search to
eliminate the remaining emissions continues.
Volvo is the only automobile manufacturer to
offer CFC-free retrofit kits for the air conditioning
system of all models as far back as the 1975
model 240. Advanced electronic engine controls
and cleaner fuels are bringing us closer to our
goal. In addition to continuous environmental

refinement of conventional gasoline-powered
internal combustion engines, Volvo is actively
looking at advanced technology alternative-fuel
vehicles.

•

If possible, precondition the vehicle with the
charging cable before driving.

•

If preconditioning is not possible in cold
weather, use the seat and steering wheel
heating primarily. Avoid heating the entire
passenger compartment, which reduces the
hybrid battery's charge level.

•

Choose the Pure drive mode to help minimize electric power consumption.

•

In hilly terrain, put the gear selector in mode
B to utilize the electric motor's braking function when the accelerator pedal is released.
This helps charge the hybrid battery.

Drive at a constant speed whenever possible.

•

See a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician as soon as possible for inspection
if the check engine (malfunction indicator)
light illuminates, or stays on after the vehicle
has started.

Select the Save drive mode for higher
speeds when driving farther than is possible
using the electric motor only.

•

When you drive a Volvo, you become our partner
in the work to lessen the car's impact on the
environment. To reduce your vehicle's environmental impact, you can:

•

Maintain proper air pressure in your tires.
Tests have shown decreased fuel economy
with improperly inflated tires.

•

Follow the recommended maintenance
schedule in your Warranty and Service
Records Information booklet.

•
•

Volvo XC90 T8 Twin Engine Plug-in
Hybrid

•

Properly dispose of any vehicle-related waste
such as used motor oil, used batteries, brake
pads, etc.

•

When cleaning your vehicle, please use genuine Volvo car care products. All Volvo car
care products are formulated to be environmentally friendly.

Related information
Driving economically (p. 355)

INTRODUCTION

Owner's manual and the
environment
The wood pulp in Volvo's printed owner's information comes from FSC® (Forest Stewardship
Council®) certified forests and other responsible
sources.

FSC®

IntelliSafe—driver support
IntelliSafe is Volvo's philosophy regarding vehicle safety. It encompasses a number of systems,
both standard and optional, that are designed to
help make driving and traveling in a Volvo safer.

Support
Systems that help make driving safer are an integral part of IntelliSafe. These include optional
features such as Adaptive Cruise Control* that
helps maintain a set distance to a vehicle ahead,
Park Assist Pilot*, which assists in parking the
vehicle, Cross Traffic Alert*, Blind Spot
Information*, etc.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

High and low beam headlights (p. 143)
Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* (p. 333)
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* (p. 330)
City Safety™ (p. 287)
Driving lane assistance (p. 338)
Airbag system (p. 89)
Roll stability control (RSC) (p. 327)
Seat belts (p. 64)
General safety information (p. 60)

Accident prevention

The symbol above indicates that the wood pulp is
FSC® certified.

Related information

•

Volvo and the environment (p. 20)

Systems such as City Safety are designed to
automatically apply the brakes in situations in
which the driver does not have time to react.
Lane Keeping Aid* alerts the drive if the vehicle
inadvertently crosses a lane's/road's side marker
line.

Protection
The vehicle is equipped with e.g., seat belt pretensioners that pull the seat belts taut in critical
situations when there is a collision risk and
numerous airbags designed to help provide cushioning if certain types of collisions should occur.

Related information

•
•

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 266)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 316)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INTRODUCTION

Sensus
Sensus is the core of your personal Volvo experience and provides information, entertainment
and features that make owning your vehicle easier.

This is Sensus

Sensus provides an intelligent interface and
Internet-connected service with an intuitive navigation structure that offers access to relevant
information when it is needed, with minimal distractions.
Sensus also includes all of your vehicle's solutions relating to entertainment, connecting to the
Internet, navigation and the user interface
between the driver and the vehicle. Sensus
makes communication between you, the vehicle
and the digital world around you possible.

INTRODUCTION

Information when it's needed, where it's needed

Information is presented in different displays depending on how it should be prioritized (generic illustration)

Head-up-display*

The head up-display presents types of information that the driver should be aware of immedi-

ately, such as traffic warnings, speed information
and navigation. Road sign information and incoming phone calls are also displayed here. The
head-up display is controlled from the right-side
steering wheel keypad and the center display.

Instrument panel

The instrument panel displays information such
as speed, an incoming phone call or the track

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

}}
23

INTRODUCTION
||

that is currently playing. It is controlled using both
steering wheel keypads.
Center display

Voice control system
The voice control system enables the driver to operate certain vehicle functions without
removing his/her hands from
the steering wheel and it
understands natural speech.
Use voice commands to e.g.,
play a track on the infotainment system, make a
phone call, raise the passenger compartment
temperature or to read a text message.
For additional information about all of the functions/system, see the respective articles in the
on-board owner's manual or the printed supplement.

Many of the vehicle's main functions are controlled from the center display, a touchscreen that
reacts to taps or other gestures. The number of
physical buttons is thereby minimized. The screen
can be operated with or without gloves.

Related information

•
•
•

Center display overview (p. 32)

The center display is used to control e.g., the climate and infotainment systems and to adjust the
power seats*. The information shown here can be
dealt with by the driver or the front seat passenger.

•
•
•

Instrument panel (p. 127)

Using the center display (p. 49)
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 42)
Head-up display (HUD)* (p. 117)
Voice control (p. 120)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INTRODUCTION

Owner's manual in mobile devices
Owner's information mobile app1 can be downloaded from the App Store and Google Play and
is adapted for both cell phones and tablets.
These apps also contain videos and interior/
exterior hotspot views of the vehicle that you can
click on for additional information.

The app contains videos and exterior/interior
views of the vehicle with certain components/
functions highlighted in hotspots, which lead
directly to related information. It is easy to navigate between the various categories and articles
and the contents are searchable.

Related information

•
•

Using the owner's manual (p. 53)
Additional information about your vehicle
(p. 14)

This QR code will take you
directly to the app or you can
search for "Volvo manual" in
the App Store or Google Play.
The mobile app is available at the App Store and Google
Play

Certain models and mobile devices

INTRODUCTION

Options, accessories and the Onboard Diagnostic (OBDII) socket
We strongly recommend that Volvo owners
install only genuine, Volvo-approved accessories, and that accessory installations be performed only by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.

NOTE

•

Optional or accessory equipment described in
this manual is indicated by an asterisk.
Optional or accessory equipment may not be
available in all countries or markets. Please note
that some vehicles may be equipped differently,
depending on special legal requirements.

•

Contact your Volvo retailer for additional information.

WARNING
If your vehicle is involved in an accident,
unseen damage may affect its drivability and
safety.

Do not export your Volvo to another
country before investigating that country's applicable safety and exhaust emission requirements. In some cases it may
be difficult or impossible to comply with
these requirements. Modifications to the
emission control system(s) may render
your Volvo not certifiable for legal operation in the U.S., Canada and other countries.

WARNING
CALIFORNIA proposition 65
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit
chemicals known to the state of California to
cause cancer, and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or other reproductive
harm.

All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this manual are based
on the latest product information available at the time of publication. Please note
that some vehicles may be equipped differently, depending on market-specific
adaptations or special legal requirements.
Optional equipment described in this
manual may not be available in all markets.

•

Some of the illustrations shown are
generic and are intended as examples
only, and may not depict the exact model
for which this owner's information is
intended.

•

Volvo reserves the right to make model
and product changes at any time, or to
change specifications or design without
notice and without incurring obligation.

WARNING
Certain components of this vehicle such as air
bag modules, seat belt pretensioners, adaptive steering columns, and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate material. Special
handling may apply for service or vehicle end
of life disposal.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.

•

Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to
ensure compatibility with the performance,
safety, and emission systems in your vehicle.
Additionally, a trained and qualified Volvo

INTRODUCTION
service technician knows where accessories
may and may not be safely installed in your
Volvo. In all cases, please consult a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician before
installing any accessory in or on your vehicle.

Connecting equipment to the On-board
Diagnostic (OBDII) socket

•

Accessories that have not been approved by
Volvo may or may not be specifically tested
for compatibility with your vehicle. Additionally, an inexperienced installer may not be
familiar with some of your car's systems.

•

Volvo Cars takes no responsibility for the consequences of connecting non-authorized
equipment to the On-board Diagnostic
(OBDII) socket. This socket should only be
used by a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.

Any of your car's performance and safety
systems could be adversely affected if you
install accessories that Volvo has not tested,
or if you allow accessories to be installed by
someone unfamiliar with your vehicle.

•

WARNING

Owner's information
Complete on-board digital owner's information is
available on the center display, as a mobile app
and on Volvo's support website.
The printed owner's manual in the glove compartment is an excerpt from the digital information
and contains important texts, the latest updates
and instructions that can be useful in situations
where it is not practical to read the information
on the screen.
Changing the language used for the on-board
information could mean that some of the information displayed may not comply with national or
local statutes and regulations.

Damage caused by unapproved or improperly
installed accessories may not be covered by
your new vehicle warranty. See your Warranty
and Service Records Information booklet for
more warranty information. Volvo assumes no
responsibility for death, injury, or expenses
that may result from the installation of nongenuine accessories.

If the content of the on-board digital information and the printed manual differ, the printed
information always has precedence.

WARNING

The diagnostic socket OBDII under the dashboard on
the driver's side

The driver is always responsible for operating
the vehicle in a safe manner and adhering to
current laws and traffic regulations.
It is also important that the vehicle be operated, maintained and serviced according to
Volvo's recommendations/instructions in the
owner's manual.

}}
27

INTRODUCTION
||

Related information

•
•

•

Owner's manual in mobile devices (p. 25)
Navigating in the digital owner's manual
(p. 56)
On-board digital owner's manual (p. 55)

Driver distraction
•

A driver has a responsibility to do everything possible to ensure his or her own safety and the
safety of passengers in the vehicle and others
sharing the roadway. Avoiding distractions is part
of that responsibility.

Never use a hand-held cellular telephone
while driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit
cellular telephone use by a driver while
the vehicle is moving.

•

If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, set and make changes to
your travel itinerary only with the vehicle
parked.

•

Never program your audio system while
the vehicle is moving. Program radio presets with the vehicle parked, and use your
programmed presets to make radio use
quicker and simpler.

•

Never use portable computers or personal digital assistants while the vehicle
is moving.

Driver distraction results from driver activities that
are not directly related to controlling the vehicle
in the driving environment. Your new Volvo is, or
can be, equipped with many feature-rich entertainment and communication systems. These
include hands-free cellular telephones, navigation
systems, and multipurpose audio systems. You
may also own other portable electronic devices
for your own convenience. When used properly
and safely, they enrich the driving experience.
Improperly used, any of these could cause a distraction.
For all of these systems, we want to provide the
following warning that reflects the strong Volvo
concern for your safety. Never use these devices
or any feature of your vehicle in a way that distracts you from the task of driving safely. Distraction can lead to a serious accident. In addition to
this general warning, we offer the following guidance regarding specific newer features that may
be found in your vehicle:

WARNING

Please keep the following warnings in mind
when operating/servicing your vehicle.

Accessory installation

•

We strongly recommend that Volvo owners
install only genuine, Volvo-approved accessories, and that accessory installations be
performed only by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.

•

Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to
ensure compatibility with the performance,
safety, and emission systems in your vehicle.
Additionally, a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician knows where accessories
may and may not be safely installed in your
Volvo. In all cases, please consult a trained

INTRODUCTION
and qualified Volvo service technician before
installing any accessory in or on your vehicle.

•

WARNING
The driver is always responsible for operating
the vehicle in a safe manner and for complying with current statutes and regulations.
It is also essential to maintain and service the
vehicle according to Volvo's recommendations
as stated in the owner's information and the
service and warranty booklet.
If the on-board information differs from the
printed owner's manual, the printed information always takes precedence.

Related information

•

Volvo Structural Parts Statement (p. 29)

Volvo Structural Parts Statement
Volvo has always been and continues to be a
leader in automotive safety.
Volvo engineers and manufactures vehicles
designed to help protect vehicle occupants in the
event of a collision.
Volvos are designed to absorb the impact of a
collision. This energy absorption system including,
but not limited to, structural components such as
bumper reinforcement bars, bumper energy
absorbers, frames, rails, fender aprons, A-pillars,
B-pillars and body panels must work together to
maintain cabin integrity and protect the vehicle
occupants.
The supplemental restraint system including but
not limited to air bags, side curtain air bags, and
deployment sensors work together with the
above components to provide proper timing for
air bag deployment.
Due to the above, Volvo Cars of North America
does not support the use of aftermarket, alternative or anything other than original Volvo parts for
collision repair.
In addition Volvo does not support the use or reuse of structural components from an existing
vehicle that has been previously damaged.
Although these parts may appear equivalent, it is
difficult to tell if the parts have been previously
replaced with non-OE parts or if the part has
been damaged as a result of a prior collision. The

}}
29

INTRODUCTION
||

quality of these used parts may also have been
affected due to environmental exposure.

Related information

•
•

Crash event data (p. 30)
Contacting Volvo (p. 14)

Crash event data
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such
data as:

•

How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;

•

Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;

•

How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

•

How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur.
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and the EDR never registers who is driving
the vehicle or the location of a crash or a near
crash-like situation. However, other parties, such
as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data
with the type of personally identifying data rou-

tinely acquired during a crash investigation. To
read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR
is needed.
Furthermore, your vehicle is equipped with a
number of computers whose task is to continuously control and monitor the vehicle’s operation.
They can also register some of this information
during normal driving conditions, most importantly
if they detect a fault relating to the vehicle’s operation and functionality or upon activation of the
vehicle’s active safety systems (e.g. City Safety
and the auto-brake function). Some of the registered information is required by technicians when
carrying out service and maintenance to enable
them to diagnose and rectify any faults that have
occurred in the vehicle and to enable Volvo to fulfill legal and other regulatory requirements. Information thus registered in the vehicle is registered
in the vehicle’s computers until the vehicle is
serviced or repaired. In addition to the above, the
registered information may – on an aggregated
basis – be used for research and product development purposes in order to continuously
improve the safety and quality of Volvo vehicles.
For additional information, contact:
In the United States
Volvo Cars of North America, LLC
Customer Care Center
1 Volvo Drive, P.O. box 914

INTRODUCTION
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

Volvo ID

Registering your Volvo ID to the vehicle

1-800-458-1552

A Volvo ID can be used to access a number of
on-line services2

If your Volvo ID was created using the Volvo On
Call mobile app, the ID has to be registered to
the vehicle:

Creating a Volvo ID

Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9

Using the Volvo ID app
1. If you have not already done so, download
the Volvo ID app from the Remote update
service.

With the vehicle connected to the Internet,
download the Volvo ID app from the Remote
update service in the center display's App
view. See also the article "Downloading,
updating and uninstalling apps."

Start the app and enter your Volvo ID.

1-800-663-8255

Start the app and register a personal email
address.

Follow the instructions that will be sent automatically to this email address.
> A Volvo ID has now been created and has
been automatically registered to the vehicle. The Volvo ID services available can
now be used.

Follow the instructions that will be sent automatically to the email address linked to your
Volvo ID.
> Your Volvo ID is now registered to the
vehicle and the Volvo ID services available
can be used.

www.volvocars.com/us
In Canada
Volvo Cars of Canada
National Customer Service
9130 Leslie Street

www.volvocars.com/ca

A Volvo ID can be created in two ways:

Using the Volvo On Call (VOC) app
1. Download the latest version of the VOC app
to your cell phone from e.g., the App Store,
Windows Phone or Google Play.
2.
3.

Start the app and create a Volvo ID on the
start page.
Register a personal email address and then
follow the instructions that will be sent automatically to this address.

Advantages of having a Volvo ID

•

Only one user name and password are
required to access online services.

•

If you change a user name or password for
one of the online service (e.g., VOC), it/they
will also be automatically changed for the
other services.

Related information

•

Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
(p. 434)

•

Connecting to the Internet (p. 431)

These services vary and may be subject to change. Consult your Volvo retailer.

INTRODUCTION

Center display overview
Many of the vehicle's functions are controlled
from the center display.

Three of the center display's basic views. Swipe to the right/left to access the Function/App view (generic illustration)

INTRODUCTION
Function view: vehicle functions can be activated/deactivated by tapping. Certain functions are called "trigger functions", which
open settings windows, e.g., Camera and
parking functions. Settings for the head-up
display* are also started from Function view
but the actual interaction is controlled from
the steering wheel keypad buttons and the
instrument panel.
Home view: the initial view shown when the
center display is started.
App (Application) view: shows apps that have
been downloaded (third-party apps) as well
as ones for integrated functions such as FM
radio. Tap an icon to open the app.
Status bar: vehicle activities are shown at the
top of the screen. Network/connection information is shown on the left side of the bar.
Media-related information, the clock and
information about background activities are
shown to the right.
Top view: pull down the tab to open Top view.
From here, you can access Settings,
Owner's manual and stored messages.

The extra sub-view: the most recently used
apps/vehicle functions that do not belong in
any of the other sub-views are listed here.
Tap the sub-view to expand it.
Climate bar: information and direct access to
settings such as temperature, seat heating*
and blower speed. Tap the symbol at the
center of the Climate bar to open Climate
view for additional settings.

Related information

•
•
•

Using the center display (p. 49)
Function view buttons (p. 40)
Symbols in the center display status bar
(p. 47)

•
•
•
•

Settings view (p. 111)

•

Cleaning the center display (p. 515)

Media player (p. 421)
Phone (p. 414)
Climate system controls in the center display
(p. 189)

Navigation: leads to map navigation. Tap the
sub-view to expand it.
Media: the most recently used media-related
apps. Tap the sub-view to expand it.
Phone: used to access phone-related functions. Tap the sub-view to expand it.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INTRODUCTION

Changing center display settings

The center display activates automatically when
the driver's door is opened. Settings can be
made for e.g., sounds, background and themes.

Turning off and reactivating the center
display
2.

Press and hold the Home button below the
screen.
> The screen will go dark. However, the climate bar remains visible and apps or
other functions connected to the display
remain active. The screen can also be
cleaned while it is turned off.
Reactivate by pressing the Home button
briefly.
> The view that was displayed when the
screen was turned off will be displayed
again.

NOTE

Home button for the center display

When the center display is turned off, the screen
goes dark to avoid disturbing the driver. However,
the climate bar remains visible and apps or other
functions connected to the display remain active.

•

The display cannot be turned off while a
message requiring action is on the
screen.

•

The display turns off automatically when
the ignition is switched off and the driver's door is opened.

Turning off or changing the volume of
center display sounds
System sounds in the center display can be
turned off or their volume can be changed:

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

Tap Sound

System Volumes.

Pull the control under Screen Touch to the
desired level to change volume or turn off
the sound for tapping the screen or Keypad
Touch.

Changing the screen's appearance
(theme)
1.

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

Tap My Car

Select a theme, e.g., Minimalistic or
Chrome Rings.

Displays

Themes.

In addition, the settings: Normal and Bright can
also be selected. For Normal, the screen's background is dark and the text is light. This is the
default setting. If Bright is selected, the background will be light and the text will be dark,
which can increase readability in strong ambient
lighting.
These alternatives are always available and do
not shift automatically according to changes in
ambient lighting.

Related information

•
•
•
•

Using the center display (p. 49)
Sensus (p. 22)
Settings view (p. 111)
Cleaning the center display (p. 515)

INTRODUCTION

Using the center display keyboard
A keyboard can be used on the center display to
enter characters and search for e.g., destinations using the navigation system, adding contacts in phone book, etc. It is also possible to
use handwriting on the screen.

Entering text using the keyboard
The keyboard will only appear at the bottom of
the center display in situations when it is possible
to write on the screen.

}}
35

INTRODUCTION
||

Keyboard function buttons (the appearance may vary depending on language settings, context, etc.)

Field for possible search hits. The word
changes as new letters are added. Scroll in
the list using the left/right arrows. Tap a

word to select it. The keyboard may not support all language selections, in which case
this line on the screen will not be displayed.

The characters that can be entered are language-dependent (see point 7). Tap a character to enter it.

INTRODUCTION
Several buttons (depending on the context
for which the keyboard is being used) will be
displayed here. In certain cases, it can be
used to enter @, .com or to start a new line.
Press to hide the keyboard. In cases where
this is not possible, the button will not be displayed.
Tap once to enter one uppercase letter.
Double-tap for Caps lock (tap again to
return to lowercase letters). Letters entered
after the !, . and ? characters will automatically be uppercase. The first letter in the text
field or in text fields intended for names,
addresses or company names will also automatically be uppercase. The first letter in text
fields intended for passwords, web
addresses or email addresses will automatically be lowercase unless upper case is
chosen.
Press to display the numbers that can be
entered. When numbers are displayed, tap
to resume entering text or
to
enter special characters.
Tap to change the keyboard language (in this
example, UK English is the selected language). The characters available will change
according to the selected language (2). This
button will only be displayed if several keyboard languages have been selected (see
the section "Changing keyboard languages"
3

In the example illustration, the button shows "UK".

below). Tap to display a list of possible languages and tap a language to use it.

Tap to enter blank spaces.
Tap to erase one character at a time.

When more than one language
has been selected, this button
(7)3 will appear on the keyboard.

Tap to enable handwriting. See the section
"Handwritten text" below.
Entering text and performing searches using the
keyboard are done somewhat differently in the
navigation system. See the section "Filtering destination search results" below.
Tap the button above the keyboard to confirm the
text that has been entered (not shown in the
illustration). This button's appearance differs
depending on the context.

Changing keyboard languages
In order to change keyboard languages, they
must first be selected under Settings.
The keyboard language can be changed without
changing the language used for the other systems/menus in the vehicle.
1.

Pull down the center display's Top view and
tap Settings.

Tap System

Select and one or more of the languages in
the list.
> The makes it possible to change the keyboard layout and characters available
depending on the language(s) selected.

To shift between keyboard languages:
1.

Press and hold the button (7).
> A list will be displayed.

Tap the desired language. If more than four
languages have been selected in Settings,
scroll in the list.
> The keyboard layout and characters available will change to the selected language.

Keyboard Layouts.

}}
37

INTRODUCTION
||

Special characters

Entering characters
1. Enter a handwritten character (1) using a fingertip or by holding e.g., a pen near the
screen.
> Several character suggestions will appear
(3). The most likely character will be at the
top of the list.

CAUTION
Do not touch the screen with sharp objects
because this could cause scratches.
Area for entering characters.
To enter language-specific characters such as é
or è (if available):

Text box where the characters entered in
area (1) appear.

Press and hold a character key.
> A box with available characters will open.

Suggested characters. Scroll in the list if
necessary.

Tap the desired character. If none of the special characters is selected, the key's initial
character will be entered.

Blank spaces.
Tap to erase one character at a time.

Handwritten text

Tap to return to the standard keyboard.

Tap button (10), see the overview illustration
above, to enter the handwriting mode.

Press to hide the keyboard. In cases where
this is not possible, the button will not be displayed.
Tap to change the keyboard language.

Continue entering characters.
> If no other choice is made, the character
at the top of the list will be used. Tap one
of the other characters in the list to use it
instead.

INTRODUCTION
Erasing/changing handwritten characters

New lines

Erase a character by swiping over the handwriting area
(1)

Create a new line by drawing above the characters as
shown in the illustration

Characters can be erased/changed in several
ways:

Related information

•
•

Tap the desired character in the list (3).

•

Sweep horizontally from right to left over the
handwriting area (1). Erase several characters by swiping over the area several times.

•

Tap the "x" in the text box (2) to delete all
characters.

Tap button (5) to erase the character and
start again.

•
•
•

Using the center display (p. 49)
Center display overview (p. 32)
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 42)

INTRODUCTION

Function view buttons
The Function view, which is one of the center
display's basic views, contains all of the vehicle's

on-screen function buttons. From the Home
view, swipe from left to right on the screen to
come to the Function view.

Different types of buttons
There are three different types of vehicle function
buttons as listed in the following table.

Type of button

Functions

Vehicle function affected

Function buttons

Have On/Off modes.

Most of the buttons in the function view are
function buttons.

An LED indicator light to the left of the button's icon will illuminate when a function is
active. Press the button to turn the function on or off.
Start buttons

Do not have On/Off modes.
Pressing a start button opens a function's window, e.g., a window for adjusting the
driver's seat.

Parking buttons

Have On/Off and scanning modes.
Similar to function buttons but have an additional parking scanning mode.

Button modes

• Camera.
• Headrest fold.
• Functions for folding down a seat.
• Head-up display adjustments.
• Park In.
• Park Out.
When a function or parking button's LED indicator is green, the function is activated. When a
function is initially activated, an additional text will
be displayed (certain functions only) in the button
for approx. 5 seconds, after which the button will
be displayed with the LED indicator illuminated.
Press the button briefly to deactivate the function.

A function is activated (on) when the LED indicator is
green

A function is deactivated (off) when the LED indicator is
off

INTRODUCTION

The yellow triangle indicates that the function is not
working correctly

Related information

•
•

Center display overview (p. 32)

•

Categories in Settings view (p. 112)

Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 42)

INTRODUCTION

Navigating in the center display's
views
There are 5 different basic views in the center
display: Home view, Top view, Climate view, App
view and Function view. The display is activated
automatically when the driver's door is opened.

Home view
Home view is displayed when the screen is activated. It consists of four sub-views: Navigation,
Media, Phone and an extra sub-view. The extra

sub-view contains the most recently used app/
vehicle function that is not related to the other
three sub-views. For example, if the most recently
used app/vehicle function is a music app, the
Media sub-view will be displayed.
The sub-views display brief information about the
respective apps.
The first time the vehicle is started, some of the
Home view's sub-views will not contain any information.

NOTE

•

In Home view's standard mode (reached
by pressing the Home button briefly), an
animation explaining how to access the
different views will be shown on the
screen.

•

Some functions may be disabled when
the vehicle is moving.

INTRODUCTION
Expanding/minimizing a sub-view

The Media sub-view shown minimized (left) and expanded (right)

•

To expand a sub-view, tap the screen anywhere in the sub-view to access the respec-

}}
43

INTRODUCTION
||

tive app's basic functions. When a sub-view
is expanded, the Home view's fourth subview will temporarily not be displayed.

•

To minimize a sub-view, tap anywhere on the
screen.

Opening/closing a sub-view in full-screen
mode
The extra sub-view and the Navigation sub-view
can be opened in full-screen mode to show additional information and possible settings.
In expanded mode, open the
app in full-screen mode by tapping the symbol.

Tap on the symbol or the Home
button below the screen to
return to the expanded view.

It is always possible to return to Home view by
pressing the Home button. Press the Home button twice to return to Home view's standard view
from full-screen.

Home button for the center display

Status bar
Current vehicle activities are shown in the status
bar at the top of the screen. Network and connection information is shown to the left. Brief
information about currently running apps and the
clock are shown to the right.

Top view
The top view has a tab at the center of the status
bar. Pull down (expand) the Top view by swiping
the tab downward.

Top view when expanded

Top view provides access to:

• Settings
• Owner's manual
• The vehicle's stored messages
To leave (minimize) Top view, tap the screen outside of this view or tap at the bottom of Top view
and swipe upward. The views behind will become
visible again. Top view is not available when the

INTRODUCTION
ignition is being started/switched off or when a
message is displayed on the screen.

App view

Going to Top view from an app
To pull down Top view when an app is running
(e.g., FM radio):

•

Tap FM Radio Settings to display these
settings.

•

Tap Owner's manual to open an article
related to the specific app.

When applicable, swipe downward to scroll in the
list of apps (depending on the number of apps
currently running).
To move an app, press and hold it. It will become
slightly bigger and transparent and can then be
dragged to the desired position and released.
Return to Home view by swiping the screen from
left to right or by pressing the Home button.

Function view

This applies only to your vehicle's factoryinstalled apps. This is not possible for thirdparty apps that have been downloaded.

Climate view
The climate bar, where the most common climate
system settings can be made, is located at the
bottom of the screen and is always visible.
Tap the symbol at the center of the climate bar to open Climate view for
access to additional climate system
settings.
Tap the symbol to close Climate view
and return to a previous view.

App view

Swipe the screen from right to left to access App
view from Home view. This displays factory-installed apps such as FM as well as any apps that
have been downloaded. Brief information will be
displayed for certain apps, for example missed
phone calls, etc.
Tap an app to open it.
Function view with vehicle function buttons

}}
45

INTRODUCTION
||

Swipe the screen from left to right to access
Function view from Home view. From Function
view, you can activate/deactivate various vehicle
functions such as Drive Modes, Speed limit
adaptation and Park Assist.
When applicable, swipe upward to scroll in the list
of functions (depending on the number of functions).
Activate/deactivate a function by tapping its button. Certain functions will open in their own windows.
To move a function button, press and hold it. It
will become slightly smaller and transparent and
can then be dragged to the desired position and
released.

Related information

•
•
•
•

Using the center display (p. 49)
Center display overview (p. 32)
Function view buttons (p. 40)
Symbols in the center display status bar
(p. 47)

•

Changing settings in different types of apps
(p. 48)

•

Climate system controls (p. 188)

INTRODUCTION

Symbols in the center display status
bar

Symbol

The following table provides an overview of the
symbols used in the center display's status bar.

•

Warning symbols in the instrument panel
(p. 137)

Remote diagnostics active.

•

Messages in the instrument panel and center
display (p. 151)

Action in progress.

The status bar shows current vehicle activities
and in certain cases, also their status. Due to limited space in the status bar, not all symbols will
be displayed at all times.
Symbol

Meaning

PreconditioningA in progress.
Audio source being played.

Meaning

Audio source paused.

Roaming activated.

Phone call in progress.

Cell phone network signal strength.

Audio source muted.

Bluetooth device connected.

News broadcasts from current radio
stationB.

Bluetooth activated but no device
connected.

Traffic information being receivedB.

Connected to a Wi-Fi network.
Clock.
Tethering activated. (Wi-Fi hotspot).
Vehicle modem activated.

A
B

Hybrid models only.
Not available in all markets.

Related information
Connected to the Internet via USB.

•

Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 42)

Type of cell phone connection (2G,
3G, etc.).

•

Indicator symbols in the instrument panel
(p. 125)

INTRODUCTION

Changing settings in different types
of apps
App view, which is one of the center display's
basic views, contains all of the vehicle's apps
(applications/programs). Access this view by
swiping the screen from right to left.

Basic apps
A number of apps are standard and are part of
Volvo Sensus, such as FM Radio, USB and CD.
To change settings in a basic app:
1.

Open the app, for example Phone, either on
the home screen or full-screen from App
view.

Pull down Top view.

Tap Phone settings.

Change the desired settings and confirm.

Press the Home button, tap the screen outside of Top view or pull Top view up.

Third-party apps
Third party apps have to be selected and downloaded. In these apps, setting are made from
within the app, not from Top view.

INTRODUCTION

Using the center display
Many of the vehicle's functions can be controlled and settings can be made from the
screen in the center console, referred to in this
owner's information as the center display, which
is a touchscreen.

Using the center display's touchscreen
functionality
Two people can interact with the screen at the
same time, e.g., to adjust the temperature for the
driver and passenger sides.
Procedure

The screen reacts differently depending on
whether the user taps, drags or swipes on the
screen. This makes it possible to move between
views, mark objects, scroll in lists and move apps
by touching the screen in various ways. The following table lists the gestures that can be used
on the screen:

CAUTION
Do not touch the screen with sharp objects
because this could cause scratches.

An infrared film on the screen enables it to react
if a finger is directly in front of the screen (but
not actually touching it). This makes it possible to
use the screen while wearing gloves.

Gesture

Result

Tap once.

Marks an object, confirms a selection or activates a function.

Double-tap.

Zooms in on an object such as a map.

Press and hold.

"Grabs" an object so that it can be dragged. Press and hold on the screen and drag the object to the desired
position.

Tap with two fingers.

Zooms out from an object such as a map.

}}
49

INTRODUCTION
||

Procedure

Gesture

Result

Drag

Moves between screen views, scrolls in a list, text or a view. Press and hold to drag apps or objects in a list.

Swipe

Moves between screen views, scrolls in a list, text or a view

Stretch

Zooms in.

Pinch

Zooms out.

INTRODUCTION

Returning to Home view
1.

Press the Home button briefly.
> The most recent Home view mode will be
displayed.

Press again briefly.
> All of the Home view's sub-views will
return to standard mode.

NOTE

button can be placed (this line may not be visible). Swipe the screen to scroll up or down in the
view to display information that may be outside of
the view.

Scrolling in lists, articles or views
A scroll indicator on the screen shows that it is
possible to scroll up or down in the view. Press
the indicator and move it up or down or swipe up
or down anywhere in the view.

From Home view's standard mode, press the
Home button to start animated on-screen
instructions describing how to display the various views.

Temperature control4

Digital controls are available for many of the vehicle's functions. For example, to set the temperature:

Moving apps and vehicle function
buttons

•
•

Apps and function buttons can be moved and
organized in their respective views.
1.

Press and hold an app/button.
> The app/button will change size and
become transparent. It can then be
moved.

The scroll indicator on the right side of the center display

Drag the app/button to an available position
in the view.

A maximum of 48 lines can be utilized for placing
apps/buttons. To move an app/button outside of
the visible view, drag it to the bottom of the view.
A new line will then be added where the app/
4

Using center display controls

Generic illustration. The temperature in your vehicle may be set to degrees Fahrenheit.

•

Drag the control to the desired temperature
Tap +/− to raise or lower the temperature
incrementally, or
Tap the desired temperature on the control

Related information

•

Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 42)

•
•

Settings view (p. 111)
Sensus (p. 22)

}}
51

INTRODUCTION
||

•

Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
(p. 434)

•

Using the center display keyboard (p. 35)

INTRODUCTION

Using the owner's manual

Options and accessories

Reading your owner's manual is a good way of
familiarizing yourself with the features and systems in your vehicle.

Optional or accessory equipment described in
this manual is indicated by an asterisk.

On-board owner's manual
Reading the owner's manual is a good way to
become familiar with your vehicle and to learn to
utilize the features and functions that it offers.
Pay particular attention to the warnings provided.
Volvo reserves the right to make model changes
at any time, or to change specifications or design
without notice and without incurring obligation.
© Volvo Car Corporation

Printed owner's information
We advise keeping printed owner's information in
the vehicle for quick access to necessary information and how to contact Volvo if help is
required.

Illustrations
Some of the illustrations used in your owner's
information may be generic and will give a general view of a certain feature or function. For
example, some illustrations describing climate
system functions may display a temperature in
degrees Celsius but the same information applies
to Fahrenheit.

Risk of injury

Optional or accessory equipment may not be
available in all countries or markets. Please note
that some vehicles may be equipped differently,
depending on special legal requirements.
Contact your Volvo retailer for additional information.

Footnotes
Certain pages of this manual contain information
in the form of footnotes at the bottom of the
page. This information supplements the text that
the footnote number refers to (a letter is used if
the footnote refers to text in a table).

Messages
There are several displays in the vehicle that
show messages generated by various systems
and functions in the vehicle. The appearance of
these texts differs slightly from normal texts (for
example: Phone, Accept).

Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning background, white text/image on a black background.
Decals of this type are used to indicate potential
danger. Ignoring a warning of this type could
result in serious injury or death.

Decals
There are various types of decals in the vehicle
whose purpose is to provide important information in a clear and concise way. The importance
of these decals is explained as follows, in
descending order of importance.
}}
53

INTRODUCTION
||

Risk of damage to the vehicle

White ISO symbols and white text/image on a
black background. These decals provide general
information.

NOTE
The decals shown in the Owner’s Manual are
examples only and are not intended to be
reproductions of the decals actually used in
the vehicle. The purpose is to give an indication of how they look and their approximate
location in the vehicle. The applicable information for your particular vehicle can be
found on the respective decals in the vehicle.
White ISO symbols and white text/image on a
black or blue warning background and space for
a message. If the information on decals of this
type is ignored, damage to the vehicle could
result.
Information

Types of lists
Procedures
Procedures (step-by-step instructions), or actions
that must be carried out in a certain order, are
arranged in numbered lists in this manual.
If there is a series of illustrations associated
with step-by-step instructions, each step in
the procedure is numbered in the same way
as the corresponding illustration.
Lists in which letters are used can be found
with series of illustrations in cases where the
order in which the instructions are carried out
is not important.
Arrows with or without numbers are used to
indicate the direction of a movement.

Arrows containing letters are used to indicate movement.
If there are no illustrations associated with a
step-by-step list, the steps in the procedure are
indicated by ordinary numbers.
Position lists
Red circles containing a number are used in
general overview illustrations in which certain
components are pointed out. The corresponding number is also used in the position
list's description of the various components.
Bullet lists
Bullets are used to differentiate a number of
components/functions/points of information that
can be listed in random order.
For example:

•
•

Coolant
Engine oil

Illustrations
Some of the illustrations and images shown in
the owner's manual are generic and may differ
slightly from the equipment in your vehicle
depending the level of instrumentation or market.

Related information
Related information offers references to articles
containing information associated with the information that you are currently reading.

INTRODUCTION

Continues on next page

} }This symbol can be found at the lower right
corner to indicate that the current topic continues
on the following page.

On-board digital owner's manual

• Start: the on-board information's start page,

When printed owner's information refers to digital owner's information, this is the on-board information available in the vehicle's center display.

• Categories: all articles sorted by category.

An article may be listed in several categories.

• Quick Guide: A selection of useful articles.
• Exterior: Exterior views of the vehicle in

Continuation from previous page

|| This symbol can be found at the upper left
corner to indicate that the current topic is a continuation from the previous page.

which certain areas/components are highlighted as hotspots. Tap a hotspot to come to
a relevant article.

Related information

•
•
•

showing an introductory text.

• Interior: Interior views of the vehicle in which

On-board digital owner's manual (p. 55)

certain areas/components are highlighted as
hotspots. Tap a hotspot to come to a relevant
article.

Owner's manual in mobile devices (p. 25)
Additional information about your vehicle
(p. 14)

• Favorites: Quick access to articles that have
been tagged as favorites.

NOTE
The on-board owner's information cannot be
accessed while the vehicle is moving.

Related information

•

Navigating in the digital owner's manual
(p. 56)

The digital on-board owner's manual is accessed from
the center display's Top view

There are a number of ways to find information in
the digital owner's manual, which can be
accessed from the manual's top menu by tapping
.

INTRODUCTION

Navigating in the digital owner's
manual
The digital on-board owner's manual is
accessed from the center display. The contents
are searchable and it is easy to navigate among
the varios sections.

To open the digital owner's information, pull down
the center display's Top view and tap Owner's
manual.

Tap
followed by Exterior/Interior.
> Exterior/interior views will be displayed
with hotspots, which lead to relevant articles. Swipe the screen horizontally to
scroll among the views.

Tap a hotspot.
> The title of a relevant article will be displayed.

Tap the title to open the article. Tap the left
arrow to go back or
to begin a new
search.

There are several ways of finding information.
To access the owner's manual's menu, tap
in the upper bar.

Searching using categories
The articles in the owner's manual are structured
in main and sub-categories. The same article may
appear in several pertinent categories in order to
make them easier to find.
1.
2.

Tap
followed by Categories.
> The main categories will be listed.
Tap a main category ( ).
> A list of sub-categories and (
cles ( ) will be displayed.

) and arti-

Tap an article to open it. Tap the left arrow to
to begin a new search.
go back or

Interior and exterior hotspots
Exterior and interior views of the vehicle where
certain components are pointed out are called
hotspots.
The digital on-board owner's manual is accessed from
the center display's Top view

Quick Guide.
The heading Quick Guide in the owner's manual's menu leads to a selection of articles that
may be helpful in familiarizing you with your vehicle's most common features and functions.
These articles can also be found through categories but have been gathered here for quick
access. Tap an article to read it in its entirety.

Favorites
This is a list of articles that have been saved as
favorites. The most recently saved one will be at
the top of the list. Tap an article to read it in its
entirety.

INTRODUCTION
Saving/deleting favorites
Save an article as a favorite by tapping the star
( ) at the upper right when an article is open.
The star symbol will be filled in ( ) when its article has been saved as a favorite.
To delete a favorite, tap its star again.

Using the search function
1.

Tap the magnifying glass icon (
) in the
owner's manual's upper menu. A keyboard
will appear at the bottom of the screen.

Enter a word, e.g., "seat belt."
> Suggested articles will be displayed as
more characters are entered.

Confirm by tapping the article. To leave
search mode tap the up-arrow next to the
search box.

Related information

•
•

On-board digital owner's manual (p. 55)
Using the center display keyboard (p. 35)

Glass

Technician certification

Laminated glass

In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo supports certification by the National Institute for
Automotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.).

The windshield and panoramic roof* are made of
laminated glass, which is reinforced to help prevent break-ins and to provide additional soundproofing. Laminated glass is optional for the
other side windows.

Laminated glass symbol5

Related information

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•

Laminated panoramic roof* (p. 106)
Power windows (p. 109)
Defrosting windows and mirrors (p. 195)
Using sun shades (p. 111)
Rearview mirror (p. 110)
Power windows (p. 109)
Head-up display (HUD)* (p. 117)
Activating/deactivating the rain sensor
(p. 157)
Windshield and headlight washers (p. 158)
Tailgate window wiper and washer (p. 159)

Certified technicians have demonstrated a high
degree of competence in specific areas. Besides
passing exams, each technician must also have
worked in the field for two or more years before a
certificate is issued. These professional technicians are best able to analyze vehicle problems
and perform the necessary maintenance procedures to keep your Volvo at peak operating condition.
XC90 T8 Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid
Technicians performing work on a vehicle with
electrification should also have the necessary
training and specialized certification required for
performing repairs and/or maintenance on a
vehicle with electrification.

This symbol is not shown on the windshield or panoramic roof.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

SAFETY

General safety information
The vehicle is equipped with a number of safety
systems for the driver and passengers.
In the event of an accident, there are a number of
sensors in the vehicle that react and trigger
safety systems such as Roll Stability Control, airbags, seat belt pretensioners, etc., depending on
the severity of the collision. There are also
mechanical systems such as the Whiplash
Protection System.

Warning symbol in the instrument panel
The warning symbol in the instrument
panel illuminates when the ignition is in
mode II or higher. It will go out after
approx. 6 seconds if no faults are
detected in the airbag system.

WARNING

•

If the SRS warning light stays on after the
engine has started or if it illuminates
while you are driving, have the vehicle
inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician as soon as possible.

•

Never try to repair any component or part
of the SRS yourself. Any interference in
the system could cause malfunction and
serious injury. All work on these systems
should be performed by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.

If the dedicated warning symbol is not
functioning, the general warning symbol will illuminate instead and the same
message will be displayed in the instrument panel.

Related information

•
•
•
•
•
•

Safety during pregnancy (p. 62)
Seat belts (p. 64)
Airbag system (p. 89)
Safety mode (p. 87)
Whiplash protection system (p. 63)
Child safety (p. 68)

Occupant safety
Safety is Volvo's cornerstone.

Volvo's concern for safety
Our concern for safety dates back to 1927 when
the first Volvo rolled off the production line.
Three-point seat belts (a Volvo invention), safety
cages, and energy-absorbing impact zones were
designed into Volvo vehicles long before it was
fashionable or required by government regulation.
We will not compromise our commitment to
safety. We continue to seek out new safety features and to refine those already in our vehicles.
You can help. We would appreciate hearing your
suggestions about improving automobile safety.
We also want to know if you ever have a safety
concern with your vehicle. Call us in the U.S. at:
1-800-458-1552 or in Canada at:
1-800-663-8255.

SAFETY
Occupant safety reminders
How safely you drive doesn't depend on how old
you are but rather on:

•
•
•

How well you see.
Your ability to concentrate.
How quickly you make decisions under
stress to avoid an accident.

The following suggestions are intended to help
you cope with the ever changing traffic environment.

•
•

Never drink and drive.

•
•
•
•

Take a driver-retraining course.

•

Take into account the traffic, road, and
weather conditions, particularly with regard to
stopping distance.

•
•

Never send text messages while driving.

If you are taking any medication, consult your
physician about its potential effects on your
driving abilities.
Have your eyes checked regularly.
Keep your windshield and headlights clean.
Replace wiper blades when they start to
leave streaks.

Refrain from using or minimize the use of a
cell phone while driving.

Related information

•
•

Recall information (p. 62)
Reporting safety defects (p. 61)

Reporting safety defects
The following information will help you report any
perceived safety-related defects in your vehicle.

Reporting safety defects in the U.S.

If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Volvo
Cars of North America, LLC. If NHTSA
receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems
between you, your retailer, or Volvo
Cars of North America, LLC. To contact
NHTSA, you may either call the Auto
Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov, where you can also
enter your vehicle's VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) to see if it has any
open recalls.
Volvo strongly recommends that if your
vehicle is covered under a service campaign, safety or emission recall or similar action, it should be completed as
soon as possible. Please check with
your local retailer or Volvo Cars of
North America, LLC if your vehicle is
covered under these conditions.
NHTSA can be reached at:
Internet:
http://www.nhtsa.gov
Telephone:
1-888-DASH-2-DOT
(1-888-327-4236).
Reporting safety defects in Canada
If you believe your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Transport Canada in
addition to notifying Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.

}}
61

SAFETY
||

Transport Canada can be contacted at:
1-800-333-0510
Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 990-4500
Fax: 1-819-994-3372
Mailing Address: Transport Canada - Road
Safety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau, (Quebec) J8Z 0A1

Related information

•
•

Recall information (p. 62)
Occupant safety (p. 60)

Recall information
On our website, select the tab YOUR VOLVO and
the heading RECALL INFORMATION will be displayed at the lower left side of the screen. Enter
your Vehicle Identification Number for your vehicle (found at the base of the windshield). If your
vehicle has any open Recalls, they will be displayed on this page.

The seat belt should always be worn during
pregnancy. However, it is crucial that it be worn
correctly.

Volvo customers in Canada
For any questions regarding open recalls for your
vehicle, please contact your authorized Volvo
retailer. If your retailer is unable to answer your
questions, please contact Volvo Customer Relations at 905 695-9626, Monday through Friday,
8:30 A.M. to 5:00 P.M. EST or by e-mail at
vclcust@volvocars.com. You may also write us at:
Volvo Cars of Canada
National Customer Service
9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9
www.tc.gc.ca

Related information

•
•

Safety during pregnancy

Occupant safety (p. 60)
Reporting safety defects (p. 61)

The diagonal section should wrap over the shoulder then be routed between the breasts and to
the side of the belly. The lap section should lay
flat over the thighs and as low as possible under
the belly. It must never be allowed to ride upward.
Remove all slack from the belt and ensure that it
fits close to the body without any twists.
As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
should adjust their seats and steering wheel such
that they can easily maintain control of the vehicle as they drive (which means they must be able
to easily operate the foot pedals and steering
wheel). Within this context, they should strive to
position the seat with as large a distance as possible between their belly and the steering wheel.

SAFETY

Related information

•
•
•

Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 65)
Adjusting power front seats* (p. 163)
Manually operated front seats (p. 162)

Whiplash protection system
The Whiplash protection system (WHIPS) consists of specially designed hinges and brackets
on the front seat backrests designed to help
absorb some of the energy generated in a collision from the rear (when the vehicle is rearended).

Function
In the event of certain rear-end collisions, the
hinges and brackets of the front seat backrests
are designed to change position slightly to allow
the backrest/head restraint to help support the
occupant's head before moving slightly rearward.
This movement helps absorb some of the forces
that could result in whiplash.

WARNING

•

Occupants in the front seats must never
sit out of position. The occupant's back
must be as upright as comfort allows and
be against the seat back with the seat
belt properly fastened.

•

If your vehicle has been involved in a rearend collision, the front seat backrests
must be inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician, even if the
seats appear to be undamaged. Certain
components in the WHIPS system may
need to be replaced.

•

Do not attempt to service any component
in the WHIPS system yourself.

WARNING

•

The WHIPS system is designed to supplement the other safety systems in your
vehicle. For this system to function properly, the three-point seat belt must be
worn. Please be aware that no system
can prevent all possible injuries that may
occur in an accident.
The WHIPS system is designed to function in certain collisions from the rear,
depending on the crash severity, angle
and speed.

WARNING

•

Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behind the
front seats could impede the function of
the WHIPS system.

•

If the rear seat backrests are folded
down, cargo must be secured to prevent
it from sliding forward against the front
seat backrests in the event of a collision
from the rear. This could interfere with
the action of the WHIPS system.

}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

SAFETY
||

Seat belts

WARNING

Seat belts should always be worn by all occupants of your vehicle. Children should be properly restrained, using an infant, car, or booster
seat determined by age, weight and height.
Most states and provinces make it mandatory for
occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts.

•

Never repair the belt yourself; have this
work done by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician only.

•

Any device used to induce slack into the
shoulder belt portion of the three-point
belt system will have a detrimental effect
on the amount of protection available to
you in the event of a collision.

•

The seat back should not be tilted too far
back. The shoulder belt must be taut in
order to function properly.

•

Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front
passenger's seat. We also recommend
that children who have outgrown these
devices sit in the rear seat with the seat
belt properly fastened.

Reversible seat belt pretensioners

Do not place any objects behind the front seats that
could impede the WHIPS function

WARNING
Any contact between the front seat backrests
and the folded rear seat or a rear-facing child
seat could impede the function of the WHIPS
system. If the rear seat is folded down, the
occupied front seats must be adjusted forward so that they do not touch the folded rear
seat.

Related information

•
•
•
•

Reversible seat belt pretensioners is a system in
the front seats that pulls the seat belts slightly
taut prior to a collision. This function helps position the front seat occupants to help improve the
effects of other safety systems, e.g., the airbag
system.

Seat belt maintenance
Check periodically that the seat belts are in good
condition. Use water and a mild detergent for
cleaning. Check seat belt mechanism function as
follows: attach the seat belt and pull rapidly on
the strap.

Related information

•
•
•

Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 65)
Door and seat belt reminders (p. 67)
Seat belt pretensioners (p. 65)

General safety information (p. 60)
Rear Collision Warning (RCW) (p. 292)
Manually operated front seats (p. 162)
Power front seats* (p. 163)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

SAFETY

Seat belt pretensioners
The vehicle's seat belts are equipped with standard and electric pretensioners that can help pull
the seat belts taut in a critical situation or a collision. Some or all of the pretensioners will be
triggered in certain types of collisions, depending on the direction and severity of the impact.

Reversible seat belt pretensioners
Reversible seat belt pretensioners is a system in
the front seats that pulls the seat belts slightly
taut prior to a collision. This function helps position the front seat occupants to help improve the
effects of other safety systems, e.g., the airbag
system.

The electric pretensioner positions the occupant
in the seat to help reduce the risk of striking the
interior of the passenger compartment and
improves the effect of other safety systems such
as the airbags.

Buckling and unbuckling seat belts

Resetting the electric pretensioners
When a critical situation has passed, the seat belt
and the electric pretensioner are reset automatically.

If the seat belt should remain taut:
1.

Stop the vehicle safely.

Unbuckle the seat belt and rebuckle it.
> The seat belt and the electric pretensioner will be reset.

Seat belt pretensioners in collisions
The seat belts are equipped with standard pretensioners that are triggered according to the
severity of a collision.

Seat belt pretensioners in critical
situations
In addition to the standard pretensioners, the
seat belts in the front seats are also equipped
with electric pretensioners.
The pretensioners interact and can be triggered
along with the City Safety and Rear Collision
Warning systems. In critical situations such as
sudden braking, evasive maneuvers, etc., the seat
belt can be pulled taut by the pretensioner's
electric motor.

Related information

•
•
•

Seat belts (p. 64)
Door and seat belt reminders (p. 67)
Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 65)

Seat belts should be used by all occupants in
the vehicle when it is in motion.

Buckling a seat belt
Pull the belt out slowly. It should not be twisted or turned.

NOTE
Each seat belt is equipped with a seat belt
retractor that will lock up in the following situations:

•
•
•
•
•

if the belt is pulled out rapidly
during braking and acceleration
if the vehicle is leaning excessively
when driving in turns
if the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) is
activated (each seat belt (except for the
driver's belt) is equipped with the
ALR/ELR function, which is designed to
help keep the seat belt taut. ALR/ELR
activates if the seat belt is pulled out as far
as possible. If this is done, a sound from
the seat belt retractor will be audible,
which is normal, and the seat belt will be
pulled taut and locked in place. This function is automatically disabled when the
seat belt is unbuckled and fully retracted).
}}
65

SAFETY
||

Insert the latch plate into the receptacle. The
seat belt retractor is normally "unlocked" and
you can move freely, provided that the shoulder belt is not pulled out too far.
> A distinct click will be audible.

The height of the seat belts in the front seats
and outboard rear seating positions can be
adjusted. The height of the shoulder section
of the seat belt must be correctly adjusted.

WARNING
The seat belt latch plate should only be
inserted into its intended receptacle. Inserting
it into one of the other receptacles may prevent it from functioning properly.
The seat belt should be positioned over the shoulder
(not over the arm)

Press the button and move the upper seat
belt anchor up or down.
Position it as high as possible so that the
shoulder section of the belt is across the seat
occupant's collarbone and not across the
throat.

SAFETY
4.

Tighten the lap section of the seat belt by
pulling the diagonal section upward toward
the shoulder.

Unbuckling the seat belt

Door and seat belt reminders

To remove the seat belt, press the red section on
the seat belt receptacle. Before exiting the vehicle, check that the seat belt retracts fully after
being unbuckled. If necessary, guide the belt
back into the retractor slot.

The door and seat belt reminders are intended
to alert all occupants of the vehicle that their
seat belts should be buckled before the vehicle
begins to move or if a door, the hood, tailgate or
fuel filler door have not been closed properly.

Related information

Graphics in the instrument panel

•
•

Door and seat belt reminders (p. 67)
Seat belts (p. 64)

The lap section of the belt must be positioned low on the
hips (not pressing against the abdomen)

Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolled up
into its retractor and that the shoulder and
lap belts are taut.

WARNING
Never use a seat belt for more than one
occupant. Never wear the shoulder portion of
the belt under the arm, behind the back or
otherwise out of position. Such use could
cause injury in the event of an accident. As
seat belts lose much of their strength when
exposed to violent stretching, they should be
replaced after any collision, even if they
appear to be undamaged.

Warning colors for doors/tailgate vary depending on the
vehicle's speed

The instrument panel graphic shows the seats
where seat belts are not buckled.
The same graphic also indicates if a door, the
hood, tailgate or fuel filler door is/are open.
This graphic disappears automatically after
approx. 30 seconds or if the if the O button on
the steering wheel keypad is pressed.
}}
67

SAFETY
||

Seat belt reminder

Rear seats
The rear seat belt reminder has two functions.

•
•

Seat belt reminder light in ceiling console

The seat belt reminder consists of an
audible signal, an indicator light near
the rearview mirror and a symbol in the
instrument panel that alert all occupants of the vehicle to buckle their seat belts.

If a door, the hood, tailgate or fuel filler door
is/are not properly closed, this will be indicated in
a graphic in the instrument panel. Stop the vehicle safely and close the source of the reminder.
If the vehicle is moving at a speed
under approx.6 mph (10 km/h), the
information symbol will illuminate in the
instrument panel.

If the driver's or a passenger's seat belt is not
buckled, this will be indicated in the instrument
panel.

Front seats
An audible signal and an indicator light will
remind the driver and front seat passenger to
buckle their seat belts.

It also provides audio and visual reminders if
a rear seat belt is unbuckled while the vehicle is in motion. The reminders will disappear
when the seat belt has been buckled again
or can be erased by pressing the O button
on the steering wheel keypad.

Door/hood/tailgate/fuel filler door
reminder

The audible signal is speed-dependent and will
sound for several seconds.

Child seats are not included in the seat belt
reminder system.

It indicates which seat belts are buckled in
the rear seats. This will also be displayed in
an instrument panel graphic.

At speeds above approx. 6 mph
(10 km/h), the warning symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel.

Related information

•
•

Seat belts (p. 64)
Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 65)

Child safety
Children should always be seated safely when
traveling in the vehicle.

General information
Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint
systems for all occupants including children.
Remember that, regardless of age and size, a
child should always be properly restrained in a
vehicle.
Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX/
LATCH attachments, which make it more convenient to install child seats.
Some restraint systems for children are designed
to be secured in the vehicle by lap belts or the
lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt. Such child
restraint systems can help protect children in
vehicles in the event of an accident only if they
are used properly. However, children could be
endangered in a crash if the child restraints are
not properly secured in the vehicle. Failure to follow the installation instructions for your child
restraint can result in your child striking the vehicle's interior in a sudden stop.
Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable
substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, a child held in a person's arms can be
crushed between the vehicle's interior and an
unrestrained person. The child could also be
injured by striking the interior, or by being ejected
from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver or

SAFETY
impact. The same can also happen if the infant or
child rides unrestrained on the seat. Other occupants should also be properly restrained to help
reduce the chance of injuring or increasing the
injury of a child.
All states and provinces have legislation governing how and where children should be carried in
a vehicle. Find out the regulations existing in your
state or province. Recent accident statistics have
shown that children are safer in rear seating
positions than front seating positions when properly restrained. A child restraint system can help
protect a child in a vehicle. Here's what to look
for when selecting a child restraint system:
It should have a label certifying that it meets
applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS 213) – or in Canada, CMVSS 213.
Make sure the child restraint system is approved
for the child's height, weight and development –
the label required by the standard or regulation,
or instructions for infant restraints, typically provide this information.

When a child has outgrown the child safety seat,
you should use the rear seat with the standard
seat belt fastened. The best way to help protect
the child here is to place the child on a cushion
so that the seat belt is properly located on the
hips. Legislation in your state or province may
mandate the use of a child seat or cushion in
combination with the seat belt, depending on the
child's age and/or size. Please check local regulations.
A specially designed and tested booster cushion
and backrest can be obtained from your Volvo
retailer.
USA: for children weighing 33 – 80 lbs. (15 –
36 kg) and 38 – 54 inches (97 – 137 cm) in
height
Canada: for children weighing 40 – 80 lbs. (18 –
36 kg) and 40 – 54 inches (102 – 137 cm) in
height

In using any child restraint system, we urge you
to carefully look over the instructions that are
provided with the restraint. Be sure you understand them and can use the device properly and
safely in this vehicle. A misused child restraint
system can result in increased injuries for both
the infant or child and other occupants in the
vehicle.
}}
69

SAFETY
||

WARNING

•

Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front
passenger's seat. We also recommend
that children under 4 feet 7 inches
(140 cm) in height who have outgrown
these devices sit in the rear seat with the
seat belt fastened.

•

Sedan models: Keep vehicle doors and
trunk locked and keep remote controls
out of a child’s reach. Unsupervised children could lock themselves in an open
trunk and risk injury. Children should be
taught not to play in vehicles.

•

On hot days, the temperature in the vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure
to these high temperatures for even a
short period of time can cause heat-related injury or death. Small children are particularly at risk.

Child seats should always be registered.

Volvo's recommendations
Why does Volvo believe that no child should sit in
the front seat of a car? It's quite simple really. A
front airbag is a very powerful device designed,
by law, to help protect an adult.
Because of the size of the airbag and its speed
of inflation, a child should never be placed in the
front seat, even if he or she is properly belted or
strapped into a child safety seat. Volvo has been

an innovator in safety for over seventy-five years,
and we'll continue to do our part. But we need
your help. Please remember to put your children
in the back seat, and buckle them up.
Volvo has some very specific
recommendations
• Always wear your seat belt.

•

Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety
device which, when used with a three-point
seat belt can help reduce serious injuries
during certain types of accidents. Volvo recommends that you do not disconnect the airbag system in your vehicle.

•

Volvo strongly recommends that everyone in
the vehicle be properly restrained.

•

Volvo recommends that ALL occupants
(adults and children) shorter than 4 feet
7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back
seat of any vehicle with a front passenger
side airbag.

•

Drive safely!

Related information

•
•
•
•
•
•

Integrated booster cushion* (p. 81)
Booster cushions (p. 77)

Child restraints
Suitable child restraints should always be used
when children travel in the vehicle.

Child restraint systems

Infant seat

There are three main types of child restraint systems: infant seats, convertible seats and booster
cushions. They are classified according to the
child's age and size.
The child restraint should be secured using a
three-point seat belt, ISOFIX/LATCH anchors or
top tether anchors.

Convertible seats (p. 74)
Infant seats (p. 72)
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 78)
Top tether anchors (p. 80)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

SAFETY

WARNING

Convertible seat

WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the front
passenger seat of any vehicle with a front
passenger airbag – not even if the "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles equipped with
Occupant Weight Sensor). If the severity of an
accident were to cause the airbag to inflate,
this could lead to serious injury or death to a
child seated in this position.

Booster cushion

WARNING
Always refer to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for detailed information on
securing the restraint.

•

When not in use, keep the child restraint
system secured or remove it from the
passenger compartment to help prevent it
from injuring passengers in the event of a
sudden stop or collision.

•

A small child's head represents a considerable part of its total weight and its neck
is still very weak. Volvo recommends that
children up to age 4 travel, properly
restrained, facing rearward. In addition,
Volvo recommends that children should
ride rearward facing, properly restrained,
as long as possible.

Automatic Locking Retractor/
Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/
ELR)
To make child seat installation easier, each seat
belt (except for the driver's belt) is equipped with
a locking mechanism to help keep the seat belt
taut.

}}
71

SAFETY
||

When attaching the seat belt to a child seat:
1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
2.

Pull the seat belt out as far as possible.

Insert the seat belt latch plate into the buckle
(lock) in the usual way.

Release the seat belt and pull it taut around
the child seat.

Child restraint recall information is readily available in both the U.S. and Canada. For recall information in the U.S., call the U.S. Government's
Auto Safety Hotline at 1-800-424-9393 or go to
http://www-odi.nhtsa.dot.gov/cars/problems/
recalls/register/childseat/index.cfm. In Canada,
visit Transport Canada's Child Safety website at
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/childsafety/
menu.htm.

Infant seats
Suitable child restraints should always be used
when children (depending on their age/size) are
seated in the vehicle.

Securing an infant seat with a seat belt

A sound from the seat belt retractor will be audible at this time and is normal. The belt will now
be locked in place. This function is automatically
disabled when the seat belt is unlocked and the
belt is fully retracted.

WARNING
Do not use child safety seats or child booster
cushions/backrests in the front passenger's
seat. We also recommend that children who
have outgrown these devices sit in the rear
seat with the seat belt properly fastened.

Child restraint registration and recalls
Child restraints could be recalled for safety reasons. You must register your child restraint to be
reached in a recall. To stay informed about child
safety seat recalls, be sure to fill out and return
the registration card that comes with new child
restraints.

Do not place the infant seat in the front passenger's
seat

Place the infant seat in the rear seat of the
vehicle.

Attach the seat belt to the infant seat
according to the manufacturer's instructions.

SAFETY

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt

WARNING

•

An infant seat must be in the rear-facing
position only.

•

The infant seat should not be positioned
behind the driver's seat unless there is
adequate space for safe installation.

Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt out
as far as possible to activate the belt's automatic locking function.

Fasten the seat belt

Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.

}}
73

SAFETY
||

NOTE

WARNING
It should not be possible to move the child
restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm)
in any direction along the seat belt path.

The locking retractor will automatically
release when the seat belt is unbuckled and
allowed to retract fully.
5.

Press the infant seat firmly in place, let the
seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound from
the seat belt retractor's automatic locking
function will be audible at this time and is
normal. The seat belt should now be locked
in place.

The infant seat can be removed by unbuckling
the seat belt and letting it retract completely.

Convertible seats
Suitable child restraints should always be used
when children (depending on their age/size) are
seated in the vehicle.

Securing a convertible seat with a seat
belt

Related information

•
•
•
•
•

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 78)
Top tether anchors (p. 80)
Convertible seats (p. 74)
Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 65)
Child safety (p. 68)

Do not place the convertible seat in the front passenger's seat

Convertible seats can be used in either a forward
or rearward-facing position, depending on the
age and size of the child.
Ensure that the seat is securely in place

Push and pull the infant seat along the seat
belt path to ensure that it is held securely in
place by the seat belt.

SAFETY

WARNING

Route the seat belt through the convertible seat

•

A small child's head represents a considerable part of its total weight and its neck is
still very weak. Volvo recommends that
children up to age 4 travel, properly
restrained, facing rearward. In addition,
Volvo recommends that children should
ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as
long as possible.

•

Convertible child seats should be installed
in the rear seat only.

•

A rear-facing convertible seat should not
be positioned behind the driver's seat
unless there is adequate space for safe
installation.

Fasten the seat belt

Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.

Attach the seat belt to the convertible seat
according to the manufacturer's instructions.

Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt out
as far as possible to activate the belt's automatic locking function.

WARNING
Always use a convertible seat that is suitable
for the child's age and size. See the convertible seat manufacturer's recommendations.
1.

Place the convertible seat in the rear seat of
the vehicle.

}}
75

SAFETY
||

NOTE
The locking retractor will automatically
release when the seat belt is unbuckled and
allowed to retract fully.
5.

Press the convertible seat firmly in place, let
the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound
from the seat belt retractor's automatic locking function will be audible at this time and is
normal. The seat belt should now be locked
in place.

WARNING
It should not be possible to move the child
restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm)
in any direction along the seat belt path.
The convertible seat can be removed by unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract completely.

Ensure that the seat is securely in place

WARNING
Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt

Push and pull the convertible seat along the
seat belt path to ensure that it is held
securely in place by the seat belt.

A child seat should never be used in the front
passenger seat of any vehicle with a front
passenger airbag – not even if the "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mirror is illuminated. If the severity of an accident
were to cause the airbag to inflate, this could
lead to serious injury or death to a child
seated in this position.

Related information

•
•
•
•
•

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 78)
Top tether anchors (p. 80)
Booster cushions (p. 77)
Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 65)
Child safety (p. 68)

SAFETY

Booster cushions

Securing a booster cushion

Position the child correctly on the booster cushion

Booster cushions are recommended for children
who have outgrown convertible seats.
1.

Place the booster cushion in the rear seat of
the vehicle.

With the child properly seated on the booster
cushion, attach the seat belt to or around the
cushion according to the manufacturer's
instructions.

Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.

Related information

•
•
•
•
•

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 78)
Top tether anchors (p. 80)
Child safety (p. 68)
Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 65)
Integrated booster cushion* (p. 81)

Positioning the seat belt

Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut and
fits snugly around the child.

WARNING

•

The hip section of the three-point seat
belt must fit snugly across the child's
hips, not across the stomach.

•

The shoulder section of the three-point
seat belt should be positioned across the
chest and shoulder.

•

The shoulder belt must never be placed
behind the child's back or under the arm.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

SAFETY

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors

Lower anchors for ISOFIX/LATCH-equipped
child seats are located in the rear, outboard
seats, hidden below the backrest cushions.

Kneel on the child restraint to press down
the seat cushion and locate the anchors by
feel.

Fasten the attachment on the child
restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX/
LATCH/LATCH lower anchors.

Firmly tension the lower child seat straps
according to the manufacturer's instructions.

Using the ISOFIX/LATCH lower child
seat anchors

WARNING
Volvo's ISOFIX/LATCH anchors conform to
FMVSS/CMVSS standards. Always refer to
the child restraint system's manual for weight
and size ratings.

NOTE
Location of the ISOFIX/LATCH anchors

Symbols on the seat back upholstery mark the
ISOFIX/LATCH anchor positions as shown. To
access the anchors, kneel on the seat cushion
and locate the anchors by feel. Always follow your
child seat manufacturer's installation instructions,
and use both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and
top tethers whenever possible.
To access the anchors
1. Put the child restraint in position.

•

The rear seat's center position is not
equipped with ISOFIX/LATCH lower
anchors. When installing a child restraint
in this position, attach the restraint's top
tether strap (if it is so equipped) to the
top tether anchorage point and secure
the restraint with the vehicle's center seat
belt.
Always follow your child seat manufacturer's installation instructions, and use both
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and top
tethers whenever possible.

Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX/LATCH
lower anchors

WARNING

•

Be sure to fasten the attachment correctly to the anchor (see the illustration).
If the attachment is not correctly fastened, the child restraint may not be
properly secured in the event of a collision.

•

The ISOFIX/LATCH lower child restraint
anchors are only intended for use with
child seats positioned in the outboard
seating positions. These anchors are not
certified for use with any child restraint
that is positioned in the center seating
position. When securing a child restraint
in the center seating position, use only
the vehicle's center seat belt.

SAFETY

Related information

•

Top tether anchors (p. 80)

Lower child seat attachment points1

WARNING

The vehicle is equipped with lower attachment
points for child seats in the second row of seats.

A child seat should never be used in the front
passenger seat of any vehicle with a front
passenger airbag – not even if the "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles equipped with
Occupant Weight Sensor). If the severity of an
accident were to cause the airbag to inflate,
this could lead to serious injury or death to a
child seated in this position.

The lower attachment points are intended for use
with rear-facing child restraints.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's
installation instructions when attaching a child
restraint to these attachment points.

Location

Related information

•
•
•

Child restraints (p. 70)
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 78)
Occupant weight sensor (p. 84)

Attachment points in the second row of seats

The attachment points in the second row of seats
are in the rear section of the front seat's floor
rails.

Not available in all markets

SAFETY

Top tether anchors

Your Volvo is equipped with child restraint top
tether anchorages in the rear seat. They are
located on the rear side of the backrests.

Child restraint anchorages
–

Attach lower tether straps to the lower ISOFIX/LATCH anchors. If the child restraint is
not equipped with lower tether straps, or the
restraint is used in the center seating position, follow instructions for securing a child
restraint using the Automatic Locking
Retractor seat belt.

WARNING

Firmly tension all straps.

Refer also to the child seat manufacturer's
instructions for information on securing the child
seat.

•

Always refer to the recommendations
made by the child restraint manufacturer.

•

Volvo recommends that the top tether
anchors be used when installing a forward-facing child restraint.

•

Never route a top tether strap over the
top of the head restraint. The strap
should be routed beneath the head
restraint.

•

Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for
adult seat belts or harnesses. The anchorages are not able to withstand excessive
forces on them in the event of collision if
full harness seat belts or adult seat belts
are installed to them. An adult who uses a
belt anchored in a child restraint anchorage runs a great risk of suffering severe
injuries should a collision occur.

•

Do not install rear speakers that require
the removal of the top tether anchors or
interfere with the proper use of the top
tether strap.

NOTE

Top tether anchors and symbols on the rear side of the
second row backrests. There is no symbol for the center
anchor position.

On models equipped with the optional cargo
area cover, this cover should be removed
before a child seat is attached to the child
restraint anchors.

Securing a child seat
1. Place the child restraint on the rear seat.
2.

Route the top tether strap under the head
restraint and attach it to the anchor.

Related information

•

Child safety (p. 68)

SAFETY

Integrated booster cushion*

WARNING

Volvo's optional integrated booster cushion is
located in the rear seat's center position and is
designed to raise the child higher so that the
shoulder strap crosses over the child's collarbone, not over the neck.

DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can
occur
Follow all instructions on the booster
cushion and in the vehicle's owner's
manual.
MAKE SURE THE BOOSTER
CUSHION IS SECURELY LOCKED
BEFORE THE CHILD IS SEATED.
• Use this booster cushion only with chil-

Integrated booster cushion2
This booster cushion has been specially
designed to help safeguard children in the rear
seat. It should be stowed (folded down into the
seat cushion) when not in use. When using an
integrated booster cushion, the child must be
secured with the vehicle's three-point seat belt.

Correct seating position: child's head is below the head
restraint and the shoulder belt is across the collarbone

dren whose height and weight are within
the permitted limits.

Use this booster cushion only with a
child whose weight is between 33–
80 lbs (15–36 kg) and whose height is
at least 37 in. (95 cm).

•

In Canada, Transport Canada's weight
recommendation is 40 – 80 lbs (18 –
36 kg).
If using a booster cushion does not result in
proper positioning of the shoulder strap, then the
child should be placed in a properly secured child
restraint. The shoulder belt must never be placed
behind the child's back or under the arm.

2 Canada

In the event of a collision while the integrated booster cushion was occupied, the
entire booster cushion and seat belt must
be replaced. The booster cushion should
also be replaced if it is badly worn or
damaged in any way. This work should be
performed by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician only.

Before driving, check that:

•

The integrated booster cushion has been
correctly raised and locked in position.

}}

only: This cushion may be referred to as a built-in booster cushion.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

SAFETY
||

•

That the seat belt is properly positioned and
is taut.

•

Raising the integrated booster
cushion*

The shoulder section of the seat belt is
across the child's collarbone, not over the
neck.

The integrated booster cushion must be correctly raised before use.

•

The lap section of the seat belt is across the
child's hips and not the abdomen.

Related information

•
•
•
•

Seat belts (p. 64)
Child safety (p. 68)
Raising the integrated booster cushion*
(p. 82)

Press the booster cushion rearward to lock it
in position.

Stowing the integrated booster cushion*
(p. 83)
Pull the handle forward and upward to
release the booster cushion.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

SAFETY

WARNING

Stowing the integrated booster
cushion*
The integrated booster cushion should be
stowed (folded down) when not in use.

Press down on the center of the booster
cushion to return it to the stowed position.

dren whose height and weight are within
the permitted limits.

•

Related information

•
•

Integrated booster cushion* (p. 81)

NOTE
Pull the handle forward to release the
booster cushion.

The booster cushion must be in the stowed
position before the rear seat backrests are
folded down.

CAUTION
Be sure there are no loose objects under the
booster cushion before it is stowed.

Stowing the integrated booster cushion*
(p. 83)

}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

SAFETY
||

WARNING

Occupant weight sensor
The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) is
designed to meet the regulatory requirements of
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)
208 and is designed to disable (will not inflate)
the passenger's side front airbag under certain
conditions.

dren whose height and weight are within
the permitted limits.

•

Related information

•
•

Integrated booster cushion* (p. 81)
Raising the integrated booster cushion*
(p. 82)

Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light

Disabling the passenger's side front
airbag
Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adults
and children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches
(140 cm) be seated in the back seat of any vehicle with a front passenger side airbag and be
properly restrained for their size and weight.

seated occupant and determine if the passenger's side front airbag should be enabled (may
inflate) or disabled (will not inflate).
The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag when:

•

the front passenger's seat is unoccupied, or
has small/medium objects in the front seat,

•

the system determines that an infant is present in a rear-facing infant seat that is installed according to the manufacturer's instructions,

•

the system determines that a small child is
present in a forward-facing child restraint
that is installed according to the manufacturer's instructions,

•

the system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat,

•

a front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time,

•

a child or a small person occupies the front
passenger's seat.

The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay on to
remind you that the passenger's side front airbag
is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is located in the overhead console,
near the base of the rearview mirror.

The OWS works with sensors that are part of the
front passenger's seat and seat belt. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a properly

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

SAFETY

NOTE

•

When the ignition is switched on, the OWS
indicator light will illuminate for several seconds while the system performs a self-diagnostic test.
However, if a fault is detected in the system:

•
•

that the passenger's side front airbag is disabled unless the
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. Make sure the
child restraint is properly installed. If there is any doubt as to the
status of the passenger's side front airbag, move the child
restraint to the rear seat.

WARNING

•

The OWS indicator light will stay on
The SRS warning light will come on and stay
on and a text message will be displayed.

Never try to open, remove, or repair any
components in the OWS system. This
could result in system malfunction. Maintenance or repairs should only be carried
out by an a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.
The front passenger's seat should not be
modified in any way. This could reduce
pressure on the seat cushion, which
might interfere with the OWS system's
function.

WARNING
If a fault in the system is detected and indicated as described, be aware that the passenger's side front airbag will not deploy in
the event of a collision. In this case, the SRS
system and Occupant Weight Sensor should
be inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician as soon as possible.

Passenger's
seat occupancy status

OWS indicator light
status

Passenger's
side front airbag status

Seat unoccupied

OWS indicator light
lights up.

Passenger's
side front airbag disabled

Seat occupied by low
weight occupant/objectA

OWS indicator light
lights up

Passenger's
side front airbag disabled

Seat occupied by heavy
occupant/
object

OWS indicator light is
not lit

Passenger's
side front airbag enabled

Volvo recommends that children always be properly restrained
in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats. Do not assume

The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate) the
passenger's side front airbag in the event of a
collision anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front
passenger's seat. The PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF indicator lamp will be off and remain off.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger's seat, but the PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possible that the
person isn't sitting properly in the seat. If this
happens:

•

Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
place the seatback in an upright position.

•

Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the person's
legs comfortably extended.

•

Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two minutes.
This will allow the system to detect that person and enable the passenger's frontal airbag.

•

If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp remains on even after this, the person
should be advised to ride in the rear seat.

This condition reflects limitations of the OWS
classification capability. It does not indicate OWS
malfunction.

}}
85

SAFETY
||

Modifications
If you are considering modifying your vehicle in
any way to accommodate a disability, for example
by altering or adapting the driver's or front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag systems, please
contact Volvo at:

WARNING

•

In the USA
Volvo Cars of North America, LLC
Customer Care Center
1 Volvo Drive

•

The seat belt should never be wrapped
around an object on the front passenger's seat. This could interfere with the
OWS system's function.

•

The front passenger's seat belt should
never be used in a way that exerts more
pressure on the passenger than normal.
This could increase the pressure exerted
on the weight sensor by a child, and
could result in the airbag being enabled,
which might cause it to deploy in the
event of a collision, thereby injuring the
child.

P.O. Box 914
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647
1-800-458-1552
In Canada
Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.
National Customer Service
9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9

No objects that add to the total weight on
the seat should be placed on the front
passenger's seat. If a child is seated in
the front passenger's seat with any additional weight, this extra weight could
cause the OWS system to enable the airbag, which might cause it to deploy in the
event of a collision, thereby injuring the
child.

WARNING

•

Keep the following points in mind with
respect to the OWS system. Failure to
follow these instructions could adversely
affect the system's function and result in
serious injury to the occupant of the front
passenger's seat:

•

The full weight of the front seat passenger should always be on the seat cushion.
The passenger should never lift him/
herself off the seat cushion using the
armrest in the door or the center console,
by pressing the feet on the floor, by sitting on the edge of the seat cushion, or
by pressing against the backrest in a way
that reduces pressure on the seat cushion. This could cause OWS to disable the
front, passenger's side airbag.

WARNING

•

Do not place any type of object on the
front passenger's seat in such a way that
jamming, pressing, or squeezing occurs
between the object and the front seat,
other than as a direct result of the correct
use of the Automatic Locking Retractor/
Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR)
seat belt.

•

No objects should be placed under the
front passenger's seat. This could interfere with the OWS system's function.

1-800-663-8255

SAFETY

Related information

•

Airbag system (p. 89)

Safety mode

WARNING

As a safety precaution after a collision, the functionality of some of the vehicle's systems may be
reduced.
If the vehicle has been involved in a collision, the
text Safety mode may appear in the information
display.

NOTE
This text can only be shown if the display is
undamaged and the vehicle's electrical system is intact.
Safety mode is a feature that is triggered if one
or more of the safety systems such as the front/
side airbags inflatable curtain, etc., or one or
more of the seat belt pretensioners has deployed.
The collision may have damaged an important
function in the vehicle, such as the fuel lines,
sensors for one of the safety systems, the brake
system, etc.

•

Never attempt to repair the vehicle yourself or to reset the electrical system after
the vehicle has displayed Safety mode.
This could result in injury or improper system function.

•

Restoring the vehicle to normal operating
status should only be done by a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician.

•

After Safety mode has been displayed, if
you detect the odor of fuel vapor, or see
any signs of fuel leakage, do not attempt
to start the vehicle. Leave the vehicle
immediately.

Related information

•

Starting or moving a vehicle in safety mode
(p. 88)

•

General safety information (p. 60)

SAFETY

Starting or moving a vehicle in
safety mode
If Safety mode has been set, it may be possible
to start and move the vehicle, for example, if it is
blocking traffic.

Starting the vehicle in safety mode
1.

Check the vehicle for damage, particularly for
fuel leakage or the smell of gasoline fumes.
If the damage to the vehicle is minor and
there is no fuel leakage/fumes, you may
attempt to start the engine and move the
vehicle.

WARNING
If you smell gasoline fumes or detect fuel
leakage while Safety mode See Owner's
manual is displayed in the instrument panel,
do not attempt to start the vehicle. Leave
the vehicle immediately.

Turn the start knob to STOP and release it.

Try to start the vehicle.
> Vehicle start System check, wait will
be displayed in the instrument panel while
the vehicle's electrical system attempts to
reset to normal mode. This may take up to
a minute.

When Vehicle start System check, wait is
no longer displayed, try to start the vehicle
again.

WARNING
If the message Safety mode See Owner's
manual is still displayed, the vehicle should
not be driven and must be towed (lifted onto a
flatbed tow truck. The vehicle may never be
towed with the wheels on the ground). Concealed faults may make the vehicle difficult to
control.

Moving the vehicle after safety mode
has been set
If the message Normal mode The vehicle is
now in normal mode is displayed, the vehicle
may be moved carefully from its present position
if, for example, it is blocking traffic.
It should, however, not be moved farther than
is absolutely necessary.

WARNING
After Safety mode has been set, the vehicle
should not be driven or towed (pulled on the
ground by another vehicle). It must be transported on a flatbed tow truck to a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician for inspection/repairs.

Related information

•
•

Safety mode (p. 87)
Towing recommendations (p. 360)

SAFETY

Airbag system
As an enhancement to the three-point seat belts,
your vehicle is equipped with an airbag system.

WARNING

•

If the airbag warning light stays on after
the engine has started or if it illuminates
while you are driving, have the vehicle
inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician as soon as possible.
Never try to repair any component or part
of the airbag systems yourself. Any interference in the system could cause malfunction and serious injury. All work on
these systems should be performed by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

WARNING
If your vehicle has become flood-damaged in
any way (e.g., soaked carpeting/standing
water on the floor of the vehicle), do not
attempt to start the vehicle. This may cause
airbag deployment which could result in serious injury. Have the vehicle towed to a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician for
repairs.

Driver/passenger side airbags
The front airbags supplement the three-point
seat belts. For these airbags to provide the protection intended, seat belts must be worn at all
times.

Before attempting to tow the vehicle:
1.

Switch off the ignition for at least
10 minutes and disconnect the battery.

Follow the instructions for manually overriding the shiftlock system.

Deployed airbags
WARNING

Driver's and passenger's side airbags

If any of the airbags have deployed:

The front airbag system

•

Do not attempt to drive the vehicle. Have
it towed to a qualified repair facility.

•

If necessary seek medical attentIon.

The front airbag system includes gas generators
surrounded by the airbags, and deceleration sensors that activate the gas generators, causing the
airbags to be inflated with nitrogen gas.
As the movement of the seats' occupants compresses the airbags, some of the gas is expelled
at a controlled rate to provide better cushioning.
Both seat belt pretensioners also deploy, minimizing seat belt slack. The entire process, including inflation and deflation of the airbags, takes
approximately one fifth of a second.

}}
89

SAFETY
||

The location of the front airbags is indicated by
SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering wheel
pad and above the glove compartment, and by
decals on both sun visors and on the front and
far right side of the dash.

•

The airbags in the vehicle are designed to
be a SUPPLEMENT to–not a replacement for–the three-point seat belts. For
maximum protection, wear seat belts at all
times. Be aware that no system can prevent all possible injuries that may occur in
an accident.

•

Never drive with your hands on the steering wheel pad/airbag housing.

•

The front airbags are designed to help
prevent serious injury. Deployment occurs
very quickly and with considerable force.
During normal deployment and depending on variables such as seating position,
one may experience abrasions, bruises,
swellings, or other injuries as a result
from deployment of one or both of the
airbags.

The driver's side front airbag is folded and
located in the steering wheel hub.
The knee airbag is folded on the underside of
the dashboard on the driver's side. The text
AIRBAG is embossed on the panel.
The passenger's side front airbag is folded
behind a panel located above the glove compartment.

•

When installing any accessory equipment,
make sure that the front airbag system is
not damaged. Any interference in the system could cause malfunction.

Front airbag deployment

•

certain non-frontal collisions where rapid
deceleration occurs.

WARNING

The front airbags are designed to deploy during certain frontal or front-angular collisions,
impacts, or decelerations, depending on the
crash severity, angle, speed and object
impacted. The airbags may also deploy in

•

The airbag system sensors, which trigger the
front airbags, are designed to react to both
the impact of the collision and the inertial
forces generated by it, and to determine if
the intensity of the collision is sufficient for
the seat belt pretensioners and/or airbags to
be deployed.

However, not all frontal collisions activate the
front airbags.

•

If the collision involves a nonrigid object (e.g.,
a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, fixed object
at a low speed, the front airbags will not necessarily deploy.

•

Front airbags do not normally deploy in a
side impact collision, in a collision from the
rear or in a rollover situation.

•

The amount of damage to the bodywork
does not reliably indicate if the airbags
should have deployed or not.

SAFETY

NOTE

•

Deployment of front airbags occurs only
one time during an accident. In a collision
where deployment occurs, the airbags
and seat belt pretensioners activate.
Some noise occurs and a small amount
of powder is released. The release of the
powder may appear as smoke-like matter.
This is a normal characteristic and does
not indicate fire.
Volvo's front airbags use special sensors
that are integrated with the front seat
buckles. The point at which the airbag
deploys is determined by whether or not
the seat belt is being used, as well as the
severity of the collision.
Collisions can occur where only one of
the airbags deploys. If the impact is less
severe, but severe enough to present a
clear injury risk, the airbags are triggered
at partial capacity. If the impact is more
severe, the airbags are triggered at full
capacity.

•

WARNING

www.volvocars.com/us

Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front
passenger's seat. We also recommend
that occupants under 4 feet 7 inches
(140 cm) in height who have outgrown
these devices sit in the rear seat with the
seat belt fastened. See also the Occupant Weight Sensor information,.

In Canada

Never drive with the airbags deployed.
The fact that they hang out can impair the
steering of your vehicle. Other safety systems can also be damaged.

www.volvocars.com/ca

Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.
National Customer Service
9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9
1-800-663-8255

Airbag decals

The smoke and dust formed when the
airbags are deployed can cause skin and
eye irritation in the event of prolonged
exposure.

Should you have questions about any component
in the SRS system, please contact a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician or Volvo customer support:
In the USA
Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors

Customer Care Center
1 Volvo Drive
P.O. Box 914
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647
1-800-458-1552

}}
91

SAFETY
||

WARNING

•

No objects or accessory equipment, e.g.
dashboard covers, may be placed on,
attached to, or installed near the air bag
hatch (the area above the glove compartment) or the area affected by airbag
deployment.

•

There should be no loose articles, such
as coffee cups on the floor, seat, or dashboard area.

•

Never try to open the airbag cover on the
steering wheel or the passenger's side
dashboard. This should only be done by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

•

Failure to follow these instructions can
result in injury to the vehicle occupants.

Passenger's side airbag decal

WARNING

•

Children must never be allowed in the
front passenger's seat.

•

Occupants in the front passenger's seat
must never sit on the edge of the seat, sit
leaning toward the instrument panel or
otherwise sit out of position.

•

The occupant's back must be as upright
as comfort allows and be against the seat
back with the seat belt properly fastened.

•

Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on the
dash, seat or out of the window.

Related information

•
•

Seat belts (p. 64)
Occupant weight sensor (p. 84)

Inflatable curtains
The inflatable curtain is designed to help protect
the heads of the occupants of the front seats
and the occupant of the outboard rear seating
positions in certain side impact collisions.

This system consists of inflatable curtains located
along the sides of the roof liners, stretching from
the center of both front side windows to the rear
edge of the rear side door windows.
In certain side impacts, both the Inflatable Curtain (IC) and the side Impact Airbag System
(SIPS airbag) will deploy. The IC and the SIPS
airbag deploy simultaneously.

SAFETY

WARNING

Side impact airbags

Components in the SIPS airbag system

•

Never try to open or repair any components of the IC system. This should be
done only by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.

As an enhancement to the structural side impact
protection built into your vehicle, it is also equipped with Side Impact Protection System (SIPS)
airbags.

This SIPS airbag system consists of a gas generator, the side airbag modules built into the outboard sides of both front seat backrests, and
electronic sensors/wiring.

•

Never hang heavy items from the ceiling
handles. This could impede deployment
of the Inflatable Curtain.

•

The cargo area and rear seat should not
be loaded to a level higher than 4 in.
(10 cm) below the upper edge of the rear
side windows. Objects placed higher than
this level could impede the function of
the Inflatable Curtain.

The SIPS airbag system is a supplement
to the structural Side Impact Protection
System and the three-point seat belt system. It is not designed to deploy during
collisions from the front or rear of the
vehicle or in rollover situations.

•

The use of seat covers on the front seats
may impede SIPS airbag deployment.

•

No objects, accessory equipment or stickers may be placed on, attached to or
installed near the SIPS airbag system or
in the area affected by SIPS airbag
deployment.

•

Never try to open or repair any components of the SIPS airbag system. This
should be done only by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.

•

In order for the SIPS airbag to provide its
best protection, both front seat occupants
should sit in an upright position with the
seat belt properly fastened.

•

Failure to follow these instructions can
result in injury to the occupants of the
vehicle in the event of an accident.

•

In order for the IC to provide its best protection, both front seat occupants and
both outboard rear seat occupants should
sit in an upright position with the seat belt
properly fastened; adults using the seat
belt and children using the proper child
restraint system.

Related information

•
•
•
•

Airbag system (p. 89)
Side impact airbags (p. 93)
Child safety (p. 68)
Seat belts (p. 64)

WARNING

The SIPS airbag system is designed to help
increase occupant protection in the event of certain side impact collisions. The SIPS airbags are
designed to deploy only during certain sideimpact collisions, depending on the crash
severity, angle, speed and point of impact.

NOTE
SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs
only on the side of the vehicle affected by the
impact. The airbags are not designed to
deploy in all side impact situations.

}}
93

SAFETY
||

Related information

•
•

Airbag system (p. 89)
Seat belts (p. 64)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Trip computer

Trip odometer

The trip computer registers and calculates information such as distance driven, fuel consumption and average speed. This information is displayed in the instrument panel.

There are two trip odometers: TM and TA. During
a drive, the trip odometer registers:

To help promote fuel efficient driving, the trip
computer provides readings for current and average fuel consumption.
The trip computer includes the following
gauges:

•
•
•
•
•

Trip odometers

•
•
•
•

Mileage

Distance to discharged battery

Driving time

This gauge shows the approximate distance that
can be driven on the charge remaining in the
hybrid battery. When the gauge displays "----"
there is no guaranteed driving charge remaining
in the battery.

Average speed
Average fuel consumption

The values displayed are those since the last
time the trip odometer was reset.

Odometer

The odometer registers the vehicle's total mileage and cannot be reset.

Current fuel consumption

Distance to empty

This gauge shows the current fuel consumption.
This reading is updated once a second.

Tourist (alternative speedometer)

Distance to empty
This function shows the approximate distance
that can be driven on the fuel remaining in the
tank.
The calculation is based on average fuel consumption during the last 20 miles (30 km) of
driving and the amount of fuel remaining in the
tank.
When the gauge displays "----", there is very little
useable fuel remaining in the tank; refuel as soon
as possible.

The accuracy of this figure may vary if your driving style changes. An economical driving style will
generally increase this distance.

This calculation is based on the average electrical
current consumption in a normally loaded vehicle
during normal driving, and whether the A/C is on
or off.
An economical driving style will generally
increase this distance.
Distance using the electric motor
To get the optimal driving distance using the
electric motor, it is essential to conserve current.
Functions that use a great deal of current (e.g.,
audio system, electrical heating in the steering
wheel/door mirrors/rear window/seats, very cold
air from the climate system, etc.) reduce the possible driving distance.

NOTE
In addition to high electrical consumption in
the passenger compartment, fast acceleration, sudden braking, heavy loads, low ambient
temperatures and driving up hills can reduce
the possible driving distance.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Tourist (alternative speedometer)
This is an alternative digital speedometer can be
used when driving in areas in which the speed
limit is listed in a different unit of measure. If the
speedometer is in mph, this gauge will show the
vehicle's speed in km/h and vice versa.

Displaying trip computer
information
The trip computer registers and calculates information such as distance driven, fuel consumption and average speed. This information is displayed in the instrument panel.

Related information

•
•

Displaying trip computer information (p. 97)
Displaying trip statistics (p. 98)

Use the right-side steering wheel keypad to navigate in
the trip computer

Open/close the app menu
Left/right arrow keys
Up/down arrow keys
Confirm
1.

Press (1) to open the app menu in the
instrument panel.
The app menu cannot be opened if there is
an a message in the instrument panel that
has not been confirmed. Press (4) to confirm.

The top four lines show readings from trip
odometer TM. The following four lines show
readings from trip odometer TA. Scroll up/
down in the list using (3).
}}
97

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||

Scroll to the selection buttons in the lines
below TA and select the trip odometer to be
displayed.

•
•
•
•
•
•

Current fuel consumption
Distance to empty

Changing the unit of measure

Displaying trip statistics

Change the units of measure for driven distance
and fuel consumption in the center display's Top
view by selecting Settings System Units
and marking the desired unit.

Trip computer statistics can be displayed graphically in the center display.

Odometer

NOTE

Trip odometers TM, TA or none

Changing these units of measure will also
change the ones used in the Volvo navigation
system*.

Tourist (alternative speedometer).
Distance to discharged battery

Select or deselect an alternative using the
center button (4). The change will be made
immediately.

Resetting a trip odometer

Related information

•
•

Displaying trip statistics (p. 98)
Trip computer (p. 96)

Reset trip odometer TM by pressing and holding
the RESET button the left-side steering wheel
lever. Trip odometer TA resets automatically if the
ignition is switched off for more than 4 hours.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

HomeLink® Wireless Control
System*

Open the Driver performance
app in the app menu to display
trip statistics.

HomeLink® can be used to open garage doors,
gates, etc.

Each bar in the graph represents a driving distance of
1 mile, 10 miles or 100 miles1
depending on the current scale; bars are added
from the right and the bar at the far right shows
the value for the current trip.
Average fuel consumption is calculated from the
most recent time at which the current trip odometer was reset.
Fuel and electrical current consumption are
shown in separate graphs. The electrical current
graph shows "net" consumption, i.e., consumed
current minus regenerated current generated by
braking.
Trip statistic settings
Select Preferences to:

•
•
•

1
2

change the graph's scale
Reset data after each trip (this occurs if the
vehicle remains parked for more than 4
hours)
Reset data for the current trip

The illustration is generic; the layout may vary depending
on the model or due to software updates

Changing the unit of measure
Change the units of measure for driven distance
and fuel consumption in the center display's Top
view.

Button 1

Tap Settings in Top view.

Button 2

Tap System

Button 3

Under Units, select: Metric, Imperial or US.

Units.

Related information

•
•

Trip computer (p. 96)
Displaying trip computer information (p. 97)

Indicator light
The HomeLink®2 Wireless Control System provides a convenient way to replace up to three
hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters used
to activate devices such as gate operators,
garage door openers, entry door locks, security

}}

This can also be displayed in kilometers.
HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||

systems, even home lighting. Additional information can be found on the Internet at,
www.homelink.com/www.youtube.com/
HomeLinkGentex or by phoning the hotline at 1–
800–355–3515.

WARNING

•

If you use HomeLink® to open a garage
door or gate, be sure no one is near the
gate or door while it is in motion.

•

When programming a garage door
opener, it is advised to park outside of the
garage.

•

Do not use HomeLink® with any garage
door opener that lacks safety stop and
reverse features as required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any
garage door opener model manufactured
before April 1, 1982). A garage door that
cannot detect an object - signaling the
door to stop and reverse - does not meet
current U.S. federal safety standards. For
more information, contact HomeLink at:
www.homelink.com.

Retain the original transmitter of the RF device
you are programming for use in other vehicles as
well as for future HomeLink programming. It is
also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased
for security purposes. See the article "Programming HomeLink."

100

Related information

•

Programming the HomeLink® Wireless Control System* (p. 100)

Programming the HomeLink®
Wireless Control System*
NOTE
Some vehicles may require the ignition to be
switched on or be in the “accessories” position for programming and/or operation of
HomeLink. It is also recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter
of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal. The
HomeLink buttons must be reset first. When
this has been completed, Homelink is in
learning mode so that you can perform programming.
To program HomeLink®
1.

Press the HomeLink® button to be programmed. The HomeLink® indicator will
begin flashing yellow once a second. You do
not need to continue holding the button.

Point the hand-held transmitter toward the
HomeLink® button to be programmed and
hold it approx. 6–12 inches (15–30 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button. Do not
obstruct the HomeLink® indicator light.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
3.

Press and hold the button on the original
remote control that is to be programmed on
HomeLink® and observe the HomeLink®
indicator light. Hold the button until the indicator light has changed from flashing yellow
once a second to either flashing green 10
times a second or by glowing steadily green.
When the HomeLink® indicator light flashes
or glows steadily green, the button on the
original remote control can be released.
Note: for certain remote controls, the
instructions listed under "Gate operators/
Canadian programming" at the end of this
article should be used instead of step 3.

Press the programmed HomeLink® button
and check the indicator light.
Indicator light glows steadily green: programming has been completed. The garage
door, gate, etc., should now be activated
when the programmed button is pressed.
Indicator light flashes 10 times a second:
press the HomeLink® button that is being
programmed. Hold it for 2 seconds and
release it. Repeat the “press/hold/release”
sequence a second time, and, depending on
the brand of the garage door opener, repeat
this sequence a third time to complete the
programming process. Programming should
now be completed and the garage door,
gate, etc., should now be activated when the
programmed button is pressed.
If the garage door, etc. still does not
react: continue with steps 6-8 to complete
programming.

Locate the "training" button on the garage
door opener, etc. The designation and color
of the button may vary, depending on the
manufacturer. It is usually located near the
antenna attachment on the device.

Press the device's "training" button. When
this has been done, step 8 must be completed within 30 seconds.

Press and hold the HomeLink® button being
programmed for 2 seconds and release it.
Repeat the “press/hold/release” sequence a
second time, and, depending on the brand of
the garage door opener, repeat this
sequence a third time to complete the programming process. Programming should now
be completed and the garage door, gate, etc.,
should now be activated when the programmed button is pressed.

}}
101

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||

Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission – which may not be long
enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to “timeout” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties
programming a gate operator or garage door
opener by using the “Programming” procedures,
replace “Programming HomeLink” step 3
with the following:

•

Continue to press and hold the HomeLink
button while you press and release - every
two seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the HomeLink indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking
light. Now you may release both the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons.

Proceed with “Programming” step 4 to complete.

Using

HomeLink®

When programming has been completed,
HomeLink® can be used instead of the original
remote controls.
To operate, press and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button until the trained device begins
to operate3 (this may take several seconds). The

102

indicator light will glow steadily or flash when the
button has been pressed. Activation will now
occur for the trained device (i.e., garage door
opener, gate operator, security system, entry door
lock, home/office lighting, etc.).

NOTE
If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink will
function for 30 minutes after the driver's door
has been opened.
For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the
device may also be used at any time.
In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions, contact HomeLink at:
www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/
HomeLinkGentex or by phoning the hotline at 1–
800–355–3515.

Resetting HomeLink® buttons
Use the following procedure to reset (erase programming) from the three HomeLink® buttons
(individual buttons cannot be reset but can be
“reprogrammed” as outlined in the following section):
1.

Press and hold HomeLink® buttons 1 and 3
for approx. 10 seconds until the indicator
light begins to flash green.

Do not hold the button for more than 20 seconds as this will clear the programming of the button.

Release both buttons.
> HomeLink® is now in the training (or
learning) mode and can be programmed
at any time beginning with “To program
HomeLink®" above.

Reprogramming a single HomeLink®
button
To reprogram an individual HomeLink® button:
1.

Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. DO NOT release the button.

The yellow indicator light will begin to flash
after 20 seconds. Without releasing the
HomeLink button, proceed with “To program
HomeLink®" step 1 above.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink
at: www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/
HomeLinkGentex or by phoning the hotline at 1–
800–355–3515.

FCC (USA) and IC (Canada)
This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and
Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This
device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause
undesired operation. WARNING: The transmitter
has been tested and complies with FCC and IC

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
rules. Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party are prohibited.

NOTE

Instruments and controls

Display/function/control

This overview shows the location of the primary
displays, and controls/buttons/switches.

Right-side steering wheel keypad
Steering wheel adjustment

The transmitter has been tested and complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the device.4

Horn
Left-side steering wheel keypad
Hood open

Related information

•

Display lighting, tailgate unlock, tailgate
open*

HomeLink® Wireless Control System* (p. 99)

Display/function/control
Parking lights, daytime running lights, low
beams, high beams, turn signals, rear fog
lights, trip computer reset
Transmission manual shifting paddle*
Head-up-display*
Instrument panel
Wipers/washers, rain sensor*

The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 103

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||

Display/function/control

Front reading lights and courtesy lighting

Start knob

Power windows, power door mirrors

Laminated panoramic roof*

Drive modes

Controls for power front seat*

Ceiling console display

Parking brake

Manual rearview mirror auto-dim (certain
markets only)

Auto-hold brakes

Display/function/control
Center display
Hazard warning flashers, max. defroster/
heated windshield*, media player, glove
compartment open
Gear selector

104

Display/function/control
Memory control for:

•
•
•

power seats*
door mirrors
head-up display*

Door open, door/tailgate lock/unlock

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Adjusting the power door mirrors

Storing the position*

The control on the driver's door is used to adjust
the position of the door mirrors.

The mirror positions are stored in the key memory* when the vehicle has been locked with the
remote key. When the vehicle is unlocked with
the same remote key, the mirrors and the driver's
seat adopt the stored positions when the driver's
door is opened. The mirrors' position can also be
stored in the power seat's* memory.

Automatically tilting the door mirrors
when parking5
This function can be activated/deactivated in the
center display.
1.

Tap Settings in Top view.

Tap My Car

Under Tilt Mirror In Reverse, select Off,
Driver, Passenger or Both to activate/
deactivate and select which mirror to tilt.

Tilting the door mirrors when parking5
The door mirrors can be tilted down to help give
the driver a better view along the sides of the
vehicle, for example when parallel parking.
–
Door mirror controls

Adjusting
1.

Press the L button for the left door mirror or
the R button for the right door mirror. The
light in the button comes on.

Adjust the position with the joystick in the
center.

Press the L or R button again. The light
should no longer be on.

WARNING
Objects seen in the mirrors may appear further away than they actually are.
5 Only

on models equipped with a power driver's seat.

To activate this function, select reverse gear
and press the L or R mirror control button to
tilt the mirror down.

The door mirror will reset to its normal position:

•

after 10 seconds when reverse is disengaged

•

immediately if you press the corresponding L
or R button again.

NOTE
Only one mirror can be tilted down at a time.

Mirrors.

Folding mirrors*
When parking in a limited space, the mirrors can
be folded in:
1.

Press the L and R buttons at the same time
(the ignition must be in at least mode I).

Release the buttons after approx. 1 second.
The mirrors will stop automatically when they
are completely folded in.

Fold out the mirrors by pressing the L and R at
the same time. The mirrors will stop automatically
when they return to their original positions.

Automatic folding when the vehicle is
locked5
The mirrors can be folded in/out automatically
when the vehicle is locked/unlocked.
This function can be activated/deactivated in the
center display.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 105

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||

Tap Settings in Top view.

Tap My Car

Mirrors.

The level of sensitivity is set from the center display:
1.

Tap Settings in Top view.

Tap My Car

Resetting the mirrors' position

A mirror that has been moved manually (e.g.,
bumped into in a parking lot, etc.) has to be
returned to its normal position electrically before
automatic folding will function correctly.

Under Auto Dim Mirrors, select Normal,
Dark or Light.

Related information

Select Fold Mirrors When Locking to activate/deactivate.

Fold in the mirrors with the L and R buttons.

Fold out the mirrors with the L and R buttons.

Mirrors.

•

Using the power seat memory function*
(p. 164)

•

Rearview mirror (p. 110)

Laminated panoramic roof*
The laminated panoramic roof is divided into two
sections and only the front section can be
opened; it can be slid horizontally to the open or
closed positions or its rear edge can be raised
and lowered to allow ventilation.
The laminated panoramic roof also has a sun
shade made of perforated fabric that is located
below the sections of glass. This shade can be
opened or closed, for example when driving in
bright sunlight.

The mirrors have now been reset to their original
positions.

Auto-dim*
Settings can be made for the auto-dim function
in the rearview and door mirrors.
The auto-dim function is always active while the
vehicle is being driven except when the reverse
gear has been selected. The level of sensitivity
for this function can be set to three levels, which
affect the rearview mirror and door mirrors.

NOTE
When the level of sensitivity is changed, this
change will not be noticeable immediately but
will take effect after a short period of time.

106

The laminated panoramic roof and the sun shade
are operated using the controls in the ceiling
console, near the rear-view mirror. The controls
are activated when the vehicle's ignition is in
mode I or II.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

CAUTION

•

Remove ice and snow before opening the
laminated panoramic roof.

•

Do not operate the laminated panoramic
roof if it is frozen closed.

•

Never place heavy objects on the laminated panoramic roof.

Operating the laminated panoramic
roof*
When opened automatically, the sun shade and
roof open completely.
In the ventilation position, the rear edge of the
front section of the roof is raised.

Operation

Wind blocker

WARNING

•

The laminated panoramic roof is equipped with a
wind blocker that folds up when the roof is open.

Related information

•

Operating the laminated panoramic roof*
(p. 107)

During manual closing, if the laminated
panoramic roof is obstructed, immediately
open it again.

•

Never open or close the laminated panoramic roof if it is obstructed in any way.

•

Never allow a child to operate the laminated panoramic roof.

•
•

Never leave a child alone in a vehicle.

•

Manual open (arrow points toward the rear of
the vehicle)
Auto open
Manual close
Auto close

When leaving the vehicle, ensure that the
ignition is in mode 0. Never leave a
remote key in the vehicle.

The laminated panoramic roof and sun shade can
be operated when the ignition is in mode I or II.

Never extend any object or body part
though the open laminated panoramic
roof, even if the vehicle's ignition is completely switched off.

To open the sun shade completely, pull the
control as far back as possible (to the auto
open position) and release it.

To fully open the laminated panoramic roof,
pull the control as far back as possible a
second time (to the auto open position) and
release it.

Automatic operation

}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 107

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||

Perform this procedure in reverse order to close
the laminated panoramic roof and/or sun shade.
Quick open/close
The laminated panoramic roof and the sun shade
can be opened/closed at the same time:

•
•

Open: pull the control back (to the auto
open position) twice in quick succession and
release it.
Close: push the control forward (to the auto
close position) twice in quick succession and
release it.

Perform this procedure in reverse order to close
the laminated panoramic roof and/or sun shade.

NOTE
For manual opening, the sun shade must first
be fully open before it will be possible to open
the laminated panoramic roof. When closing,
the laminated panoramic roof must be fully
closed before the sun shade can be closed.

Tilt (ventilation) position

Manual operation
1.

108

Automatically closing the sun shade6
When the vehicle is parked in sunny/warm
weather, the sun shade can be closed automatically 15 minutes after the vehicle has been
locked to help keep the temperature in the passenger compartment down and to protect the
upholstery from the sun.

Opening the sun shade: Pull the control
back to the first stop (the manual open position) and hold it until the sun shade has
opened to the position of your choice.

This function is deactivated by default and can be
activated/deactivated:
1.

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

Opening the rear edge of the laminated
panoramic roof: Pull the control back to the
first stop (the manual open position) a second time to open the rear edge of the laminated panoramic roof.

Tap My Car

Opening the front glass section: Pull the
control back to the first stop (the manual
open position) a third time and hold it until
the laminated panoramic roof has opened to
the position of your choice.

available in all markets

Locking.

Select Auto Close Sun Curtain to activate/deactivate.

Auto-stop
Tilt position, raised at the rear edge

Open (raise the rear edge of the front glass
section) by pressing the rear edge of the
control upward.
Close by pulling the rear edge of the control
downward/forward and holding it until the

6 Not

laminated panoramic roof has closed completely.
If the sun shade is completely closed, it will open
approximately 2 inches (5 cm) when the laminated panoramic roof is opened to the tilt position.

The laminated panoramic roof has an auto-stop
feature that is triggered if the glass section of the
roof or the sun shade is blocked in any way when
being closed. In this case, the laminated panoramic roof or sun shade will stop and reverse
automatically approximately 2 in. (5 cm) from the

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
point at which it was blocked (or will open fully to
the tilt position).
The auto-stop feature also functions when the
laminated panoramic roof or sun shade is being
opened.

Power windows
All power windows can be operated using the
control panel in the driver's door. The control
panels in the other doors only operate the window in the respective doors.

The auto-stop feature can be overridden if the
closing procedure has been interrupted (e.g., due
to ice around the laminated panoramic roof) by
pressing and holding the control forward/down
until the roof is closed.

Operating the power windows
WARNING

•

Always put the ignition in mode 0 and
remove the ignition key from the vehicle
when the vehicle is unattended

•

Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.

•

Make sure that the windows are completely unobstructed before they are
operated.

Operating

Driver's door control panel

Switch for power child safety locks* and disengaging rear power window buttons
Rear window controls
Front window controls

Related information

•
•

Operating the power windows (p. 109)
Child safety locks (p. 228)

Operating the power windows

Manual up/down
Auto up/down.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 109

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||

For the power windows to function, the ignition
must be in at least mode I. When the vehicle has
been running, the power windows can be operated for several minutes after the ignition has
been switched off, or until a door has been
opened.

•

Rearview mirror

If the battery has been disconnected, the auto
open function must be reset so that it will work
properly

The interior rearview mirror has an auto-dim
function that helps reduce glare from following
vehicle's headlights.

Gently raise the front section of the button to
close the window and hold it for one second.

NOTE

Release the button briefly.

Movement of the windows will stop if they
are obstructed in any way. If this happens
twice in succession, the automatic function will not work for several minutes and
the window can be closed by holding the
button up.

Raise the front section of the button again
for one second.

To reduce buffeting wind noise if the rear
windows are opened, also open the front
windows slightly.

Manual up/down
– Move one of the controls up/down slightly.
> The power windows move up/down as
long as the control is held in position.
Auto up/down
– Move one of the controls up/down as far as
possible and release it.
> The window will open or close completely.

110

Resetting

Related information

•

Child safety locks (p. 228)

Auto-dim function
The auto-dim function is controlled by two sensors: one pointing forward (located on the forward-facing side of the mirror, which monitors the
amount of ambient light) and one pointing rearward (located on the side of the mirror facing the
driver at the upper edge, which senses the
strength of following vehicles' headlights), and
work together to help eliminate glare.

NOTE
Obstructing the forward sensor with e.g.,
parking stickers, transponders, etc., or the rear
sensor by loading the cargo area or the rear
seat in such a way that light is prevented from
reaching the sensor will reduce the auto-dim
function in the interior rearview mirror and
optional auto-dim function in the door mirrors.
The auto-dim function is always active while the
vehicle is being driven except when the reverse
gear has been selected. The level of sensitivity
for this function can be set to three levels, which
affect the rearview mirror and door mirrors.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

NOTE
When the level of sensitivity is changed, this
change will not be noticeable immediately but
will take effect after a short period of time.

Using sun shades

Settings view

Both rear doors have integrated sun shades.

The center display's Settings view is used to
make many of the vehicle's function settings and
to display vehicle-related information.

Rear doors

Opening Settings view
The level of sensitivity is set from the center display:
1.

Tap Settings in Top view.

Tap My Car

Under Auto Dim Mirrors, select Normal,
Dark or Light.

Mirrors.

Related information

•

Adjusting the power door mirrors (p. 105)
Hook and locking mechanism
1.

Pull up the sun shade and hook it to the
upper section of the door frame.

Lock the sun shade by moving the locking
mechanism upward.

The window can be opened/closed when the sun
shade is being used.

Top view with the Settings button

Pull down the tab on the upper edge of the
center display to open Top view.

Tap Settings.

Tap one of the categories displayed and navigate to sub-categories and settings by tapping again.

Tap Back to go back in Settings view.
Tap Close to close Settings view.

}}
111

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||

Changing a setting

A sub-category in Settings view with various possible
settings

Tap the category/sub-category to navigate to
the desired setting.

Change the setting(s).
> The changes are saved immediately.

Types of settings
Type of
setting

Description

Trigger
function

Starts an app or a separate view
for more advanced settings. Tap
the text to e.g., connect a
Bluetooth device.

Radio
button

112

Select one of the possible settings by tapping the desired radio
button to e.g., change the system
language.

Type of
setting

Description

Multiselection
button

Select a level for a particular setting by pressing the desired part
of the button e.g., to set the
desired level for City Safety.

Check
box

Tap to activate/deactivate a function e.g., to select automatic start
for steering wheel heating.

Slider

Select a level for a function by
pressing and dragging the slider
control e.g., to set a volume level.

Information display

This is not an actual setting but
displays information such as the
vehicle's VIN number.

Related information

Categories in Settings view
Settings view consists of a number of main categories and sub-categories that contain settings
and information for many of the vehicle's features and functions.
The main categories in Settings view are: My
Car, Sound, Navigation, Media,
Communication, Climate and System.
Each main category, in turn, contains several subcategories with possible settings. The table
shows the first level of sub-categories. The possible settings for a function or area are described
in greater detail in their respective articles in the
owner's manual. For system settings not described in the respective articles, see "Changing system settings in Settings view."

My Car

•
•

Center display overview (p. 32)

Sub-categories

Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 42)

Displays

•
•

Using the center display (p. 49)

•

Categories in Settings view (p. 112)

Changing system settings in Settings view
(p. 114)

IntelliSafe
Park Assist
Drive Mode/Individual Drive Mode*
Lights
Mirrors
Locking and Unlocking Feedback

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Sub-categories

Media
Sub-categories

Electric Parking Brake

AM/FM

Seats
Wipers
Suspension
Exterior SoundA
A

XC90 T8 Plug-in Hybrid, certain markets only.

Sound
Sub-categories

Sound Experience*
Tone
Balance
System Volumes

Navigation
Sub-categories

Map
Route
Traffic
Guidance

System

RadioA

Sub-categories

Date & Time

SiriusXM

Language

Gracenote®

Keyboard Layouts

Video

Voice Control

AM radio is not available in hybrid models.

Units

Communication

Storage

Sub-categories

Software Updates

Phone

Factory reset

Text Messages

Services

Bluetooth
Wi-Fi
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot

Related information

•
•

Settings view (p. 111)
Changing system settings in Settings view
(p. 114)

Vehicle Modem Internet
Volvo On Call
Volvo Service Networks

Climate
The main category Climate has no sub-categories.

System

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 113

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Changing system settings in
Settings view

Settings view's main category System contains
general settings and information, such as language, units of measure, etc.

Changing system languages
Pull down the center display's Top view and
tap Settings.

Tap System

Select a new system language. Languages
that can be used for voice commands are
indicated by a voice control symbol.
> This change affects the language used in
the instrument panel, center display and
the head-up display*.

• Metric: kilometers, liters and degrees Cel-

Pull down the center display's Top view and
tap Settings.

• Imperial: miles, gallons and degrees Cel-

Tap System Vehicle Identification
Number.
> The vehicle's VIN will be displayed.

sius.

• US: miles, gallons and degrees Fahren-

heit.
> This change affects the units of measure
used in the instrument panel, center display and the head-up display*

Changing tire inflation pressure units
1. Pull down the center display's Top view and
tap Settings.
2.

Tap System

Select a unit of measure for tire pressure.
> This changes the tire inflation pressure
units used in the Car status app in the
center display.

Units

Tire Pressure.

Viewing storage information

Changing units of measure

Changing length and volume units
1. Pull down the center display's Top view and
tap Settings.

Pull down the center display's Top view and
tap Settings.

Tap System Storage.
> Storage information for the vehicle's hard
drive will be displayed, including total
capacity, available capacity and the
amount of storage space used by the
apps that have been installed.

114

Language.

Viewing the VIN (Vehicle Identification
Number)

sius.

The system settings under Driver Profile, Date
& Time, Keyboard Layouts, Voice Control,
Software Updates, Factory reset and
Services are described in their respective articles in the owner's manual.
1.

Select one of the following measurement
standards:

Tap System

Units

Units.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Changing settings in apps
App view, which is one of the center display's
basic views, contains all of the apps installed in
the vehicle. From Home view, navigate to App
view by swiping the screen from right to left.

Related information

•
•
•

Settings view (p. 111)
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 42)
Categories in Settings view (p. 112)

Resetting the settings view
All of the changes made under Settings view
can be reset to their default values at the same
time.

Resetting

Apps for integrated (basic) functions

Certain apps in your vehicle are factory-installed,
such as FM, USB and CD and are part of Sensus. Settings in these apps can be changed in
the center display's Top view.

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

Tap System

Tap OK to confirm your choice.

Changing settings for a basic app
1. Tap one of the basic apps, for example FM
radio.
2.

Pull down Top view.

Tap FM Radio Settings.

Change the desired settings and confirm.

Press the Home button below the center display or tap the screen outside of Top view or
pull up Top view to return to your original
view. See also the article "Categories in Settings view."

Factory reset.

Related information

•
•

Settings view (p. 111)
Resetting user data when the vehicle
changes owners (p. 116)

Third party apps
Third party apps have to be downloaded e.g.,
Volvo ID. Settings for these apps are made in
the apps themselves, not in Top view.

115

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Resetting user data when the
vehicle changes owners
When the vehicle changes owners, all user settings should be reset to the factory defaults.

Ambient temperature sensor

Settings

The ambient temperature sensor displays the
temperature outside the vehicle in the instrument
panel.

Changing measurement standard in the center
display:

When the vehicle changes owners, it is essential
to reset all user data and system settings to their
factory defaults, including Volvo On Call.

Pull down the center display's Top view and
tap Settings.

Tap System

Select measurement standard, Metric,
Imperial or US.

Related information

•
•

Resetting the settings view (p. 115)

Related information

Volvo ID (p. 31)

•
•

Location of the ambient temperature sensor in 12"
(upper) and 8" (lower) instrument panels (temperature
shown here in degrees Celsius)

NOTE
When the ambient temperature is between
23° and 36 °F (–5° and +2 °C), a snowflake
symbol will be displayed next to the temperature. This symbol serves as a warning for possible slippery road surfaces. Please note that
this symbol does not indicate a fault with your
vehicle.
At low speeds or when the vehicle is not moving, the temperature readings may be slightly
higher than the actual ambient temperature.

116

Units.

Instrument panel (p. 127)
Climate system sensors (p. 179)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Clock
The clock is displayed in the instrument panel
and in the center display.

Automatic time
The function Automatic Time is also available,
which adjusts the time zone automatically,
depending on the vehicle's location. If Automatic
Time has not been selected, set the date and
time manually by tapping the up or down arrows
on the center display.

Head-up display (HUD)*
The head-up display provides information such
as speed, cruise control functions, navigation,
traffic sign information, incoming phone calls,
etc. at the base of the windshield in the driver's
field of vision.

Daylight savings time
In certain countries, an automatic change to daylight savings time can be selected by activating
Auto. If the automatic change is not available,
change to daylight savings time by selecting On
or Off.

Related information

Location of the clock in the instrument panel in 12"
(upper) and 8" (lower) instrument panels

Certain messages and other information in the
instrument panel may temporarily obscure the
clock.
In the center display, the clock is located at the
upper right of the status bar.

Settings for date and time
Select Settings System Date & Time in
the center display's Top view to change the format for displaying date or time.
Set the date and time by tapping the up or down
arrows on the center display.

•
•
•

Instrument panel (p. 127)
Center display overview (p. 32)
Using the center display (p. 49)
Incoming phone call

The HUD supplements the instrument panel and
projects information on the lower section of the
windshield. The projected information can only be
seen from the driver's seat.

CAUTION
The HUD's projection unit is located in the
dashboard. Avoid scratching or placing
objects on the unit's glass surface.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 117

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||

NOTE
If the City Safety is activated, the information
in the HUD will be replaced by a City Safetyrelated graphic. This graphic will illuminate
even if the HUD is turned off.

NOTE
The driver's ability to see information in the
HUD may be impeded by:

•
•
•
•
•

Example of information in the head-up display. The information shown is generic and may vary slightly from market to market or in terms of units of measure

•

Speed
Cruise control
Navigation
Road signs
Symbols such as the following ones may appear
temporarily in the HUD.
If the warning symbol appears, read the
warning text in the instrument panel.

If the information symbol appears, read
the warning text in the instrument
panel.

118

A graphic for the City Safety flashes to attract the driver's attention

the use of polarizing sunglasses
not sitting in the center of the driver's
seat
objects on the HUD projector glass on
the dashboard
certain ambient lighting conditions
certain types of vision problems, which
may also result in headaches or eye
strain.
Activating/deactivating and settings for
HUD are only possible when an image is
projected on the windshield. The engine
must be running.

Activating/deactivating HUD
HUD can be activated in two ways in the center
display:
Via Function view
Tap the Head-up display button.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Via settings
1. Tap Settings in Top view.

Tap My Car

Select/deselect Head-Up Display.

Displays.

Use the right-side steering wheel keypad to
adjust the HUD's brightness and height position on the windshield in the driver's field of
vision.

Tap Settings in Top view.

Tap My Car Displays
Display Options.

If the windshield has to be replaced, contact a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician or
authorized workshop. The correct type of replacement windshield must be used for a head-up display.

Head-Up

Tap Go to the center display's Settings view
and select Driver Display & Head-up
Display.
3.

Select : Show Navigation In Head-Up
Display, Road Sign Information In HeadUp Display, Show Driver Support In
Head-Up Display or Show Phone In
Head-Up Display.

Adjusting HUD brightness and height
position

Calibrating the horizontal position
Reduce brightness
Increase brightness
Higher position

Tap Head-up display adjustments in the
center display's Function view.

If the windshield has been replaced, it may be
necessary to calibrate the HUD's horizontal position. This means that the projected image will
have to be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise.
To do so:
1.

Pull down the center display's Top view and
tap Settings.

Select My Car Displays
Display Calibration.

Use the buttons on the right-side steering
wheel keypad to calibrate the horizontal position.

Lower position
Confirm

Replacing the windshield
Vehicles with a head-up display have a special
type of windshield meeting the requirements for
displaying projected information.

Selecting display alternatives
1.

Power front seat* memory function
The position of the HUD can be stored in the
power seat's memory function.

Adapting brightness
The brightness of the graphics displayed in the
HUD are also automatically adjusted according to
ambient lighting conditions. HUD brightness is
also affected by adjustments to the brightness of
the other displays in the vehicle.

Head-Up

}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 119

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||

Voice control
Voice commands make it possible for the driver
to voice-control certain functions in the media
player, a Bluetooth-connected cell phone, climate system and the Volvo navigation system*.
Voice control offers convenience and enables the
driver to keep his/her hands on the steering
wheel and concentrate on driving and the traffic
situation around the vehicle.

WARNING
Rotate counterclockwise
Rotate clockwise

As the driver, you have full responsibility for
operating the vehicle safely and adhering to
all applicable traffic regulations.

Confirm

The voice control system uses the same microphone as the Bluetooth hands-free system and
system responses come via the infotainment system's speakers.
In certain cases, text messages are also provided
in the instrument panel.
The functions are controlled using the right-side
steering wheel keypad and settings are made
from the center console.
System updates
The voice control system is being constantly
improved and updates should be downloaded for
optimal functionality. See the support site
support.volvocars.com.

Related information

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Cleaning
Wipe the glass covering the HUD projection unit
carefully with a clean and dry (or very slightly
damp if necessary) microfiber cloth.
Never use strong stain removers. For difficult
cleaning conditions, a special cleaning agent can
be purchased at a Volvo retailer.

Using voice commands (p. 121)
Voice control settings (p. 125)
Voice control for radio and media (p. 122)
Voice control for cell phones (p. 122)
System updates (p. 474)
Navigation system voice commands (p. 124)
Climate system voice commands (p. 123)

Related information

•
•

120

Center display overview (p. 32)
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 42)

Input to the system is in dialog form and comprises commands from the driver and a verbal
response from the system.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Using voice commands

Voice command examples

The following is an introduction for using voice
commands.

Press
, say "Call"-"[First-name]"-"[Lastname]"-"[number category]" to call a contact
in your phonebook if the person has more than
one phone number listed (i.e., home, mobile, work,
etc.).

Press the button on the rightside steering wheel keypad to
activate the system and initiate
a voice command dialog.

•

When giving a command, speak at your usual
speed and in a normal tone of voice after
the tone.

•

Avoid speaking while the system is responding. Commands cannot be processed during
a response.

•

Avoid background noises in the cabin when
using the system by closing the vehicle's
doors, windows and panoramic roof* when
giving voice commands.

Voice command dialogs can be cancelled by:

•
•

Saying "Cancel".
button on
By pressing and holding the
the right-side steering wheel keypad.

To speed up a command dialog or to skip system
responses, press the
button on the rightside steering wheel keypad when the system is
responding and give your next command.

•

For example, press
and say
"Call"-"Robin"-"Smith"-"mobile".

Commands/phrases
Keep the following points in mind when using
voice commands:

sequence of numbers, e.g., twenty-two
twenty-two (22 22) and "double" or "triple"
can also be used, e.g., double zero (00) or triple zero (000). Numbers in the range
0-2300 can be used.

The following commands can always be used:

•

Frequencies can be spoken ninety-eight
point eight (98.8), one hundred four point
two (104.2) or hundred four point two
(104.2).

Related information

•

Voice control (p. 120)

Repeat: the system will repeat the most
recent voice instruction.

• Cancel: cancel the dialog.
• Help: Initiates a help dialog. The system will
provide several alternative commands that
can be used in a given situation.

The commands for specific situations are described in the respective articles such as "Cell phone
commands", etc.
Numbers
Numbers can be spoken in different ways
depending on the context and function being
used:

•

Phone numbers and zip codes should be
spoken individually, number by number, e.g.,
five five five one two three four (5551234).

•

Addresses (house numbers) can be spoken individually or as a group, e.g., two two or
twenty-two (22). It is also possible to say a

121

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Voice control for cell phones

Voice control for radio and media

Voice commands can be used to control many
of the most common functions in a Bluetooth®connected cell phone.

The following voice commands can be used for
the radio or an external media player.

To specify a phone book contact, the voice command has to include the contact's information
that is in the phone book. For example, if a contact such as John Smith has several phone
numbers, a number category such as home or
mobile can be specified. To call, say: "Call John
Smith mobile".
To use the voice control system, press the
on the right-side steering wheel keypad and say
one of the following commands after the tone:

•

"Call [contact]": call a contact from your
phone book.

•

"Call [phone number]": call a phone number.

•

"Recent calls": displays the list of recent
calls.

•

"Read message": reads a message aloud.
If there are several messages, select the one
to be read.

Related information

•
•
•

122

Voice control (p. 120)
Using voice commands (p. 121)
Voice control settings (p. 125)

To use the voice control system, press the
on the right-side steering wheel keypad and say
one of the following commands after the tone:

•

"Media": initiates a dialog and displays possible commands.

•

"Play [artist]": plays music by the selected
artist.

•
•

"Play [song title]": plays the selected song.

•

"Play [radio station]": starts the selected
radio station.

•

"Tune to [frequency]": tunes to the
selected frequency on the current waveband.
If no waveband has been selected, FM is the
default.

•

"Tune to [frequency] [waveband]": tunes
to the selected station on the selected waveband.

•
•
•
•
•

"Radio": starts FM radio.

•
•

"iPod": starts playback from an iPod.

•

"Similar music": starts playback from a
USB flash drive with music similar to the type
currently playing.

"Bluetooth": starts playback from a Bluetooth-connected device.

Related information

•
•
•

Voice control (p. 120)
Using voice commands (p. 121)
Voice control settings (p. 125)

"Play [song title] from [album]": plays the
selected song from the selected album.

"Radio FM": starts FM radio.
"SiriusXM": starts SiriusXM radio*
"CD": starts playback from a CD.
"USB": starts playback from a USB flash
drive.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Climate system voice commands
Voice commands can be used to control the climate system to e.g., change the temperature,
activate seat heating* or change blower (fan)
speed.
To use the voice control system, press the
on the right-side steering wheel keypad and say
one of the following commands after the tone:

•

"Climate": starts a command dialog and
provides examples of commands that can be
used.

•

"Set temperature to X degrees": sets the
desired temperature.

•

"Raise temperature"/"Lower
temperature": raises/lowers the temperature.

•

"Sync temperature": synchronizes the temperature in all of the vehicle's climate zones
with the one set for the driver's side.

•

"Air on feet"/"Air on body": opens the
desired air vent.

•

"Air on feet off"/"Air on body off": closes
the desired air vent.

•

"Set fan to max"/"Turn off fan": changes
the blower speed to Max/Off.

•

"Raise fan speed"/"Lower fan speed":
raises/lowers the blower speed.

•

"Turn on auto": activates automatic climate
control.

•

"Air condition on"/"Air condition off":
activates/deactivates the air conditioning.

•

"Recirculation on"/"Recirculation off":
activates/deactivates recirculation.

•

"Turn on defroster "/"Turn off defroster":
activates/deactivates window and door mirror
defrosting.

•

"Turn on max defroster"/"Turn off max
defroster": activates/deactivates max
defroster.

•

"Turn on electric defroster"/"Turn off
electric defroster": activates/deactivates
the electrically heated windshield*.

•

"Turn on rear defroster"/"Turn off rear
defroster": activates/deactivates the electrically heated rear window and door mirrors.

•

"Turn steering wheel heat on"/"Turn
steering wheel heat off": activates/deactivates the electrically heated steering wheel*.

•

"Raise steering wheel heat"/"Lower
steering wheel heat": raises/lowers the
heating level for the electrically heated steering wheel*.

•

"Turn on seat heat"/"Turn off seat heat":
activates/deactivates the electrically heated
seats*.

•

"Raise seat heat"/"Lower seat heat": raises/lowers the heating level for the electrically heated seats*.

•

"Turn on seat ventilation"/"Turn off seat
ventilation": activates/deactivates seat ventilation*.

•

"Raise seat ventilation"/"Lower seat
ventilation": raises/lowers the level for seat
ventilation*.

Related information

•
•
•

Climate system controls (p. 188)
Voice control (p. 120)
Using voice commands (p. 121)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 123

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Navigation system voice commands

•

Many of the navigation system's functions can
be activated using voice commands.

"Go to [Zip code]: Enter a zip code as a
destination, e.g., "Go to 07405."

•

"Go to [Name]: Enter a name from a list of
contacts e.g., "Go to John Smith."

•

"Search [POI category]: Search for a POI
(e.g., a restaurant)7, which is always sorted
according to POIs "around the vehicle." To
search along the route, say "Along the
route" when the list of results is displayed.

The following list contains examples of commands that are unique to navigation system.

•

To use the voice control system, press the
on the right-side steering wheel keypad and say
one of the following commands after the tone:

"Change country/Change state: Changes
the country/state in which a search is conducted.

•

"Show favorites: Shows a list of Favorites
in the center display's Top view.

•

"Clear itinerary: Deletes all intermediate
destinations in an itinerary.

•

"Repeat voice guidance: Repeats the most
recent guidance instruction.

The procedure for using voice control is described in greater detail in the articles "Voice control," "Using voice control" and "Voice control
settings."

Voice commands

•
•

"Take me home: Guidance will be given to
the location set as Home.

•

"Go to [City]: Enter a city as a destination,
e.g., "Go to New York."

"Pause guidance: Pauses guidance on the
map.

•

"Go to [Address]: Enter an address as a
destination, e.g., Go to 125 43 St., New
York."

"Resume guidance: Resumes guidance on
the map.

•

"Turn off voice guidance: Turns voice navigation guidance off.

•

"Go to Intersection": Enter an intersection
as a destination. The search for the intersection will be done within the specified area.

•

"Turn on voice guidance: Turns voice navigation guidance on.

124

"Navigation: Starts a navigation voice command dialog and displays available commands.

You can opt to call the POI or set it as a destination.

Related information

•
•
•

Voice control (p. 120)
Using voice commands (p. 121)
Voice control settings (p. 125)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Voice control settings
There are a number of settings that can be made
for the voice control system.
Open the center display's Top view and tap
Settings System Voice Control and
select settings.

• Repeat Mode
• Gender
• Speech Rate

Indicator symbols in the instrument
panel
The indicator symbols alert the driver when certain functions are activated, that a system is
actively working or that a fault may have occurred in a system or function.
Symbol

Explanation

The information symbol illuminates
in combination with a text message if one of the vehicle's systems requires the driver's attention. The information symbol can
also illuminate in combination with
other symbols.

Changing languages
The voice control system only understands the
languages marked by the
symbol in the list
of possible system languages.
Changing the language for this system also
affects menus, messages and help texts.

Brake system
A

System

Related information

•
•
•

Explanation
ABS brake system
A

Information, see the text message in the instrument panel

Sound settings
Open Top view and tap Settings Sound
System Volumes Voice Control.

Open Top view and tap Settings
Language.

Symbol

Voice control (p. 120)
Using voice commands (p. 121)
Navigation system voice commands (p. 124)

This symbol indicates a possible
fault in the ABS braking function.
The vehicle's normal brakes will
still function but without ABS
brake modulation.
Parking brake/Auto-brake

This function keeps the vehicle at
a standstill after it has stopped.
The symbol is on when the function is activated and the brakes or
parking brake are being used.
Tire pressure system
The symbol illuminates to indicate
low tire pressure or a fault in the
tire pressure system.
Malfunction indicator light
(check engine light)
This symbol will illuminate if there
is a fault in the emissions control
system. If this happens, please
have your vehicle checked by a
trained and qualified Volvo service
technician as soon as possible.

}}
125

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||

Symbol

Explanation
Left/right turn signals
Both turn signal indicators will
flash when the hazard warning
flashers are being used.

Forward lights

Active Bending Lights (ABL)
This symbol will illuminate if there
is a fault in the ABL system.
Automatic/active high beams
on

Symbol

Explanation
Automatic/active high beams
on

Explanation
PreconditioningC

The symbol will be blue when the
automatic high beams are on. The
parking lights will also be on.

The symbol illuminates when the
engine/cabin heater/air conditioning are preconditioning the vehicle.

Automatic/active high beams
off

Stability system

The symbol will be white when the
automatic high beams are off. The
parking lights will be on.
High beams on
The high beams and parking lights
will be on.
Not in use

The symbol will be blue when the
automatic high beams are on.

126

Symbol

Automatic/active high beams
offThe symbol will be white when
the automatic high beams are off.

Rear fog lights

High beam indicator

Rain sensor

The symbol will illuminate when
the high beams are on or when
high beam flash is being used.

The symbol illuminates when the
rain sensor is on.

The symbol illuminates when the
rear fog lights are on.

This symbol flashes when the stability system is actively working to
stabilize the vehicle. If the symbol
glows steadily, there is a fault in
the system.
Stability system, sport mode
This symbol illuminates when
Sport mode is on. Sport mode
offers more active driving characteristics by monitoring movement
of the accelerator pedal, steering
wheel and cornering by allowing
more lateral movement of the rear
wheels before the stability system
is activated.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Symbol

Explanation
Lane keeping aid
White symbol: lane keeping aid on
and marker lines detected.

•
•

Instrument panel (p. 127)
Warning symbols in the instrument panel
(p. 137)

Instrument panel
The instrument panel displays vehicle- and driving-related information.

Gray symbol: lane keeping aid on
and no marker lines detected.

The gauges, indicators, symbols and functions
displayed in the instrument panel depend on the
equipment/systems installed in the vehicle and
which functions are currently activated.

Yellow symbol: lane keeping aid
active

The instrument panel is available in two versions:
12" and 8".

Lane keeping aid and rain sensor

Some of the functions listed below are optional.

White symbol: lane keeping aid on
and marker lines detected. Rain
sensor on.
Gray symbol: lane keeping aid on
and no marker lines detected.
Rain sensor on.
A
B
C

Related information

US models
Canadian models
XC90 T8 Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid only.

Door/hood/tailgate/fuel filler door
reminder

•

Door and seat belt reminders (p. 67)

WARNING

•

If the instrument panel is not functioning
properly, information about e.g., brakes,
airbags or other safety-related messages
cannot be displayed and the driver cannot
be alerted to possible problems.

•

If the instrument panel turns off, does not
activate when the ignition is switched on
or is completely/partially not possible to
read, do not drive the vehicle. Contact a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

If a door or the hood/tailgate/fuel filler door are
not closed properly, the information or warning
symbol will illuminate and a graphic will be displayed in instrument panel. Stop the vehicle in a
safe place as soon as possible and close the
door, etc.
}}
127

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||

12" instrument panel

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Door and seat belt status
Hybrid battery charge information
Media player
Navigation system map
Cell phone
Voice control

Right side
Tachometer (depending on current driving
mode)

Left side
• Speedometer

•
•
•
•

Trip odometer
Odometer
Cruise control/speed limiter information
Road sign information

Center
• Indicator and warning symbols

•
•
•

•
•

128

Ambient temperature sensor
Clock
Messages (and in certain cases also graphics)
Distance to empty tank
Distance to discharged hybrid battery (eDTE:
electrical Distance to Empty)

Press the brake pedal

•

Open one of the doors

Compass

•

•
•
•
•

•
•

Fuel gauge
Battery gauge
Gear indicator
Current driving mode (Hybrid, Off Road, Save,
Pure, Power and AWD)

•

ECO gauge (depending on current driving
mode)

•
•
•

Current fuel consumption
Hybrid battery's charge level
App menu (activated using the right-side
steering wheel keypad)

Activating the instrument panel
The instrument panel is activated as soon as a
door is opened (i.e., ignition mode 0). After a
short period, the panel will go out if it is not used.
To reactivate it, do one of the following:

Turn the start knob to START and release it
(without pressing the brake pedal). This activates ignition mode I

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Instrument panel settings
Some of the settings for the instrument panel
can be made in the App menu (see also the article "Instrument panel app menu").

•

Indicator symbols in the instrument panel
(p. 125)

Instrument panel App menu
The App (application) menu in the instrument
panel provides quick access to commonly used
functions in certain apps.

The following settings can be made in the center
display's Top view under: Settings My Car
Displays:

• Driver Display Center Area: Select what is

displayed in the background (center) of the
instrument panel. The options are: (Show no
information in the background, Show
information for current playing media or
Show navigation even if no route is
set)8. In the 12" instrument panel, the information is shown in the center and in the 8"
instrument panel, it is shown in the field at
the upper right.

• Themes. Select a theme (appearance). The
options are: (Glass, Minimalistic,
Performance or Chrome Rings).

In some cases, the App menu can be used instead of
the center display

The App menu is displayed in the instrument
panel and is controlled using the right-side steering wheel keypad. This menu makes it possible to
toggle between apps or functions in apps without
removing your hands from the steering wheel.

The system language can be changed under
Settings System Choose system
language. This change affects the language
used in all displays.

App menu functions

Related information

The following apps and their functions can be
controlled from the App menu:

•
•

Instrument panel App menu (p. 129)
Warning symbols in the instrument panel
(p. 137)

The 8" instrument panel only shows guidance instructions. The 12" instrument panel only shows the map. See the navigation manual for additional information.

}}
129

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||

Hybrid-related information in the
instrument panel

App

Functions

Trip computer

Select a trip odometer, make
instrument panel display settings, etc.

Media
player

Select the active source for the
media player.

Phone

Call a contact from the call list.

The vehicle also stores driving statistics that can
be viewed in the form of a bar graph.

Navigation

Pause guidance, start guidance
to a recently set destination, etc.

Hybrid-unique symbols

Related information

•
•
•

Instrument panel (p. 127)
Center display overview (p. 32)
Using the instrument panel App menu
(p. 156)

Different types of information will be displayed in
the instrument panel, depending on the drive
mode selected. These drive modes offer unique
ways of helping the driver achieve the best possible driving economy.

The various gauges and indicators in the instrument panel show the relationship between the
electric motor's current power consumption and
the remaining power available.
Indicates the currently available output
from the electric motor. A solid symbol
indicates that the electric motor is
being used.
Indicates the currently available output
from the electric motor. A hollow symbol means that the electric motor is
not being used.
Indicates the output level when the
gasoline engine starts. A solid symbol
indicates that the gasoline engine is
being used.

130

Indicates the output level when the
gasoline engine will start. A hollow
symbol indicates that the gasoline
engine is not being used.
Indicates that the hybrid battery is
being charged.

Indicates the current charge level in
the electric motor's battery. This indicator is located by the hybrid battery
gauge in the lower right corner.
eDTE (Electrical Distance To Empty)
indicator (distance until the hybrid battery is discharged).

The hybrid gauge
Available electric motor output
This hybrid battery indicator is located between
the hybrid gauge and the fuel gauge on the lower
right side of the instrument panel. It indicates the
current (charge level) remaining in the hybrid battery, which can be used to power the electric
motor or to heat/cool the vehicle.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

The Save drive mode

Power utilized by the driver
The indicator shows the amount of power utilized
(requested) by the driver through pressure on the
accelerator pedal. The higher the reading on the
scale, the greater the amount of power utilized in
the current gear. The mark between the "lightning" and "drop" symbols is the point at which
the electric motor switches off and the gasoline
engine starts.
Examples

The electric motor alone cannot provide the
power requested and the gasoline engine will
start.

The vehicle has started but is stationary and no
power is being utilized.

The Save drive mode is activated. The battery's
charge level is locked at the level it was at when
this drive mode was activated, which is shown by
symbol near the battery indicator. The
the
control system maintains this charge level by
using the gasoline engine intermittently (in the
same way as in the Hybrid drive mode). If the
hybrid battery's charge level was below 33%
when Save was activated, the gasoline engine will
be used to charge the hybrid battery up to this
level.

Related information

The vehicle is generating current to recharge the
battery, e.g., during moderate braking or during
engine braking on a downslope.

•
•
•
•

Drive modes (p. 390)
Displaying trip computer information (p. 97)
Displaying trip statistics (p. 98)
Instrument panel (p. 127)

131

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Instrument panel licenses
BSD 4-clause "Original" or "Old"
License
Copyright ©) 1982, 1986, 1990, 1991, 1993
The Regents of the University of California. All
rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1.

Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.

Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.

All advertising materials mentioning features
or use of this software must display the
following acknowledgment: This product
includes software developed by the
University of California, Berkeley and its
contributors.

Neither the name of the University nor the
names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written
permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

132

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.

BSD 3-clause "New" or "Revised"
License
Copyright (c) 2011-2014, Yann Collet.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1.

Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.

Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in

the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3.

Neither the name of the organisation nor the
names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derive from this
software without specific prior written
permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER
OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.

BSD 2-clause “Simplified” license

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1.

Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER
OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The views and conclusions contained in the
software and documentation are those of the
authors and should not be interpreted as
representing official policies, either expressed or
implied, of the FreeBSD Project.

FreeType Project License
1.

1 Copyright 1996-1999 by David Turner,
Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg
Introduction The FreeType Project is
distributed in several archive packages; some
of them may contain, in addition to the
FreeType font engine, various tools and
contributions which rely on, or relate to, the
FreeType Project. This license applies to all
files found in such packages, and which do
not fall under their own explicit license. The
license affects thus the FreeType font
engine, the test programs, documentation
and makefiles, at the very least. This license
was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG
(Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which
all encourage inclusion and use of free
software in commercial and freeware
products alike. As a consequence, its main
points are that: o We don't promise that this
software works. However, we are be
interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as is'
distribution) o You can use this software for
whatever you want, in parts or full form,
without having to pay us. (`royalty-free'
usage) o You may not pretend that you wrote

this software. If you use it, or only parts of it,
in a program, you must acknowledge
somewhere in your documentation that
you've used the FreeType code. (`credits')
We specifically permit and encourage the
inclusion of this software, with or without
modifications, in commercial products,
provided that all warranty or liability claims
are assumed by the product vendor. Legal
Terms 0. Definitions Throughout this license,
the terms `package', `FreeType Project', and
`FreeType archive' refer to the set of files
originally distributed by the authors (David
Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner
Lemberg) as the `FreeType project', be they
named as alpha, beta or final release. `You'
refers to the licensee, or person using the
project, where `using' is a generic term
including compiling the project's source code
as well as linking it to form a `program' or
`executable'. This program is referred to as `a
program using the FreeType engine'. This
license applies to all files distributed in the
original FreeType archive, including all source
code, binaries and documentation, unless
otherwise stated in the file in its original,
unmodified form as distributed in the original
archive. If you are unsure whether or not a
particular file is covered by this license, you
must contact us to verify this. The FreeType
project is copyright (C) 1996-1999 by David
Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner
Lemberg. All rights reserved except as
specified below. 1. No Warranty THE
FREETYPE ARCHIVE IS PROVIDED `AS IS'

}}
133

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||

WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY
THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF
THE FREETYPE PROJECT. As you have not
signed this license, you are not required to
accept it. However, as the FreeType project
is copyrighted material, only this license, or
another one contracted with the authors,
grants you the right to use, distribute, and
modify it. Therefore, by using, distributing, or
modifying the FreeType project, you indicate
that you understand and accept all the terms
of this license.
2.

134

Redistribution Redistribution and use in
source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met: o Redistribution
of source code must retain this license file
(`licence.txt') unaltered; any additions,
deletions or changes to the original files
must be clearly indicated in accompanying
documentation. The copyright notices of the
unaltered, original files must be preserved in
all copies of source files. o Redistribution in
binary form must provide a disclaimer that
states that the software is based in part of
the work of the FreeType Team, in the
distribution documentation. We also

encourage you to put an URL to the
FreeType web page in your documentation,
though this isn't mandatory. These conditions
apply to any software derived from or based
on the FreeType code, not just the
unmodified files. If you use our work, you
must acknowledge us. However, no fee need
be paid to us.
3.

Advertising The names of FreeType's authors
and contributors may not be used to endorse
or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written
permission. We suggest, but do not require,
that you use one or more of the following
phrases to refer to this software in your
documentation or advertising materials:
`FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine',
`FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'.

Contacts There are two mailing lists related
to FreeType: o freetype@freetype.org
Discusses general use and applications of
FreeType, as well as future and wanted
additions to the library and distribution. If you
are looking for support, start in this list if you
haven't found anything to help you in the
documentation. o devel@freetype.org
Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals,
design issues, specific licenses, porting, etc.
o http://www.freetype.org Holds the current
FreeType web page, which will allow you to
download our latest development version and
read online documentation. You can also
contact us individually at: David Turner
Robert Wilhelm

Werner
Lemberg

Libpng License
This copy of the libpng notices is provided for
your convenience. In case of any discrepancy
between this copy and the notices in the file
png.h that is included in the libpng distribution,
the latter shall prevail.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and
LICENSE:
If you modify libpng you may insert additional
notices immediately following this sentence.

Tom Lane

libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through
1.0.13, April 15, 2002, are Copyright (c)
2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson and are
distributed according to the same disclaimer and
license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following
individuals added to the list of Contributing
Authors

libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96,
May 1997, are Copyright (c) 1996, 1997
Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the same
disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88, with the
following individuals added to the list of
Contributing Authors:

Simon-Pierre Cadieux

Kevin Bracey

Eric S. Raymond

Sam Bushell

Gilles Vollant

Magnus Holmgren

and with the following additions to the disclaimer:

Greg Roelofs

There is no warranty against interference with
your enjoyment of the library or against
infringement. There is no warranty that our efforts
or the library will fulfill any of your particular
purposes or needs. This library is provided with all
faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality,
performance, accuracy, and effort is with the user.
libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through
1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright (c) 1998,
1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are
distributed according to the same disclaimer and
license as libpng-0.96, with the following
individuals added to the list of Contributing
Authors:

Glenn Randers-Pehrson
Willem van Schaik

John Bowler

The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS".
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied,
including, without limitation, the warranties of
merchantability and of fitness for any purpose.
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental,
special, exemplary, or consequential damages,
which may result from the use of the PNG
Reference Library, even if advised of the
possibility of such damage.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy,
modify, and distribute this source code, or
portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee,
subject to the following restrictions:
1.

The origin of this source code must not be
misrepresented.

Tom Tanner

libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88,
January 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy
Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc.

Altered versions must be plainly marked as
such and must not be misrepresented as
being the original source.

This Copyright notice may not be removed or
altered from any source or altered source
distribution.

For the purposes of this copyright and license,
"Contributing Authors" is defined as the following
set of individuals:
Andreas Dilger
Dave Martindale
Guy Eric Schalnat
Paul Schmidt
Tim Wegner

The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
specifically permit, without fee, and encourage
the use of this source code as a component to
supporting the PNG file format in commercial
products. If you use this source code in a product,
acknowledgment is not required but would be
appreciated.
}}
135

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||

A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for
convenient use in "about" boxes and the like:
printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL));
Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is
supplied in the files "pngbar.png" and
"pngbar.jpg (88x31) and "pngnow.png" (98x31).
Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software.
OSI Certified Open Source is a certification mark
of the Open Source Initiative.
Glenn Randers-Pehrson randeg@alum.rpi.edu
April 15, 2002

MIT License

Copyright (c)
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"),
to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use,
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:

LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

zlib License

The zlib/libpng License Copyright (c)

This software is provided 'as-is', without any
express or implied warranty. In no event will the
authors be held liable for any damages arising
from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this
software for any purpose, including commercial
applications, and to alter it and redistribute it
freely, subject to the following restrictions:
1.

The origin of this software must not be
misrepresented; you must not claim that you
wrote the original software. If you use this
software in a product, an acknowledgment in
the product documentation would be
appreciated but is not required.

Altered source versions must be plainly
marked as such, and must not be

The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included in all copies or
substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT

136

misrepresented as being the original
software.
3.

This notice may not be removed or altered
from any source distribution.

SGI Free Software B License Version
2.0.
SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B (Version 2.0,
Sept. 18, 2008)
Copyright (C) [dates of first publication] Silicon
Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Permission is
hereby granted, free of charge, to any person
obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in
the Software without restriction, including without
limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies
of the Software, and to permit persons to whom
the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the
following conditions: The above copyright notice
including the dates of first publication and either
this permission notice or a reference to http://
oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE
OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of
Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
or other dealings in this Software without prior
written authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc.

Related information

•

Instrument panel (p. 127)

Warning symbols in the instrument
panel

Symbol

Meaning
Airbags

The warning symbols alert the driver that an
important function is activated or that a serious
fault has occurred.
Symbol

Stop the vehicle in a safe place
and do not continue driving.
If this light comes on while the
vehicle is being driven, or remains
on after the vehicle has been
started, the airbag system's diagnostic functions have detected a
fault. Have the system(s) inspected by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician as soon
as possible.

Meaning
Warning
The red warning symbol alerts the
driver that an important function is
activated or that a serious fault
has occurred that may affect the
vehicle's drivability. The warning
symbol can also illuminate in combination with other symbols.
Seat belt reminder
This symbol will flash for approximately 6 seconds if the driver or
front seat passenger has not fastened his or her seat belt or if anyone in the rear seat has unbuckled a seat belt.

Brake system
A

If this symbol illuminates, the
brake fluid level may be too low.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place
and check the level in the brake
fluid reservoir. See also the warning following this table.

}}
137

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||

Symbol

Meaning

Symbol

Parking brake

Oil pressure

•

This symbol flashes while the
parking brake is being applied and
then glows steadily when the
parking brake has been set.

If the symbol illuminates during
driving, stop the vehicle, the
engine oil level is too low. Stop the
engine immediately and check the
engine oil level. Add oil if necessary. If the oil level is normal and
the symbol remains illuminated,
have the vehicle towed to the
nearest authorized Volvo workshop or trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.

If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in
the brake fluid reservoir or if a warning
message is displayed in the text window:
DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed
to a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician and have the brake system
inspected.

•

If the BRAKE and ABS symbols illuminate at the same time, there is a risk of
reduced vehicle stability.

If the symbol flashes in any other
situation, this indicates a fault. See
the text message in the instrument panel.

Generator not charging
This symbol illuminates during
driving if a fault has occurred in
the electrical system. Contact an
authorized Volvo workshop or
trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
A
B

138

WARNING

Meaning

US models
Canadian models

Door/hood/tailgate/fuel filler door
reminder
It a door, tailgate, the hood or the fuel filler door
are not closed properly, the information or warning symbol will illuminate and a graphic will be
displayed in the instrument panel.

Related information

•
•

Instrument panel (p. 127)
Indicator symbols in the instrument panel
(p. 125)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Compass
The rear-view mirror has an integrated compass
that shows the direction in which the vehicle is
traveling.

Related information

•
•

Calibrating the compass (p. 139)
Ignition modes (p. 370)

Calibrating the compass
North America is divided into 15 magnetic zones
and the compass will need to be calibrated if the
vehicle is driven from one zone to another.
To calibrate the compass:
1.

Stop the vehicle in a large open area, safely
out of traffic and away from steel structures
and high-tension electrical wires.

Start the vehicle.

NOTE

•

For best calibration results, switch off all
electrical equipment in the vehicle (climate
system, windshield wipers, audio system,
etc.) and make sure that all doors are
closed.

•

Calibration may not succeed or be incorrect if the vehicle's electrical equipment is
not switched off.

Rearview mirror with compass

Eight different directions are shown with the
abbreviations: N (north) NE (northeast) E (east),
SE (southeast) S (south), SW (southwest) W
(west) NW (northwest)

Switching the compass on/off
The compass is displayed automatically when the
vehicle is started or in ignition mode II.

Using a pen, paperclip or similar object, press
and hold the button on the underside of mirror for approx. 3 seconds until the number of
the current magnetic zone is displayed.

To switch the compass on/off:
–

Use a pen, paperclip or similar object and
press in the button on the underside of the
mirror.
}}
139

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||

1
2

15
14

3
13
4
12
8

Related information

•
•

Defrosting windows and mirrors (p. 195)
Compass (p. 139)

Lighting panel and controls
The lighting controls on the left-side steering
wheel lever can be used to activate the vehicle's
exterior lighting. Instrument lighting brightness
can be adjusted on the lighting panel.

Ring on the steering wheel lever

11
9

Repeat the calibration procedure if necessary.

Magnetic zones

140

Press the button on the underside of mirror
repeatedly until the desired magnetic zone
(1–15) is displayed (see the map of magnetic zones).

Wait until C is again displayed in the mirror
or hold the button on the underside of mirror
for approx. 6 seconds until C is displayed in
the mirror.

Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more
than 6 mph (10 km/h) until a direction is displayed. This indicates that calibration is complete. Drive around in a circle an additional
two times to fine-tune the calibration.

Vehicles with an electrically heated windshield:* if C is displayed when the heating
function is activated, perform step 6 with the
heating function on.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Position

Result

Position

WARNING

Result

•

Daytime Running Lights are a driving aid
designed to help make the vehicle visible
to other roads users.

•

The driver is always responsible for
adapting the use of Daytime Running
Lights/headlights according to ambient
lighting and weather conditions.

With the ignition in mode II or if
the engine is running:

•

In the US: the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will be off

•

In Canada: the Daytime Running Lights will be on

•

High beam flash can be used

The Daytime Running Lights
will be onB (the low beam
headlights will automatically
switch on in dark conditions or
if the rear fog lights are on

•

Tunnel detection* will be activated

Lighting panel

•

Active High Beams (AHB) can
be activated

Instrument lighting

•

High beam flash can be used

With the ignition in mode II or if
the engine is running:A

•

In the US: the Daytime Running Lights will be off

•

In Canada: the Daytime Running Lights will be on

•

High beam flash can be used

With the ignition in mode II or if
the engine is running:

•

The Daytime Running Lights
will be off

•

The low beam headlights will
be on

•

High Beams/High Beam flash
can be used

Active High Beams On/Off
A

The parking lights will be on in this position, even if the ignition
is switched off. In dark conditions, the rear parking lights illuminate automatically when the tailgate is open, regardless of the
control's position or ignition mode.
US models only: The use of Daytime Running Lights can be
activated/deactivated in the center display's Settings menu.

NOTE
The use of Daytime Running Lights is recommended in the United States and is mandatory in Canada.
Volvo recommends using the
whenever possible.

position

Thumb wheel (to the left) for adjusting display brightness

Illumination of the display and instrument lights
will vary, depending on ignition mode.
The display lighting is automatically subdued in
darkness and the sensitivity is set with the thumb
wheel.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 141

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||

Related information

•
•

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) (p. 142)
High and low beam headlights (p. 143)

Low beam headlights

Daytime Running Lights (DRL)

In dark ambient lighting conditions, the low
beams will be activated automatically when the
engine is started or the ignition is in mode II and
the left-side steering wheel lever's ring is turned
position.
to the

The car monitors ambient lighting conditions.

If the ring is turned to
, the low beams will
be activated automatically when the engine is
started or the ignition is in mode II, regardless of
the ambient lighting conditions.

With the ring on the left-side steering wheel
lever in the
position and the ignition in
mode II (or the engine running), the lights toggle
automatically between DRL and low beam headlights.

Low beams

Ring in the AUTO position.

NOTE
The use of Daytime Running Lights is recommended in the United States and is mandatory in Canada.

Left-side steering wheel lever ring

With the ring in the
position, the low
beams will also be activated if the windshield
wipers or rear fog lights are being used.

Related information

•
•
142

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) (p. 142)
Ignition modes (p. 370)

With the headlight ring in the 0 position:

•
•

In the US: DRL will be off
In Canada: DRL will be on

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

9 position
With the headlight ring in the
and the ignition in mode II or if the engine is
running:

•
•

In the US: DRL will be off
In Canada: DRL will be on

With the headlight ring in the

•

High and low beam headlights
When the engine is started, the low beams are
activated automatically if the headlight control is
.
in position

The active high beam system uses a camera at
the upper edge of the windshield to detect the
headlights of oncoming vehicles or the taillights
of a vehicle directly ahead. When this happens,
the headlights will automatically switch from high
beams to low beams.

US models only: DRL can be deactivated in the
center display's Settings view.
selected, a tunnel detection function
With
activates the low beams when the vehicle enters
a tunnel.

•

position:

DRL will be off and the low beam headlights
will be on

symbol will illuminate in the instrument
The
panel when the high beams are on.

Active high beams

position:

DRL will be on (the low beam headlights will
automatically switch on in dark conditions)

With the headlight ring in the

beams by moving the lever forward. Return to low
beams by moving the lever toward the steering
wheel.

Steering wheel lever and ring

When the camera no longer detects the headlights/taillights of other vehicles, your headlights
will switch back to high beams after several seconds.

High beam flash
Toggle between high and low beams

High beam flash
Pull the lever slightly toward the steering wheel.
The high beams illuminate until the lever is
released.

Continuous high beams
Continuous high beams are available if the ring is
10 or
turned to
. Toggle to high
9 The parking lights will be on in
10 When the low beams are on.

this position, even if the ignition is switched off.

}}
143

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||

Operation
Activate/deactivate this function by turning the
ring on the left-side steering wheel lever to
.
If the ring is not in this position, toggling between
high and low beams must be done manually.
If the ring is turned to another position while the
high beams are on, the headlights will automatically switch to low beams.
A white symbol (
) in the instrument panel
indicates that the function has been activated.
When the high beams are on, the symbol will
change to blue.

CAUTION
windshield sensors are blocked and the
symbol are displayed. The
symbol will go
out if this happens.
Automatic high beams may be temporarily
unavailable (e.g., in heavy fog or rain). When the
system becomes active again or if the sensors in
the windshield are no longer obscured, the messymbol will
sages will disappear and the
illuminate.

WARNING

•

NOTE

•

Keep the windshield in front of the camera free of ice, snow, dirt, etc.

•

Do not mount or in any way attach anything on the windshield that could
obstruct the camera.

•

Automatic high beams are a driving aid
designed to help provide the best possible headlight illumination in good driving
conditions.
The driver is always responsible for manually toggling between high and low
beams when this is required by traffic or
weather conditions.

If a message is displayed in the instrument panel
saying that active high beams are temporarily
unavailable, switching between high and low
beams will have to be done manually. However,
the light switch can remain in the
position.
The same applies if a message saying that the

144

In the following situations, it may be necessary to switch between high and low beams
manually:

•
•
•
•
•
•

In heavy fog or rain

•

If there are pedestrians on or near the
road

•

If there are reflective objects, such as
signs, near the road

•

When oncoming vehicles' lights are
obscured by e.g., fences, bushes, etc.

•

When there are vehicles on connecting
roads

•
•

In blowing snow or slush
In bright moonlight
In freezing rain
In areas with dim street lighting
When oncoming vehicles have dim front
lighting

At the top of hills or in dips in the road
In sharp curves

Auxiliary lights*
If the vehicle is equipped with auxiliary lights, the
driver can use the center display to activate/
deactivate them or decide if they will go on/off
along with the high beams11.

These lights must be connected to the vehicle's electrical system by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Related information

•
•

City Safety™ troubleshooting (p. 295)
Lighting panel and controls (p. 140)

Active Bending Lights*

NOTE

Active Bending Lights (ABL) are designed to
help light up a curve according to movements of
the steering wheel.

This function is only active in twilight or dark
conditions, and only when the vehicle is in
motion.

Deactivating/activating the function
ABL can be deactivated/activated in two ways in
the center display:
Via Function view
Tap the Active Bending
Lights button.

Headlight pattern with the Active Bending Light function
deactivated (left) and activated (right)

ABL is activated automatically12 when the engine
is started and can be deactivated in the center
display.
If a fault is detected in the system, the
symbol in the instrument panel will illuminate. A
text message will be displayed and an additional
symbol will also illuminate.

Via settings
1. Tap Settings in Top view.
2.

Tap My Car

Deselect/select Active Bending Lights.

Lights

Exterior Lights.

Related information

•

Settings view (p. 111)

The factory default setting is on.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 145

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Brake lights

Rear fog lights

The brake lights illuminate automatically when
the brakes are applied.

The rear fog lights are considerably brighter than
the normal taillights and should be used only
when conditions such as fog, rain, snow, smoke
or dust reduce visibility for other vehicles to less
than 500 ft. (150 meters).

In addition to illuminating when the brake pedal is
depressed, the brake lights also illuminate when
one of the driver support systems (e.g., adaptive
cruise control, City Safety or collision warning)
slow the vehicle.

light switch is turned to the
tions.

posi-

Related information

•

Lighting panel and controls (p. 140)

Related information

•
•
•

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 266)
City Safety™ (p. 287)
Emergency brake lights (p. 350)

Rear fog light button

The rear fog lights can only be used when:

•

the ignition is in mode II or if the engine is
running and the left-side steering wheel levor
er's thumb wheel is in the
position

Press the button to turn the fog lights on/off. The
rear fog light indicator symbol
in the
instrument panel illuminates when the rear fog
lights are switched on.
The rear fog lights turn off automatically when
the start knob is turned to STOP or when the

146

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Hazard warning flashers

Parking lights

The hazard warning flashers should be used to
indicate that the vehicle has become a traffic
hazard.

Turn the parking lights on by turning the ring on
the left-side steering wheel lever.

that the headlight control is in or which mode the
ignition is in.

Related information

•

When the function is activated, both turn signal
indicators in the instrument panel will flash.

Lighting panel and controls (p. 140)

Lighting ring in the parking light position

Turn the ring to the
position (the license
plate lighting comes on at the same time).
Hazard warning flasher button

Press the button to activate the flashers. Press
the button again to turn off the flashers.
Regulations regarding the use of the hazard
warning flashers may vary, depending on where
you live.

Related information

•

Using turn signals (p. 151)

Canadian models: If the ignition is in position II
or the engine is running, the daytime running
lights will also be on.
With the ring in this position, the parking lights
will remain on even when the ignition is switched
off, however, the rear parking lights will not be on
if the ignition is in model 0.
In dark ambient lighting conditions, the rear parking lights also illuminate when the tailgate is
opened to alert anyone traveling behind your
vehicle. This happens regardless of the position

147

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Approach lighting

Home safe lighting

Passenger compartment lighting

Approach lighting activates the parking lights,
outer door handle lights*, license plate lighting,
courtesy lighting and footwell lighting when you
approach the vehicle.

The home safe lighting function illuminates the
area in front of the vehicle in dark conditions.

The passenger compartment lighting is controlled using the buttons in the ceiling above the
front and rear seats.

This function is activated by unlocking the car.
The time interval for this lighting can be set on
the center display.
The function can be deactivated/activated in the
center display:
1.

Tap Settings in Top view.

Tap My Car

Deselect/select Welcome Light.

Lights

The length of time that these lights remain illuminated can be set in the center display:

All passenger compartment lighting can be
turned on and off manually within 30 minutes
after:

•

the vehicle is unlocked but the engine has
not been started
the engine is switched off and the ignition is
in mode 0.

Tap Settings in Top view.

•

Tap My Car Lights
Home Safety Lights.

Front interior lighting

Select Off, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 sec.

Exterior Lights.

Related information

•
•
•

This function turns on the headlights, parking
lights, outer door handle lights*, license plate
lights, front ceiling lighting and footwell lighting
for a set amount of time.

Exterior Lights

To activate home safe lighting:

Settings view (p. 111)

Switch off the ignition (mode 0).

Home safe lighting (p. 148)

Push the turn signal lever as far as possible
towards the dashboard and release it.

Exit the vehicle and lock the doors.

Remote key (p. 235)

Related information

•
•

Using the center display (p. 49)
Settings view (p. 111)

Controls in the ceiling console for front reading lights
and courtesy lighting

Driver's side reading light
Courtesy lighting

148

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Courtesy lighting (AUTO) switch

Rear interior lighting

Passenger's side reading light

Rear reading lights

Rear courtesy lighting

Front reading lights
Turn the reading lights on or off by pressing the
respective buttons briefly. Adjust the brightness
by pressing and holding the button.
Courtesy lighting
Turn the footwell and overhead courtesy lighting
on or off by pressing the button briefly.
Courtesy lighting switch
Activate the automatic function by briefly pressing the AUTO button in the ceiling console. The
indicator light in the button will illuminate. With
AUTO activated, the courtesy lighting will switch
on and off as follows:
The courtesy lighting:

•

comes on when the vehicle is unlocked and
when the ignition is switched off

•

goes off when the engine is started and
when the vehicle is locked

•

comes on or goes off when one of the side
doors is opened or closed

•

remains on for 2 minutes if a side door is
open

The courtesy lighting switches off when:

Rear reading lights: third row of seats*
Rear reading lights: second row of seats

The rear interior lighting/reading lights are
located in the ceiling.
Turn them on or off by briefly pressing the button
in the side console. Adjust the brightness by
pressing and holding the button.

The rear courtesy lighting is turned on or off by
briefly pressing the button in the ceiling console.
Adjust the brightness by pressing and holding
the button.

Glove compartment lighting
The glove compartment lighting comes on or
goes off when the glove compartment is opened
or closed.

Vanity mirror lighting
The vanity mirror lighting comes on or goes off
when the cover over the mirror is opened or
closed.

Cargo area lighting
The cargo area lighting comes on or goes off
when the tailgate is opened or closed.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 149

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||

Ground lighting

Mood lighting*

The ground lighting comes on or goes off when a
door is opened or closed.

When the overhead courtesy lighting has gone
out and the engine is running, several LEDs
located near the roof console illuminate to provide faint lighting to help e.g., see objects in storage compartments. This lighting goes out just
after the overhead courtesy lighting when the
vehicle is locked.

Doorsill lighting
The doorsill lighting comes on or goes off when a
door is opened or closed.

Ambience lighting
1.

In the center display's Top view, select
Settings My Car Lights Ambient
Lighting

Choose among the following settings:

•

Under Ambient Light Intensity, choose:
Off, Low or High.

• Ambient Light Level: Reduced or Full.

The following settings can be made for the mood
lighting in the center display:
Brightness
1. In the center display's Top view, select
Settings My Car Lights Interior
Mood Lighting.
2.

Press Interior Mood Light Intensity and
choose Off, Low or High.

Change the color of the light
1. In the center display's Top view, select
Settings My Car Lights Interior
Mood Lighting.
2.

The intensity of the mood lighting can also be fine-tuned
using the thumb wheel (on the dashboard to the left of
the steering wheel)

Related information

•
•

Lighting panel and controls (p. 140)
Ignition modes (p. 370)

Choose By Temperature, By Theme or
Theme Colors.

The ambience lighting can also be fine-tuned using the
thumb wheel (on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel)

150

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Using turn signals
The turn signals are controlled using the left
steering wheel lever. The turn signals flash three
times or continuously, depending on how far up
or down the lever is moved.

lever can be returned to its initial position by
hand.

NOTE

•
•

This automatic flashing sequence can be
interrupted by immediately moving the
lever in the opposite direction.

Messages in the instrument panel
and center display
Information and warning messages are displayed in the instrument panel and center display.

Instrument panel

If the turn signal indicator flashes faster
than normal, check for a burned-out turn
signal bulb.

Related information

•
•
•

Lighting panel and controls (p. 140)
Hazard warning flashers (p. 147)
Settings view (p. 111)

Turn signals

Short flashing sequence
The driver can automatically flash the turn
signals 3 times by moving the left steering
wheel lever up or down to the first position
and releasing it. This function can be activated/deactivated in the center display.

Continuous flashing sequence
Move the lever as far up or down as possible
to start the turn signals.
The turn signals will be cancelled automatically
by the movement of the steering wheel, or the

Message in the instrument panel (12" version)

High-priority messages are displayed in the
instrument panel.
Messages may appear in different parts of the
instrument panel depending on their context. The
message will time out after a short period of time
or disappear when it has been confirmed or if
action has been taken. Messages that need to be
stored will be saved under My car messages in
the center display's Top view.

}}
151

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||

The message may be displayed along with graphics, symbols or buttons for e.g., confirming the
message or accepting a request.
Service messages
The following table lists a selection of important
service messages and the action that should be
taken.
Message

Action

Stop safelyA

Stop and switch off the
engine. There is a risk of
serious damage to the vehicleB.

Turn off
engineA

A
B

Action

Maintenance
overdue

Time for the next scheduled
service. Contact a workshopB. If the service schedule is not followed, this may
void all or part of the vehicle's warranty and result in
damage to vehicle components.

Temporarily
offA

A function has been temporarily deactivated and will be
reactivated automatically
while driving or after the
engine is restarted.

Part of the message is context-dependent.
Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.

Center display

Message in the center display's status bar

Messages with lower priority for the driver are
shown in the center display.

Service
urgent Drive
to workshopA

Contact a workshopB to have
the vehicle inspected immediately.

Most of the messages are shown in the center
display's status bar. The message times out after
a short period of time or disappears if it has been
confirmed or if action has been taken. Messages
that need to be stored are saved under My car
messages in Top view.

Service
requiredA

Contact a workshopB to have
the vehicle inspected as
soon as possible.

Some messages in the center display contain
one or more buttons for e.g., confirming the message or accepting a request.

Book time for
maintenance

Time for the next scheduled
service. Contact a workshopB.

Messages' form can vary and they may be displayed with graphics, symbols or buttons for e.g.,
confirming a message or accepting a request.

Time for
maintenance

152

Stop and switch off the
engine. There is a risk of
serious damage to the vehicleB.

Message

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Pop-up messages
Messages are sometimes displayed in pop-up
windows. Messages of this type have higher priority than ones in the status bar and must be
confirmed or action must be taken before they
disappear. Messages that need to be stored are
saved under My car messages in Top view.

Handling messages in the
instrument panel and center display
Instrument panel

Instrument panel (p. 127)

Confirm a choice by pressing (2).
> The message will disappear from the
instrument panel.

For messages without buttons:
–

Related information

•
•

Close the message by pressing (2) or let the
message time-out after a short period.
> The message will disappear from the
instrument panel.

If a message needs to be saved, it will be stored
in the Car status app, which can be opened in
the center display's App view. Car message
stored in Car status application will be displayed at this time in the center display.

Center display overview (p. 32)

Message in the instrument panel (12" version) and the
right-side steering wheel keypad

Center display

Left/right arrow keys
Confirm
Some messages in the instrument panel contain
one or more buttons for e.g., confirming a message or accepting a proposal.
Handling new messages
For messages with buttons:
1.

Navigate among the buttons available by
pressing the left/right arrow keys (1).

Message in the center display

Some buttons in the center display have a button
(or several buttons in a pop-up) to make it possi}}
153

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||

ble to e.g., activate/deactivate a function related
to the message.
Handling new messages
For messages with buttons:
–

Handling messages stored from the
instrument panel and center display
Messages saved from the instrument
panel

Tap the button to carry out the action or let
the message time-out after a short period.
> The message will disappear from the center display's status bar.
Close the message by tapping it or let the
message time-out after a short period.
> The message will disappear from the center display's status bar.

If a message needs to be saved, it will be stored
in the center display's Top view.

Related information

154

•

Messages in the instrument panel and center
display (p. 151)

•

Using the instrument panel App menu
(p. 156)

–

Tap the button to the right of the message
Car message stored in Car status
application in the center display.
> The saved message will be displayed in
the Car status app.

Reading a saved message at a later time:

For messages without buttons:
–

Reading saved messages
Reading a saved message immediately:

Saved messages and possible selections in the Car
status app

Messages that have been displayed in the instrument panel
and need to be saved are
stored in the Car status app,
which can be opened in the
center display's App view. Car
message stored in Car
status application will be displayed at this time
in the center display.

Open the Car status app in the center display's App view.
> The app will open in Home view's lowest
sub-view.

Select the Messages tab in the app.
> A list of saved messages will be displayed.

Tap the arrow to the right to expand/minimize the message.
> More information about the message will
appear in the list and the image to the left
in the app will show information about the
message in graphic form.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Handling a saved message
In expanded form, some messages have two buttons for booking service or reading the owner's
manual.

Messages saved from the center
display

Reading the owner's manual:
–

With the message in expanded form, tap
Owner's manual to read the section of the
owner's manual related to the message.
> The owner's manual will open in the center display and provide information related
to the message.

Messages stored in the app will be erased automatically each time the engine is started.

Messages saved in Top view are erased automatically when the engine is switched off.

•

With the message in expanded form, tap
Request appoint./Call to make
Appointment13 to book a service/repair
appointment.
> Request appoint.: the Appointments
tab will open in the app and create a
request for a service/repair appointment.

Call to make Appointment: the phone
app will start and initiate a call to your preferred retailer to make a service/repair
appointment.

Tap the button to carry out the action.

Related information

Booking service:
–

–

Handling messages in the instrument panel
and center display (p. 153)

Saved messages and possible selections in Top view

Messages that have been shown in the center
display and need to be saved are stored in the
center display's Top view.
Reading a saved message
1. Open the center display's Top view.
> A list of saved messages will be displayed.
The ones with an arrow to the right can
be expanded.
2.

Tap the arrow to the right to expand/minimize the message.

Handling a saved message
Some messages have a button to e.g., activate/
deactivate a function related to the message.

Certain markets only.

155

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Using the instrument panel App
menu

Opening/closing the App menu

Using the windshield wipers

–

Before using the wipers, ice and snow should
be removed from the windshield. Be sure the
wiper blades are not frozen in place.

The App (application) menu in the instrument
panel is controlled using the right-side steering
wheel keypad.

Press the App menu (1).
The App menu cannot be opened if there are
unread/unconfirmed messages in the instrument panel. The message must be confirmed
before the App menu can be opened.
> The App menu opens/closes.

The App menu closes automatically after a period
of inactivity or after certain selections are made.

Navigating and making selections in the
App menu

App menu and right-side steering wheel keypad

App menu

Navigate between the various apps by pressing left or right (3).
> Functions for the preceding/next app will
be displayed in the App menu.

Scroll through the current app's selections
using up or down (4).

Confirm or select a function by pressing (2).
> The function will be activated and in certain cases, the App menu will close.

Left/right
Up/down
Confirm

Related information

•

Instrument panel App menu (p. 129)

Right-side steering wheel lever

Thumb wheel to set rain sensor* sensitivity/
interval wiper speed

Single sweep
Move the lever down and release it for a
single sweep.

Wipers off
Move the lever to position 0 to turn off
the windshield wipers.

Interval wipers
Set the wiper interval speed by moving
the thumb wheel upward or downward.

156

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Continuous wipers
Move the lever upward for the wipers to
operate at normal speed.

NOTE

Activating/deactivating the rain
sensor

Activate the rain sensor by pressing the
button. The wipers will make one sweep.

The rain sensor monitors the amount of water on
the windshield and automatically regulates wiper
speed.

If the lever is pressed down, the wipers will make
additional sweeps across the windshield.

Before using the wipers, be sure that the
wiper blades are not frozen onto the windshield and that any ice or snow on the windshield has been removed.

Move the thumb wheel upward for increased sensitivity or downward for decreased sensitivity. The
wipers will make one extra sweep if the thumb
wheel is moved upward.

Deactivating the rain sensor
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the
button or by moving the lever upward to another
wiper position.

Move the lever upward to the next position for maximum wiper speed.

Related information

•
•

Tailgate window wiper and washer (p. 159)

•

Windshield and headlight washers (p. 158)

The rain sensor is automatically deactivated in
ignition mode 0.

Activating/deactivating the rain sensor
(p. 157)
Right-side steering wheel lever

Rain sensor button
Thumb wheel for adjusting sensitivity/interval
wiper speed
When the rain sensor is activated, the
symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel.

Activating the rain sensor
When activating the rain sensor, the engine must
be running or the ignition must be in mode I or II.
The windshield wiper lever must also be in position 0 or in the single sweep position.

The rain sensor is also automatically deactivated
when the wipers blades are put in the service
position and will reactivate when the wipers have
been returned to the normal operating position.

CAUTION
Deactivate the rain sensor when washing the
vehicle in an automatic car wash if the engine
is running or if the ignition is left in mode I or
II. The symbol in the instrument panel will go
out. If the rain sensor is not deactivated, the
wipers may start inadvertently in the car wash
and could be damaged.
}}
157

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||

Windshield and headlight washers

Activating/deactivating the memory
function
The rain sensor's memory function can be set to
activate the rain sensor each time the engine is
started:
1.

In the center display, select Settings
Car Wipers

Activate by selecting the Rain Sensor
Memory box.

Use the windshield/headlight washers to help
improve visibility.

Starting the windshield and headlight
washers

Related information

•

Using the windshield wipers (p. 156)
Windshield wipers in the service position
(p. 508)
Tailgate window wiper and washer (p. 159)

•

Use ample washer fluid when washing
the windshield. The windshield should be
thoroughly wet when the wipers are in
operation.

•

Avoid using the washers if the fluid reservoir is frozen or empty to help avoid damage to the pump.

When the washing system is used, the length of
time that the windshield washers operate
depends on the ambient temperature. In cold
weather, the amount of washer fluid used will
also be increased automatically to help improve
cleaning.

Deactivate by deselecting the Rain Sensor
Memory box.

•
•

CAUTION

Heated washer nozzles*
Washing function

–

Move the right-side steering wheel lever
toward the wheel to start the windshield and
headlight washers.
> After the lever is released the wipers
make several extra sweeps.

The washer nozzles are heated automatically in
cold weather to help prevent the washer fluid
from freezing.

High-pressure headlight washing*
High-pressure headlight washing consumes a
large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the
headlights are washed once for every five times
the windshield is washed.

Reduced washing
When approx. 1 US quart (1 liter) of washer fluid
remains in the reservoir, the headlights will no
longer be washed to conserve fluid.

158

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

A text message and the
symbol will be displayed in the instrument panel to remind the
driver to fill the washer fluid reservoir.

Tailgate window wiper and washer

Tailgate wiper and reverse gear

Start the tailgate window wiper/washer with controls on the right-side steering wheel lever.

In the center display, select Settings
Car Wipers.

Activate/deactivate by selecting/deselecting
the Auto Rear Wiper box.

Related information

•

Refilling the windshield washer fluid reservoir
(p. 511)

•
•

Using the windshield wipers (p. 156)

NOTE
The rear wiper is equipped with a cut-off
function, which means that it will not operate
if its electric motor overheats. The wiper will
function again after a cool-down period
(30 seconds or longer, depending on the heat
of the motor and ambient temperature conditions).

Tailgate window wiper and washer (p. 159)

Using the tailgate wiper/washer

If the windshield wipers are on and the transmission is put into reverse gear, the tailgate wiper
will start. This function is deactivated when a different gear is selected.

Related information

•
•
•
•

–

Press

for tailgate interval wiper

Press

for tailgate continuous wiper

Using the windshield wipers (p. 156)
Windshield and headlight washers (p. 158)
Refilling the windshield washer fluid reservoir
(p. 511)
Activating/deactivating the rain sensor
(p. 157)

Move the lever forward to wash/wipe the tailgate window.

159

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Steering wheel

Horn

The steering wheel has controls for the horn,
certain optional driver support systems, menus/
messages and paddles for manually shifting
gears*.

•

Using the instrument panel App menu
(p. 156)

•

Phone (p. 414)

The horn is located in the steering wheel hub.

Related information

Steering wheel keypads and paddles*

Driver support system controls14
Paddles for manually shifting gears*
Keypad for voice controls, adjusting the
head-up display*accessing menus and messages, and handling phone calls

160

•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 161)
Turning steering wheel heating* on and off
(p. 197)
Cruise Control (CC) (p. 261)
Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 298)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 266)
Distance Alert* (p. 329)
Pilot Assist* (p. 273)
Steering wheel paddles* (p. 398)
Voice control (p. 120)
Head-up display (HUD)* (p. 117)

Cruise control*, Speed limiter *, Adaptive cruise control*, Distance alert* and Pilot Assist*.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Adjusting the steering wheel

WARNING

The steering wheel can be adjusted to various
positions.

Never adjust the steering wheel while driving.
If the vehicle is equipped with the optional
speed-dependent power steering, the level of
steering force can be adjusted. The force level is
adjusted according to the vehicle's speed.

Related information

•
•

Adjusting the steering wheel

Lever for releasing/locking the steering
wheel
Possible positions
The steering wheel's height and reach can be
adjusted. To do so:
1.

Push the lever down to release the steering
wheel.

Adjust the steering wheel to a suitable position.

Pull back the lever to lock the steering wheel
in place. If the lever is difficult to pull into
place, press the steering wheel lightly at the
same time as you pull the lever.

Steering wheel (p. 160)
Adjustable steering force* (p. 323)

Seats
The vehicle is equipped with 7 seats. The front
seats can be adjusted electroncially or manually.
The second and third row seats are adjusted primarily manually.
The adjustment settings for the power front
seats*, door mirrors and the head-up display can
be stored in memory buttons.
Using the multi-function control*, comfort in the
front seats can be further enhance by e.g., adjusting the lumbar support or extending the length of
the front seat cushion.
The rear seats can be folded down and their
head restraints can be adjusted. The second row
seats can be moved forward/rearward and their
backrest tilt can also be changed.

Related information

•
•

Adjusting power front seats* (p. 163)
Adjusting function settings in the multifunctional front seats* (p. 166)

•
•

Manually operated front seats (p. 162)

•
•

Folding the second row backrests (p. 172)

Using the power seat memory function*
(p. 164)
Getting into and out of the third row of seats
(p. 174)

}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 161

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

•
•

Moving the second row seats forward/rearward (p. 174)
Adjusting the second row backrest tilt
(p. 171)

Manually operated front seats

WARNING

The front seats can be adjusted in a number of
ways to help provide the most comfortable seating position.

•

Do not adjust the seat while driving. The
seat should be adjusted so that the brake
pedal can be depressed fully. In addition,
position the seat as far rearward as comfort and control allow.

•

Check that the seat is securely locked
into position after adjusting.

Related information

•
•
•
•

Turning seat heating* on and off (p. 199)
Power front seats* (p. 163)
Multifunctional front seats* (p. 165)
Seat belts (p. 64)

Raise/lower the front edge of seat cushion
by pumping up/down
Move the seat forward/rearward by pulling
the bar upward and moving the seat.
Change lumbar support by pressing the button*
Raise/lower the seat by moving the control
up/down
Change backrest tilt by turning the wheel

162

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Power front seats*

Adjusting power front seats*

The power front seats offer a number of adjustment possibilities to help maximize comfort and
ergonomics.

The power front seat(s) can be adjusted to many
positions to help improve comfort and ergonomics.

Related information

•
•

The power seats have an overload protector that
activates if a seat is blocked by any object. If this
occurs, put the ignition in mode I or 0 and wait
for a short period before operating the seat
again.

Power front seats* (p. 163)
Using the power seat memory function*
(p. 164)
Multifunctional front seats* (p. 165)
Seat belts (p. 64)

The power seat(s) can be adjusted for a short
period after unlocking the door with the remote
key without switching the ignition on. Seat adjustment can always be made when the engine is
running.

Related information

•
•
•

Multifunctional front seats* (p. 165)
Adjusting power front seats* (p. 163)

Adjust lumbar support by pressing the control up/down/forward/rearward

Using the power seat memory function*
(p. 164)

Raise/lower the front edge of the seat cushion by moving the control up/down

•
•
•

Manually operated front seats (p. 162)
Turning seat heating* on and off (p. 199)

Raise/lower the seat by moving the control
up/down

Turning front seat ventilation* on and off
(p. 200)

Move the seat forward/rearward by moving
the control forward/rearward

•

Easy access to and from the driver seat
(p. 169)

Change backrest tilt by moving the control
forward/rearward
Only one of the power seat's controls can be
used at the same time.
The front seat backrests can be folded down
completely.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 163

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Adjusting the passenger's seat from
the driver's seat*

Using the power seat memory
function*

Using the controls on the side of the driver's
seat, the driver can adjust the position of the
front passenger's seat.

The memory function can be used to store the
settings (positions) of the power front seats*,
door mirrors and the head-up display. Three different settings can be stored using this function.
Memory controls are found on one or both of the
front doors*.

Activating the function in the center
display
From the center display, the function can be activated in two ways.
After activating the function, adjust the passenger's seat within 10 seconds. If no adjustments
are made in that time span, the function deactivates automatically.

Power seat controls

Move the passenger's seat forward/rearward
by moving the control forward/rearward.

Activating from Function view

Change the passenger seat's backrest tilt by
moving the control forward/rearward.

Related information

Go to the center display's Function view.

Activate the function by tapping Adjust
passenger seat.

Activating from Settings
– In the center display, select Settings My
Car Seats Adjust Passenger Seat
From Driver Position.

164

•
•
•

Power front seats* (p. 163)
Adjusting power front seats* (p. 163)

Button for storing a position

Seat belts (p. 64)

Button for storing a position
Button for storing a position
M (memory) button

Storing a position
1.

Adjust the seat, door mirrors and head-up
display to the desired positions.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2.
3.

Press and release the M button. The indicator light in the button will illuminate.
Press button 1, 2 or 3 within 3 seconds to
store the current position of the seat/
mirrors/head-up display in the selected button.
> When the position has been stored in the
selected button, an audible signal will
sound and the indicator light in the M button will go out.

The seat, door mirrors and head-up display will
stop automatically if the button is released before
the they have reached the stored positions.

WARNING

If none of the buttons (1, 2 or 3) is pressed
within 3 seconds, the indicator light in the M button will go out and the position will not be stored.

•

Because the driver's seat can be adjusted
with the ignition off, children should never
be left unattended in the vehicle.

•

Movement of the seat can be STOPPED
at any time by pressing any button on the
power seat control panel.

•

Do not adjust the seat while driving. The
seat should be adjusted so that the brake
pedal can be depressed fully. In addition,
position the seat as far rearward as comfort and control allow.

•

The seat rails on the floor must not be
obstructed in any way when the seat is in
motion.

The seat/mirrors/head-up display must be
moved before a new position can be stored.

Using a stored position
A stored position can be used when one of the
front doors is opened or closed:
Front door open
– Press one of the bottons (1–3) briefly. The
seat, door mirrors and head-up display will
move to the positions stored in that button.
Front door closed
– Press and hold one of the buttons (1–3) until
the seat, door mirrors and head-up display
have moved to the positions stored in that
button.

Related information

•
•

Adjusting power front seats* (p. 163)
Power front seats* (p. 163)

Multifunctional front seats*
In addition to the adjustment settings offered by
the power seat controls, the multifunction control
provides additional possibilities for convenience
and comfort.

Multifunction control on the side of the seat

The multifunction control can be used to adjust
lumbar support*, the backrest's side bolsters*, the
length of the seat cushion and the massage
function*. The adjustment settings made with the
control are shown in the center display* and certain settings can be made directly from the center display.

Center display
The adjustment settings for the driver and passenger seats made using the multifunction control are shown in the center display. If only one
seat is adjusted, the settings are shown in the

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 165

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||

center of the display. If both seats are adjusted,
the settings for the driver seat are shown on the
upper half of the screen and the ones made for
the passenger seat are on the lower half.
Press the Home button on the center console to
exit the seat adjustment setting view.

Adjusting function settings in the
multifunctional front seats*
The multifunction controls on the side of the seat
as well as the center display can be used to
make seat adjustments. The adjustment settings
are shown in the center display*.

Related information

•
•
•

Power front seats* (p. 163)
Adjusting function settings in the multifunctional front seats* (p. 166)
Turning seat heating* on and off (p. 199)

Multifunction control on the side of the seat

Turn the control up or down to activate.

Front seat massage settings*
The front seat backrests have a massage function. Air-filled cushions provide the massaging
action and a number of settings are available.

Massage view in the center display

Activate the multifunction control by turning
it up or down. Seat settings will be displayed
in the center display.

Tap Massage in the seat settings view.

The massage function can only be used when
the engine is running.

166

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
3.

Select massage settings by tapping the center display or by moving the cursor up/down
using the multifunction control's upper/lower
buttons. Change a setting in the selected
function by tapping the arrows on the center
display or by using the multifunction control's
front/rear buttons.

Massage settings
The following massage settings are available:

• On/Off.
• Program 1-5: There are 5 preset massage

The massage function switches off automatically
after 20 minutes and must be restarted manually
for continued use.
Tap Restart in the center display to restart the
selected massage program.

Adjusting the side bolsters in the front
seats*
The side bolsters in the front seat backrests can
be inflated/deflated to adjust the amount of support provided.

programs. Select Swell, Tread, Advanced,
Lumbar or Shoulder.

• Intensity: Select Low, Normal or High.
• Speed: Select Slow, Normal or Fast.
Restarting the massage function

Side bolster view in the center display

Activate the multifunction control on the side
of the seat by moving it up/down. The seat
settings view will appear in the center display.

Select Side bolsters in the seat settings
view.

•

Tap the front button to increase bolster
support.

•

Tap the rear button to decrease bolster
support.

Massage restart button in the center display

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 167

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||

Adjusting front seat lumbar support*
Lumbar support can be adjusted up/down/front/
rear.

Select Lumbar in the seat settings view.

•

Tap the button up/down to move lumbar
support up/down.

•

Tap the front button to make lumbar support firmer.

•

Tap the rear button to make lumbar support softer.

Extending the seat cushion
The seat cushion can be extended/retracted
using the multifunction control.

Seat cushion extension view in the center display

Activate the multifunction control on the side
of the seat by moving it up/down. The seat
settings view will appear in the center display.

Select Cushion extension in the seat settings view.

Lumbar support view in the center display

168

Activate the multifunction control on the side
of the seat by moving it up/down. The seat
settings view will appear in the center display.

•

Tap the front button to extend the cushion.

•

Tap the rear button to retract the cushion.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Related information

•

Multifunctional front seats* (p. 165)

Rear seats
Your vehicle has three rows of seats. The second row of seats has three individual seating
positions and the optional third row of seats has
two individual seating positions.

Related information

•

Adjusting the second row backrest tilt
(p. 171)

•

Adjusting the second row head restraints
(p. 170)

•
•
•

Folding the second row backrests (p. 172)

Easy access to and from the driver
seat
The Easy Ingress & Egress function can be
used to make getting into and out of the driver's
seat easier.

Easy egress
To make getting out of the driver's seat easier,
the seat is lowered, the side bolsters deflate and
the seat cushion retracts at the same time.
The easy egress function must be activated in
the center display.
1.

Move the gear selector to the P position.

Getting into and out of the third row of seats
(p. 174)

Switch off the engine.

•

Unbuckle the seat belt.

Moving the second row seats forward/rearward (p. 174)

•

Turning seat heating* on and off (p. 199)

Open the driver's door.
> The seat, side bolsters and seat cushion
all move at the same time to a position
that makes it easier to leave the seat.

Folding the third row backrests (p. 175)

Easy ingress
The seat remains in the easy egress position
when the driver leaves the vehicle. When the
driver returns to the vehicle, the seat is in a position to make sitting down easier. When the driver
is seated, has buckled the seat belt and has put
the ignition in at least mode 1, the seat will return
to the driver's preferred position.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 169

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||

Activating/deactivating the function
1.

In the center display, select Settings
Car Seats.

Activate/deactivate the function by selecting/deselecting the Easy Ingress & Egress
box.

Related information

•
•

Adjusting the second row head
restraints
The center head restraint in the second row of
seats can be adjusted to suit the height of the
seat's occupant. The outboard head restraints
can be folded down* for a better rear view.

Adjusting the center head restraint

Power front seats* (p. 163)
Ignition modes (p. 370)
The center head restraint should be adjusted up
or down according to the passenger's height. The
restraint should be carefully adjusted to support
the occupant's head.
To lower the head restraint, press and hold the
button (see the illustration) and push the head
restraint down carefully.
Center head restraint button

WARNING
The center rear seat head restraint should
only be in its lowest position when this seat is
NOT occupied. When the center position is
occupied, the head restraint should be correctly adjusted to the passenger’s height. The
upper edge of the head restraint should be at
least on a level with the upper-most point of
the seat occupant's ear.

170

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Electrically folding down the rear seat’s
outboard head restraints*

In the center display, select Settings My
Car Seats Fold Headrest On
Second Row Seats to fold down the outboard head restraints.

WARNING

Adjusting the second row backrest
tilt
Backrest tilt can be adjusted separately for each
of the second row seats.

Center seat

For safety reasons, no one should be allowed
to sit in the outboard rear seat positions if the
head restraints are folded down. If these positions are occupied, the head restraints should
be in the upright (fixed) position.

The outboard head restraints can be folded down
in two ways from the center display.

The head restraints must be returned to the
upright position manually until they click into
position.

WARNING

From Function view

The head restraint must be locked in the
upright position after it has been folded up.

Pull the strap on the center seat's right side.

Adjust backrest tilt forward/rearward by
decreasing/increasing pressure on it.

Release the strap to lock the backrest in the
new position and press the backrest until its
lock engages.

Related information

•
•
1.

Go to the center display's Function view.

Tap the Headrest fold button.

Folding the second row backrests (p. 172)
Center display overview (p. 32)

Via settings
1. The ignition has to be in at least mode II.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 171

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||

Outboard seats

•

Seat belts (p. 64)

Folding the second row backrests
The second row of seats has three individual
seating positions whose backrests can be
folded down separately.

CAUTION

Pull the handle on the side of the seat
upward.

Adjust backrest tilt forward/rearward by
decreasing/increasing pressure on it.

Release the handle to lock the backrest in
the new position and press the backrest until
its lock engages.

WARNING
Check that all backrests are securely locked
in place after changing the tilt angle.

Related information

•
•
•

172

•

To help avoid damage to the seat upholstery, before a rear seat backrest is folded
down, remove any objects from the seat
and ensure that the seat belts are not
buckled.

•

The integrated booster cushion* in the
center position must be stowed (folded
down) before the backrest is folded
down.

•

The center seating position armrest must
be folded up before the backrest is
folded down.

NOTE

•

It may be necessary to adjust the front
seat backrests and/or move these seats
forward in order to fold down the rear
seat backrests completely.

•

It may also be necessary to move the
second row of seats rearward.

Rear seats (p. 169)
Moving the second row seats forward/rearward (p. 174)
Folding the second row backrests (p. 172)

WARNING
Adjust the seat and be sure it is locked in the
new position before driving.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Center seat

Outboard seats

WARNING
After being folded down, be sure the backrests are securely locked in place.
To return the backrest to the upright position:
1.

Pull up and hold the handle on the side of
the seat while the backrest is being folded
up.

Be sure that the backrest and head restraint
do not come in contact with the front seats
while they are being folded up. Fold up the
backrest and release the handle.

To fold down the backrest:

Press the backrest until its lock engages.

Fold down the head restraint manually.

Fold up the head restraint manually.

Pull the strap on the center seat's right side.

Pull up and hold the handle on the side of
the seat while the backrest is being folded
down.

Fold the backrest down until it locks in position. The seat cushion will move downward/
forward as the backrest is folded down to
create a flat surface.

Be sure that the backrest and head restraint
do not come in contact with the front seats
while they are being folded down. Fold down
until the backrest locks in place.
> The seat cushion will move downward/
forward as the backrest is folded down to
create a flat surface. The head restraint
folds down automatically when the backrest is folded down.

To return the backrest to the upright position:
1.

Pull the strap.

Fold the backrest and release the strap.
Push it into position until its lock engages.

Adjust the head restraint if necessary.

WARNING
Be sure the backrest and head restraint are
securely locked in position after they have
been folded up.

Related information

•
•
•
•

Rear seats (p. 169)
Adjusting the second row backrest tilt
(p. 171)
Folding the third row backrests (p. 175)
Adjusting the second row head restraints
(p. 170)

173

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Moving the second row seats
forward/rearward
The second row seats can be moved forward/
rearward individually to help optimize legroom for
the passengers.

Rear seats (p. 169)

Getting into and out of the third row
of seats

Getting into and out of the third row of seats
(p. 174)

The second row seats can be moved for easier
access to the third row of seats*.

Related information

•
•

Getting into and out of a third row seat

Lift the handle located under the seat.

To fold down the backrest:

Move the seat forward/rearward to the
desired position.

Pull the handle on the upper side of one of
the outboard second row seats upward/
forward.

Fold the backrest forward and move the
entire seat forward.

Release the handle and move the seat so
that it locks in the new position.

WARNING
Be careful when moving the seat to avoid
injuries to your hands/fingers.

To return the backrest to the upright position:
–

Move the seat back and fold up the backrest
until it locks in position.

Check that the seat is securely locked in position after being moved.

174

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

WARNING
Be sure the backrest and head restraint are
securely locked in position after they have
been folded up.

Folding the third row backrests

NOTE

Related information

•

Moving the second row seats forward/rearward (p. 174)

•

Adjusting the second row backrest tilt
(p. 171)

•

Folding the second row backrests (p. 172)

The third row of seats has two individual seating
positions that can be folded down manually or
electrically*.

Before folding down the third row seats, it
may be necessary to change the position/tilt
of the seats in the second row.

Be sure that the backrest and head restraint
do not come in contact with the seat ahead
while they are being folded down. Fold the
backrest down.
> The seat cushion will move downward/
forward as the backrest is folded down to
create a flat surface. The head restraint
folds down automatically when the backrest is folded down.

To return the backrest to the upright position,
fold the backrest up until it locks in position. The
head restraint has to be folded up manually.

WARNING
Be sure the backrest and head restraint are
securely locked in position after they have
been folded up.

Related information

•
•
1.

Pull the handle on the upper side of the
backrest upward/forward.

Rear seats (p. 169)
Adjusting the second row head restraints
(p. 170)

•

Adjusting the second row backrest tilt
(p. 171)

•

Moving the second row seats forward/rearward (p. 174)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 175

CLIMATE

Climate control system
The vehicle is equipped with Electronic Climate
Control (ECC) that cools, heats, dehumidifies
and filters the air in the passenger compartment.

4-zone climate system

•
•
•
•

Air quality (p. 186)

Perceived temperature

Air distribution (p. 201)

The climate system regulates passenger compartment temperature based on the perceived
temperature, not on the actual one.

Air conditioning refrigerant (p. 527)
Parking climate (preconditioning) (p. 179)

The selected passenger compartment temperature is based on a physical perception relating to
the current ambient temperature, air flow, humidity, sunlight in the passenger compartment, etc.
The system's sunlight sensor monitors the side of
the car where sunlight is entering the passenger
compartment. This means that the actual temperature may differ between the right and left
sides of the compartment, even if the temperature setting is the same for both sides.

Related information
4-zone system climate zones

The 4-zone climate system makes it possible to
set the left- and right-side temperatures separately for the front and rears seats.
All climate system settings are made from the
center display and the buttons in the center console. Settings for the rear seats can also be
made from the climate system panel on the rear
side of the tunnel console.

Related information

•
•
•

178

Climate system sensors (p. 179)
Perceived temperature (p. 178)
Climate system controls (p. 188)

•
•

Climate system sensors (p. 179)
Climate control system (p. 178)

CLIMATE

Climate system sensors
The climate system's sensors help regulate the
passenger compartment temperature, humidity
level, etc.

Location of the sensors

On models equipped with the optional Interior Air
Quality System, there is also an air quality sensor
located at the climate system's air intake.

Related information

•
•
•

Climate control system (p. 178)

Parking climate (preconditioning)
The climate in the passenger compartment can
be preconditioned and maintained, even when
the vehicle is parked. For full functionality, the
vehicle's charging cable must be connected.

Perceived temperature (p. 178)
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* (p. 186)

Humidity sensor: in the rearview mirror console.
Ambient temperature sensor: in the passenger's side door mirror.
Passenger compartment temperature sensor: near the center console buttons.
Sunlight sensor: on the upper side of the
dashboard.

NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects.

Parking climate/preconditioning and maintaining passenger compartment climate comfort is controlled from
the Parking climate tab in the center display's Climate
view.

}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 179

CLIMATE
||

Preconditioning
Preconditioning the vehicle before driving can
help reduce wear and reduce energy consumption during a trip.

NOTE
Full preconditioning is only possible when the
vehicle's charging cable is connected.
In other cases, the passenger compartment
can be cooled for 3 minutes in warm weather.
This function is started from the Parking
climate tab in the center display's Climate
view.
With the charging cable connected, preconditioning can be started immediately or a timer function
can start this procedure at a later time.
This feature utilizes several of the vehicle's systems:

180

•

Heating for the windshield, tailgate window
and door mirrors can be activated.

If preconditioning is used in warm weather, a certain amount of water may condense under the
vehicle, which is normal.
When preconditioning is used, this system will
attempt to establish a comfortable temperature in
the passenger compartment but not necessarily
the temperature currently set in the climate
system.

Related information

•

Starting and stopping preconditioning
(p. 184)

•

Activating/deactivating the climate comfort
retaining function* (p. 181)

•

Activating/deactivating the parking climate
timer (p. 181)

•
•

Charging the hybrid battery (p. 383)
Hybrid battery charging cable (p. 375)

Maintaining a comfortable passenger
compartment climate
The climate in the passenger compartment can
be maintained even when the vehicle is parked
and the engine is turned off (e.g., if anyone
intends to remain in the vehicle).
This function can only be direct-started.
This function utilizes several of the vehicle's systems:

•

The High Voltage Coolant Heater (HVCH)
warms the hybrid battery and passenger
compartment in cold weather.

•

In warm weather, the ventilation system will
attempt to cool the passenger compartment
to the current ambient temperature.

Residual heat from the engine is used help
keep the passenger compartment warm in
cool temperatures.

•

In warm weather, the air conditioning system
will cool the passenger compartment to a
comfortable temperature.

In warm weather, the ventilation system will
attempt to cool the passenger compartment
to the current ambient temperature.

•

The electrically heated steering wheel and
seats can be activated.

This function will not be activated if the vehicle is
locked from the outside in order to avoid using
residual engine heat unnecessarily. This function
is primarily intended for use when the engine is
not running but someone remains in the vehicle.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

CLIMATE

Activating/deactivating the parking
climate timer
With the vehicle's charging cable connected,
the parking climate timer can be activated or
deactivated at any time.

Related information

•
•
•

Preconditioning timer (p. 182)
Setting the parking climate (preconditioning)
timer (p. 182)
Hybrid battery charging cable (p. 375)

Activating/deactivating the climate
comfort retaining function*
This function helps keep the passenger compartment comfortable if anyone remains in the
vehicle after the engine has been switched off.

The timer button in the Parking climate tab in Climate
view

Button for retaining climate comfort in the Parking
climate tab in Climate view

Open Climate view in the center display.

Tap Parking climate .

Activate/deactivate the timer by tapping the
button to the right of the setting.
> The timer setting will be activated/deactivated and the indicator light in the button
will be on/off.

Tap Keep climate comfort.
> The function for retaining climate comfort
in the passenger compartment will be
activated/deactivated and the indicator
light in the button will be on/off.

}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 181

CLIMATE

NOTE

•

If there is not sufficient residual engine
heat available, this function cannot be
started

•

This function will be turned off if the vehicle is locked from the outside in order to
avoid using residual engine heat unnecessarily. This function is primarily
intended for use when the engine is not
running but someone remains in the vehicle

Preconditioning timer
The timer can be set to start preconditioning at a
predetermined time.
The timer can store up to 8 preset times for:

•
•

A time on a particular date
A time on one or more days of the week, with
or without the repeat function.

Setting the parking climate
(preconditioning) timer
The parking climate (preconditioning) timer can
be activated or deactivated at any time. However, the vehicle's changing cable must be
connected.

Adding a timer

Related information

•

182

Parking climate (preconditioning) (p. 179)

Timer button in the center display's Parking climate tab

Open Climate view in the center display.

Tap Parking climate .

CLIMATE
3.

Tap Add timer.
> A pop-up window will open.

NOTE
A new timer setting cannot be made if there
are already 8 timers set. Delete one of the
existing timer settings in order to add a new
one.
4.

Tap Date to set a specific date for the timer
setting.

Editing a timer setting
1.

Open Climate view in the center display.

Tap the Parking climate tab.

Tap the timer setting to be changed.
> A pop-up window will open.

Change the setting as described in the section "Adding a timer setting" above.

Tap Delete to confirm.
> The timer setting will be deleted from the
list.

Deleting a timer setting

Tap Days to set a timer for one or more days
of the week.
For Days: activate/deactivate the repeat
function by selecting/deselecting the
Repeat weekly box.
5.

For Date: Select a date for preconditioning
by scrolling in the date list using the arrow
keys.
For Days: Select days of the week for preconditioning by tapping the days' buttons.

Set the time at which preconditioning should
be completed by scrolling with the arrows in
the clock.
Tap Confirm to add the timer setting.
> The timer settings will be added to the list
and activated.

The button for editing a list/deleting a timer setting in
the Climate setting's Parking climate tab

Open Climate view in the center display.

Tap the Parking climate tab.

Tap Edit list.

Tap the delete icon at the right in the list.
> The icon will change to the text Delete.

183

CLIMATE

Starting and stopping
preconditioning

The vehicle's doors and windows should be
closed during preconditioning.

Preconditioning heats/cools the passenger compartment prior to driving. Please note that the
charging cable must be connected.

Starting from a cell phone*
Starting preconditioning and checking the current settings can be done from a cell phone with
the Volvo On Call mobile app. Preconditioning
heats the passenger compartment to a comfortable temperature or cools the compartment to the
current ambient temperature.

Starting/stopping from the center
display

The window for seat/steering wheel heating in Climate
view's Parking climate tab

The preconditioning button in the Parking climate tab
in Climate view.

Open Climate view in the center display.

Tap Parking climate .

Tap the boxes to select if seat/steering
wheel heating is to be activated/deactivated
when preconditioning starts.
Tap Preconditioning.
> Preconditioning starts/stops and the indicator lights in the buttons will be on/off.

If the vehicle is equipped with the optional
Engine Remote Start (ERS), the air conditioning
can be used to pre-cool the passenger compartment to a comfortable temperature.

Related information

•

Setting the parking climate (preconditioning)
timer (p. 182)

•

Activating/deactivating the parking climate
timer (p. 181)

•

Hybrid battery charging cable (p. 375)

184

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

CLIMATE

Preconditioning symbols and
messages
A symbol and various texts relating to preconditioning may be displayed in the instrument panel.
Symbol

Message

Explanation

Parking climate

Preconditioning cannot be started because the hybrid battery's charge level is too low. Connect the
charging cable. In certain cases, the parking climate function can be started with limited functionality.

Unavailable Battery level too low
Parking climate
Unavailable, fuel and battery level
too lowA
Parking climate
Service required
Parking climate
Unavailable Activation limited
A

Preconditioning is not functioning properly. Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo service technician to have the system checked as soon as possible.
Preconditioning is temporarily not functioning and will be reset automatically while the vehicle is being
driven or when it is restarted.

The reference to fuel level does not apply in North America.

185

CLIMATE

Air quality
The materials used in the passenger compartment have been selected and designed to be
pleasant and comfortable, even for people with
asthma or other types of allergies.

Materials in the passenger
compartment
The materials used have been developed to help
minimize the amount of dust and make the cabin
easier to keep clean.

Clean Zone Interior Package
(CZIP)*
The Clean Zone Interior Package includes a
number of features that help further reduce allergenic substances in the passenger compartment.
CZIP includes the following:

•

All floor mats can be easily removed for cleaning.
Use car cleaning products recommended by
Volvo.
Only use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and follow the instructions included with the car care
product.

Air filtering systems
In addition to the passenger compartment filter,
the Clean Zone Interior Package* and the Interior
Air Quality System* contribute to a cleaner passenger compartment environment.

•

An enhanced blower function that starts the
blower when the vehicle is unlocked with the
remote key to fill the passenger compartment with fresh air. This function starts automatically when required and shuts off automatically after a short period or if one the
doors is opened. The time for which the
blower operates decreases gradually due to
reduced need until the vehicle is four years
old.
The Interior Air Quality System (IAQS).

NOTE
In order to retain the CZIP standard, the IAQS
filter must be replaced at the specified intervals. Consult your Volvo retailer.

Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)*
The Interior Air Quality System uses a multifilter
and an air quality sensor to remove gases, particles and other contaminants from the air entering the passenger compartment.
The IAQS air quality sensor monitors increased
levels of contaminants in the outside air and if
contaminants are detected, the air intake closes
and the air inside the passenger compartment is
recirculated, i.e., no outside air enters the vehicle.
The filter also cleans recirculated passenger
compartment air.

NOTE

•

The air quality sensor should always be
engaged in order to obtain the best air in
the passenger compartment.

•

Recirculation is limited in cold weather to
avoid fogging.

•

If the insides of the windows start fogging, disengage the air quality sensor.
Use the defroster function to increase
airflow to the front, side, and rear windows.

Related information

186

•
•
•

Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* (p. 186)

•

Cleaning the interior (p. 513)

Passenger compartment air filter (p. 187)
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*
(p. 186)

Activating/deactivating IAQS
To change the setting for IAQS activation/deactivation:
1.

In the center display's Settings view, go to
Climate.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

CLIMATE
2.

Activate/deactivate IAQS by selecting/deselecting the Air Quality Sensor box.

Related information

Passenger compartment air filter

Automatic climate control

All air entering the passenger compartment
through the climate system air intake is filtered.

The Auto feature automatically controls a number of climate system functions.

•
•
•

Air quality (p. 186)

Filter replacement

Passenger compartment air filter (p. 187)

•

Turning recirculation on and off (p. 194)

The filter must be replaced according to the service schedule for your vehicle. When driving in e.g.,
dusty or industrial areas, the filer may need to be
replaced more often. Consult your Volvo retailer.

Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*
(p. 186)

Related information

•
•

Air quality (p. 186)
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*
(p. 186)
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* (p. 186)
Volvo's service program (p. 472)

The Auto climate button in Climate view

Go to the center display's Climate view.

Tap or press and hold AUTO.
> Auto mode is activated (button lights up)/
deactivated (button is off). Auto mode
automatically controls air recirculation, air
conditioning, and air distribution.
Blower speed and temperature change
depending on how long the button is
pressed.

•
•

Tap: return to previous settings.
Press and hold: change to default settings (level 3 and 72 °F (22 °C).
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 187

CLIMATE
||

Related information

•

Climate system controls in the center display
(p. 189)

Climate system controls
Climate system functions are controlled using
buttons on the center console, the center display and the climate system panel on the rear
side of the tunnel console.

Overview of climate system controls

Climate system controls in the center display
Defroster buttons on the center console
Climate system panel on the rear side of the
tunnel console

Related information

188

•

Climate system controls in the center display
(p. 189)

•
•

Climate control system (p. 178)
Rear climate system controls on the tunnel
console (p. 190)

•
•

Defrosting windows and mirrors (p. 195)
Climate system voice commands (p. 123)

CLIMATE

Climate system controls in the
center display
All climate system functions can be controlled
from the center display's climate bar and Climate view.

Climate bar
The most common climate system functions can
be controlled from the climate bar.

Temperature control for the driver and passenger sides.
Control for heated* and ventilated* driver/
passenger seats and heated steering wheel*.
Button for opening Climate view. The graphic
in the button shows the activated climate
system settings.

Climate view
Tap the center button on the climate bar to
access Climate view, which is divided into the following tabs: Main climate, Rear climate and
Parking climate Toggle between the tabs by
swiping the screen from left to right and by tapping the respective headings.
Main climate
In addition to the climate bar's functions, other
primary climate system functions can also be
controlled from the Main climate tab.

Max, Electric, Rear: controls for defrosting
windows and door mirrors.
AC: air conditioning controls.
Recirc: recirculation controls.
Air distribution controls.
Blower control for the front seats.
AUTO: climate system Auto mode.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 189

CLIMATE
||

Rear climate
All of the climate system functions for the rear
seat can be controlled from the Rear climate
tab.

Rear seat temperature control.
Rear seat heating control*.
Parking climate1
All of the parking climate functions can be controlled from the Parking climate tab.

Rear climate system controls on the
tunnel console
The rear seat climate system functions are controlled from the rear side of the tunnel console.

Related information

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Climate system controls (p. 188)
Defrosting windows and mirrors (p. 195)
Air conditioning (p. 198)
Adjusting air distribution (p. 202)
Setting the temperature (p. 192)
Setting the blower speed (p. 191)
Automatic climate control (p. 187)
Turning steering wheel heating* on and off
(p. 197)

Rear seat heating*

Turning seat heating* on and off (p. 199)

Rear seat blower speed
Rear seat temperature control

Related information

Blower control for the second row of seats.
Blower control for the third row of seats.

1 XC90

190

•
•
•
•

Climate system controls (p. 188)
Turning seat heating* on and off (p. 199)
Setting the blower speed (p. 191)
Setting the temperature (p. 192)

T8 Plug-in Hybrid only.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

CLIMATE

Setting the blower speed

Setting the rear seat blower speed*

The blower can be set to five different automatic
speeds plus Off and Max. The blower speed
can be set separately for the front and rear
seats.

From the front seat

From the rear seat

Setting blower speed for the front seats

Blower control buttons in the Rear climate tab in Climate view

Blower control buttons in Climate view

Go to the center display's Climate view.

Tap the desired blower speed: Off, 1–5 or
Max.
> The blower speed will change and the
button for the selected speed will light up.

NOTE
If the blower is turned off completely, the air
conditioning is disengaged, which may result
in fogging on the windows.

Go to the center display's Climate view.

Go to Rear climate.

Blower controls on the climate panel on the rear side of
the tunnel console

–

Tap the desired blower level: Off or 1–5 on
the climate panel.
> The blower speed will change and the
button for the selected speed will light up.

Tap the desired blower speed: 1–5.
The blower can be turned off for the second
and third row of seats* by tapping 2nd row
climate.
The blower speed for the third row of seats *
is the same as for the second row but can be
turned off separately* by tapping 3rd row
climate.
> The blower speed will change and the
button for the selected speed will light up.

NOTE

•

Blower speed for the rear seat cannot be
set if the front seat blower setting is Off.

•

The climate system will adapt air flow
within each set blower speed, which
means that the blower speed may vary
slightly.

}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 191

CLIMATE
||

Related information

•

Climate system controls in the center display
(p. 189)

•

Rear climate system controls on the tunnel
console (p. 190)

Setting the temperature4
The temperature can be set separately for the
left and right sides of the passenger compartment and for the front and rear seats separately.

Setting the temperature for the front
seats

Temperature control

Set a temperature by:

•
•

Temperature buttons in the climate bar

192

Shown here in Celsius but also applies to Fahrenheit

Tap the right or left side temperature button
in the center display's climate bar to open
the control.

dragging the control to the desired temperature or

tapping +/− to raise/lower the temperature.
> The temperature will change and the new
temperature will be shown in the button.

CLIMATE
Synchronizing the temperature

Setting the rear seat temperature*
From the front seat

Temperature control
Synchronization button on the driver's side temperature
control

Tap the driver's side temperature button to
open the control.

Tap Synchronize temperature .
> The temperature for all of the vehicle's climate zones will be synchronized with the
one set for the driver's side and the synchronization symbol will be displayed in
the temperature button.

Set the temperature by:

Temperature buttons in the Rear climate group in Climate view

•

Go the center display's Climate view.

•

Go to Rear climate.

Tap the left or right side temperature buttons
to open the control.

dragging the control to the desired temperature or

tapping +/− to raise/lower the temperature.
> The temperature will change and the new
temperature will be shown in the button.

Synchronization can be stopped by tapping
Synchronize temperature again or by changing the temperature for the passenger's side or
the rear seat.

}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 193

CLIMATE
||

From the rear seat

•
•

Rear climate system controls on the tunnel
console (p. 190)
Perceived temperature (p. 178)

Turning recirculation on and off
Recirculation can be used to shut out exhaust
fumes, smoke, etc., from the passenger compartment.

Temperature controls on the climate panel on the rear
side of the tunnel console

–

Tap the left or right side's buttons on climate panel to lower/raise the temperature.
> The temperature will change and the climate panel screen will show the new temperature.

Recirculation button in Climate view

Go to Climate view in the center display.

Press Recirc.
> Recirculation is activated (button lights
up)/deactivated (button is off)

NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be speeded up by
selecting a higher/lower temperature than
the actual temperature required.

NOTE

•

If recirculation is on for too long, there is
a risk of condensation forming on the
insides of the windows, especially in winter.

•

Recirculation cannot be deactivated if
max. defroster is being used.

Related information

•
•

194

Climate system controls (p. 188)
Climate system controls in the center display
(p. 189)

CLIMATE

Activating/deactivating the recirculation
timer
With the timer activated, recirculation will switch
off automatically after 20 minutes.
1.

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

Tap Climate.

Activate/deactivate the timer by selecting/
deselecting the box for Recirculation
Timer.

Related information

•

Defrosting windows and mirrors

Models without a heated windshield.

The max. defroster, heated windshield* and
heated rear window/door mirror functions are
used to remove ice or condensation.

–

Using the buttons in the center console
The buttons in the center console offer quick
access to the defroster functions.

Press button (1).
> Max. defroster is activated (button indicator light on)/deactivated (button indicator
light off).

Models with a heated windshield*.
–

On models with the optional heated windshield,
the max. defroster function can only be activated
separately from the Climate view in the center
display.

Press button (1) repeatedly to access the
function's three levels:

•
•

Activate windshield heating
Activate windshield heating and max.
defroster

•

Climate system controls in the center display
(p. 189)

Deactivated
> The windshield heating is activated (button indicator light on)/deactivated (button
indicator light off).

NOTE
Max. defroster starts after a slight delay to
avoid a brief increase in blower speed if the
heated windshield function has been deactivated by pressing the button twice in quick
succession.

Center console buttons

Button for the heated windshield* and max.
defroster.
Button for the heated rear window and door
mirrors.

Heated rear window and door mirrors
–

Press button (2).
> Heating for the rear window/door mirrors
is activated (button indicator light on)/
deactivated (button indicator light off).

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 195

CLIMATE
||

From the center display's Climate view

Activating/deactivating windshield heating*

Activate/deactivate max. defroster

Activating/deactivating rear window and
door mirror heating

Windshield heating button in Climate view
Max. defroster button in Climate view

Go to Climate view in the center display.

Rear window/door mirror heating button in Climate view

Go to Climate view in the center display.

Tap Max.
> Max. defroster is activated (button lights
up)/deactivated (button is off).

Tap Electric.
> Windshield heating is activated (button
lights up)/deactivated (button is off).

Tap Rear.
> Rear window/door mirror heating is activated (button lights up)/deactivated (button is off).

Max. defroster overrides automatic climate
control and recirculation, and activates the
air conditioning, changes blower speed to
55 and the temperature to HI5.
When max. defroster is deactivated, the
climate system returns to the previous
settings.

196

NOTE

•

Triangular areas at the far sides of the
windshield are not heated electrically and
will take slightly longer to defrost/de-ice.

•

The heated windshield may affect the
performance/range of e.g., transponders
used to automatically pay highway tolls or
other communication equipment.

Automatically activating/deactivating
the defrosting function when the engine
is started
The rear window/door mirror/windshield heating*
can be set to start automatically when the engine
is started.
1.

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view and select Climate.

In models with the 4-zone climate system*, front seats only.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

CLIMATE
2.

Activate/deactivate the respective defroster
functions when the engine is started by
selecting/deselecting the boxes for Auto
Electric Front Defroster and Auto Electric
Rear Defroster.

The heating function will switch off automatically
when the window/mirror is sufficiently warm and
the ice/condensation has disappeared.

Turning steering wheel heating* on
and off
The steering wheel can be heated electrically for
added comfort in cold weather.

Activating/deactivating steering wheel
heating

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Tap the steering wheel heating button
repeatedly to select one of four levels: Off,
High, Middle or Low.
> The level changes and is displayed in the
button.

Automatic steering wheel heating
The automatic function starts heating the steering wheel automatically when the engine is
started if the temperature is sufficiently cold. This
feature can be activated/deactivated.

Related information

•
•

Climate system controls (p. 188)
Climate system controls in the center display
(p. 189)

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

Defrosting windows and mirrors (p. 195)

Tap Climate.

Air conditioning (p. 198)

Under Auto Steering Wheel Heating
Level, select Off, Low, Middle or High to
activate/deactivate the automatic function.

Turning recirculation on and off (p. 194)
Adjusting air distribution (p. 202)
Setting the blower speed (p. 191)
Automatic climate control (p. 187)

Buttons for heated steering wheel and seats in the climate bar

Turning front seat ventilation* on and off
(p. 200)

Turning steering wheel heating* on and off
(p. 197)

Tap the driver side steering wheel and seat
button in the center display's climate bar to
open the steering wheel and seat heating
controls.

Related information

•
•

•

Climate system controls (p. 188)
Climate system controls in the center display
(p. 189)
Steering wheel (p. 160)

If the vehicle is not equipped with the
optional heated or ventilated seats, the button for steering wheel heating will be directly
accessible in the climate bar.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 197

CLIMATE

Air conditioning

NOTE

The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies the
air in the passenger compartment.

•

Activating/deactivating the main air
conditioning unit

For the air conditioning to function optimally, close the side windows and laminated panoramic roof*

•

The air conditioning cannot be activated
if the blower is set to Off.

For the air conditioning to function optimally,
close the side windows and laminated panoramic roof*.

NOTE
Air conditioning for the third row of seats cannot be activated if the main air conditioning
unit or the air conditioning for the second row
of seats* is/are deactivated.

Related information
Activating/deactivating the air
conditioning unit for the third row seats

•

Climate system controls in the center display
(p. 189)

Air conditioning button in Climate view

198

Go to Climate view in the center display.

Tap AC.
> The air conditioning is activated (button
lights up)/deactivated (button is off).

Air conditioning button in the Rear climate tab in Climate view

Go to Climate view in the center display.

Go to Rear climate.

Tap 3rd row climate.
> The air conditioning is activated (button
lights up)/deactivated (button is off).

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

CLIMATE

Turning seat heating* on and off

The seats can be heated for added comfort in
cold weather.

Activating/deactivating front seat
heating

Tap the seat heating button repeatedly to
select one of four levels: Off, High, Middle
or Low.
> The level changes and is displayed in the
button.

From the rear seat
With the 4-zone climate system*

Activating/deactivating rear seat
heating
From the front seat*

Seat heating indicator and control on the climate panel
on the rear side of the tunnel console

–
Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate bar

Tap the left or right side steering wheel and
seat button in the center display's climate
bar to open the steering wheel and seat
heating controls.
If the vehicle is not equipped with the
optional heated steering wheel or ventilated
seats, the button for seat heating will be
directly accessible in the climate bar.

Temperature buttons for Rear climate in Climate view

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

Tap Climate.

Under Auto Driver Seat Heating Level and
Auto Passenger Seat Heating Level,
select Off, Low, Middle or High to activate/
deactivate and to select the desired level.

Tap repeatedly on the left or right side seat
heating buttons on the climate panel on the
rear side of the tunnel console to select one
of four levels: Off, High, Middle or Low.
> The level changes and is displayed on the
screen in the climate panel.

NOTE
Rear seat heating switches off automatically
after 15 minutes.

}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 199

CLIMATE
||

Automatically activating/deactivating
the seat heating function when the
engine is started
The seat heating* can be set to start automatically when the engine is started.
The automatic function starts heating the seats
when the ambient temperature is sufficiently cold.
1.

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

Tap Climate.

Under Auto Driver Seat Heating Level and
Auto Passenger Seat Heating Level,
select Off, Low, Middle or High to activate/
deactivate the automatic function and select
a level for the driver's and passenger's seats.

Turning front seat ventilation* on
and off

Activating/deactivating front seat
ventilation

Seat ventilation can be used e.g., to help remove
dampness from the seat occupant's clothing.
The ventilation system consists of fans in the
seats and backrests that draw air through the
seat upholstery. The cooling effect increases as
the air in the passenger compartment becomes
cooler. This feature can be activated when the
engine is running and it monitors the seat's temperature, sunlight in the passenger compartment
and the ambient temperature.
Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate bar

Related information

•
•

•

Climate system controls (p. 188)

If the vehicle is not equipped with the
optional heated steering wheel/seats, the
button for seat ventilation will be directly
accessible in the climate bar.

Climate system controls in the center display
(p. 189)
Rear climate system controls on the tunnel
console (p. 190)
2.

200

Tap the left or right side steering wheel and
seat button in the center display's climate
bar to open the steering wheel and seat controls.

Tap the seat ventilation button repeatedly to
select one of four levels: Off, High, Middle
or Low.
> The level changes and is displayed in the
button.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

CLIMATE

NOTE
Seat ventilation cannot be started if the temperature in the passenger compartment is too
low.

Air distribution
The incoming air is distributed through a number
of different vents in the passenger compartment.

Air distribution overview

For use over extended periods, the setting
Low is recommended.

Related information

•
•

Climate system controls (p. 188)
Climate system controls in the center display
(p. 189)

Location of the air vents

Four vents on the dashboard and one on
each of the pillars between the front and rear
doors, two vents on the rear side of the tunnel console and one vent on each of the pillars behind the rear seats

Air distribution with a 4-zone climate system

Adjustable air vents
There are 6, 8* or 10* adjustable air vents in the
passenger compartment.

Related information

•
•
•
•
•

Climate control system (p. 178)
Adjusting air distribution (p. 202)
Opening/closing/directing air vents (p. 202)
Air distribution table (p. 204)
Automatic climate control (p. 187)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 201

CLIMATE

Opening/closing/directing air vents

Directing air flow

Some of the passenger compartment air vents
can be open/closed/directed individually.

Adjusting air distribution
Air distribution can be adjusted manually.

Direct the dashboard and door pillar outer air
vents toward the side windows to defrost.
Direct the vents into the passenger compartment
to help maintain a comfortable temperature in
warm weather.

Opening/closing air vents

Air flow control 6

–

Move the control from side to side or up/
down to direct the flow of air from the vent.

Air distribution buttons in Climate view

Defrost the windshield

Related information

•
•
•
Air vent thumb wheel 6

–

Turn the thumb wheel to open/close the air
flow from the vent.
The more of the white line on the thumb
wheel that is visible, the greater the air flow.

202

The illustration is generic; its design varies, depending on its location.

Air vents in the dashboard and center console

Air distribution (p. 201)
Adjusting air distribution (p. 202)

Floor air vents

Air distribution table (p. 204)
1.

Go to Climate view in the center display.

Tap one or more of the air distribution buttons to open/close the corresponding air
flow.
> Air distribution changes and the buttons
light up or go out.

CLIMATE

Related information

•
•
•
•

Air distribution (p. 201)
Opening/closing/directing air vents (p. 202)
Air distribution table (p. 204)
Climate system controls in the center display
(p. 189)

203

CLIMATE

Air distribution table
Air distribution can be adjusted manually.
Air distribution

Use

If all air distribution buttons are deselected in manual mode, the climate system
will revert to automatic mode.

204

Main air flow from the defroster vents, some flow from the other vents.

To remove ice and condensation (with moderate
blower speed).

Main air flow from the dashboard vents, some flow from the other vents.

For best comfort in hot weather.

Main air flow from the floor vents, some flow from the other vents.

For heating/cooling near the floor.

CLIMATE

Air distribution

Use

Main air flow from the defroster and dashboard vents, some flow from the other
vents.

For best comfort in hot and dry weather.

Main air flow from the defroster and floor vents, some flow from the other vents.

For best comfort and defrosting in cold or humid conditions.

Main air flow from the dashboard and floor vents, some flow from the other
vents.

For good comfort in sunny, cool weather.

Main air flow from the defroster, dashboard and floor vents.

For cooler air toward the floor in warm weather or
warmer air upward in cold weather.

Related information

•
•

•

Climate system controls in the center display
(p. 189)

•

Adjusting air distribution (p. 202)

Air distribution (p. 201)
Opening/closing/directing air vents (p. 202)

For cooling or heat to the floor.

205

LOADING AND STORAGE

Cargo space
The vehicle has flexible cargo capacity that
makes it possible to load and secure large
objects.
By folding down the backrests in the second and
third rows* of seats, the cargo capacity of the
vehicle increases considerably. To make loading
easier, the rear section of the vehicle can be
raised and lowered using the pneumatic suspension*. Use the load anchoring eyelets or the grocery bag holder to secure objects and the cargo
compartment cover helps conceal the load.

Passenger compartment storage
spaces
The following is an overview of the passenger
compartment and its storage spaces.

Front seats

Storage spaces, cup holders and 12-volt socket in the
tunnel console

The jack* and tools can be found under the cargo
compartment's floor.

Second row of seats

Related information

•
•
•
•
•
•

Loading (p. 215)
Cargo compartment cover* (p. 221)
Cargo net (p. 217)

Storage spaces in the door panel, near the steering
wheel, the glove compartment and the sun visors

Grocery bag holder (p. 217)
Load anchoring eyelets (p. 220)
Steel cargo grid* (p. 219)

Storage compartments in the door panels, cupholders in
the center seat's backrest, storage pockets on the rear
side of the front seat backrest, and 12-volt socket on
the rear side of the tunnel console

208

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

LOADING AND STORAGE

Third row of seats

Using the glove compartment

Locking the glove compartment

The glove compartment provides a lockable storage compartment for small items.

This can be done from the center display's
Function or Settings view:

•

Go to Function view and tap Private
locking unlocked.

•

Go to Settings view and select My Car
Locking and Unlocking Feedback. Tap
the Private Locking box.
> A pop-up window will appear.

NOTE
Storage space and cup holder in the side panel and the
storage space between the seats

WARNING
Always stow loose items such as cell phones,
cameras, remote controls, etc. in the glove
compartment or other storage spaces to help
keep them from becoming projectiles in the
event of sudden braking, etc.

Related information

•
•
•
•

Tunnel console (p. 210)
Using the glove compartment (p. 209)
Electrical sockets (p. 212)
Sun visors (p. 211)

The glove compartment and opening button on the center console

The owner's manual and maps can be kept here.
There are also holders for pens on the inside of
the glove compartment door.

Opening the glove compartment
–

Press the glove compartment button on the
center console.
> The glove compartment door will open.

A security code has to be selected the first
time this function is used. This code is used
to reset the function if an attempt has been
made to deactivate private locking using an
incorrect code.
Keep this code in a safe place.
2.

Enter the code to be used to unlock the
glove compartment and tap Confirm.
> The glove compartment will be locked.

Locking/unlocking the glove
compartment
The glove compartment can be locked when e.g.,
the vehicle is in a workshop for service, etc. When
the private locking function is activated, the tailgate is also locked.

}}
209

LOADING AND STORAGE
||

Unlocking the glove compartment

Tunnel console

The tunnel console, located between the front
seats, contains a 12-volt electrical socket, cup
holders and storage spaces, etc.

This function can be deactivated from the
center display's Function or Settings view:

•

Go to Function view and tap Private
locking locked.

•

Go to settings and select My Car
Locking and Unlocking Feedback.
Deselect the Private Locking box.
> A pop-up window will appear.

Specify the code to be used to lock the glove
compartment and tap Confirm.
> The glove compartment will be unlocked.

Using the glove compartment as a
cooler*
The glove compartment can be used to cool
drinks or food and the cooling feature functions
when the climate system is active (i.e., when the
ignition is in mode II or when the engine is running).

Cooling activated
Cooling deactivated
–

Activate/deactivate cooling by moving the
control as far as possible toward the passenger compartment/glove compartment.

Related information

•

Passenger compartment storage spaces
(p. 208)

•

Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 244)

Storage space
Storage space with cup holders for the driver
and passenger and a 12-volt socket
Storage space and USB/AUX sockets under
the armrest
Climate control panel for the rear seats*

NOTE
One of the alarm sensors, which is sensitive
to metallic objects, is located under the tunnel
console cup holders. Avoid leaving coins,
keys, etc., in the cup holders because they
may inadvertently trigger the alarm.

210

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

LOADING AND STORAGE

Related information

•

•
•
•

Passenger compartment storage spaces
(p. 208)

Sun visors
There are vanity mirrors with card holders on the
upper sides of the sun visors.

Electrical sockets (p. 212)
Alarm (p. 226)
Rear climate system controls on the tunnel
console (p. 190)

Lighted vanity mirror and card holder

The vanity mirror lighting comes on when the mirror is opened.
The vanity mirror's frame has a holder for e.g., a
card or ticket.

Related information

•

Passenger compartment storage spaces
(p. 208)

211

LOADING AND STORAGE

Electrical sockets
There are two 12-volt sockets in the tunnel console, a 120-volt socket on the rear side of the
tunnel console, and one 12-volt socket in the
cargo area*.

120-volt socket in the tunnel console1

Using the socket
1. Pull down the cover over the socket and plug
in the device.
> The socket's indicator light will indicate its
status. The socket can only provide electrical current when the light is green.

WARNING

•

Be sure to place any devices connected
to the socket safely so that they do not
become projectiles in the event of a sudden stop and injure the occupants of the
vehicle.

Disconnect the device by pulling its plug, not
its cord.

•

Be aware that connected devices may
generate heat and become very hot.

Pull up the cover over the socket when it is not in
use.

•

Only connect devices that function correctly and are free from defects. These
devices should be intended for use in a
120-volt, 60Hz socket with a plug
intended for the socket in the vehicle and
be UL-approved (or the equivalent
thereof).

•

Never let the device, its plug or the
socket itself come in contact with fluids
of any kind. Never touch or use the
socket if it appears to be damaged or
wet.

•

Never connect multiple plugs, adapters or
extension cords to the socket. This could
override the socket's safety functions.

•

Never let children play or tamper with the
socket, or attempt to insert any objects
into it. Never leave children unattended in
the vehicle when the socket is active.

•

Never try to modify or repair the 120-volt
socket. This should only be done by a

CAUTION

120-volt socket in the tunnel console for the second
row of seats

This socket is intended for 120-volt devices such
as laptops, chargers, etc.
The max. current provided is 150W.

1 Certain

212

•

Do not connect devices with large or
heavy plugs that could come loose while
driving.

•

Do not use devices that can cause interference with the vehicle's radio receiver
or electrical system.

models only.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

LOADING AND STORAGE
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Failure to follow the points above could result
in electrical shock and/or serious injury.

Status indication
An LED (Light Emitting Diode) on the socket
indicates its status:

Status indicator light

Socket status

Action

Steady green light

The socket is providing current to a connected device.

None.

Flashing orange light

The socket's voltage converter is too hot (the connected device draws too much
current, etc. or the temperature in the passenger compartment is very high).

Unplug the device, let the converter cool down
and plug in the device again.

The connected device draws too much current (constantly or currently) or is not
functioning properly.

None. The device should not be plugged into the
socket.

The socket has not detected a plugged in device.

Be sure the device is correctly plugged into the
socket.

The socket is not active.

Put the vehicle's ignition in at least mode I.

The socket has been active but has been deactivated.

Start the engine and/or charge the start battery.

Indicator light off

If a problem persists, have the socket checked by
a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

}}
213

LOADING AND STORAGE
||

12-volt socket in the tunnel console

phones. For the sockets to provide electrical current, the ignition must be in at least mode I.

12-volt socket in the cargo area

WARNING
Always keep the sockets covered when not in
use.

NOTE

12-volt socket in the tunnel console for the front seats

Options and accessories such as monitors,
MP3 players and cell phones that are connected to the 12-volt sockets may be activated by the climate system even if the ignition is completely switched off or when the
vehicle is locked if preconditioning is started
by a timer.

12-volt socket in the cargo area

Fold down the cover to access the socket. Max.
current provided is 10 A (120 W).

For this reason, disconnect these devices
from the sockets when they are not in use to
help avoid battery drain.

NOTE
The 12-volt socket in the cargo area provides
electrical current even when the ignition is
switched off. Using the socket while the
engine is not running will drain the battery.

CAUTION

12-volt socket in the tunnel console for the second row
of seats

The electrical sockets can be used for 12-volt
devices such as monitors, MP3 players and cell

214

Max. current provided is 10 A (120 W) if one
socket is used at a time. If both of the sockets in the tunnel console are used at the
same time, the max. current provided per
socket is 7.5 A (90 W)
If a tire sealing system's compressor is being
used, no other device should be connected to
any of the other sockets while the compressor is operating.

Related information

•

Passenger compartment storage spaces
(p. 208)

•

Ignition modes (p. 370)

LOADING AND STORAGE

Loading
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is
determined by factors such as the number of
passengers, the amount of cargo, the weight of
any accessories that may be installed, etc.

impede the function of the Whiplash
Protection System (WHIPS).

•

Unstable loads can be secured to the load
anchoring eyelets with straps or web lashings to help keep them from shifting.

•

Stop the engine and apply the parking brake
when loading or unloading long objects. The
gear selector can be knocked out of position
by long loads, which could set the vehicle in
motion.

WARNING

•
•

The vehicle's driving characteristics may
change depending on the weight and distribution of the load.

•

A 44-pound (20 kg) object produces a
force of 2,200 pounds (1,000 kg) in a
head-on collision at 30 mph (50 km/h).

•

The cargo area and rear seat should not
be loaded to a level higher than 2 in.
(5 cm) below the upper edge of the rear
side windows. Objects placed higher than
this level could impede the function of
the Inflatable Curtain.

Tailgate opening button on the lighting panel

Open the tailgate by pressing the button on the
button on the
lighting panel, pressing the
remote key or by using the optional foot movement sensor under the rear bumper.

Loading recommendations

•

Load objects in the cargo compartment
against the backrest whenever possible.

•

If the backrests of the second row seats are
folded down, they should not be in contact
with the front seat backrests. This could

An accessory trailer hitch can be purchased from a Volvo retailer.

Stop the engine, put the gear selector in
P, and apply the parking brake when
loading or unloading long objects.

WARNING

•

Cover sharp edges on long loads to help
prevent injury to occupants. Secure the
load to help prevent shifting during sudden stops.

•

Always secure large and heavy objects
with a seat belt or cargo retaining straps.

•

Always secure the load to help prevent it
from moving in the event of sudden stops.

•

Switch off the engine, apply the parking
brake and put the gear selector in P
when loading and unloading the vehicle.

Raising/lowering the rear-end of the
vehicle*
Using the buttons on the read edge of the cargo
compartment, the rear-end of the vehicle (the
level of the cargo compartment floor) can be
raised or lowered for easier loading or to make
attaching a trailer2 simpler.

}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 215

LOADING AND STORAGE
||

Extra loading space

•

The rear seat backrests can be folded down to
added cargo space or for transporting long
objects.

The vehicle's wind resistance and fuel consumption will increase with the size of the
load.

•

Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid starts, fast cornering and hard braking.

Roof loads
Load carriers are available as Volvo accessories.
Observe the following points when in use:

•

Level control buttons on the rear edge of the cargo
compartment

Volvo-approved removable roof racks are
designed to carry the maximum allowable
roof load for this vehicle (see the article
"Weights" for specific information).

The level control consists of two buttons: one to
raise and one to lower the rear-end of the vehicle.

•

Press and hold the respective buttons until the
desired level has been reached.

Never exceed the rack manufacturer's weigh
limits.

•

Avoid single-point loads. Distribute loads
evenly.

•

Place heavier cargo at the bottom of the
load.

•

Secure the cargo correctly with appropriate
tie-down equipment.

•

Check periodically that the load carriers and
load are properly secured.

•

Remember that the vehicle's center of gravity
and handling change when you carry a load
on the roof.

NOTE
The level cannot be adjusted if a door or the
hood are open (this does not apply to the tailgate).

WARNING
Be sure that the entire area under the vehicle
is completely unobstructed before lowering
the level.

216

•

To avoid damaging your vehicle and to
achieve maximum safety when driving, we
recommend using the load carriers that Volvo
has developed especially for your vehicle.

See the article "Weights" for information about
the maximum permissible load that can be transported on the roof.

Related information

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Folding the second row backrests (p. 172)
Folding the third row backrests (p. 175)
Weights (p. 525)
Cargo net (p. 217)
Cargo compartment cover* (p. 221)
Load anchoring eyelets (p. 220)
Whiplash protection system (p. 63)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

LOADING AND STORAGE

Grocery bag holder

On the sides of the cargo compartment

The grocery bag holders (hooks) and elastic
strap help keep shopping bags in place.

Cargo net
The cargo net helps protect passengers from
objects in the cargo compartment in the event of
a sudden stop or hard braking.

Under the cargo compartment floor3

The cargo net is attached at four points.

There are also two fold-out holders in the side
panels, one on each side.

CAUTION

There are two grocery bag holders and an elastic
strap4 in the hatch that is part of the cargo area
floor. The strap can be attached in four positions.
Open the hatch to access the grocery bag holders and attach the elastic strap. Grocery bags
with handles can also be hung on the hooks.

3 5-seat models only.
4 Can be replaced by ordering

a new one from a Volvo retailer.

The grocery bag holders (hooks) are only
intended to hold weights less than approx.
11 lbs (5 kg).

Related information

•
•
•

Cargo net (p. 217)
Steel cargo grid* (p. 219)

Cargo net

The cargo net can be mounted in two positions:

•

Rear mounting: behind the second row seats'
backrests.

•

Front mounting: behind the front seats' backrests.

Cargo compartment cover* (p. 221)

}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 217

LOADING AND STORAGE
||

WARNING

•

Objects in the cargo compartment should
always be securely anchored.

•

The nets upper hooks must be securely
inserted into the ceiling mounting points
and the lower spring hooks must be
securely hooked onto the cargo anchoring eyelets.

•

A damaged net must never be used.

Insert the other upper hook into the ceiling
mounting point on the opposite side. It is
spring-loaded to make mounting easier.
Press each of the hooks as far forward into
the respective mounting points as possible.

Rear mounting: with the upper hooks
inserted into the rear ceiling mounting points,
hook the lower straps through the load
anchoring eyelets on the floor of the cargo
compartment as show in the illustration.

Attaching
1.

Fold out the cargo net and fold out the upper
rod. Be sure it locks in position.

Insert one of the net's upper hooks into the
front or rear ceiling mounting point with the
net's lower straps' locks facing you.
Rear mounting

Front mounting

Front mounting: with the upper hooks
inserted into the front ceiling mounting
points, hook the lower straps through the
eyelets on the front seat rails as shown in the
illustration. Attaching the net is easier if the
front seat backrests are upright and the seats
are moved slightly forward.
Adjust the front seats so that they only touch
the net but do not apply pressure to it.

218

LOADING AND STORAGE

CAUTION
Pressure from the front seats against the
cargo net could damage the net and/or its
brackets.
5.

Pull the lower straps taut.

Removing and storing
1.

Reduce tension on the net by pressing the
button on the lower straps' respective locks
and allow some slack on both sides.

Press in the catches and release both of the
straps' hooks.

Remove the upper hooks from the ceiling
mounting points.

Press the red button on the upper rod to
allow it to fold.

Fold and roll up the net.

Store the net under the cargo compartment floor.

Steel cargo grid*

Mounting

Your vehicle can be equipped with a steel grid
that helps prevent objects in the cargo area from
moving forward into the passenger compartment.

Fold down the rear seats (second row of
seats in 7-seat models) and lift in the steel
grid through one of the rear doors or the tailgate. The curved (convex) side of the grid
should face toward the cargo compartment
and the hooks on each side of the grid
should face upward. The mounting brackets
and plastic sleeves are not needed in this
step.

Press one of the grid's hooks into the larger
part of the opening in the ceiling attachment
point (1) as shown in the illustration.

Grasp the grid near the hook and move it
toward the smaller opening (2).
> This secures the hook in the attachment
point.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the hook on the
opposite side of the grid.

The steel grid is made up of the grid itself and
two separate mounting brackets. Each of the
brackets has a screw cover and there are two
plastic sleeves for the grid.

WARNING

•

No one should ever be allowed to remain
in the cargo compartment when the vehicle is moving.

•

The steel grid may only be used in the
rear position described in this article. The
ceiling attachment points above the front
seats are not intended to anchor the
steel grid.

•

The third row of seats (7-seat models*
only): these seats must be folded down
when the steel grid is mounted in the
vehicle.

•

After being mounted, be sure that the
steel grid is securely anchored in place.

Related information

•
•
•
•

Cargo compartment cover* (p. 221)
Load anchoring eyelets (p. 220)
Steel cargo grid* (p. 219)
Loading (p. 215)

}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 219

LOADING AND STORAGE
||

Related information

•
•
•
•

Attach the mounting bracket's hook through
the cargo anchoring eyelet near the floor of
the cargo compartment and insert the threaded section of the bracket through the grid's
lower attachment hole (1).

Slide the plastic sleeve onto the threaded
section of the of the mounting bracket with
the sleeve's flange turned upward and press
it down through the hole. Screw the screw
cover into place until its underside is approx.
0.2 in. (5 mm) from the grid (2).

Repeat steps 5 and 6 for the opposite side.

Center the grid and tighten both mounting
brackets alternately until the grid is held
securely in place.

Removing
Perform the steps above in reverse order. The
hooks can be removed before the plastic sleeves
are removed from the holes in the grid.

220

Cargo net (p. 217)

Load anchoring eyelets

Load anchoring eyelets (p. 220)

The eyelets in the cargo compartment can be
folded out to secure objects with straps, a net,
etc.

Loading (p. 215)

Load anchoring eyelets

Cargo compartment cover* (p. 221)

WARNING

•

Cover sharp edges on long loads to help
prevent injury to occupants. Secure the
load to help prevent shifting during sudden stops.

•

Always secure large and heavy objects
with a seat belt or cargo retaining straps.

•

Always secure the load to help prevent it
from moving in the event of sudden stops.

•

Switch off the engine, apply the parking
brake and put the gear selector in P
when loading and unloading the vehicle.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

LOADING AND STORAGE

Related information

•

Loading (p. 215)

Cargo compartment cover*

Use

The cover can be used to conceal objects in the
cargo area.

The cover can be used in two positions: fully
open to completely cover the cargo compartment
or partially retracted to make it easier to reach
farther into the cargo compartment.

Installing the cover5

Fully open

With the cover retracted, press the end piece
on one side of the cargo area cover into the
retaining bracket in the side panel of the
cargo area.
Do the same on the opposite side.
Press both sides of the cover, one at a time,
until they click into place.
> The red mark will no longer be visible.
Check that both ends of the cover are
securely locked in place.

5 XC90

Excellence only: the cover is permanently mounted and cannot be retracted or removed.

Third row seats, 7-seat models*: hang the
seat belt latches in the hooks provided in the
side panels. For 5-seat models, see the following step.
With the cover retracted, grasp its handle
and pull it out completely.
Press the attaching pins on the rear corners
of the cover into the grooves in the side panels and release the cover.
> The cover is now fixed in the fully open
position.

}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 221

LOADING AND STORAGE
||

Partially retracted

WARNING
7-seat models: remove the cargo compartment cover completely from the vehicle if one
or both of the third row seats will be occupied.
Retracting the cover5
From the fully open position:
–

With the cover retracted, grasp its handle
and pull it so that it is above the cargo compartment's side panels until it is fully open.
Press the attaching pins on the rear corners
of the cover into the grooves in the side panels. If the cover is already fully open see the
next step.
With the cover completely pulled out, press it
upward lightly and allow it to retract slowly.
> Allow the cover to retract until it stops in
the partially retracted position.

If you are holding something in one of your
hands:
From the fully open position, push the cover's
handle slightly upward with e.g., your elbow.
>
The cover will close until it reaches the
partially retracted position.

222

From the partially retracted position:
–

Grasp the handle and lift it slightly to release
the attaching pins from their grooves. Pull
the cover to the fully open position.
> Allow the cover to retract completely.

To fully open the cover from the partially open
position:

Removing the cover5

Grasp the handle and pull out the cover to
the fully open position.

With the cover retracted, press the button on
one of the cover's ends and lift out that end.

Let the cover retract slightly and press the
handle slightly downward.
> The cover will be secured n the fully open
position.

For 7-seat models: Release the seat belt
latches from the hooks in the side panels.
For 5-seat models, see the following step.

Carefully lift the cover up/out.
> The other end will release automatically.
Lift the cover out of the cargo compartment.

Avoid placing any objects on the cover when it is
open.

5 XC90

Lift the cover's handle and pull it rearward
slightly to release the attaching pins from
their grooves. Allow the cover to retract.

Excellence only: the cover is permanently mounted and cannot be retracted or removed.

LOADING AND STORAGE

Related information

•
•
•
•

Cargo net (p. 217)
Steel cargo grid* (p. 219)
Loading (p. 215)
Load anchoring eyelets (p. 220)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 223

LOCKS AND ALARM

Locks and remote keys
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked in various ways and there are several types of remote
keys that can be used.

Locking/unlocking/opening/closing
The vehicle can be locked/unlocked from the
passenger compartment, using the buttons on
the remote key or by using the optional Passive
Entry system where it is only necessary to have a
key in your possession to lock or unlock the
doors.
On models equipped with a power tailgate*, the
tailgate can be opened/closed by moving your
foot under a sensor* beneath the rear bumper.
If for any reason a remote key does not function
properly, it may be necessary to replace its batteries but the vehicle can always be locked or
unlocked manually using the remote key's
detachable key blade.

Remote key
The remote key does not have to be physically
handled in order to start the engine because the
vehicle is equipped with the standard Passive
Start system (the key only needs to be in the
front part of the passenger compartment). If the
vehicle is equipped with the optional Passive
Entry system that enables keyless entry and start,
the key can be anywhere in the vehicle when the
engine is started.

226

Models with Passive Entry* also have an extra,
smaller key without buttons called a Key Tag.
Additional keys can be ordered from a Volvo
retailer.

Related information

•
•
•
•
•
•

Immobilizer (p. 231)
Alarm (p. 226)
Child safety locks (p. 228)
Remote key (p. 235)
Foot movement tailgate operation* (p. 238)
Locking/unlocking from inside the vehicle
(p. 242)

•

Locking/unlocking from outside the vehicle
(p. 243)

•
•

Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 244)
Starting the engine (p. 372)

Alarm
The alarm system provides a warning if an
attempt is made to break into the vehicle.
The following conditions will trigger the alarm:

•
•
•

a door/hood/tailgate are opened
the battery is disconnected
the alarm siren is disconnected

If a problem is detected in the alarm system, a
message will be displayed in the instrument
panel.
Do not attempt to repair any of the components
in the alarm system yourself; this could affect the
insurance policy on the vehicle. Contact a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

LOCKS AND ALARM

Arming the alarm
–

Lock the vehicle by pressing the remote
key's lock button, pressing the outer indentation for locking on one of the door handles1
or by pressing the tailgate's rubberized pressure plate1.

If the door that triggered the alarm is left open,
the alarm cycle will be repeated 10 times.

Alarm indicator
A red indicator light on the upper side of the
dashboard shows the alarm's status:

Related information

•

Automatically arming/disarming the alarm
(p. 228)

•

Deactivating the alarm without a functioning
remote key (p. 228)

If the vehicle is equipped with a power tailgate*, the button on the lower edge of the
tailgate can also be used to lock the vehicle
and arm the alarm.

Disarming the alarm
–

Unlock the vehicle by pressing the remote
key's unlock button, pressing the pressuresensitive area on the inside of one of the
door handles1 or by pressing the tailgate's
rubberized pressure plate1.

Turning off a triggered (sounding)
alarm
–

Press the remote key's unlock button or put
the ignition in mode I by turning the start
knob to START and releasing it.

Alarm signals
The following occurs if the alarm has been triggered:

•

A siren will sound for 30 seconds or until the
alarm is turned off

•

All turn signals flash for 5 minutes or until
the alarm is turned off

•
•
•

Indicator off: the alarm is disarmed
Indicator flashes once every two seconds:
the alarm is armed
Indicator flashes quickly after the alarm has
been disarmed until the ignition has been put
in mode I (turn the start knob to START and
release it): the alarm has been triggered

Models withe the optional Passive Entry only.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 227

LOCKS AND ALARM

Automatically arming/disarming the
alarm

Deactivating the alarm without a
functioning remote key

Automatically arming the alarm helps prevent
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without alarm
protection.

If the remote key is not functioning properly, the
alarm can be turned off and the vehicle can be
started as follows:

If the vehicle has been unlocked with the remote
key (and the alarm has been disarmed) but no
door or the tailgate has been opened within
2 minutes, the vehicle will automatically relock
and the alarm will re-arm.

Unlock and open the driver's door with the
detachable key blade.
> This will trigger the alarm.

In certain markets, the alarm will be re-armed
automatically after a slight delay after the driver's
door has been opened and closed without being
locked.

Child safety locks
Child safety locks help prevent children from
inadvertently opening one of the rear doors from
inside the vehicle.

Electronic* activation/deactivation
The electronic child safety locks can be activated/deactivated as long as the ignition is not
completely switched off and this can be done for
up to two minutes after the engine has been
switched off if no door has been opened.
To activate:

Related information

•
•

Alarm (p. 226)
Deactivating the alarm without a functioning
remote key (p. 228)

Location of the back-up key reader in the cup holder

Place the remote key on the back-up key
reader in the tunnel console's cup holder.

Turn the start knob to START and release it.
> The alarm will turn off.

Related information

•
•
•
•

228

Alarm (p. 226)

Child safety lock button on the driver door control panel

Switch on the ignition or start the engine.

Detachable key blade (p. 237)
Starting the engine (p. 372)
Automatically arming/disarming the alarm
(p. 228)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

LOCKS AND ALARM
2.

Press the button on the driver's door control
panel.
> Rear child lock Activated will be displayed in the instrument panel and the
indicator light in the button will illuminate
to show that the child safety locking function is activated.

Manual activation/deactivation

Related information

•
•

Detachable key blade (p. 237)
Ignition modes (p. 370)

While the child safety locks are activated:

•

the rear door windows can only be opened
from the driver door control panel

•

the rear doors cannot be opened from the
inside

To deactivate:

Manual child safety locks in the rear doors

–

Press the button in the driver door control
panel.
> Rear child lock Deactivated will be displayed in the instrument panel and the
indicator light in the button will go out to
show that the child safety locking function
is deactivated.

When the ignition is switched off, the current setting for the child safety locks will be stored. If the
locks were activated at that time, they will continue to be activated when the ignition is
switched on again.

Use the detachable key blade in the remote
key to adjust these controls.
The rear doors can only be opened from the
outside.
The rear doors can be opened from the
inside or the outside.

NOTE

•

Each control on the respective doors
control that door only, not both doors.

•

There are no manual child safety locks on
models equipped with the electronic
option.

229

LOCKS AND ALARM

Antenna locations for the start and
lock system

WARNING
People with implanted pacemakers should not
allow the pacemaker to come closer than
9 inches (22 cm) to any of the Passive Entry
system's antennas. This is to help prevent
interference between the pacemaker and the
Passive Entry system.

The vehicle is equipped with a keyless2 start and
lock system that requires a number of antennas
located at various points in the vehicle.

Related information

•
•

Remote key (p. 235)
Remote key's range (p. 235)

Start and lock system type
designations
The following information contains type designations for the start and lock system.

Alarm system
USA FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3)
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3)

Location of the antennas

Under the cup holders in the front section of
the tunnel console
In the upper front section of the driver side
rear door2
In the upper front section of the passenger
side rear door2
In the center of the rear seat backrest2,3

2
3

230

This device is subject to the following conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.

Remote keys (Passive entry/Passive
start*)
USA
Volvo Standard Key FCC ID: YGOHUF8423
Volvo Tag ID FCC ID: YGOHUF8432
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:

Vehicles with the optional Passive Entry system only.
In a seven-seat model, the antenna is located between the seats where the backrest and seat cushion meet.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

LOCKS AND ALARM
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Any changes or modification not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate this
equipment.
Canada
Volvo Standard Key IC: 4008C-HUF8423
Volvo Tag ID IC: 4008C-HUF8432
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.

Immobilizer and Passive entry/Passive
start* systems

(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Any changes or modification not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate this
equipment.
Canada–IC:3659A-VO3134
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.

Immobilizer
The immobilizer is a start inhibitor that helps prevent unauthorized persons from starting the
engine.
Each of the keys supplied with your vehicle contains a unique coded transponder. The vehicle
code in the key is transmitted to the vehicle's
ignition system where it is compared to the code
stored in the start inhibitor module.
The following message (which may appear in the
instrument panel) is related to the immobilizer:
Message

Explanation

Car key
not found

Remote key not recognized during start. Place the remote key
on the key symbol in the tunnel
console cup holder and try to
start the vehicle again.

Related information

•
•

Alarm (p. 226)
Remote key (p. 235)

Related information

•
•

Remote key's range (p. 235)
Remote key (p. 235)

USA–FCC ID: LTQVO3134
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 231

LOCKS AND ALARM

Changing the remote key's battery

Replacing the battery

The remote key can be opened if the battery
needs to be replaced.
The battery should be replaced if:

•

The information symbol illuminates and
Unavailable Battery level too low is
shown in the display

and/or

•

if the locks do not react after several
attempts to unlock or lock the vehicle

Hold the remote key with the front side
(with the Volvo symbol) toward you and move
the button on lower edge of the key near the
key ring to the right. Slide the front cover
slightly upward.
The cover will loosen and can be
removed from the key.

232

Move the button to the side and slide
rear cover slightly upward.
The cover will loosen and can be
removed from the key.

LOCKS AND ALARM

Use e.g., a screwdriver to turn the battery
cover counterclockwise so that the markers
align toward OPEN.
Remove the cover carefully by pressing
e.g., a finger nail into the indentation.
Pry the cover up.

The battery's positive (+) side is up. Pry
out the battery as shown in the illustration.

CAUTION
When handling batteries, avoid touching their
contact surfaces as this could result in poor
battery function in the remote key.

Insert a new battery4 with the positive (+)
side up. Put the battery cover back in place
by:
Placing the battery's edge downward in
the holder. Slide the battery forward so that it
is held in place by the two plastic catches.
Pressing the battery downward so that it
is also held in place by the two upper
catches under the upper black holder.
and turn until the marker points to CLOSE.

Use a CR2032, 3 V battery.

}}
233

LOCKS AND ALARM
||

NOTE
Volvo recommends that the batteries used in
the remote control meet the UN Manual of
Test and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 38.3.
Batteries installed in the key from the factory
and batteries exchanged by an authorized
Volvo workshop fulfill the above criteria.
Old batteries should be disposed of properly
at a recycling center or at your Volvo retailer.

Put the rear cover in position and press
down until it clicks into place.
Slide the cover into place as indicated by
arrow 2 in the illustration.
> Another click indicates that it is correctly
in position and closed.

Put the battery cover in place and turn it
clockwise until the marker points to CLOSE.

Turn the key over and press the front
cover (with the Volvo logo) until it clicks into
place.
Slide the cover into position as indicated
by arrow 2 in the illustration.
> Another click indicates that it is correctly
in position and closed.
Dispose of old batteries properly, preferably at
recycling station.

Related information

•

234

Remote key (p. 235)

LOCKS AND ALARM

Remote key's range

Manual use

For keyless entry into the vehicle, the remote key
must be within approximately 5 feet (1.5 meters)
of the sides of the vehicle or approximately 3 feet
(1 meter) of the tailgate as shown in the illustration.

The remote key's functions, such as locking and
unlocking the vehicle, which are activated by
or
buttons, have a range
pressing the
of approx. 65 feet (20 meters) from the vehicle.

The remote key may not function properly due to
ambient radio waves, buildings or topographical
obstructions, etc. The vehicle can always be
locked/unlocked with the detachable key blade.

Buildings or other obstacles may interfere with
the function of the remote key. The vehicle can
also be locked or unlocked with the key blade.

If the remote key is removed from the
vehicle

In order to function correctly, the remote key
must be within a certain distance of the vehicle.

If the vehicle's locks do not react, move closer
and try again.

Keyless use5

If all of the remote keys are removed from the
vehicle while the engine is running, Vehicle key
not found Removed from vehicle will be displayed in the instrument panel and an audible
signal will sound when all of the doors have been
closed. The message will be erased when a
remote key has been returned to the vehicle and
the O button on the right-side steering wheel
keypad has been pressed or when all of the
doors have been closed again.

Related information

•
•

The shaded areas illustrate the range of the Passive
Entry system's antennas

5 Models

equipped with the optional Passive Entry only.

Remote key (p. 235)
Antenna locations for the start and lock system (p. 230)

Remote key
The remote key is used to lock/unlock the vehicle and must be in the passenger compartment
in order to start the engine.

The standard remote key (left) and the Key Tag (right)

In models with the standard Passive Start system,
the remote key only needs to be in the front section of the passenger compartment or in the tunnel console cup holders in order to start the
engine.
The keyless Passive Entry system for locking/
unlocking the vehicle is available as an option.
This system has a range of approximately 5 feet
(1.5 meters) from the sides of the vehicle or
approximately 3 feet (1 meter) from the tailgate.
With this system, a remote key can be anywhere
in the vehicle.
}}
235

LOCKS AND ALARM
||

NOTE
Avoid placing the remote key closer than
approx. (4-6 in.) (10-15 cm) to any metallic
objects or electronic devices such as cell
phones, tablets, laptops or chargers.
If interference persists, unlock the vehicle with
the detachable key blade and place the remote
key in the backup key reader in the tunnel console cup holder to disarm the alarm.

WARNING
Always remove the remote key from the passenger compartment when leaving the vehicle
and ensure that the ignition in mode 0, especially if there are children in the vehicle.

Ordering new keys
Two remote keys are provided with the vehicle (a
Key Tag6 is also included for vehicles equipped
with the optional Passive Entry system). Additional keys (a total of 12) can be ordered and
used with the vehicle.

Loss of a remote key
If a remote key is lost, the others should be taken
with the vehicle to a Volvo retailer. As an antitheft measure, the code of the lost remote key
must be erased from the system. The number of

236

registered keys for the vehicle can be found in
the center display's Top view.

NOTE

blade and its battery cannot be replaced; a new
Key Tag has to be ordered.

The remote key's buttons

Additional or duplicate remote control keys
can be obtained from any authorized Volvo
retailer.
You can also obtain additional or duplicate
remote control keys from certain independent
repair facilities and locksmiths that are qualified to make remote control keys. Each key
must be programmed to work with your vehicle.
A list of independent repair facilities and/or
locksmiths known to Volvo that can cut and
code replacement keys can be found:

•

on the Volvo website,
www.volvocars.com/us

•

by calling Volvo Customer Care at
1-800-458-1552.

Key Tag
In addition to the two remote keys provided, a
smaller third key, called a Key Tag, is also provided for vehicles equipped with the optional
Passive Entry system.
This key functions in the same way as a standard
remote key but does not have a detachable key

The remote key has four buttons: one on the left side
and three on the right side

Lock: Press to lock the doors/tailgate and
arm the alarm.
Unlock: Press to unlock the driver's door
and disarm the alarm. Press again to unlock
the other doors and the tailgate. This setting
can be changed in the center display's Settings menu.
Tailgate: Press to unlock the tailgate only
(and disarm the alarm for the tailgate). On
vehicles equipped with the power tailgate*,
press and hold to open the tailgate. Press

The Key Tag is also referred to as a Sport key. This key is designed to be waterproof to a depth of approximately 30 ft (10 meters) for up to 60 minutes, making it suitable for use in activities in and around water.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

LOCKS AND ALARM
and hold to close an open tailgate (an audible warning signal will sound).
Panic alarm: Press to attract attention during emergency situations. To activate, press
and hold this button for at least 3 seconds or
press it twice within 3 seconds to activate
the turn signals and horn. To deactivate,
wait approximately 5 seconds and press the
button again (the panic alarm will also deactivate automatically after several minutes).

Related information

•
•
•

Remote key's range (p. 235)
Detachable key blade (p. 237)
Changing the remote key's battery (p. 232)

Detachable key blade
Your vehicle's remote key contains a detachable
key blade that can be used to unlock the driver's
door, etc.
A Volvo retailer can provide you with the key
blade's unique code.

Using the detachable key blade
The remote key's detachable key blade can be
used to:

Interference

•

Metallic objects or electromagnetic fields may
interfere with the remote key's function. Avoid
placing the remote key within 4-6 in. (10-15 cm)
of a cell phone or a metallic object.

Unlock the driver's door if the central locking
system cannot be activated using the remote
key

•
•

Lock all doors

If interference persists, use the remote key's
detachable key blade to unlock the vehicle and
place the remote key in the backup key reader in
the tunnel console cup holder.

Activate/deactivate the mechanical child
safety locks in the rear doors

The Key Tag7 does not have a detachable key
blade.

Loss of a remote key
If a remote keys is lost, a new one can be
ordered. The other keys should be taken with the
vehicle to a Volvo retailer or authorized independent locksmith. As an anti-theft measure, the code
of the lost remote key must be erased from the
system. The number of registered keys for the
vehicle can be found in the center display's Top
view.

Models with the optional Passive Entry system only.

}}
237

LOCKS AND ALARM
||

Foot movement tailgate operation*

Detaching the key blade

The foot movement sensor* simplifies opening or
closing the tailgate if your hands are full.8

After use, press the key blade back into
its position in the key, put the cover back on
the key and slide it into position.
> A click indicates that the cover is correctly
in place.

Related information

•

Locking/unlocking with the detachable key
blade (p. 248)

•

Child safety locks (p. 228)

The foot movement sensor is located to the left of center under the rear bumper9

NOTE
One of the remote keys must be in your possession or within range when you are behind
the vehicle in order to activate the foot movement sensor, even if the tailgate is already
unlocked. This is done to help prevent the
sensor from inadvertently opening the tailgate, for example, in a car wash.

Remove the key blade.
8
9

238

Be sure that the key is not within range when
the vehicle is in an automatic carwash.

Models equipped with the optional power tailgate only.
If the vehicle is equipped with a skid plate/diffuser*, the sensor is located under the left corner of the bumper.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

LOCKS AND ALARM

Operation

If several attempts have been made to open/
close the tailgate using the foot sensor without a
remote key within range, the function will time
out and will not be available for a short period.

NOTE
Foot operation may not be possible or function normally if the sensor is obstructed by
snow, ice, dirt, etc.

Kicking motion under the sensor's activation area

Opening/closing
– With the remote key within range, move your
foot slowly forward in a kicking motion below
the left section of the rear bumper without
touching the bumper and take a step back.
> A brief audible signal will sound when the
tailgate begins to open/close.
The tailgate can be closed (or closed and locked)
by pressing the
or
buttons on the lower
edge of the tailgate10.

Interrupting opening/closing
– Move your foot slowly forward in a kicking
motion while the tailgate is opening/closing
to stop its movement.
No remote keys need to be within range in order
to interrupt movement of the tailgate.

Sensor location on vehicles equipped with a skid plate/
diffuser*

To open/close the tailgate, make the kicking
motion from the side of the rear bumper.

Vehicles equipped with a skid plate/
diffuser*
If the vehicle is equipped with a skid plate/
diffuser*, the sensor is located under the left corner of the rear bumper.

It can also be operated manually or by pressing
the button on the lighting panel in the passenger
compartment or on the remote key.
Kicking motion under the sensor's activation area

Vehicles equipped with the optional Passive Entry system only.

}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 239

LOCKS AND ALARM
||

Related information

•
•
•

Power tailgate* (p. 246)
Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 244)
Remote key's range (p. 235)

Locking and unlocking confirmation

Interior confirmation

The turn signals can be used to indicate that the
vehicle has been locked/unlocked with the
remote key. These settings can also be
changed.

Exterior confirmation

•

Locking: the turn signals flash once and the
door mirrors will fold in (retract)11

•

Unlocking: the turn signals flash twice and
the door mirrors will fold out11

When the vehicle is locked, confirmation will only
be given if all doors/tailgate and the hood are
closed.
If the vehicle is locked while only the driver's door
is closed, all doors/tailgate will lock but confirmation will only be given when all doors/tailgate/
hood are closed.

240

Lock and alarm indicator light on the dashboard

A long flash indicates the vehicle is locked. While
the vehicle is locked, the indicator will flash
briefly.
LEDs in the lock buttons on the doors illuminate
when the doors are locked.

Models with retractable door mirrors only.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

LOCKS AND ALARM

Indicators in the interior lock buttons

Related information

In all doors

Lock buttons in the front doors

•

Locking/unlocking from outside the vehicle
(p. 243)

•
•

Home safe lighting (p. 148)
Adjusting the power door mirrors (p. 105)

Rear door lock buttons and indicator lights
Front door lock buttons and indicator lights

Indicator lights on: all doors are locked.
If a door is opened, the lights in both buttons will
go out.

Indicator light in the respective door on: that door
is locked. If either of the rear doors is opened, the
light in that door will out but the other indicator
lights will remain on.

Confirmation alternatives
Various alternatives for locking/unlocking confirmation can be selected in the center display.
1.

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

Tap My Car

Change the settings under Locking and
Unlocking Feedback.

Locking.

241

LOCKS AND ALARM

Locking/unlocking from inside the
vehicle

Lock buttons on the rear doors*

The lock buttons on either of the front doors can
be used to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate at the same time. The rear doors can be
locked using their respective lock buttons*.

Alternative locking when parking13
The central locking button on the front doors can
also be used to lock the vehicle when you leave
it. To do so:

The central locking system

Open the door.

Press the lock section of the button.

Close the door. This will lock the vehicle
completely and arm the alarm.

Lock button in a rear door

The lock buttons in the rear doors lock/unlock
each door respectively.
To unlock a rear door:
–
Central locking/unlocking buttons and indicator lights
on the front doors

–

Press the
button on the driver's door to
to
lock all doors/tailgate and press
unlock.

Unlocking
Press the
button on either of the front doors
to unlock all doors and the tailgate.

12
13

242

A rear door must be closed before it can be
locked.

To open one of the rear doors individually,
pull its handle once and release it to unlock
the door. Pull the handle again to open the
door12.

NOTE
Please be aware that locking the vehicle in
this way makes it possible to lock the remote
key in the passenger compartment. To help
avoid this, lock the vehicle from the outside by
pressing the lock button on the remote key.
If the vehicle is locked using the central locking button, be sure that the remote key is in
your possession before closing the door.

Locking
–

Press the
button on either of the front
doors (both front doors must be closed). All
doors/tailgate are locked.

Automatic locking
All of the doors/tailgate will lock automatically
when the vehicle begins to move.

The rear doors can also be locked individually by
pressing the lock button on the respective door.

Assuming that the child safety locks are not activated.
This does not apply to models equipped with the optional Passive Entry system.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

LOCKS AND ALARM

Related information

•

Locking/unlocking from outside the vehicle
(p. 243)

•

Child safety locks (p. 228)

Locking/unlocking from outside the
vehicle

driver's door can be unlocked with the detachable key blade.

The buttons on the remote key can be used to
lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate at the
same time. This can also be done without pressing the remote key buttons on models equipped
with the optional keyless Passive Entry system.
The power tailgate* can also be opened/closed
by moving your foot under a sensor beneath the
rear bumper*.

Keyless Passive Entry*

The lock/unlock settings can be changed in the
center display's Top view.

If the vehicle is equipped with this system, it is
only necessary to have a remote key in your possession to operate the central locking system.
Models with Passive Entry have an indentation on
the outside of the handle for locking the vehicle
and a pressure-sensitive area on the inside of the
handle for unlocking. The tailgate has a rubberized button used only for locking/unlocking.

Go to: Settings My Car Remote Unlock
and select Unlock All Doors or Driver Door
Only.
In order to lock the vehicle, the driver's door must
be closed. If the tailgate or any of the other doors
are open, they will be locked and the alarm will be
armed when they are closed.

NOTE
Be sure the remote key is outside of the vehicle before the other doors/tailgate are closed
to help avoid locking the remote inside the
vehicle.

Outer indentation for locking, the pressure sensitive area
on the inside of the handle is for unlocking

If the locks repeatedly do not react when the
unlock button is pressed, it may be necessary to
replace the battery in the remote. In this case, the
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 243

LOCKS AND ALARM
||

opening control. The lock indicator light on the
dashboard will go out to show that the vehicle is
unlocked and the alarm has been disarmed.
The lock/unlock settings can be changed in the
center display's Top view:
Go to: Settings My Car Keyless Unlock
and select All Doors or Single Door.

Locking/unlocking the tailgate
The tailgate can be locked/unlocked in different
ways, depending on whether the vehicle is
equipped with the optional keyless Passive Entry
system.

Unlocking with the remote key

Automatic relocking

Rubberized button on the tailgate used only for locking/
unlocking

Locking
All of the doors have to be closed before the
vehicle can be locked but the tailgate can be
open.
Lock the doors and tailgate by pressing the pressure sensitive area on any of the door handles or
by pressing the rubberized button on the tailgate.
The lock indicator light on the dashboard will
begin to flash to show that the vehicle is locked
and the alarm has been armed.
To close any windows or the panoramic roof*
when locking the vehicle, hold the pressure sensitive area for several seconds until closing
begins.
Unlocking
Pull a door handle to unlock and open the door
or press the rubberized button under the tailgate

244

If no door or the tailgate is opened within two
minutes after being unlocked, the vehicle will
automatically relock.

Remote door unlock
The vehicle can be unlocked using the Volvo On
Call app.

Related information

•
•
•
•

Remote key (p. 235)
Remote key's range (p. 235)
Detachable key blade (p. 237)

Remote key tailgate button

button on the remote key.
Press the
> The tailgate will be unlocked but remain
closed. The alarm indicator on the dashboard will go out to indicate that the tailgate alarm is no longer armed. The other
doors will remain locked and the alarm will
remain armed for them.

Open the tailgate.
> If the tailgate is not opened in within two
minutes, it will relock and the alarm will
rearm.

Alarm (p. 226)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

LOCKS AND ALARM

Keyless unlocking*

CAUTION

To unlock the tailgate:

•

When pressing the rubberized pressure
plate, only light pressure is necessary to
release the tailgate's electronic locking
mechanism.

–

•

When opening the tailgate, pull it up
using the handle. Too much pressure on
the rubberized pressure plate can damage its electrical connections.

Locking with the remote key
–

WARNING
Rubberized pressure plate

Opening the tailgate:
1.

With the remote key in your possession,
unlock the tailgate by pressing lightly on the
rubberized pressure plate under the outer
tailgate handle. If the remote key is not
detected, the tailgate cannot be unlocked/
opened. Three audible signals will sound.

Avoid driving with the tailgate open if at all
possible. Doing so could allow exhaust gases
to enter the passenger compartment.

Unlocking the tailgate from inside the
vehicle

Press the
button on the lighting panel.
> The tailgate will unlock and can be
opened within two minutes (if the vehicle
has been locked from the inside).

Press the
button on the remote key.
> The alarm indicator on the dashboard will
begin to flash to show that the alarm has
been armed.

Related information

•
•
•
•

Remote key (p. 235)
Power tailgate* (p. 246)
Foot movement tailgate operation* (p. 238)
Remote key's range (p. 235)

Lift the handle to open the tailgate fully.

Tailgate unlock button

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 245

LOCKS AND ALARM

Power tailgate*

Closing the tailgate

The optional power tailgate can be opened/
closed in several ways.

The tailgate can be closed by moving your foot
under a sensor beneath the rear bumper*, by
pressing the button on the lighting panel, with
the remote key or by pressing the button on the
lower edge of the tailgate*14

The power tailgate can be opened/closed using
the
button on the lighting panel in the passenger compartment, the
on the remote key,
by moving your foot under a sensor under the
rear bumper* or manually.

To close the tailgate15:
–

WARNING
When operating the tailgate manually, do not
use force to open or close it. This could result
in injury.

Button on the lighting panel in the passenger compartment

Press the
button on the lighting panel
or on the
button on the remote key.
> The tailgate will close automatically and
audible signal will sound. This will not
lock the tailgate.

Opening the tailgate
The power tailgate can be opened electrically by:

•
•

Pressing and holding the
button on the
lighting panel until the tailgate begins to
open.
button on the
Pressing and holding the
remote key until the tailgate begins to open.

•

Pressing lightly on the rubber-covered button
under the tailgate's outside handle.

•

Moving your foot under a sensor under the
rear bumper*.

Buttons on the lower edge of the tailgate

Buttons in the lower edge of the tailgate

14
15

246

Models equipped with the optional Passive Entry system have a button to close the tailgate and a button to close and lock the tailgate.
See also the article "Foot movement tailgate opening/closing."

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

LOCKS AND ALARM
–

–

Press the
button14 on the lower edge of
the tailgate.
> The tailgate will close automatically but
will not be locked.
Press the
button14 on the lower edge of
the tailgate.
> The tailgate will close automatically. The
tailgate and doors will also be locked and
the alarm will be armed.

Programming the tailgate's maximum
opening angle
The tailgate's maximum opening angle can be
programmed, for example, if the tailgate has to be
opened in a garage with a low ceiling.
Programming the opening angle:
–

If the remote key is not close enough to the tailgate, automatic locking/unlocking/opening/closing will not be possible. Three short audible signals will sound.

Interrupting opening/closing
–

This can be done in five ways:

•
•
•

Press the button on the lighting panel

•

Press lightly on the rubber-covered button
under the tailgate's outside handle

Press the button on the remote key
Press either of the buttons on the lower
edge of the tailgate

Open the tailgate manually to the desired
angle and press and hold the closing button
on the tailgate's lower edge for at least 3
seconds. Release the tailgate.
> Two audible signals will sound to indicate
that the selected opening angle has been
stored.

Erasing tailgate programming
–

Open the tailgate manually to its highest
position and press and hold the closing button on the tailgate's lower edge for at least 3
seconds. Release the tailgate.
> Two audible signals will sound to indicate
that the programmed opening angle has
been erased.

•

Move your foot under a sensor beneath
the rear bumper*
> The tailgate will stop moving

NOTE
If the tailgate has been opened and closed
continuously too long, the automatic function
will be deactivated to avoid overloading the
electrical system. The automatic function can
be used again after approximately 2 minutes.

Models equipped with the optional Passive Entry system have a button to close the tailgate and a button to close and lock the tailgate.

If the vehicle's battery has been discharged or
disconnected, or if the tailgate has been open
for more than 24 hours, the tailgate must be
opened and closed once manually to reset
the system.

Pinch protection
If the tailgate is obstructed when being opened/
closed, a pinch protection mechanism is activated.

•

While opening: the tailgate will stop moving
and an audible signal will sound.

•

While closing: the tailgate will stop and
return to the maximum programmable opening position. An audible signal will sound.

WARNING
Be sure that no one is near the tailgate when
it is opened or closed automatically. The tailgate should never be obstructed in any way
when it is operated.

}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 247

LOCKS AND ALARM
||

Related information

•
•
•

Remote key's range (p. 235)
Locking/unlocking from outside the vehicle
(p. 243)
Foot movement tailgate operation* (p. 238)

Locking/unlocking with the
detachable key blade

Lock the door in the same way, but turn the key
in step 3 counterclockwise.

The detachable key blade can be used to e.g.,
unlock the driver's door from the outside if, for
example, the remote key's battery is weak.

Turning off the alarm

Unlocking

Backup key reader under the tunnel console cup holders

To turn off the alarm:
Pull out the driver's door handle as far as
possible to access the lock cylinder.
Remove the key blade from the remote key
and insert it into the lock cylinder.
Turn it clockwise 45 degrees so that the key
blade points straight rearward.
Turn the key blade back 45 degrees to its
original position. Remove the key blade from
the lock cylinder and release the door handle.
5.

248

Pull the door handle again to open the door.
> This will trigger the alarm.

Place the remote key in the cup holder (on
the key symbol) in the tunnel console (see
the illustration).

Turn the start knob to START and release it.
> The start knob will return to its original
position and the alarm will be turned off.

Locking
If necessary, the vehicle can be locked by inserting the detachable key blade into the lock cylinder in the driver's door.
Each of the other doors has a lock mechanism
that must be pressed in using the key blade so
that the door cannot be opened from the outside.
The doors can still be opened from the inside.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

LOCKS AND ALARM

NOTE
If the child safety locks are activated for the
rear doors and the mechanical locking mechanism has also been activated with the key
blade, it will not be possible to open these
doors from the inside or the outside.
To unlock, use the central unlocking button
on either of the front doors or the unlock button on the remote key.

Manually locking a door (this is not the child safety lock)

–

Remove the detachable key blade from the
remote key. Insert it into the opening for the
lock mechanism and press it in as far as possible.

Related information

•

Detachable key blade (p. 237)

The door can be opened from inside and the
outside.
The door cannot be opened from the outside.
To override the locking function, open the
door from the inside.
The doors can also be unlocked by pressing the
unlock button on the remote key or by pressing
the unlock button on the driver's door panel.

249

DRIVER SUPPORT

Driver support systems
The vehicle is equipped with a number of driver
support systems that help provide the driver with
active/passive support.

•

Park Assist Camera (PAC)* (p. 311)

Driver support system camera
The camera is used by a number of driver support systems to e.g., detect a driving lane's side
marker lines or traffic signs.

Some of these systems are standard while others
are optional and they are designed to e.g., help
the driver maintain a set speed or a set distance
to a vehicle ahead, or warn the driver of a potential collision situation and in certain cases apply
the brakes if necessary. Certain optional systems
can also assist in various parking situations.

Related information

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

252

Adjustable steering force* (p. 323)
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) (p. 323)
Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 298)
Cruise Control (CC) (p. 261)

Camera location

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 266)

The camera is used by the following driver support systems:

Pilot Assist* (p. 273)
Distance Alert* (p. 329)
City Safety™ (p. 287)
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* (p. 330)
Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* (p. 333)
Driver Alert Control (DAC) (p. 327)
Driving lane assistance (p. 338)
Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 304)
Park Assist* (p. 306)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 316)

•
•
•
•
•
•

Lane Departure Warning/Lane Keeping Aid*
Driver Alert Control*
Pilot Assist*
City Safety
Road sign information*
Active high beams*

Related information

•
•

High and low beam headlights (p. 143)
Driving lane assistance (p. 338)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT

•
•
•
•

Pilot Assist* (p. 273)
Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 304)
City Safety™ (p. 287)
Driver Alert Control (DAC) (p. 327)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 253

DRIVER SUPPORT

Camera limitations
The camera used by several of the driver support
systems has certain limitations, which also affect
the systems using it.

WARNING

Obstructions

Never place any objects, decals, etc., on the
windshield in front of the camera/radar unit.
This could reduce or block these components'
functions, and could cause one or more of the
systems that utilize the them to stop functioning.

Reduced visibility
WARNING

•

254

The camera has the same limitations as
the human eye. In other words, its “vision
is impaired” by adverse weather conditions such as heavy snowfall, dense fog,
etc. These conditions may reduce the
function of systems that depend on the
camera or cause these systems to temporarily stop functioning.
Strong sunlight, reflections from the road
surface, ice or snow covering the road, a
dirty road surface, or unclear lane marker
lines may drastically reduce the camera’s
capacity to detect the side of a lane, a
pedestrian, a cyclist or another vehicle.

If this symbol and the message
Windscreen Sensors blocked
appear in the instrument panel, this
indicates that the camera and/or radar
sensor cannot detect other vehicles ahead.
The marked area must not be obstructed in any way.
This area of the windshield should always be kept clean

The camera is located at the upper, center section of the windshield along with the radar unit.

The following table shows some of the situations
that can cause the message to be displayed and
suggested actions.

Cause

Action

The area of the windshield in front of the camera/radar sensor is dirty or covered
by ice or snow.

Clean the windshield or remove the ice/ snow.

Thick fog or heavy rain/snow blocks reduces the camera/radar sensor's range of
visibility.

No action. The driver should be extra alert in conditions of this type.

Water or snow on the surface of the road swirl up and block radar signals or the
camera's view.

No action. The driver should be extra alert in conditions of this type.

DRIVER SUPPORT

Cause

Action

There is dirt between the inside of the windshield and the camera/radar sensor.

Have the area of the windshield cleaned by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.

Strong backlighting

No action required. The came will reset automatically when lighting
conditions improve.

High temperatures
If the temperature in the passenger compartment
is very high, the camera and radar sensor may be
temporarily turned off for approx. 15 minutes
after the engine has been started to protect their
electronic components. When the temperature
has cooled sufficiently, the camera and radar
sensor will restart automatically.

Damaged windshield

used, this may cause City Safety to function improperly or not at all.

CAUTION

•

Service and maintenance on City Safety
may only be carried out by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.

Volvo recommends the use of only Genuine Volvo Replacement Windshields.

•

When replacing windshield wipers, use
the same type or ones approved by Volvo.

•

If a crack, scratch or stone chip should
occur in the section of the windshield in
front the camera/radar sensor, contact a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician to repair or replace the windshield.
Failing to do so may result in reduced
City Safety functionality.

After the windshield has been replaced, the
camera/radar sensor will have to be recalibrated by a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician to help ensure proper function of
all of the vehicle's camera-/radar-based systems.

To help prevent limited or reduced functionality, please also observe the following:

•

Volvo recommends that cracks, scratches
or stone chips on the windshield in front
of the camera/radar sensor should not
be repaired; in such cases, the entire
windshield should be replaced.

•

Before the windshield is replaced, contact a Volvo retailer to ensure that the
correct windshield is ordered and installed. If the wrong type of windshield is

Maintenance
In order for camera and radar sensor to function
properly, the area of the windshield must be kept
free of dirt, ice, snow, etc. and should be washed
regularly with a suitable car washing detergent.

Related information

•
•
•

City Safety™ (p. 287)
Radar sensor limitations (p. 258)
Driver support systems (p. 252)

}}
255

DRIVER SUPPORT
||

•
•
•
•
•

256

Road Sign Assistance (RSI)* limitations
(p. 306)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* limitations (p. 320)
City Safety limitations (p. 293)
Driving lane assistance (p. 338)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 266)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT

Driver support system radar unit
The radar unit is used by a number of driver support systems to e.g., help detect other vehicles.
The radar unit is used by the following functions:

•
•
•
•

Distance Alert*
Adaptive Cruise Control*
Pilot Assist*
City Safety

Any modifications to the radar unit may make its
use illegal.

Related information

•
•
•
•
•

Radar sensor (p. 283)
Distance Alert* (p. 329)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 266)
Pilot Assist* (p. 273)
City Safety™ (p. 287)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 257

DRIVER SUPPORT

Radar sensor limitations
The radar sensor used by several of the driver
support systems has certain limitations, which
also affect the systems using it.

Obstructions

The radar sensor is located at the upper, center
section of the windshield along with the camera.

The following table shows some of the situations
that can cause the message to be displayed and
suggested actions.

WARNING
Never place any objects, decals, etc., on the
windshield in front of the camera/radar unit.
This could reduce or block these components'
functions, and could cause one or more of the
systems that utilize the them to stop functioning.

258

Cause

Action

The area of the windshield in front of the camera/radar sensor is dirty or covered by ice or
snow.

Clean the windshield or remove the ice/ snow.

Thick fog or heavy rain/snow blocks reduces the camera/radar sensor's range of visibility.

No action. The driver should be extra alert in conditions of this
type.

Water or snow on the surface of the road swirl up and block radar signals or the camera's
view.

No action. The driver should be extra alert in conditions of this
type.

There is dirt between the inside of the windshield and the camera/radar sensor.

Have the area of the windshield cleaned by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

DRIVER SUPPORT

The radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles
ahead is impeded:

•

if the speed of the vehicle ahead differs
greatly from your vehicle's speed.

Limited field of vision
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In
some situations it may detect a vehicle later than
expected or not detect other vehicles at all.
Low trailer in the radar shadow

Low trailers may also be difficult to detect or may
not be detected at all. The driver should be extra
alert in situations of this type.

High temperatures

Radar sensor's field of vision

If the temperature in the passenger compartment
is very high, the camera and radar sensor may be
temporarily turned off for approx. 15 minutes
after the engine has been started to protect their
electronic components. When the temperature
has cooled sufficiently, the camera and radar
sensor will restart automatically.

In certain situations, the radar sensor cannot
detect vehicles at close quarters, for example
a vehicle that suddenly enters the lane
between your vehicle and the target vehicle.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehicles not driving in the center of the lane may
remain undetected.
In curves, the radar sensor may detect the
wrong vehicle or lose sight of the target vehicle.

}}
259

DRIVER SUPPORT
||

Damaged windshield

CAUTION

•

Service and maintenance on City Safety
may only be carried out by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.

•

To help prevent limited or reduced functionality, please also observe the following:

•

260

Volvo recommends that cracks, scratches
or stone chips on the windshield in front
of the camera/radar sensor should not
be repaired; in such cases, the entire
windshield should be replaced.
Before the windshield is replaced, contact a Volvo retailer to ensure that the
correct windshield is ordered and installed. If the wrong type of windshield is
used, this may cause City Safety to function improperly or not at all.

•

Volvo recommends the use of only Genuine Volvo Replacement Windshields.

•

When replacing windshield wipers, use
the same type or ones approved by Volvo.

Related information

•
•
•

•
•
•
•

City Safety™ (p. 287)
Driver support systems (p. 252)
Road Sign Assistance (RSI)* limitations
(p. 306)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* limitations (p. 320)
City Safety limitations (p. 293)
Driving lane assistance (p. 338)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 266)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT

Cruise Control (CC)

The vehicle's current speed

Cruise Control (CC) is designed to assist the
driver by maintaining a set speed. It is primarily
intended for use on long straight roads in steady
traffic, such as on highways and other main
roads in smoothly flowing traffic.

The set speed

WARNING

•

The vehicle must always be driven
according to current traffic/road conditions. The driver must take action if CC
does not maintain a suitable speed
and/or distance to other vehicles.

•

The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle in a safe manner.

Overview

Starting and activating Cruise
Control
Cruise Control (CC) must be selected and activated before it can regulate the vehicle's speed.

Selecting CC (putting it in standby
mode)

Related information

Function buttons and symbols

Increases the set speed or CC switches from
standby mode to active mode and the set
speed will be resumed
Press to put CC in active mode and set the
current speed or from active mode, press to
put CC in standby mode

•

Starting and activating Cruise Control
(p. 261)

•
•

Changing Cruise Control speed (p. 262)
Deactivating/resuming Cruise Control (CC)
(p. 263)

Function buttons and symbols

•
•
•

Turning Cruise Control off (p. 264)

–

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 266)
Switching between Cruise Control (CC) and
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 265)

Press ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to scroll to the CC
(
) function.
> The symbol (4) will be displayed in the
instrument panel. This indicates that CC
has been selected and can then be activated to maintain a set speed.

Reduces the set speed
Set speed indicator
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 261

DRIVER SUPPORT
||

NOTE
Before CC can be activated, the vehicle's
speed must be at least 20 mph (30 km/h).
This is also the lowest speed that can be set.

Changing Cruise Control speed
Changing a set speed

Activating CC (putting it in active mode
and setting a speed)
–

•
•

Cruise Control (CC) (p. 261)
Switching between Cruise Control (CC) and
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 265)

•

Deactivating/resuming Cruise Control (CC)
(p. 263)

•

Turning Cruise Control off (p. 264)

A temporary increase in speed, such as when
passing another vehicle, does not affect the CC
set speed. The vehicle will return to the set speed
when the accelerator pedal is released.

Engine braking instead of applying the
brakes

With the
symbol displayed (CC is in
button (2) on
standby mode), press the
the left-side steering wheel keypad.
> This puts CC in active mode and will
maintain the vehicle's current speed.

Related information

erator pedal is still depressed when the button is
pressed.

CC regulates speed by applying the brakes
lightly. To avoid a loss of speed when driving
down hills, use the engine braking function
instead of letting the CC apply the brakes. In this
situation, the driver can temporarily deactivate the
CC braking function.
Function buttons and symbols

–

Change a set speed by pressing the
(1)
or — (2) buttons briefly or by pressing and
holding them:

•

Press briefly: changes speed in
+/– 1 mph (+/– 1 km/h) increments.
Each press changes the vehicle's speed
by +/– 1 mph (+/– 1 km/h).

•

Press and hold: Release the button
when the set speed indicator (4) has
moved to the desired speed.

To do so:
–

Press the accelerator pedal approx. halfway
down and release it.
> CC will automatically deactivate the automatic brake function and will then only
use the engine braking function.

Related information

•

Cruise Control (CC) (p. 261)

If speed is increased by pressing the accelerator
button is pressed, the vehipedal before the
cle's speed when the button is pressed will
become the set speed assuming that the accel-

262

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT

Deactivating/resuming Cruise
Control (CC)
Cruise Control (CC) can be temporarily deactivated and put in standby mode.

Deactivating and putting CC in standby
mode
To temporarily deactivate and put Cruise Control
in standby mode:

Standby mode due to action by the driver
CC is temporarily deactivated and put in standby
mode if:

•
•
•

Reactivating CC from standby mode
To reactivate CC after it has temporarily been put
in standby mode:

the brakes are applied
The gear selector is moved to N
the vehicle is driven faster than the set
speed for more than 1 minute.

In these cases, the driver will have to regulate the
vehicle's speed.
A temporary increase in speed, such as when
passing another vehicle, does not affect the CC
set speed. The vehicle will return to the set speed
when the accelerator pedal is released.
Automatic standby mode
CC switches automatically to standby mode if:

Function buttons and symbols

–

Press the
button (2).
> The set speed marker (4) and symbols will
change colors from WHITE to GRAY.
This indicates that CC is temporarily in
standby mode and will not maintain a set
speed.

•
•
•
•

–

Press the
button (1).
> The set speed marker (4) will change
color from GRAY to WHITE. The vehicle
will then return to the most recently set
speed.

the wheels lose traction
engine speed (rpm) is too high/low
brake temperature is too high
the vehicle's speed goes below approx.
20 mph (30 km/h)

In these cases, the driver will have to regulate the
vehicle's speed.

WARNING
There may be a significant increase in speed
after the
button has been pressed.
or

}}
263

DRIVER SUPPORT
||

–

Press the
button (2).
> The set speed marker (4) and symbols will
change colors from GRAY to WHITE. CC
will then set and maintain the vehicle's
current speed.

Turning Cruise Control off
Cruise Control (CC) can be deactivated (turned
off).

Related information

•
•

Cruise Control (CC) (p. 261)
Starting and activating Cruise Control
(p. 261)

Function buttons and symbols

button (2) on the left-side
Press the
steering wheel keypad.
> This puts CC in standby mode.

Press the ◀ or ▶ button to switch to another
function.
> The Cruise Control symbol in the instrument panel (

264

) will go out.

button (2) again.
Press the
> Another function will be activated and the
set speed in the CC system's memory will
be erased.

Related information

•
•

Cruise Control (CC) (p. 261)
Starting and activating Cruise Control
(p. 261)

DRIVER SUPPORT

Switching between Cruise Control
(CC) and Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)*

WARNING
Switching from ACC to CC means that:

In models equipped with the optional ACC, the
driver can toggle between CC and ACC.

Switching from ACC till CC
A symbol in the instrument panel will indicate
which system is currently being used:
CC

ACC

Cruise Control

Adaptive Cruise Control

A
A

If the symbol is WHITE, the function is active. If the symbol is
GRAY, the function is in standby mode.

To switch from ACC to CC
1.

From the center display's Function view, tap
the Activate cruise control button.

The symbol in the instrument panel will
change from
(ACC) to
(CC). This means that ACC has been completely deactivated (turned off) and CC is in
standby mode (ready for use but not currently maintaining a set speed).

button on the left-side steerPress the
ing wheel keypad: CC goes into active mode
and sets the vehicle's current speed.

•

Your vehicle will no longer automatically
maintain a set distance to a vehicle
ahead.

•

Only the set speed will be maintained and
the driver will have to apply the brakes
when needed.

Related information

•
•
•

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 266)
Cruise Control (CC) (p. 261)
Center display overview (p. 32)

If CC was activated when the engine was turned
off, ACC will be selected and go into standby
mode when the engine is restarted.

Switching from CC back to ACC
1.

In the center display's Function view, tap the
Activate cruise control button.

The symbol in the instrument panel will
change from
(CC) to
(ACC). This means that CC has been completely deactivated (turned off) and ACC is in
standby mode (ready for use but not currently maintaining a set speed/time interval).

button on the left-side steerPress the
ing wheel keypad: ACC goes into active
mode and sets the vehicle's current speed
and the selected distance to the vehicle
ahead.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 265

DRIVER SUPPORT

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
•

It is advisable to read through all of the
related articles pertaining to ACC (see
the list at the end of this article).

The driver sets that desired speed and time interval to the vehicle ahead. When the camera and
radar sensor detects a slower moving vehicle
ahead, your vehicle's speed is automatically
adapted. When there are no longer slower moving vehicles ahead, your vehicle will accelerate to
resume the set speed.

•
•

ACC is designed to follow a vehicle ahead in the
same lane and maintain a time interval to that
vehicle set by the driver. If the radar sensor does
not detect a vehicle ahead, ACC will instead
maintain the speed set by the driver.
ACC is designed to smoothly regulate speed.
However, the driver must apply the brakes in situations that require immediate braking. This
applies when there are great differences in
speed between vehicles, or if the vehicle ahead
brakes suddenly. Due to limitations in the radar
sensor, braking may occur unexpectedly or not at
all.
Adaptive Cruise Control can follow another vehicle from a standstill up to 125 mph (200 km/h).
Always observe posted speed limits.

266

WARNING

ACC is an optional system designed to assist
the driver by maintaining a set speed or a set
time interval to the vehicle ahead.

•

WARNING

•

Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover all
driving situations and traffic, weather and
road conditions.

Adaptive Cruise Control is not a collision
avoidance system. The driver is always
responsible for applying the brakes if the
system does not detect another vehicle.

•

This system is designed to be a supplementary driving aid. It is not, however,
intended to replace the driver's attention
and judgement. The driver is responsible
for maintaining a safe distance and speed
and must intervene if Adaptive Cruise
Control does not maintain a suitable
speed or suitable distance to the vehicle
ahead.

Adaptive Cruise Control does not react to
people or animals, or small vehicles such
as bicycles and motorcycles. It also does
not react to slow moving, parked or
approaching vehicles, or stationary
objects.

•

Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in
demanding driving conditions such as city
driving or other heavy traffic situations, in
slippery conditions, when there is a great
deal of water or slush on the road, during
heavy rain or snow, in poor visibility, on
winding roads or on highway on- or offramps.

Maintenance of ACC components may
only be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo technician.

Overview
The distance to the vehicle ahead (in the same
lane) is monitored by a radar sensor. Your vehicle's speed is regulated by accelerating and
braking. The brakes may emit a sound when they
are being modulated by the adaptive cruise control system. This is normal.

WARNING
The brake pedal moves when the adaptive
cruise control system modulates the brakes.
Do not rest your foot under the brake pedal.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT
Controls

Instrument panel

Collision warning

Function buttons and symbols

Speed indicators

Warning light

Increases the set speed or puts ACC back
into active mode (previous settings will be
resumed)

Set speed

Puts ACC in active mode and stores the current speed or puts ACC standby mode

The current speed of your vehicle

Reduces the set speed
Target vehicle indicator: ACC has detected
and is following a target vehicle using the set
time interval

Speed of the vehicle ahead

Adaptive Cruise Control can exert brake force
that is equivalent to approximately 40% of the
vehicle's total braking capacity.
In situations requiring more brake force than
ACC can provide and if the driver does not apply
the brakes, an audible signal from the City Safety
system will sound and warning light will illuminate
in the windshield to alert the driver to react.

NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is
not looking straight ahead may make the visual warning signal in the windshield difficult to
see.
}}
267

DRIVER SUPPORT
||

Head-up-display*

•

Setting an Adaptive Cruise Control time
interval (p. 272)

Starting and activating Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)

•

Deactivating/resuming Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) (p. 269)

•

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) symbols and
messages (p. 286)

ACC must first be put in active mode before it
can be started in order to regulate speed or a
set time interval to the vehicle ahead.

•

Switching between Cruise Control (CC) and
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 265)

Starting ACC (putting it in standby
mode)

A flashing light alerts the driver

A flashing icon will appear in the head-up display* to alert the driver of a collision risk.

WARNING
Adaptive Cruise Control only warns of vehicles
detected by the radar sensor. In some cases
there may be no warning or the warning may
be delayed. The driver should always apply the
brakes when necessary.

Related information

268

•

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) - fault tracing
(p. 285)

•

Starting and activating Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) (p. 268)

•

Adaptive cruise control passing assistance
(p. 284)

Function buttons and symbols

–

Press ◀ (2) or ▶ (3) to scroll to the ACC
(
) function. The symbol (4) will be displayed in the instrument panel.
> The symbol indicates that ACC has been
started and is in standby mode. In
standby mode, the vehicle will not maintain a set speed or a time interval to the
vehicle ahead.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT

Activating ACC (putting it in active
mode and setting a speed)

The time interval to the vehicle ahead will only be shown
when two vehicles are displayed.

Before ACC can be put in active mode:

•

The driver's seat belt must be buckled and
the driver's door must be closed.

•

There must be a vehicle ahead (a target vehicle) or your vehicle's current speed must be
at least 10 mph (15 km/h).

A speed interval will also be
indicated:

•
•

Deactivating/resuming Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)
ACC can be put temporarily in standby mode
and then reactivated.

Deactivating and putting ACC in
standby mode
If ACC is in standby mode and your vehicle
comes too close to the vehicle ahead, the driver
will be warned by the Distance Alert system
instead.

The higher speed is the one set in ACC
The lower one is the speed of the vehicle
ahead (the target vehicle).

Related information

•
•
–

With the
symbol displayed (ACC is in
standby mode), press the
button (1) on
the left-side steering wheel keypad.
> This puts ACC in active mode and sets
the vehicle's current speed, which is indicated by digits in the center of the speedometer.

•

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 266)
Setting an Adaptive Cruise Control time
interval (p. 272)
Deactivating/resuming Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) (p. 269)

}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 269

DRIVER SUPPORT
||

To temporarily deactivate and put Adaptive Cruise
Control in standby mode:

In these cases, the driver will have to regulate the
vehicle's speed.
A temporary increase in speed, such as when
passing another vehicle, does not affect the ACC
set speed. The vehicle will return to the set speed
when the accelerator pedal is released.
Automatic standby mode
ACC interacts with other systems, such as
Electronic Stability Control. If any of these other
systems are not functioning properly, ACC will
turn off automatically.

WARNING
Press the
button (2).
> The
symbol in the instrument panel
will change colors from WHITE to GRAY
and the set speed in the center of the
speedometer will change from BEIGE to
GRAY.

Standby mode due to action by the driver
ACC is temporarily deactivated and put in
standby mode if:

•
•
•

270

the brakes are applied

•

the vehicle's speed goes below approx.
3 mph (5 km/h) and ACC cannot determine
if the vehicle ahead is stationary or is an
object such as a speed bump, etc

•

the vehicle's speed goes below approx.
3 mph (5 km/h) and the vehicle ahead
changes lanes or turns so that ACC no
longer has a target vehicle to follow

•
•

the driver opens the door

engine speed (rpm) is too high/low
the wheels lose traction
the parking brake is applied
the stability system's ESC Sport Mode is
activated
the Off Road drive mode is selected
The radar sensor is covered by e.g., wet snow
or if heavy rain interferes with radar waves

Reactivating ACC from standby mode
To reactivate ACC after it has temporarily been
put in standby mode:
–

Press the
button (1).
> The vehicle will then return to the most
recently set speed.

WARNING
There may be a significant increase in speed
button has been pressed.
after the

ACC switches automatically to standby mode if:

The gear selector is moved to N
the vehicle is driven faster than the set
speed for more than 1 minute.

•
•

If this happens, the driver will be alerted by an
audible signal and a message in the instrument panel. The driver will have to adapt the
vehicle's speed, apply the brakes when necessary and keep a safe distance to the vehicle
ahead.

Function buttons and symbols

–

•
•
•
•

Related information

•
•

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 266)

•

Setting an Adaptive Cruise Control time
interval (p. 272)

Starting and activating Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) (p. 268)

the driver unbuckles the seat belt

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT

•

Adaptive cruise control passing assistance
(p. 284)

Changing Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) speed

•

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) symbols and
messages (p. 286)

ACC makes it possible to set various speeds.

Changing a set speed

If speed is increased by pressing the accelerator
pedal before the
button is pressed, the vehicle's speed when the button is pressed will
become the set speed assuming that the accelerator pedal is still depressed when the button is
pressed.
A temporary increase in speed, such as when
passing another vehicle, does not affect the ACC
set speed. The vehicle will return to the set speed
when the accelerator pedal is released.
The lowest speed that can be set for ACC is
20 mph (30 km/h). However, ACC can monitor
and react to the speed of the vehicle ahead down
to a standstill.

ACC not installed at the factory
Change a set speed by pressing the
(1)
or — (3) buttons briefly or by pressing and
holding them:

This function can be installed in the vehicle after
delivery if it is equipped with the normal cruise
control. If ACC was installed after the vehicle was
purchased, it will differ from the factory-installed
version as follows:

•

Press briefly: changes speed in
+/– 5 mph (+/– 5 km/h) increments.
Each press changes the vehicle's speed
by +/– 5 mph (+/– 5 km/h).

•

Press and hold: changes the speed
+/– 1 mph (+/– 1 km/h) at a time.
Release the button when the set speed
indicator (4) has moved to the desired
speed.

If the speed of the vehicle ahead goes below
18 mph (30 km/h), ACC disengages (goes
into standby mode) and will no longer modulate the brakes. The driver will then have to
maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead

•

The lowest speed at which ACC can be
started is 20 mph (30 km/h)

Function buttons and symbols

–

}}
271

DRIVER SUPPORT
||

Related information

•
•
•

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 266)
Starting and activating Pilot Assist (p. 276)
Setting an Adaptive Cruise Control time
interval (p. 272)

Setting an Adaptive Cruise Control
time interval

Changing a time interval

ACC makes it possible to set various time intervals to the vehicle ahead.
Different time intervals to the
vehicle ahead can be selected
and are shown in the instrument panel as 1–5 horizontal
bars. The greater the number of
bars, the longer the time interval. One bar between the vehicles represents a time interval of approximately
1 second; 5 bars is approximately 3 seconds.

Controls for setting a time interval

The same symbol appears if Distance Alert is
activated.

•

If the symbol shows two vehicle's, ACC is
actively following the vehicle ahead.

•

If only one vehicle is displayed, ACC is not
actively following another vehicle.

Reduce the time interval
Increase the time interval
Distance/time indicator
–

Press buttons (1) or (2) to reduce or
increase the time interval.
> The distance/time indicator (3) shows the
current time interval.

In order to follow the vehicle ahead as smoothly
as possible, ACC allows the time interval to vary
considerably in certain situations. At low speeds,
when the distance to the vehicle ahead is short,
ACC increases the time interval slightly.

•

272

If ACC does not seem to react when it is put
in active mode, this may be because the set

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT
time interval to the vehicle ahead does not
allow an increase in speed.

•

The higher the speed, the greater the distance to the vehicle ahead for a given time
interval.

•

Only use time intervals permitted by local
traffic regulations.

WARNING

•

Only use a time interval that is suitable in
current traffic conditions.

•

A short time interval gives the driver limited reaction time if an unexpected situation occurs in traffic.

Pilot Assist*
The Pilot Assist feature helps keep the vehicle in
its current traffic lane, at a set speed and a set
time interval to the vehicle ahead.

Function
The vehicle's camera monitors the traffic lane's
side marker lines and a distance monitor helps
maintain the set time interval to the vehicle
ahead.
Pilot Assist helps provide more relaxed driving in
heavy, slow-moving traffic at speeds up to
30 mph (50 km/h) on highways and major roads.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 266)

•

Deactivating/resuming Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) (p. 269)

•

Adaptive cruise control passing assistance
(p. 284)

•

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) symbols and
messages (p. 286)

Pilot Assist's steering assistance is based on
monitoring the direction of the vehicle ahead and
the traffic lane's side marker lines. The driver can
always override Pilot Assist and steer the vehicle
to e.g., change lanes, etc.
If the camera and radar sensor cannot detect the
lane's side marker lines or a vehicle ahead, Pilot
Assist goes into standby mode.

Related information

•
•

The driver sets the desired time interval to the
vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist monitors that vehicle
and the traffic lane's side market lines using the
camera and radar sensor mounted in the upper,
center section of the windshield. It helps maintain
the set time interval by automatically adjusting
speed and by providing steering assistance to
help keep your vehicle in the lane.

When Pilot Assist is in standby mode and your
vehicle comes too close to the vehicle ahead, the
driver will be alerted by the Distance Alert function.

Starting and activating Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) (p. 268)

Function overview

Windshield module containing the camera/
radar sensor
Monitoring distance
Monitoring side marker lines

}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 273

DRIVER SUPPORT
||

WARNING

•

Pilot Assist is designed to be a supplementary driving aid and cannot cover all
driving situations, traffic, weather and/or
road conditions.

•

The driver should be familiar with all of
the information in this article regarding
Pilot Assist, including its limitations.

•

Pilot Assist is not intended to replace the
driver's attention and judgement.

•

Pilot Assist must only be used where
there are clearly visible traffic lane side
marker lines on both sides of the current
traffic lane. In other circumstances there
is an increased risk of collision with surrounding obstacles that are not detected
by the system.

•

The driver is always responsible for steering the vehicle and maintaining a suitable
speed and distance to the vehicle ahead
and must intervene if necessary, even if
Pilot Assist is being used.

Pilot Assist is designed to regulate speed
smoothly but in situations calling for fast braking,
the driver must apply the brakes. This applies to
situations where there are considerable differences in speed or if the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly. Due to the limitations of the camera and
radar sensor, the system may apply the brakes in
your vehicle suddenly or not at all.

274

The default speed for Pilot Assist is preset to
approx. 30 mph (50 km/h) and cannot be
changed. If the vehicle ahead increases speed to
over 30 mph (50 km/h) and pulls away from your
vehicle, Pilot Assist will go into standby mode.

Pilot Assist overview
Controls

NOTE

•

Pilot Assist maintenance should only be
carried out by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.

•

Pilot Assist regulates your vehicle's
speed using the accelerator pedal and
the brakes. Please be aware that there
may be a faint sound from the brakes
when the system is using them.

WARNING

•

Pilot Assist does not react to people or
animals, or small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. It also does not
react to low trailers, slow moving, parked
or approaching vehicles, or stationary
objects.
Do not use Pilot Assist in demanding
driving conditions such as city driving or
other heavy traffic situations, in slippery
conditions, when there is a great deal of
water or slush on the road, during heavy
rain or snow, in poor visibility, on winding
roads or on highway on- or off-ramps.

Function buttons and symbols

[
]: Press to activate Pilot Assist or put it
in standby mode
Arrow key [ < ]: change from Pilot Assist to
Adaptive Cruise Control (symbol (6) will also
change)
Reduce the distance (time interval) to the
vehicle ahead
Arrow key [ > ]: change from Adaptive Cruise
Control to Pilot Assist (symbol (6) will also
change)
Increase the distance (time interval) to the
vehicle ahead
Function symbols

DRIVER SUPPORT
Instrument panel

Collision warning

Head-up-display*

Speed indication

Warning light

A flashing symbol alerts the driver

Pilot Assist can exert brake force that is equivalent to approximately 40% of the vehicle's total
braking capacity.

If the vehicle is equipped with a head-up display*,
a flashing symbol in the windshield will alert the
driver.

Set speed
Speed of the vehicle ahead
Your vehicle's current speed.

In situations requiring more brake force than Pilot
Assist can provide and if the driver does not
apply the brakes, an audible signal from the City
Safety system will sound and warning light will
illuminate in the windshield to alert the driver to
react.

}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 275

DRIVER SUPPORT
||

WARNING

Starting and activating Pilot Assist

Pilot Assist only provides warnings for vehicles that its radar sensor and camera have
detected. For this reason, a warning may be
given later than expected or not at all. The
driver should never wait for a warning before
applying the brakes.

With ACC in standby mode:

Related information

•
•

•
•
•

Tap ▶ (4).
> The symbol will be displayed and Pilot
Assist will go into standby mode.

button (1) on the left-side
Press the
steering wheel keypad.
> Pilot Assist will go into active mode.

Pilot Assist limitations (p. 280)
Pilot Assist auto-hold brake function
(p. 279)
Distance Alert* (p. 329)
Other Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) functions (p. 282)
Setting an Adaptive Cruise Control time
interval (p. 272)

WARNING
Function buttons and symbols

Prerequisites
The prerequisites for activating Pilot Assist are:

•

The vehicle ahead must be within a reasonable (detectable) distance

•

The camera must be able to clearly detect
the traffic lane's side marker lines

•

The vehicle's speed must be under approx.
30 mph (50 km/h).
A WHITE symbol indicates that
Pilot Assist has been selected.
In other cases, the WHITE
arrow pointing to the right indicates that the system is available.

276

A YELLOW symbol with a flashing WHITE arrow
indicates that the system is about to shift into
standby mode.

•

Pilot Assist is not a collision avoidance
system. The driver is always responsible
for applying the brakes if the system does
not detect another vehicle.

•

Do not use Pilot Assist in demanding
driving conditions such as city driving or
other heavy traffic situations, in slippery
conditions, when there is a great deal of
water or slush on the road, during heavy
rain or snow, in poor visibility, on winding
roads or on highway on- or off-ramps.

•

Pilot Assist uses the vehicle's camera
and radar sensor, which have limitations.
Pilot Assist may deactivate or not function
optimally if:

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT

•

the lane's side market lines are missing,
badly faded or cross each other.

•

the division of lanes is not clear, e.g.,
when a line divides or merges with
another, at exits or if there are many road
signs/markers.

•

if there are edges or other lines on or
near the lane, e.g., curbs, cracks, repaired
areas, sharp shadows, etc.

•
•

the lane is narrow or winding.

the weather conditions (rain, snow, fog,
slush, poor visibility, backlighting, etc).
The driver should also be aware that Pilot
Assist has the following limitations:

•

High curbs, barriers and temporary obstacles (cones, barriers etc) may not be
detected or could be detected incorrectly
as side marker lines, which may create a
risk of collision. The driver must ensure a
safe distance to these obstacles.
The camera or radar sensor may not be
able to detect objects if there are potholes or if there are stationary objects
partially or completely blocking the road.

•

Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians,
animals, etc.

•

Pilot Assist's steering capacity is limited
and may not always be able to help the
driver keep the vehicle in the lane.

Hands on the steering wheel
Pilot Assist only functions when the driver's
hands are on the steering wheel, which is continuously monitored by the system. If this is not
the case, the driver will be alerted by a text message in the instrument panel. If the driver's hands
are not returned to the steering wheel, an audible
signal will sound.

Deactivating/resuming Pilot Assist
Putting Pilot Assist in standby mode

If the driver does not return his/her hands to the
steering wheel after the audible signal, Pilot
Assist will go into standby mode and must be
.
reactivated by pressing

Related information

•

Pilot Assist* (p. 273)

Function buttons and symbols

button (1).
Press the
> Pilot Assist will go into standby mode.

Press the ◀ button (2).
> Pilot Assist will be turned off and shift to
ACC in standby mode.

or
–

Press the ◀ button (2).
> Pilot Assist will be turned off and switch
to ACC in active mode.

}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 277

DRIVER SUPPORT
||

Standby mode due to driver action
If a turn signal is used or if the accelerator pedal
is pressed, Pilot Assist will temporarily go into
standby mode. When the turn signal is switched
off or the accelerator pedal is released, Pilot
Assist will reactivate automatically.
Automatic reactivation from standby mode can be
done within 1 minute. After 1 minute has
elapsed, Pilot Assist must be reactivated manbutton.
ually by pressing the
Pilot Assist will temporarily go into standby mode
if:

•
•

the brakes are applied
the gear selector is moved to the N position.

The driver will then have to regulate speed and
distance to the vehicle ahead, or reactivate Pilot
Assist manually by pressing the
button on
the left-side steering wheel keypad.
Automatic standby mode
Pilot Assist interacts with other systems, such as
Electronic Stability Control. If any of these other
systems are not functioning properly, Pilot Assist
will automatically be deactivated.

WARNING
If this happens, the driver will be alerted by an
audible signal and a message in the instrument panel. The driver will have to adapt the
vehicle's speed, apply the brakes when necessary and keep a safe distance to the vehicle
ahead.
Pilot Assist switches automatically to standby
mode if:

•

the camera cannot detect the traffic lane's
side marker lines

•

the vehicle ahead is not within a reasonable
(detectable) distance

•

the driver's hands are not on the steering
wheel

•
•
•
•
•

the driver unbuckles the seat belt

Setting a Pilot Assist time interval
Different time intervals to the vehicle ahead can
be selected and are shown in the instrument
panel as 1–5 horizontal bars.

Changing the time interval
The greater the number of bars,
the longer the time interval.
One bar between the vehicles
represents a time interval of
approximately 1 second; 5 bars
is approximately 3 seconds.
The same symbol appears if Distance Alert is
activated.

engine speed (rpm) is too high/low
the wheels lose traction
brake temperature is too high
The camera lens/radar sensor is covered by
e.g., wet snow or if heavy rain interferes with
radar waves

Reactivating Pilot Assist from standby
mode
–

Press the
button (1).
> The most recently set speed will be used.

Related information

•
278

Pilot Assist* (p. 273)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT

WARNING

•

Only use a time interval that is suitable in
current traffic conditions.

•

A short time interval gives the driver limited reaction time if an unexpected situation occurs in traffic.

Related information

•
Time interval controls

Pilot Assist* (p. 273)

Pilot Assist auto-hold brake
function
At certain speeds, Pilot Assist provides braking
effect.

Stop-and-go driving
During brief stops in slow-moving traffic or att
traffic lights where the vehicle is not stopped for
more than 3 seconds, driving will resume automatically. If it takes more than 3 seconds for the
vehicle ahead to begin moving again, Pilot Assist
will go into standby mode and the auto-hold
brake function will activate.

Press to reduce the time interval to the vehicle ahead

The driver will then have to reactivate Pilot Assist
as follows:

Press to increase the time interval to the
vehicle ahead

–

•
•

Distance indicator
In order to follow the vehicle ahead as smoothly
as possible, Pilot Assist allows the time interval to
vary considerably in certain situations. At low
speeds, when the distance to the vehicle ahead
is short, Pilot Assist increases the time interval
slightly.

•

If Pilot Assist does not seem to react when it
is put in active mode, this may be because
the set time interval to the vehicle ahead
does not allow an increase in speed.
The higher the speed, the greater the distance to the vehicle ahead for a given time
interval.

Press the

button

Press the accelerator pedal
> Pilot Assist will resume following the vehicle ahead if it begins to move within
approx. 6 seconds.

NOTE

•

Pilot Assist can keep the vehicle stationary for max. 5 minutes, after which the
parking brake will be set and Pilot Assist
will go into standby mode.

•

The parking brake must be released
before Pilot Assist can be reactivated.
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 279

DRIVER SUPPORT
||

Deactivating the auto-hold brake
function
In certain situations, auto-hold will be deactivated
when the vehicle is at a standstill and Pilot Assist
will go into standby mode.

Related information

•

Pilot Assist* (p. 273)

Pilot Assist limitations
Pilot Assist functionality may be limited in certain
situations.

This means that the brakes will be released
and the vehicle can begin to roll.
The driver must actively apply the brakes to keep
the vehicle at a standstill.
This can occur in the following situations:

•
•
•
•

the driver presses the brake pedal
the parking brake is set
the gear selector is moved to the P, N or R
positions
the driver puts Pilot Assist in standby mode

Automatically setting the parking brake
In certain situations, the parking brake is set
automatically to help keep the vehicle at a standstill.
This occurs if:

•

the driver unbuckles the seat belt or opens
the door

•

Pilot Assist has kept the vehicle at a standstill for more than approx. 5 minutes

•
•

280

the engine is turned off
the brakes overheat

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT

•

WARNING

•

Pilot Assist is not a collision avoidance
system. The driver is always responsible
for applying the brakes if the system does
not detect another vehicle.
Do not use Pilot Assist in demanding
driving conditions such as city driving or
other heavy traffic situations, in slippery
conditions, when there is a great deal of
water or slush on the road, during heavy
rain or snow, in poor visibility, on winding
roads or on highway on- or off-ramps.

•

Pilot Assist uses the vehicle's camera
and radar sensor, which have limitations.
Pilot Assist may deactivate or not function
optimally if:

•

the lane's side market lines are missing,
badly faded or cross each other.

•

the division of lanes is not clear, e.g.,
when a line divides or merges with
another, at exits or if there are many road
signs/markers.

•

if there are edges or other lines on or
near the lane, e.g., curbs, cracks, repaired
areas, sharp shadows, etc.

•
•

the lane is narrow or winding.

the weather conditions (rain, snow, fog,
slush, poor visibility, backlighting, etc).
The driver should also be aware that Pilot
Assist has the following limitations:

•

The camera or radar sensor may not be
able to detect objects if there are potholes or if there are stationary objects
partially or completely blocking the road.

•

Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians,
animals, etc.

•

Pilot Assist's steering capacity is limited
and may not always be able to help the
driver keep the vehicle in the lane.

•
•
•
•

Setting a Pilot Assist time interval (p. 278)
Deactivating/resuming Pilot Assist (p. 277)
Pilot Assist auto-hold brake function (p. 279)
Camera limitations (p. 254)

The driver can always take action to override Pilot
Assist.

Steep roads and/or heavy loads
Pilot Assist is primarily intended for use on relatively level roads. The function may not be able to
maintain the correct time interval to the vehicle
ahead on when driving down steep hills, when the
vehicle is transporting a heavy load or if it is towing a trailer. The driver should be attentive and
prepared to apply the brakes in these situations.

Related information

•
•
•

Radar sensor limitations (p. 258)
Pilot Assist* (p. 273)
Starting and activating Pilot Assist (p. 276)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 281

DRIVER SUPPORT

Other Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) functions

WARNING
If ACC changes targets from a moving vehicle
to a stationary one at speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h), the system will not react to the
stationary vehicle and will accelerate to the
previously set speed.

ACC has several supplementary functions:

•
•

Changing target vehicles

•
•
•

Auto-hold brake function

Automatic standby mode when changing targets
Deactivation of the auto-hold brake function
Automatically setting the parking brake

Changing target vehicles

The driver must actively apply the brakes to
slow/stop the vehicle.
Automatic standby mode when changing
targets
ACC disengages and goes into standby mode if:

•

If the target vehicle turns suddenly, there may be a stationary vehicle ahead

When ACC is actively following another vehicle at
speeds under 20 mph (30 km/h) and changes
targets from a moving vehicle to a stationary one,
the system will brake for the stationary vehicle.

282

your vehicle's speed goes below approx. 3
mph (5 km/h) and ACC cannot determine if
the target object is a stationary vehicle or
some other type of object such as a speed
bump, etc
the vehicle's speed goes below approx.
3 mph (5 km/h) and the vehicle ahead
changes lanes or turns so that ACC no
longer has a target vehicle to follow

Auto-hold brake function
In slow-moving, stop-and-go traffic or when stopped at a traffic light, driving will resume automatically if the vehicle is not stopped for more than
approx. 3 seconds. If it takes more than
3 seconds for the vehicle ahead to begin moving
again, ACC will go into standby mode and the
auto-hold brake function will activate.

–

The driver will then have to reactivate ACC in
one of the following ways:

•

Press the
button on the left-side
steering wheel keypad

•

Press the accelerator pedal
> ACC will resume following the vehicle
ahead (target vehicle) if it begins to move
within approx. 6 seconds.

NOTE
ACC can keep the vehicle at a standstill for
up to 5 minutes, after which the parking brake
will be set and ACC will go into standby
mode.
The parking brake has to be released before
ACC can be reactivated.

DRIVER SUPPORT
Deactivation of the auto-hold brake function
In certain situations, auto-hold will be deactivated
when the vehicle is at a standstill and ACC will go
into standby mode.
This means that the brakes will be released and
the vehicle can begin to roll.
The driver must actively apply the brakes to keep
the vehicle at a standstill.
This can occur in the following situations:

•
•
•
•

the driver presses the brake pedal
the parking brake is set
the gear selector is moved to the P, N or R
positions
the driver puts ACC in standby mode

Automatically setting the parking brake

Related information

•
•
•

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 266)
Auto-hold brake function (p. 349)
Parking brake (p. 352)

Radar sensor
The radar sensor is used by several driver support functions to help detect other vehicles.
The radar sensor is used by the following functions:

•
•
•
•

Distance Alert*
Adaptive Cruise Control*
Pilot Assist*
City Safety*

Modification of the radar sensor could make its
use illegal.

Related information

•
•

Radar sensor - type approval (p. 284)
Radar sensor limitations (p. 258)

In certain situations, the parking brake is set
automatically to help keep the vehicle at a standstill.
This occurs if:

•

the driver unbuckles the seat belt or opens
the door

•

ACC has kept the vehicle at a standstill for
more than approx. 5 minutes

•
•

the engine is turned off
the brakes overheat

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 283

DRIVER SUPPORT

Radar sensor - type approval
USA & Canada:
FCC ID: L2C0054TR IC: 3432A-0054TR FCC
ID: L2C0055TR IC: 3432A-0055TR
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

Adaptive cruise control passing
assistance

•

ACC can assist the driver when passing other
vehicles.

Starting passing assistance

How passing assistance works

•

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

When ACC is following another vehicle and the
driver indicates that he/she is about to pass that
vehicle by using the left turn signal, ACC will
begin accelerating toward the vehicle ahead
before your vehicle has moved into the passing
lane.

(2) This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.

The function will then delay a speed reduction to
avoid early braking as your vehicle approaches
the slower-moving vehicle.

WARNING

Be aware that this function may be activated
in situations other than when passing a vehicle, such as if the turn signal is used to indicate a lane change or to indicate a turn. The
vehicle will accelerate briefly.

•

284

Radar sensor (p. 283)

Using passing assistance
To activate passing assistance:

•

Your vehicle (ACC) must be following
another vehicle (the target vehicle).

•

Current speed must be at least approx.
45 mph (70 km/h ).

Activate the left turn signal.

Passing assistance limitations
WARNING
The driver should be prepared for sudden
changes when passing assistance is used. In
certain cases, there may be undesired acceleration.
Certain situations should be avoided, such as:

WARNING

The term “IC:” before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.

Related information

To start a passing assistance sequence:

The function is active until your vehicle has
passed the other vehicle.

Changes or modifications not expressively
approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

The speed set for ACC must be high enough
to safely pass the vehicle ahead.

•

If the vehicle is approaching an exit to the
left or a left turn.

•

If the vehicle ahead slows down before
your vehicle has moved into the passing
lane.

•

Traffic in the passing lane slows down.

Passing assistance in these situations can be
deactivated by putting ACC in standby mode.

Related information

•

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 266)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) fault tracing

This message also indicates that the following
systems may have reduced functionality:

If this symbol is displayed in the instrument panel and the message
Windscreen sensor Sensor
blocked, see Owner's manual
appears, the ACC radar sensor is blocked and
cannot detect vehicles ahead.

•
•
•
•
•

Distance Alert

•
•

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)
Traffic Sign Information (TSI)

The following table lists possible causes for this
message being displayed and suitable actions:

City Safety
Driver Alert Control
Pilot Assist
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

Cause

Action

The windshield in front of the radar is dirty or covered with snow/ice.

Clean/clear the windshield in front of the radar.

Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals.

No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the radar.

Swirling water or snow from the surface of the road may interfere with the
radar signals.

No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affect the
function of the radar.

The windshield in front of the radar is clean but the message remains in the
display.

Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that it is
no longer obstructed.

A text message can be erased by briefly pressing
the O button on the right-side steering wheel
keypad. If the message recurs, contact a trained
and authorized Volvo service technician or
retailer.

Related information

•

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 266)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 285

DRIVER SUPPORT

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
symbols and messages

The following table lists several ACC-related
symbols and messages.

In certain cases, ACC will display symbols (in
different colors) and text messages.
Symbol

Message

Explanation

WHITE symbol

ACC is in active mode and maintaining the set speed.

GRAY symbol and Unavailable

ACC is in standby mode.

Adaptive cruise

The system is not functioning properly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo Service technician.

Service required
Windscreen sensor Sensor blocked, see
Owner's manual

Clean the windshield in front of the camera/radar sensor.

Related information

•

286

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 266)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT

City Safety™
City Safety™ is a support system designed to
help alert the driver to pedestrians, cyclists and
vehicles that may appear suddenly in front of
your vehicle. Visual and audible alerts are provided. The vehicle will brake automatically if the
driver is unable to react quickly enough.

City Safety introduction

WARNING

•

City Safety™ is a supplemental aid to the
driver. It can never replace the driver’s
attention to traffic conditions or his/her
responsibility for operating the vehicle in
a safe manner.
City Safety™ does not function in all driving situations or in all traffic, weather or
road conditions.

The City Safety function can help the driver avoid
a collision when e.g., there is a sudden change in
the traffic ahead if the driver's does not take
action.
The function assists the driver by applying the
brakes automatically if there is an imminent risk
of a collision and the driver does not react in
time.
Location of the camera and radar sensor

City Safety can help prevent a collision or lower
the vehicle's speed at the point of impact.

Normally, the occupants of the vehicle will not be
aware of City Safety except when the system
intervenes when a collision is imminent.

City Safety parameters
City Safety can help avoid a collision with a vehicle or cyclist ahead by reducing your vehicle's
speed by up to 30 mph (50 km/h). In the case of
pedestrians, City Safety can reduce speed by up
to 28 mph (45 km/h).
If the difference in speed between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead/pedestrian is greater than
30 mph (50 km/h) or 28 mph (45 km/h) respectively, City Safety's auto-brake function cannot
prevent a collision but it can help mitigate effects
of the collision.

City Safety triggers brief, forceful braking in an
attempt to stop your vehicle immediately behind
the vehicle or object ahead. This braking may be
perceived as being very sudden.
City Safety activates in situations where the driver
has not applied the brakes in time, which means
that the system cannot help the driver in all situations.
City Safety is designed to intervene as late as
possible to help avoid unnecessary activation.
}}
287

DRIVER SUPPORT
||

an audible signal and pulsations in the brake
pedal.

WARNING
Warnings will only be provided if there is an
imminent risk of a collision taking place. The
driver should be aware of the system's limitations before operating the vehicle.

2: Brake assistance
If the risk of a collision increases, brake support
will be activated.

Warnings and automatic braking for pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at speeds
above 50 mph (80 km/h).
City Safety's auto-brake function can help
prevent a collision or reduce the speed at
which a collision occurs. However, the driver
should always apply the brakes, even if autobrake is operating.
The driver is always responsible for maintaining the correct speed and distance in relation
to the vehicle ahead. Never wait for a collision
warning or for City Safety to intervene.
City Safety does not activate the auto-brake
function during fast acceleration.
City Safety maintenance may only be carried
out by a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.

This function increases pressure on the brake
pedal if the driver does not apply enough pressure to the pedal.

3: Auto-brake
The brakes will be applied automatically.
Function overview

Audio-visual collision warning
Distance monitoring by a camera and radar
sensor
When triggered, City Safety carries out three
steps in the following order:
1.

Collision warning

Brake assistance

Auto-brake

1: Collision warning
The driver is first alerted to the risk of an imminent collision.
City Safety can detect pedestrians, cyclists or
vehicles that are stationary, are moving in the
same direction as your vehicle or are described in
the article "City Safety in crossing traffic." The
driver is alerted by a flashing red warning signal,

288

If the driver has not taken action at this stage and
a collision is imminent, auto-braking will be triggered. Full braking effect will be used to avoid
the collision if possible or to make the speed at
the point of impact as low as possible.
In certain situations, auto-braking may begin with
limited effect before full braking is used.
If City Safety has prevented a collision, the vehicle will be kept at a standstill until the driver
takes action. If the vehicle has slowed to avoid
colliding with the vehicle ahead, your speed will
be reduced to that vehicle's speed.
When auto-break is triggered, the seat belt pretensioners may also be activated, see the article
"Seat belts" for additional information.
Auto-braking can be cancelled if the driver
presses hard on the accelerator pedal.

DRIVER SUPPORT
When City Safety applies the brakes, the brake
lights will illuminate.
When City Safety is triggered and applies the
brakes, a text message will be displayed in the
instrument panel.

Related information

•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•

City Safety™ troubleshooting (p. 295)
City Safety in crossing traffic (p. 291)
City Safety limitations (p. 293)

City Safety warning level settings
City Safety is always activated but the function's
warning distance can be adjusted.

Rear Collision Warning (RCW) (p. 292)
City Safety warning level settings (p. 289)

To do so:

City Safety in crossing traffic (p. 291)

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

Tap My Car

Choose among Earlier, Normal or Later.

Detecting cyclists and pedestrians with City
Safety (p. 290)

•

No automatic system can be guaranteed
to function 100% correctly in all situations. For that reason, never test City
Safety by driving toward a person or
object. This could result in serious injury
or death.

•

Even if the setting Earlier has been
selected, warnings may be perceived as
being given late, e.g., if the difference in
speed is great or if the vehicle ahead
brakes suddenly.

•

City Safety can provide a warning for a
potential collision but it can never shorten
the driver's reaction time.

•

To help make City Safety as effective as
possible, always using the setting Earlier
is recommended.

NOTE
City Safety cannot be turned off and activates
automatically each time the engine/electric
motor is started.
Setting a warning level (distance)
The distance set for warnings determines the
system's responsiveness and sets the distance at
which visual, audible and tangible (haptic) warnings will be triggered.

City Safety symbols and messages (p. 297)

WARNING

Seat belts (p. 64)

IntelliSafe

City Safety.

Begin by choosing Earlier. If too many warnings
are given, change to Normal.
If the driver feels that warnings are given too
often, the warning level can be lowered. This
means that warnings will be provided later, resulting in fewer warnings being given.
The setting Later should only used in exceptional
circumstances, e.g., for a more dynamic driving
style.

NOTE

•

Due to local traffic regulations in certain
markets, RCW will not activate the rear
turn signals. That part of the function will
be deactivated.

•

The use of the rear turn signals will also
be deactivated if the City Safety warning
level is set at Later. See also the section
"Setting a warning level (distance)" in the
article "City Safety settings."

•

If RCW detects a vehicle approaching
from behind, the seat belt pretensioners

}}
289

DRIVER SUPPORT
||

and Whiplash Protection System will be
activated.

Related information

•
•
•

City Safety limitations (p. 293)
City Safety™ (p. 287)
Rear Collision Warning (RCW) (p. 292)

Detecting cyclists and pedestrians
with City Safety

shoulders, legs, the upper and lower parts of the
body and a cyclist's normal pattern of movement.

City Safety can detect vehicles, cyclists and
pedestrians.

•

If major parts of the cyclist's body are not
visible to the camera, the system cannot
detect the cyclist.

•

The cyclist must be an adult riding a bike
intended for an adult.

Vehicles
City Safety detects most types of vehicles that
are either stationary, moving in the same direction as your vehicle or approaching when you are
about to turn left.
In order for City Safety to detect a vehicle in
darkness, its headlights and taillights must be on
and clearly visible.

Cyclists

WARNING
City Safety is designed to be a supplementary
driving aid.
It cannot detect:

•

all cyclists in all situations, e.g., a partially
obscured cyclist will not be detected.

•

a cyclist whose clothing prevents a clear
view of the person's body contours.

•

a cyclist transporting a large object.
The driver is always responsible for operating
the vehicle in a safe manner.

Optimal example of what the system considers to be a
cyclist: clear body/bike contours

To help function optimally, City Safety's function
for cyclist detection needs clear information
about the bike itself and the rider's head, arms,

290

DRIVER SUPPORT

Pedestrians

•

If major parts of the pedestrian's body are
not visible to the camera, he/she may not be
detected.

•

In order to detect a pedestrian, the system
must have a full view of the person's entire
body and the person must be at least 32 in.
(80 cm) tall.

City Safety in crossing traffic
City Safety can help the driver when making a
left turn in an intersection.

Turning at an intersection

WARNING
City Safety is designed to be a supplementary
driving aid.
It cannot detect pedestrians:
Optimal example of what the system considers to be a
pedestrian: clear body contours

To help function optimally, City Safety's function
for pedestrian detection needs clear information
about the person's head, arms, shoulders, legs,
the upper and lower parts of the body and a person's normal pattern of movement.
In order to detect a pedestrian, there must be a
contrast to the background. If there is little contrast, the person may be detected late or not at
all, which may result in a late or no reaction from
the system.
City Safety can also detect pedestrians in darkness with the help of the vehicle's headlights.

•

who are partially obscured, wearing clothing that prevents a clear view of the person's body contours or who are not at
least 32 in. (80 cm) tall.

•

who have limited contrast to their immediate background. A warning or braking
may be delayed or not come at all.

•

carrying a large object.
The driver is always responsible for operating
the vehicle in a safe manner.

1. The area in which City Safety can detect an oncoming
vehicle

In order for City Safety to detect an approaching
vehicle in situations where there is a risk of a collision, that vehicle must be within City Safety's
range (the red area in the illustration).
The following criteria must also be met:

Related information

•
•
•

City Safety™ (p. 287)
City Safety limitations (p. 293)
City Safety in crossing traffic (p. 291)

•

your vehicle's speed must be at least 3 mph
(4 km/h)

•

the approaching vehicle's headlights must be
on

}}
291

DRIVER SUPPORT
||

WARNING

•

City Safety is a supplementary driving aid
and does not function in all driving situations or in all traffic, weather or road conditions.

•

Warnings and braking for an approaching
vehicle will usually come at a very late
stage.

•

The driver is responsible for maintaining a
safe distance and speed. Never wait for a
warning or for City Safety to take action.

Limitations
In certain situations, it may be very difficult for
City Safety to help the driver avoid a collision with
an approaching vehicle in crossing traffic, for
example:

•

on slippery roads when Electronic Stability
Control is active

•

if the approaching vehicle is detected at a
late stage

•

If the approaching vehicle is partially
obscured by another vehicle

•

if the approaching vehicle moves erratically
(e.g., sudden lane changes at a late stage)

Related information

•
•

292

City Safety™ (p. 287)
City Safety limitations (p. 293)

Rear Collision Warning (RCW)

NOTE

The Rear Collision Warning with braking at
standstill (RCW) function can help the driver
avoid rear-end collisions.
RCW is activated automatically each time the
engine is started and cannot be turned off.

•

Due to local traffic regulations in certain
markets, RCW will not activate the rear
turn signals. That part of the function will
be deactivated.

•

If RCW detects a vehicle approaching
from behind, the seat belt pretensioners
and Whiplash Protection System will be
activated.

RCW can warn the driver of a vehicle approaching yours from behind by rapidly flashing your
rear turn signals.
RCW is only activated when a vehicle is rapidly
approaching your vehicle from behind.
At speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h), if RCW
determines that your vehicle is at risk of a rearend collision, the front seat belt pretensioners
and the Whiplash Protection System are activated.

Limitations
In some circumstances, it may be difficult for
RCW to help the driver if there is a risk of a collision, such as:

Just prior to the collision, the brakes are also
applied to help reduce your vehicle's forward
movement if and when the collision occurs. However, this can only happen if your vehicle is stationary.

•

In slippery conditions when Electronic
Stability Control is active

•

The brakes will be released immediately if the
accelerator pedal is pressed.

If the vehicle approaching from the rear is
detected at a late stage

•

If the vehicle approaching from the rear
changes lanes at a late stage

•

If the vehicle approaching from the rear is
moving at a speed above approx. 50 mph
(80 km/h)

DRIVER SUPPORT

Related information

•
•
•
•

City Safety™ (p. 287)
Whiplash protection system (p. 63)
Seat belts (p. 64)
City Safety warning level settings (p. 289)

City Safety limitations
City Safety™ may have limited or reduced functionality in certain situations.
The function has several limitations that the driver
should be familiar with:
Low objects
Hanging objects, such as flags for overhanging
loads or accessories such as auxiliary lights or
front protective grids that extend beyond the
height of the hood may limit City Safety's function.
Slippery driving conditions
The extended braking distance on slippery roads
may reduce City Safety's capacity to help avoid a
collision. In situations of this type, the ABS
brakes and Electronic Stability Control will help
provide braking power and stability.
Backlighting
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is not
looking straight ahead may make the visual warning signal in the windshield difficult to see.
Heat
If the temperature in the passenger compartment
is very high, the camera and radar sensor may be
temporarily turned off for approx. 15 minutes
after the engine has been started to protect their
electronic components. When the temperature
has cooled sufficiently, the camera and radar
sensor will restart automatically.

The visual warning signal may also be temporarily
disabled due to high passenger compartment
temperatures caused by strong sunlight.
Warnings may not be given if the distance to the
vehicle ahead is short and the driver is actively
operating the vehicle (clearly depressing a pedal
or turning the steering wheel).
Reduced visibility
City Safety's functions may be greatly impeded or
deactivated by e.g., intense snowfall or rain, in
dense fog, in very dusty conditions or if there is
blowing snow in front of the vehicle. Condensation, ice, snow or dirt on the windshield may also
reduce the system's functionality.

NOTE

•

Keep the windshield in front of the radar
sensor free of ice, snow, dirt, etc.

•

Snow or ice on the hood deeper than
2 inches (5 cm) may obstruct the sensor.
Keep the hood free of ice and snow.

•

Do not mount or in any way attach anything on the windshield that could
obstruct the radar sensor.

}}
293

DRIVER SUPPORT
||

Camera and radar sensor's field of vision
The camera and radar sensor have limited fields
of vision. In some situations they may detect a
vehicle, pedestrian or cyclist later than expected
or not detect them at all.

•

Other vehicles that are dirty may be detected
later than others and in dark conditions, motorcycles may be detected late or not at all.

Warnings and braking may be delayed or
not occur at all if traffic, weather or other
conditions prevent the camera and/or
radar sensor from detecting pedestrians,
cyclists or other vehicles correctly.

•

Other vehicles can only be detected in
darkness if their headlights and taillights
are clearly visible.

•

The sensors have a limited range for
pedestrians and cyclists. The system
functions best at speeds up to 30 mph
(50 km/h). For stationary or slow-moving
vehicles, the system functions best at
speeds up to approx. 43 mph (70 km/h).

If a text message is displayed in the instrument
panel indicates that the camera or radar sensor
are blocked, it may be difficult for City Safety to
detect a vehicle, pedestrian or cyclist and the
system's functionality may be reduced.

WARNING
Text messages may not be displayed in all situations in which the camera and/or radar
sensor are blocked. It is therefore essential to
keep the windshield in front the camera/radar
sensor clean and free from snow, ice, etc.
Camera and radar sensor components should
only be serviced or replaced by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.
Other limitations
City Safety uses the vehicle's camera and radar
sensor, which have certain general limitations.
See the articles "Camera limitations" and Radar
sensor limitations" for additional information.

294

WARNING

•

Warnings for stationary or slow-moving
vehicles may be impeded by darkness or
poor visibility.

•

Warnings and braking for pedestrians and
cyclists will not be provided at speeds
above approx. 50 mph (80 km/h).

•

Do not place, attach or mount any objects
on the inside or outside of the windshield
near or over the sensor. This could affect
the camera-based functions.

Action by the driver
Backing up
City Safety is temporarily deactivated while the
vehicle is backing up.

Low speed
City Safety is not activated at very low speeds
(under approx. 3 mph (4 km/h). This means that
the system will not be triggered if your vehicle
approaches a vehicle ahead, such as when parking.
Active driver
Action by the driver always has priority. For this
reason, City Safety may not react or react later
than expected in situations in which the driver is
actively operating the vehicle, even if a collision is
imminent. This is also done to help eliminate
excessive warnings.

Related information

•
•
•
•
•

City Safety™ (p. 287)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) - fault tracing
(p. 285)
City Safety™ troubleshooting (p. 295)
Camera limitations (p. 254)
Radar sensor limitations (p. 258)

DRIVER SUPPORT

City Safety™ troubleshooting
Messages pertaining to any possible problems
with City Safety will be displayed in the instrument panel.

Troubleshooting and remedial action

Location of the camera and the radar sensor

If a message is displayed in the instrument panel
saying that the camera/radar sensor is blocked,
City Safety cannot detect vehicles, cyclists or
pedestrians ahead of you, which means that the
system is not functioning properly.
However, this message will not be displayed in all
situations in which the camera/radar sensor is
obstructed. For this reason, the driver must
ensure that the area of the windshield in front of
the camera/radar sensor is always kept clean.

The following table shows some of the situations
that can cause the message to be displayed and
suggested actions.
Cause

Action

The area of the windshield in front of the
camera/radar sensor is
dirty or covered by ice or
snow.

Clean the windshield or remove
the ice/ snow.

Thick fog or heavy rain/
snow blocks reduces the
camera/radar sensor's
range of visibility.

No action. The
driver should be
extra alert in conditions of this type.

There is dirt between
the inside of the windshield and the camera/
radar sensor.

Have the area of
the windshield
cleaned by a
trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.

CAUTION

•

Service and maintenance on City Safety
may only be carried out by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.

•

To help prevent limited or reduced functionality, please also observe the following:

•

Volvo recommends that cracks, scratches
or stone chips on the windshield in front
of the camera/radar sensor should not
be repaired; in such cases, the entire
windshield should be replaced.

•

Before the windshield is replaced, contact a Volvo retailer to ensure that the
correct windshield is ordered and installed. If the wrong type of windshield is
used, this may cause City Safety to function improperly or not at all.

•

Volvo recommends the use of only Genuine Volvo Replacement Windshields.

•

When replacing windshield wipers, use
the same type or ones approved by Volvo.

}}
295

DRIVER SUPPORT
||

WARNING

•

The camera has the same type of limitations as the human eye, i.e., it cannot see
as well in heavy snowfall or rain, thick fog
or in heavy blowing dust or snow. In such
conditions, systems depending on the
camera may experience greatly reduced
functionality or may be temporarily deactivated.

•

Never place any objects, decals, etc., on
the windshield in front of the camera. This
could reduce or block the camera’s function, and could cause one or more of the
systems that utilize the camera to stop
functioning.

•

Strong sunlight, reflections from the road
surface, ice or snow covering the road, a
dirty road surface, or unclear lane marker
lines may drastically reduce the camera’s
capacity to detect the side of a lane, a
pedestrian, a cyclist or another vehicle.

Maintenance
In order for City Safety to function properly, the
area of the windshield must be kept free of dirt,
ice, snow, etc.

Other vehicle functions
If a message is displayed in the instrument panel,
this means that the other systems using the camera/radar sensor (see the list below) will not have
full functionality or may not function at all.
The radar sensor is used by the following functions:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Distance Alert*
Driver Alert Control*
Adaptive Cruise Control*

Radar sensor for other functions

Pilot Assist*

City Safetyuses the same radar sensor as Adaptive Cruise Control. See the article "Radar sensor
limitations" for detailed information.

Road Sign Information*
Active High Beams*
Lane Keeping Aid*

Do not mount or in any way attach anything on
the windshield that could obstruct the camera/
radar sensor.

296

Related information

•
•
•

Radar sensor limitations (p. 258)
Radar sensor (p. 283)
City Safety limitations (p. 293)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT

City Safety symbols and messages
A number of City Safety-related messages may
be displayed in the instrument panel.
Message

Explanation

City Safety

When City Safety is braking or has applied the brakes, one of more symbols may illuminate in the instrument
panel and a text message will be displayed.

Automatic intervention
City Safety

The system is not functioning properly. Contact a trained and authorized Volvo service technician.

Reduced functionality Service required

Related information

•

City Safety™ (p. 287)

297

DRIVER SUPPORT

Speed limiter (SL)*

Set maximum speed indicator

The Speed Limiter (SL) is a feature that helps
prevent the driver from exceeding a preset maximum speed.

The vehicle's current speed

•

Starting and activating the Speed Limiter
(SL)* (p. 299)

•

Deactivating/reactivating the Speed Limiter*
(p. 303)

WARNING

•

Changing a Speed Limiter (SL)* maximum
speed (p. 299)

The Speed Limiter cannot cover all driving situations and traffic, weather and
road conditions.

•
•

Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)* (p. 300)

•

The vehicle must always be driven
according to current traffic/road conditions.

•

Changing tolerance for the Automatic Speed
Limiter (p. 302)

•

The driver must take action if SL does not
maintain the set maximum speed.

•

Turning the Speed Limiter* off (p. 304)

•

The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle in a safe manner and
observing posted speed limits.

The set maximum speed

Overview

•

Function buttons and symbols

SL switches from standby mode to
active mode and the set maximum speed will
be used
Increases the set maximum speed
From standby mode, press to put SL
in active mode and set the current speed as
the maximum or from active mode, press to
put SL in standby mode (the set maximum
speed can be exceeded)

Related information

Activating/deactivating the Automatic Speed
Limiter (ASL)* (p. 301)

Limitations
On steep downslopes, the Speed limiter's braking
capacity may not be sufficient and the set maximum speed may be exceeded. If this happens,
Speed limit exceeded will be displayed in the
instrument panel to alert the driver.
This message will appear if the set maximum
speed is exceeded by more than approx. 2 mph
(3 km/h).

— Decreases the set maximum speed

298

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT

Starting and activating the Speed
Limiter (SL)*

Activating SL (putting it in active mode
and setting a maximum speed)

The Speed Limiter (SL) is a feature that has to
be selected and activated in order to set a maximum speed.

The engine must be running before SL can be
put in active mode. The lowest maximum speed
that can be set is 20 mph (30 km/h).

Selecting SL (putting it in standby
mode)

–

Changing a Speed Limiter (SL)*
maximum speed

With SL in standby mode (the
will
be displayed), press the
button (2).
> This puts SL in active mode and sets the
vehicle's current speed as the maximum
speed.

Related information

Function buttons and symbols

–

Press ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to scroll to the Speed
) function.
Limiter (
> The symbol (4) will be displayed in the
instrument panel. This indicates that SL
has been selected and is in standby
mode (no maximum speed has been set).

•
•

Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 298)

•

Changing a Speed Limiter (SL)* maximum
speed (p. 299)

•
•

Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)* (p. 300)

•

Changing tolerance for the Automatic Speed
Limiter (p. 302)

•

Turning the Speed Limiter* off (p. 304)

Deactivating/reactivating the Speed Limiter*
(p. 303)

Activating/deactivating the Automatic Speed
Limiter (ASL)* (p. 301)

Function buttons and symbols

–

Change a set maximum speed by pressing
the
(1) or — (3) buttons briefly or by
pressing and holding them:

•

Press briefly: changes the maximum
speed in +/– 5 mph (+/– 5 km/h) increments. Each press changes the maximum
speed by +/– 5 mph (+/– 5 km/h).

•

Press and hold: changes the maximum
speed +/– 1 mph (+/– 1 km/h) at a time.
Release the button when the indicator (4)
has moved to the desired maximum
speed.

}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 299

DRIVER SUPPORT
||

Limitations

Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)*

When driving down steep hills, the Speed
Limiter's braking effect may not be adequate and
the set maximum speed may be exceeded. The
message Speed limit exceeded will appear in
the instrument panel to alert the driver.

The Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL) reads road
signs and adapts the vehicle's maximum speed
to the posted speed limits.

NOTE
This message will appear if the maximum
speed is exceeded by more than 2 mph
(3 km/h).

Green/yellow

ASL is active

Amber/orange

Is SL or ASL active?
Symbols in the instrument panel indicate which
function is active:
SL

ASL

✓

Related information
Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 298)
A

✓

Sign symbolB after "70": ASL is activated.

ASL is in standby mode
ASL is temporarily in standby
mode (e.g., because a speed
limit sign could not be read)

Limitations
Adjusting a set speed is done first when the vehicle passes a speed limit sign. If a speed limit sign
cannot be read (e.g., because it is twisted, damaged, faded, dirty, covered by snow, etc.) ASL will
go into standby mode because the system will
not have "seen" the speed posted on the sign
(SL will activate). The driver will have to react and
adapt the vehicle's speed. ASL will reactivate
when the vehicle passes a speed limit sign that
the system can read.

Related information

WHITE symbol: the function is active, GRAY symbol: the function is in standby mode.
See the section "ASL symbol" below for an explanation of the
symbol's different colors.

•
•

Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 298)

ASL symbol
A road sign symbol (next to the stored
speed in the center of the speedometer) can be displayed in three different
colors as explained in the following
table:

•

Changing tolerance for the Automatic Speed
Limiter (p. 302)

•

Starting and activating the Speed Limiter
(SL)* (p. 299)

A
B

300

Explanation

Gray

The Speed Limiter function can be switched to
Automatic Speed Limiter.

Symbol

•

Road sign
symbol's color

Activating/deactivating the Automatic Speed
Limiter (ASL)* (p. 301)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT

•

Deactivating/reactivating the Speed Limiter*
(p. 303)

•

Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 304)

Activating/deactivating the
Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)*

ASL is activated/deactivated in
the center display's Function
view.

Press the
button on the left-side steering wheel keypad.
> SL will go into standby mode.

WARNING
After switching from ASL to SL, the vehicle
will no longer adapt speed to posted speed
limits. It will only limit the vehicle's maximum
speed.

Activating
1. If SL is not activated, tap the Speed Sign
Assist button1 in the center display's Function view.
> ASL will go into standby mode and a
green indicator light in the button will illuminate. A road sign symbol will be displayed in center of the speedometer.
2.

Related information

•
•

Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 298)
Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)* (p. 300)

Press the
button on the left-side steering wheel keypad.
> ASL will be activated with the vehicle's
current speed.

Deactivating
1. Tap the Speed Sign Assist button in the
center display's Function view.
> ASL will be deactivated and the Speed
limiter (SL) will be activated.

If this button is tapped while SL is activated, ASL will immediately begin reading road signs.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 301

DRIVER SUPPORT

Changing tolerance for the
Automatic Speed Limiter

Related information

•
•

Posted speed limit tolerance
ASL can be set to allow the vehicle to drive a
maximum of 5 mph (10 km/h) above or below
the posted speed limit. For example, if the current
posted speed limit is 50 mph (70 km/h), the
driver can opt to allow the vehicle to drive at a
speed of 55 mph (80 km/h).

•
•

Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)* (p. 300)
Activating/deactivating the Automatic Speed
Limiter (ASL)* (p. 301)
Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 304)
Changing a Speed Limiter (SL)* maximum
speed (p. 299)

Function buttons and symbols

–

Press the
button (1) briefly to change
50 mph (70 km/h) to 55 mph (75 km/h) in
the center of the speedometer (6).
> The vehicle will then use the selected tolerance if the speed limit sign detected is
50 mph (70 km/h). This will continue until
the vehicle passes a sign with a lower or
higher speed limit. The vehicle will then
adjust to the new maximum speed and
the set tolerance will be deleted from the
system's memory.
The set tolerance can be adjusted in the
same way as the set Speed Limiter's set
maximum speed.
If the Road Sign Information system* is
activated, the posted speed limit will be
indicated by a RED marker (4) on the
speedometer's speed scale.

302

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT

Deactivating/reactivating the Speed
Limiter*
The Speed Limiter (SL) can be temporarily deactivated and put in standby mode.

Reactivating SL from standby mode
To reactivate SL after it has temporarily been put
in standby mode:
–

Deactivating and putting SL in standby
mode
To temporarily put the Speed Limiter in standby
mode:

Press the
button (1).
> The maximum speed marker (4) and symbols will change colors to WHITE and the
vehicle's maximum speed will be limited to
the previously set maximum speed.

Related information

•
•

Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 298)
Starting and activating the Speed Limiter
(SL)* (p. 299)

or
–

Press the
button (2).
> The symbols will change colors from
GRAY to WHITE and the vehicle's current
speed will be set as the maximum speed.

Increasing the speed with the
accelerator pedal
The set maximum speed can be temporarily
exceeded using the accelerator pedal without
putting SL in standby mode, for instance when
quick acceleration is required.
Function buttons and symbols

–

Press the accelerator pedal as far down as
possible and release it when the vehicle has
reached the desired speed.
> SL remains activated (the symbols in the
instrument panel will remain WHITE).

Release the accelerator pedal when the temporary acceleration is completed.
> The vehicle will slow down and its speed
will remain under the set maximum speed.

Press the
button (2).
> The symbols in the instrument panel will
change colors from WHITE to GRAY.
This indicates that SL is temporarily in
standby mode and will not limit the vehicle's maximum speed.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 303

DRIVER SUPPORT

Turning the Speed Limiter* off

Road Sign Information (RSI)*

The Speed Limiter (SL) can be turned off.

RSI is a feature that helps the driver see road
signs showing the posted speed limit.

Related information

•

Road Sign Assistance (RSI)* operation
(p. 305)

•

Road Sign Assistance (RSI)* limitations
(p. 306)

•

Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 298)

Function buttons and symbols

1.
2.

Press the
button (2).
> SL will go into standby mode.
Press the ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) buttons to select
another function.
> The SL symbol (4) in the instrument panel
will go out and the set maximum speed
will be erased from the system's memory.
button (2) again.
Press the
> The newly selected function will be activated.

Examples of readable road signs

If the vehicle passes a sign showing the speed
limit, this will be displayed in the instrument panel
and the head-up display*.

WARNING
RSI does not function in all situations and is
only intended to provide supplementary information.
The driver is always responsible for operating
the vehicle safely.

Related information

•
•

304

Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 298)
Starting and activating the Speed Limiter
(SL)* (p. 299)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT

Road Sign Assistance (RSI)*
operation
Speed limit information

Activating/deactivating RSI
RSI can be activated/deactivated in the center display's
function view.

–

Speed limit information

When RSI registers a road sign showing the
speed limit, this sign is displayed as a symbol on
the instrument panel.

Settings
RSI settings can be made in the center display's
Top view.
Go to: Settings My Car
Road Sign Information.

IntelliSafe

Tap the Road Sign Information button in
Function view.
> When RSI is activated, the indicator light
in the button will be green. The indicator
light will be gray when the function is
deactivated.

Activating/deactivating the speed warning
function
The driver can be alerted if the current speed
limit is being exceeded (the symbol for the current speed limit will begin to flash). This function
can be activated or deactivated and the limit for a
warning can be set.
1.

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

Tap My Car
Information.

Tap Speed Limit Warning to activate/deactivate this function.
> If the function is activated, a speed selector will be displayed.

IntelliSafe

Select the limit at which the speed warning is
to be given by pressing the up/down arrows.
Please be aware that the set warning limit
will not be used when a speed camera symbol is displayed in the instrument panel.

Activating/deactivating the audible alert
The audible alert can be activated/deactivated
and the limit for a warning can be set.
1.

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

Tap My Car
Information.

Tap Audio Warning to activate/deactivate
this function.

IntelliSafe

Road Sign

}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 305

DRIVER SUPPORT
||

Speed camera alert

Road Sign Assistance (RSI)*
limitations
RSI may have difficulty reading signs that are:

•
•
•
•
•
•
Speed camera warning in the instrument panel (generic
illustration)

If the Sensus navigation system
in your vehicle is being used,
the driver can be alerted if the
vehicle is exceeding a detected
speed limit and is approaching
a speed camera.

Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 304)

Twisted or damaged
Positioned high above the road
Obstructed (by bushes, etc.)
Partially covered by snow, ice, etc.

NOTE
RSI may perceive certain types of bicycle
holders (with wiring attached to the trailer
electrical socket) as a trailer, which may result
in faulty speed limit information to the driver.

Related information

•
•

306

Located in a curve

The Park Assist system is designed to assist you
when driving into parking spaces, garages, etc.
An audible signal and symbols in the instrument
panel and center display indicate the distance to
the object.

The camera used by RSI (and other driver support systems such as Adaptive Cruise Control*)
has certain limitations. See the article "City
Safety limitations" for additional information.

Related information

•

Faded

Park Assist*

City Safety limitations (p. 293)
Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 304)

Display view showing object zones and sensor sectors

The center display shows an overview of the vehicle in relation to objects that have been detected.
The highlighted sector shows which of the sensors has detected the object. The closer the
highlighted sector is to the vehicle symbol, the
closer the actual object is to your vehicle.
The Park Assist system uses an intermittent tone
that pulses faster as you come closer to an
object. Sound from the infotainment system will
be temporarily turned down.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT
The tone becomes constant when you are within
approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an object and the
innermost sensor field will be red. If there are
objects within this distance both behind and in
front of the vehicle, the tone alternates between
front and rear speakers.
While an audible signal is being given, its volume
level can be raised/lowered using the >II control
in the center console or can be adjusted in the
Setting menu.

WARNING
Park Assist is an information system, NOT a
safety system. This system is designed to be
a supplementary aid when parking the vehicle.
It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement.

The system's rear sensors are activated automatically when the engine is started and are active if
the vehicle rolls rearward with the gear selector
in N or if R has been selected.
The distance monitored behind the vehicle is
approximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The audible signal
comes from the rear speakers.

The distance monitored along the sides of the
vehicle is approximately 1 ft (0.3 m). The audible
signal comes from the side speakers.

Front park assist

The rear sensors will be deactivated automatically
when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine trailer wiring is used. If a non-Volvo trailer hitch is being
used, it may be necessary to switch off the system manually.

Side park assist

The system's front sensors are activated automatically when the engine is started and are
active at speeds below approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h).

Rear park assist

The distance monitored in front of the vehicle is
approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audible signal
comes from the front speakers.
The system's side sensors are activated automatically when the engine is started and are active at
speeds below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

Front Park Assist is deactivated if the parking
brake is applied or if the gear selector is put in P.
When installing auxiliary headlights, be sure that
they do not obstruct the front sensors. Otherwise,
these lights could trigger a Park Assist warning.
}}
307

DRIVER SUPPORT
||

Related information

•
•
•

Activating/deactivating Park Assist (p. 308)
Park Assist limitations (p. 308)
Park assist symbols and messages (p. 310)

Activating/deactivating Park Assist

Park Assist limitations

The Park Assist system can be turned on or off.

The Park Assist system has certain limitations.

On/Off
Park Assist's front and side sensors are activated
automatically when the engine is started. The
rear sensors activate if the vehicle rolls rearward
in N or if R is selected.
This function can be activated/
deactivated in the center display's Function view.

–

NOTE
A trailer hitch whose wiring is integrated with
the vehicle's electrical system will be taken
into account when measuring the available
space behind the vehicle.

Tap the Park Assist button.
> Green indicator: the function is active.
Gray indicator: the function is deactivated.

Related information

•
•
•

308

Park Assist* (p. 306)
Park Assist limitations (p. 308)
Park assist symbols and messages (p. 310)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT

NOTE

•

The system will not detect high objects,
such as a loading dock, etc.

•

Certain materials or fabrics may not be
detected by the sensors. Objects made of
these materials or people wearing clothing made of these fabrics may not be
detected.

•

Children or animals near the vehicle may
not always be detected.

•

Objects such as chains, thin shiny poles
or low objects may temporarily not be
detected by the system. This may result
in the pulsing tone unexpectedly stopping
instead of changing to a constant tone as
the vehicle approaches the object. In
such cases, use caution when backing up
or stop the vehicle to help avoid damage.

•

In certain circumstances, the park assist
system may give unexpected warning signals that can be caused by external
sound sources that use the same ultrasound frequencies as the system. This
may include such things as the horns of
other vehicles, wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, motorcycle exhaust pipes,
other vehicles with similar ultrasound systems, etc. This does not indicate a fault in
the system.

Cleaning the sensors

Location of the Park Assist sensors

The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure
that they work properly. Clean them with water
and a suitable car washing detergent.

NOTE
If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt,
snow, or ice, this could result in false warning
signals from the park assist system.

Related information

•
•
•

Park Assist* (p. 306)
Activating/deactivating Park Assist (p. 308)
Park assist symbols and messages (p. 310)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 309

DRIVER SUPPORT

Park assist symbols and messages

The following table provides some examples.

A number of messages relating to Park Assist
will appear in the instrument panel.
Message

Explanation

Park Assist System

The system is not functioning properly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

Unavailable Service required
Park Assist System
Sensors blocked, cleaning needed

Related information

•

310

Park Assist limitations (p. 308)

One or more of the system's sensors are blocked. Check and clean the sensors as soon as possible.

DRIVER SUPPORT

Park Assist Camera (PAC)*
The Park Assist Camera system is designed to
provide the driver with a view of the area around
the vehicle in the form of a camera image and
graphics in the center display.
PAC is a supplementary parking aid that can be
activated automatically when the gear selector is
in R or by tapping a button in the center display,
depending on the selected settings. See also the
article "Starting the Park Assist Camera."

Cross Traffic Alert* On/Off

Camera views

Zoom3

Panorama (360°) view

NOTE
A trailer hitch whose wiring is integrated with
the vehicle's electrical system will be taken
into account when measuring the available
space behind the vehicle.

WARNING

•

Guiding lines On/Off
Guiding lines for a trailer hitch*2 On/Off
Park Assist On/Off

2
3

Not available in all markets.
Only available on vehicles with a trailer hitch.

PAC is designed to be a supplementary
aid when parking the vehicle. It is not,
however, intended to replace the driver’s
attention and judgment.

•

The camera has blind spots where it cannot detect objects or people around or
near the vehicle.

•

Pay particular attention to people or animals that are close to the vehicle.

•

Objects seen on the screen may be
closer than they appear to be.

Location of the cameras and their fields of vision

All four sides of the vehicle are shown in the center display to help the driver monitor objects
close-by when maneuvering at low speeds.
Each camera view can be displayed separately:

•

Tap the center display in the desired "field of
vision," e.g., behind the rear camera, etc.

The camera view selected (front/left/right/rear)
will be indicated at the top of the graphic.
The cameras can be activated automatically or
manually, see the article "Park Assist Camera
settings."

}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 311

DRIVER SUPPORT
||

Backing up

Location of the rear Park Assist Camera

The rear camera shows a wide area, part of the
bumper and the trailer hitch (if installed).
Some objects on the screen may appear to “lean”
slightly, which is normal.
If the vehicle is also equipped with the optional
Park Assist system, this information will be displayed on the screen as colored fields showing
the distance to obstacles that have been
detected. See also the article "Park Assist
Camera guiding lines and fields."

WARNING
People/objects/obstructions displayed on the
center console screen may be closer to the
vehicle than they appear.

312

Front camera

Side camera

The front camera is located behind the grill and
can be useful when driving off in areas with limited visibility (hedges, bushes, etc). It is active at
speeds up to approx. 16 mph (25 km/h) and is
automatically turned off when the vehicle
exceeds this speed.

The side cameras are located in the respective
door mirrors.

•

Park Assist Camera (PAC)* trajectory lines
and fields (p. 313)

However, if the vehicle's speed remains under
31 mph (50 km/h) for 60 seconds and its speed
goes under 22 mph (22 km/h), the front camera
will reactivate.

•

Park Assist Camera (PAC)* limitations
(p. 316)

•

Starting the Park Assist Camera (PAC)*
(p. 315)

Related information

NOTE
The front camera will only reactivate automatically if Auto Camera Reverse Activation
has been selected in Settings My Car
Park Assist.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT

Park Assist Camera (PAC)*
trajectory lines and fields
The Park Assist Camera system uses trajectory
and lines and fields to indicate the vehicle's
position in relation to its immediate surroundings.

Trajectory lines

These lines also indicate the outermost limits that
any object (door mirrors, corners of the body, a
trailer hitch, etc.) extends out from the vehicle,
even when it turns.

NOTE
When backing up with a trailer, the trajectory
lines show the path that the vehicle will take,
not the trailer.

Models with the 360° panorama camera
system and Park Assist sensors*
On models with the 360° panorama camera system, trajectory lines will be shown in front of or to
the sides of the vehicle, depending on its direction.

•
•

When driving forward: front lines
When backing up: side/rear lines

WARNING
Keep in mind that when the rear camera has
been selected, the image on the screen only
shows the area behind the vehicle. The driver
must always watch for people, animals, other
vehicles, etc., near the sides or the front of the
vehicle when turning while backing up.
The opposite is true when the front camera is
selected.
Sample guidelines

The trajectory lines are intended to show the
position of the vehicle's outermost dimensions
based on the current position of the steering
wheel to help simplify parallel parking, backing
into tight spaces or when attaching a trailer.
The lines on the screen are projected as if they
were a path on the ground around the vehicle
and are directly affected by the way in which the
steering wheel is turned. This enables the driver
to see path the vehicle will take, even if he/she
turns the steering wheel.

Please note that the trajectory lines show the
shortest path. Be sure that the vehicle’s sides
do not come into contact with or scrape
against any obstacle/obstruction when the
steering wheel is turned while driving forward
or that the front of the vehicle does not come
into contact with or scrape against any obstacle/obstruction when backing up.

Location of the cameras and their fields of vision

With 360° view selected, the center display will
show views from all of the parking cameras.
To select a specific camera, tap its "field of
vision."

}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 313

DRIVER SUPPORT
||

Trajectory lines for a trailer hitch (towbar)

Front and rear sensor fields
Front and rear sensors

Side field color

Distance to the object

Orange

0–1 ft (0–0.3 m)

Related information

•
•

Towbar: activate trajectory lines for a trailer
hitch
Zoom: zoom in/out
The camera can help make hitching a trailer easier by showing the "line" that the trailer hitch will
take toward the trailer.
1.

Tap Towbar (1).
> The trajectory lines will be displayed and
the trajectory lines for the vehicle will disappear.
Tap Zoom (2) for a close-up view.
> The camera will zoom in.

trajectory lines for the trailer hitch and the vehicle
cannot be shown at the same time.

314

Park Assist Camera (PAC)* (p. 311)
Starting the Park Assist Camera (PAC)*
(p. 315)

The screen can display colored sensor fields on the car
symbol at the right

The front and rear fields change colors (yelloworange-red) as the vehicle moves closer to an
object.
Front/rear field colors

Distance to the object

Yellow

2–4.9 ft (06.–1.5 m )

Orange

1.3–2 ft (0.4–0.6 m)

Red

0–1.3 ft (0–0.4 m)

Side sensors
The side fields will only be shown in orange.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT

Starting the Park Assist Camera
(PAC)*

Activating/deactivating automatic start
of PAC

PAC starts automatically when the gear selector
is moved to R or can be started manually from
the center display.

PAC can be started automatically when reverse
gear is selected.

Tap My Car

Select Rear View Instead of 360° to set
the rear view as default.

Park Assist.

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

Related information

•

Tap My Car

Park Assist Camera (PAC)* trajectory lines
and fields (p. 313)

Select Auto Camera Reverse Activation
to activate/deactivate automatic start.

•

Park Assist Camera (PAC)* limitations
(p. 316)

•

Ignition modes (p. 370)

Starting the camera
PAC can be started manually in
the center display's Function
view if it is turned off.

Park Assist.

Automatically deactivating the camera
–

Tap the Camera button.
> The camera will start.

Starting the camera in different
situations
When the button is tapped, the vehicle's speed
and direction determine if the camera starts in
top view or front view:

•

Top view: if the vehicle is stationary or is
moving forward at speeds up to 9 mph
(15 km/h)

•

Top view: if the vehicle is stationary or is
reversing, regardless of speed

•

Front view: if the vehicle is moving forward at
speeds between 9–14 mph (15–22 km/h)

Front view switches off at a speed of approx. 16
mph (25 km/h) to help avoid distracting the
driver. If the setting Auto Camera Reverse
Activation has been selected, the camera's front
view will reactivate if the vehicle's speed drops
below 14 mph (22 km/h) within 60 seconds. If
the vehicle's speed has exceeded 31 mph (50
km/h), front view will not automatically reactivate.
Other camera views switch off at 9 mph (15
km/h) and will not reactivate automatically.

Selecting the camera's basic view when
reversing
With Auto Camera Reverse Activation
selected, the driver can also choose the camera
view to be used when reversing: the rear view or
360° view*.
1.

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 315

DRIVER SUPPORT

Park Assist Camera (PAC)*
limitations
The Park Assist Camera system has certain limitations that the driver should be aware of.

NOTE
Bicycle carriers or other accessories mounted
on the tailgate may obstruct the camera's
field of vision.

Blind sectors
Even if a fairly small section of the screen image
appears to be obstructed, this may mean that a
relatively large area is hidden and objects there
may not be detected until they are very near the
vehicle.

•
•

With 360° view selected, objects/obstacles
may not be detected at the edges of the individual cameras' fields of vision.
A crossed-out camera icon means that the
camera is not functioning properly.

Ambient lighting
The camera images are adjusted automatically to
the ambient light, which means the image may
vary slightly in terms of light and quality. Poor
ambient lighting may reduce the quality of the
image.

Maintenance

•

Keep the camera's lens free of dirt, ice and
snow. This is particularly important in poor
ambient lighting conditions.

•

Remove dirt, ice and snow carefully to avoid
scratching the lenses.

•

Clean the lens regularly with warm water and
a suitable car washing detergent.

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)*
Park Assist Pilot (PAP) helps the driver drive into
and leave parallel parking spaces.
Park Assist Pilot (PAP) provides assistance when
parking by measuring the parking space and
turning the steering wheel to guide the vehicle
into the space.
Information about the actions required by the
driver is provided in the center display in the form
of symbols, images and text.

NOTE
The driver's task is to follow the instructions,
select a gear (D or R), regulate the vehicle's
speed, apply the brakes when necessary and
stop.

Related information

•

Park Assist Camera (PAC)* (p. 311)

The "blind" sectors between the cameras' fields of vision

316

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT

Types of parking

Perpendicular parking

WARNING

Parallel parking

•

PAP does not function in all situations
and is only intended to assist the driver
during parallel or perpendicular parking.

•

As the driver, you have full responsibility
for parking the vehicle in a safe manner.

Related information

•
•
•
Procedure for perpendicular parking
Procedure for parallel parking

PAP helps park the vehicle as follows:

The system searches for and measures a
possible parking space. While this is being
done, the vehicle's speed may not exceed
approx. 4 mph ( 7 km/h).

The vehicle is steered while it is backing into
the parking space and its position in the
space is adjusted by prompting the driver to
move forward and rearward while the system
steers. The driver controls the vehicle's
speed.

The system searches for and measures a
possible parking space. While this is being
done, the vehicle's speed may not exceed
approx. 20 mph ( 30 km/h). When backing
into a space, the speed may not exceed
approx. 4 mph ( 7 km/h).

The vehicle is steered while it is backing into
the parking space. The driver controls the
vehicle's speed.

The vehicle's position in the parking space is
adjusted by prompting the driver to move forward and rearward while the system steers.

Using Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 318)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* limitations (p. 320)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* symbols and messages (p. 322)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 317

DRIVER SUPPORT

Using Park Assist Pilot (PAP)*

1. Tap the Park Assist button
in the center display's Function
view. If necessary, slow down to
a speed below 20 mph (30
km/h) for parallel parking or
approx. 12 mph ( 20 km/h) for
perpendicular parking.

1: Searching and measuring

Park Assist Pilot (PAP) gives the driver instructions during the parking procedure.
Symbols, images and text in the center display
indicate when the various steps in the parking
procedure will be carried out.
PAP can be activated if the following conditions
are met after the engine has started:

•
•

Keep an eye on the display and be prepared
to stop the vehicle when you are instructed
by PAP to do so.

Select Parallel parking or Perpendicular
parking and put the transmission in reverse.

Keep an eye on the display and be prepared
to stop the vehicle when you are instructed
by PAP to do so.

Stop the vehicle when instructed to do so.

The vehicle may not be towing a trailer.
The vehicle's speed must be below approx.
30 mph (50 km/h).

NOTE

Parallel parking

If a trailer hitch is configured in the vehicle's
electrical system, PAP will take the trailer
hitch into consideration when determining the
necessary size of a parking space.

NOTE
PAP normally searches for available parking
spaces along the curb on the right (passenger's) side of the vehicle. However, it can also
assist in finding and parking in spaces on the
driver's side. To do so:

Parking
Procedure for parking:

318

The system searches for and measures a
possible parking space.

The vehicle is steered while it is backing into
the parking space.

The vehicle's position is adjusted in the parking space by moving forward and rearward.

•
Perpendicular parking

PAP searches for a potential parking space and
measures it to see if there is sufficient space for
your vehicle. To start this procedure:

Activate the left turn signal. PAP will then
search for a parking space on the left
side of the vehicle.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT
2: Backing into the parking space

When the vehicle is backing up, PAP will steer it
into the parking space. Do as follows:
1.

Check that the area behind the vehicle is
clear and put the gear selector in R.

Back up slowly without moving the steering
wheel. The vehicle's speed must be below
approximately 4 mph 7 km/h.

Keep an eye on the instrument panel and be
prepared to stop the vehicle when you are
instructed by PAP to do so.

3: Adjusting the vehicle's position

NOTE
Parallel parking

Perpendicular parking

•

Release the wheel while PAP is steering
the vehicle.

•

The steering wheel must be able to turn
freely.

•

For PAP to function optimally, wait until
the steering wheel is no longer turning
before beginning the next phase of the
parking procedure.

Parallel

Perpendicular

After the vehicle has backed into the parking
space, its position in the space has to be
}}
319

DRIVER SUPPORT
||

adjusted by driving slightly forward and backing
up.
1.

Put the gear selector in D, wait until the
steering wheel has turned and drive forward
slowly.

Stop the vehicle when you are instructed by
PAP to do so.

Put the gear selector in R, back up slowly
and stop when you are instructed by PAP to
do so.

When the parking procedure is finished (this will
be indicated by a text message and a graphic
image), PAP switches off automatically. If necessary, the driver may need to make minor adjustments to ensure that the vehicle is parked correctly.

2. Follow the instructions provided. The procedure is the same as when parking the vehicle.
The steering wheel may turn back slightly when
the function is completed and the driver may
have to turn the back before leaving the parking
space.
If PAP determines that the driver can leave the
parking space without assistance, the function
will deactivate before the vehicle is completely
out of the space.

Related information

•
•
•

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 316)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* limitations
The PAP function may be limited in certain situations.

The PAP parking sequence is cancelled
A parking sequence will be cancelled:

•

if the vehicle is driven too fast (above approx.
4 mph (7 km/h)

•
•

if the driver taps Cancel in the center display
if the driver moves the steering wheel with
sufficient force.

•

if the anti-lock brakes or Electronic Stability
Control are activated (e.g., if a wheel begins
to spin or lose traction)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* limitations (p. 320)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* symbols and messages (p. 322)

In such cases, a text message will explain why
the parking sequence was cancelled.

CAUTION
The warning distance is shorter when PAP is
using the sensors than when Park Assist is
using them.

Leaving a parking space
This function can only be used
for a vehicle that has been parallel parked and is activated in
the center display's Function
view.

NOTE

•

PAP will not function correctly if its sensors are obstructed by dirt, snow, etc.

•

In certain situations, PAP may not be able
to measure a parking space. This could
be due to external sources of sound (e.g.,
a vehicle's horn, tires on wet asphalt,
pneumatic brakes, noise from a motorcycle's exhaust, etc.) emitting ultrasound
using approximately the same frequencies as PAP.

1. Tap the Park out button in
the center display's Function view.

320

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT

Points to keep in mind
PAP is a parking aid only and the driver should
always be prepared to take control and cancel a
parking sequence. This can be due to one or
more of the following factors:

•

PAP's function is based on the way that the
vehicles are parked behind and in front of
your parking space. If they are, for example,
parked too close to the curb, there is a risk
that your vehicle's tires or wheel rims could
be damaged by the curb during the parking
procedure.
PAP is intended to provide parking assistance on straight streets, not sections of
street with curved or irregular curbs. Be sure
that your vehicle is parallel to the curb when
PAP measures the parking space.
PAP may not be able to provide parking
assistance on narrow streets due to lack of
space to maneuver the vehicle. In situations
like this, it may help to drive between 1.5-5 ft
(0.5-1.5 m) from the side of the road where
the parking space is located.

•

Use only approved tires with the correct inflation pressure because this affects PAP's
capacity to provide parking assistance.
Changing to a different approved tire size
may affect PAP's parameters. Consult a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

•

Heavy rain or snow may inhibit PAP's
capacity to correctly measure a parking
space.

•

Do not use PAP when using snow chains
and/or a temporary spare tire.

•

Do not use PAP if there are any objects protruding from the vehicle.

Maintenance

WARNING

•

The front end of your vehicle may turn out
toward oncoming traffic during the parking procedure.

•

Objects located above the parking sensors' field of vision are not included when
PAP measures a parking space. For this
reason, PAP may turn into the parking
space too soon. Avoid parking spaces of
this type.

•

The driver is always responsible for determining if PAP has selected a suitable
parking space.

Location of the PAP sensors

PAP uses the same sensors as the Park Assist
system. To function correctly, these sensors must
be cleaned regularly with water and a suitable car
washing detergent.

Related information

•
•
•

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 316)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* limitations (p. 320)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* symbols and messages (p. 322)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 321

DRIVER SUPPORT

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* symbols
and messages

Various PAP-related combinations of graphics
and text messages are displayed in the instrument panel and sometimes also include suitable
actions.

Park Assist Pilot uses graphics and text messages to indicate if there is a problem with the
system.

The following table provides some examples.

Message

Explanation

Park Assist System

The system is not functioning properly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

Unavailable Service required
Park Assist System

One or more of the system's sensors are blocked. Check and clean the sensors as soon as possible.

Sensors blocked, cleaning needed
A text message can be erased by briefly pressing
the O button in the center of the right-side steering wheel keypad.
Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician If a message indicating
that PAP is not functioning properly remains displayed or recurs.

Related information

•
•
•

322

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 316)
Using Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 318)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* limitations (p. 320)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT

Adjustable steering force*
Steering force increases with the speed of the
vehicle to give the driver an enhanced sense of
control and stability. At low speed the vehicle is
easier to steer in order to facilitate parking, etc.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) helps reduce
wheel spin, counteract skidding and to generally
help improve directional stability.
A pulsating sound will be audible when the system is actively
operating and is normal. Acceleration may also be slightly
slower than normal.

Changing the steering force level
To change the level of steering force, see the
information under the heading "individual" in article "Drive modes" for additional information.

NOTE

•

This steering force level menu function
cannot be accessed when the vehicle is
in motion.

•

In certain situations, the power steering
function may become too hot and must
be temporarily cooled. During cooling,
power steering effect will be reduced and
more force may be necessary to turn the
steering wheel and a message will be
displayed in the instrument panel.

Related information

•
•

Driver support systems (p. 252)
Drive modes (p. 390)

WARNING
ESC is a supplementary aid and cannot deal
with all situations or road conditions.
The driver is always responsible for operating
the vehicle in a safe manner in accordance
with current traffic regulations.
ESC consists of the following functions:

•
•
•
•
•

Traction control
Spin control
Active Yaw Control
Engine Drag Control
Trailer Stability Assist

Traction control
This function is designed to help reduce wheel
spin by transferring power from a drive wheel that
4 This

function is included if the vehicle is equipped with a Volvo original trailer hitch.

begins to lose traction to the wheel on the opposite side of the vehicle (on the same axle).

Spin control
This function is designed to help prevent the
drive wheels from spinning while the vehicle is
accelerating.

Active Yaw Control
At low speeds, this function helps maintain directional stability by braking one or more of the
wheels if the vehicle shows a tendency to skid or
slide laterally.

Engine Drag Control EDC
EDC helps keep the engine running if the wheels
show a tendency to lock, e.g., when shifting down
in the manual shifting mode or while using the
engine's braking function on a slippery surface. If
the wheels were to lock, the vehicle would
become more difficult to steer.

Trailer Stability Assist*4
TSA helps stabilize a vehicle that is towing a
trailer when the vehicle and trailer have begun to
sway.
This system is automatically deactivated if the
driver selects Sport mode.

Related information

•
•

Detachable trailer hitch (p. 368)
Driving with a trailer (p. 367)
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 323

DRIVER SUPPORT

•
•

Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) (p. 369)

•

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) symbols
and messages (p. 325)

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) sport mode
(p. 324)

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
sport mode
ESC is always activated and cannot be switched
off.
However, the driver can select Sport mode,
which offers more active driving characteristics.
In Sport mode, the engine management system
monitors movement of the accelerator pedal and
steering wheel for sportier driving and allows
more lateral movement of the rear wheels before
ESC is triggered.
Under certain circumstances, such as when driving with snow chains, or driving in deep snow or
loose sand, it may be advisable to temporarily use
Sport mode for maximum tractive force.
If the driver releases pressure on the accelerator
pedal, ETC will also activate to help stabilize the
vehicle.

Activating/deactivating Sport mode
In the center display's Function
view, tap ESC Sport Mode.
The green indicator light in the
button will illuminate to show
that the function has been activated or gray when the function
is deactivated.

324

When Sport mode is activated, this
symbol will illuminate in the instrument
panel. It will remain on until the driver
deactivates the function. ETC will also
return to normal mode when the engine is restarted.

Related information

•

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) (p. 323)

DRIVER SUPPORT

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
symbols and messages
Symbol

Message

Description

Steady glow for 2 seconds
when the engine is started.

The system is performing a self-diagnostic test.

Flashing symbol.

ESC is actively functioning to help counteract wheel spin and/or a skid.

Steady glow.

Sport mode has been activated.
Please note that ESC is not deactivated at this time but its functionality is reduced.

ESC

See the message in the instrument panel.

Temporarily off

}}
325

DRIVER SUPPORT
||

Symbol

Message

Description

ESC Temporarily off

The ESC system function has been temporarily reduced due to high brake disc temperature. The function reactivates automatically when the brakes have cooled.

ESC Service required

The ESC system is not functioning properly.

•
•
WARNING
The stability system is intended to help
improve driving safety. It supplements, but can
never replace, the driver's judgment and
responsibility when operating the vehicle.
Speed and driving style should always be
adapted to traffic and road conditions.

Related information

•

326

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) (p. 323)

Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine and restart it.
If the message is still displayed when the engine has restarted, drive to an authorized Volvo workshop to
have the system inspected.

DRIVER SUPPORT

Roll stability control (RSC)

Driver Alert Control (DAC)

Volvo's Roll Stability Control (RSC) is a stability
system designed to help minimize the risk of a
rollover in emergency maneuvers or if a skid
should occur.

DAC is intended to alert the driver if his/her driving becomes erratic due to e.g., distraction or
fatigue.

RSC uses a gyroscopic sensor that registers the
amount of change in the lateral angle at which
the vehicle is leaning. Using this information, RSC
calculates the likelihood of a rollover. If there is
an imminent risk of a rollover, the stability system
is activated, power to the engine is cut and the
brakes are applied to one or more of the wheels
until the vehicle regains stability.

DAC is designed to help detect a slowly changing driving pattern. It is primarily intended to be
used on main roads and is not meant for use in
city traffic.
The function activates initially when the vehicle's
speed first exceeds 40 mph (65 km/h) and
remains active as long the speed remains above
approx. 38 mph (60 km/h)

WARNING
The vehicle’s stability systems, including RSC,
do not replace the driver’s responsibility for
operating the vehicle in a safe manner. Speed
and driving style should always be adapted to
the current road, traffic and weather conditions. Posted speed limits should always be
respected.

If the driving pattern becomes
noticeably erratic, the driver will
be alerted by an audible signal
and Driver Alert Time for a
break will appear in the instrument panel along with a symbol.
The warning will be repeated if the driving pattern
does not change.

Related information

•
•

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) (p. 323)
General safety information (p. 60)

A camera monitors the traffic lane's side marker
lines and compares the direction of the road with
the driver’s movements of the steering wheel.

}}
327

DRIVER SUPPORT
||

WARNING

Driver Alert Control limitations

Using Driver Alert Control (DAC)

•

DAC is not intended to extend the duration of driving. Always plan breaks at regular intervals to help remain alert.

The camera used by DAC (and other driver support systems such as Adaptive Cruise Control*)
has certain limitations.

DAC settings are made in the center display's
menu system.

•

A warning from DAC should not be
ignored. A driver may not be aware of
how fatigued he/she has become.

In certain situations, DAC may provide warnings
even if the driver’s driving pattern has not
become erratic:

In certain cases, fatigue may not affect
the driver’s behavior. In situations of this
type, no warning will be provided. Therefore, it is important to take breaks at regular intervals, regardless of whether or
not DAC has given a warning.

•
•

•

Related information

•
•

Using Driver Alert Control (DAC) (p. 328)
Driver Alert Control limitations (p. 328)

in strong crosswinds

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

Tap My Car
Control.

Select Alertness Warning to activate/deactivate DAC.

on grooved road surfaces

Related information

•
•
•
•

Activating/deactivating Driver Alert
Control

Driver Alert Control (DAC) (p. 327)
Using Driver Alert Control (DAC) (p. 328)
Driver Alert Control limitations (p. 328)
Camera limitations (p. 254)

IntelliSafe

Driver Alert

Activating/deactivating guidance to a
rest area
With this feature activated, DAC will propose a
nearby rest area if a warning has been given.
1.

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

Tap My Car
Control.

Select Rest Stop Guidance to activate/
deactivate guidance to a rest area.

IntelliSafe

Driver Alert

Related information

•

328

Driver Alert Control (DAC) (p. 327)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT

Distance Alert*

NOTE

Distance Alert is a function that alerts the driver
if the time interval to the vehicle ahead is too
short.

Distance Alert only monitors distance to the
vehicle ahead while Adaptive Cruise Control is
in standby mode or off.

Distance Alert is active at speeds above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h) and only reacts to a
vehicle ahead that is driving in the same direction. No information is provided for vehicles driving toward you, moving very slowly, or at a standstill.

WARNING
Distance Alert only indicates the distance to
the vehicle ahead. It does not affect the
speed of your vehicle.

Related information

•
•

Warning light

An warning light in the windshield glows steadily
if your vehicle is closer to the one ahead than the
set time interval.
If your vehicle is equipped with the optional headup display, a symbol will appear.

Using Distance Alert*
Distance Alert is used as follows:

Operation
Pull down the center display's
Top view and select Settings
followed by Distance alert.
Tap to turn the function On or
Off.

Setting a time interval

Distance Alert* limitations (p. 330)
Using Distance Alert* (p. 329)

Controls for setting a time interval

Reduce the time interval
Increase the time interval
Distance/time indicator

}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 329

DRIVER SUPPORT
||

Different time intervals to the
vehicle ahead can be selected
and are shown in the instrument panel as 1–5 horizontal
bars. The greater the number of
bars, the longer the time interval.

Distance Alert* limitations

Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*

Distance Alert uses the same radar sensor as
Adaptive Cruise Control* and has several limitations.

Blind Spot Information is a system designed to
alert the driver to the presence of other vehicles
moving in the same direction as your vehicle on
roads with several lanes.

WARNING

•

One bar between the vehicles represents a time
interval of approximately 1 second; 5 bars is
approximately 3 seconds.
The same symbol appears if Adaptive Cruise
Control is activated.

NOTE

•

The set time interval is also used by
Adaptive Cruise Control*.

The radar sensor cannot cover all driving
situations and traffic, weather and road
conditions.

•

The driver is responsible for maintaining a
safe distance and speed and must intervene if the various driver support systems
do not maintain a suitable speed or suitable distance to the vehicle ahead.

•

Only use time intervals permitted by local
traffic regulations.

•
•

Related information

•

The greater the vehicles' speed, the
greater the distance between them for a
set time interval.

•

Distance Alert* (p. 329)

The radar sensor has a limited field of
vision. In some situations it may detect a
vehicle later than expected or not detect
other vehicles at all.

Maintenance of radar sensor components
may only be performed by a trained and
qualified Volvo technician.
Strong sunlight, reflections from the road
surface, strong lighting contrasts or using
sunglasses may make the warning light in
the windshield difficult to see.

For additional information, see also the article
"Radar sensor limitations."

Blind Spot Information is a driving aid intended
to:

•

detect other vehicles in your door mirrors'
"blind area"

•

detect vehicles that are about to pass your
vehicle or are approaching your vehicle
quickly from behind in the left and/or right
lanes

WARNING

•

Blind Spot Information is an information
system, NOT a warning or safety system
and does not function in all situations.

•

Blind Spot Information does not eliminate
the need for you to visually confirm the
conditions around you, and the need for
you to turn your head and shoulders to
make sure that you can safely change
lanes or back up.

•

As the driver, you have full responsibility
for changing lanes/backing up in a safe
manner.

Related information

•
•
330

Radar sensor limitations (p. 258)
Distance Alert* (p. 329)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT

Overview

WARNING

•

Blind Spot Information does not function
in sharp curves.

•

Blind Spot Information does not function
when your vehicle is backing up.

Related information

Blind Spot Information indicators

Indicator light
Blind Spot Information symbol
The indicator light illuminates on the side of the
vehicle where the system has detected another
vehicle. If your vehicle is passed on both sides at
the same time, both lights will illuminate.

Principle for Blind Spot Information: Zone 1. Blind area,
Zone 2. Area for approaching/passing vehicles

•

Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* On/Off
(p. 332)

•

Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* limitations
(p. 332)

•

Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* (p. 333)

Blind Spot Information functions when your vehicle is moving at speeds above approx. 6 mph
(10 km/h).
Blind Spot Information is designed to react to:

•
•

vehicles that are passing your vehicle
other vehicles that are rapidly approaching
your vehicle

When Blind Spot Information detects a vehicle in
zone 1 or a fast-approaching vehicle in zone 2,
the indicator light in the respective door mirror
will glow steadily.
If the driver then uses the turn signal on the side
on which the warning is given, the indicator light
will begin flashing and become brighter.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 331

DRIVER SUPPORT

Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*
On/Off
The Blind Spot Information function can be activated/deactivated.

If BLIS is deactivated when the engine is
switched off, it will remain off the next time the
engine is started and the indicator lights in the
door mirrors will not illuminate.

Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*
limitations

Related information

•

Dirt, ice and snow on the sensors may
reduce functionality and prevent the system
from providing warnings.

•

Do not attach any objects, tape, decals, etc.,
on the surface of the sensors.

•

BLIS is deactivated if a trailer is attached to
the vehicle's electrical system.

•

Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* (p. 330)

Blind Spot Information functionality may be
reduced in certain situations.

Blind Spot Information indicators

Indicator light
Blind Spot Information symbol
Blind Spot Information can be activated/deactivated in the center display's Function view.
–

In Function view, tap BLIS.
> When Blind Spot Information is activated/
deactivated, the indicator light in the button will be green/gray.

If BLIS is activated when the engine is started,
the indicator lights in the door mirrors will flash
once.

332

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT

Maintenance

CAUTION

The BLIS/CTA5 sensors are located on the
inside of the rear fenders/bumper.

Repairs to the BLIS/CTA systems and/or
repainting the rear bumper should only be
done by a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.

Related information

•

Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* On/Off
(p. 332)

•
•

Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* (p. 330)

Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)*
Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) is a supplementary part
of Blind Spot Information and is intended to
detect vehicles crossing behind your vehicle
while you are backing up.

When does Cross Traffic Alert function

Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* (p. 333)

Keep the highlighted area clean (on both sides of the
vehicle)

For the system to function optimally, the area
over and around the sensors must be kept clean.
If one or both of the sensors are blocked and
"Rear sensors blocked, cleaning needed" is
displayed in the instrument panel, clean the area
over and around the sensors as soon as possible.
A text message can be erased by briefly pressing
the O button on the right-side steering wheel
keypad.

Principle for CTA

CTA supplements BLIS by warning the driver of
crossing traffic behind your vehicle, for example,
when backing out of a parking space.
It is primarily designed to detect another vehicle
but in certain cases may also detect pedestrians
or smaller objects such as bicycles.
CTA is only activated when the vehicle is rolling
rearward or backing up and is activated automatically when the gear selector is put in reverse.

Cross Traffic Alert*

}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 333

DRIVER SUPPORT
||

•

An audible signal indicates that CTA has
detected something that is approaching from
the side. The signal will come from either the
left or right infotainment system speakers,
depending on which the side of your vehicle
the approaching vehicle/ object has been
detected.

•

A warning is indicated using the Park Assist*
system's graphic in the instrument panel.

•

An icon is also shown in the Park Assist
Camera's* Top view.

Related information

•

Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic Alert
(CTA)* (p. 334)

•

Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* with Cross
Traffic Alert (CTA)* symbols and messages
(p. 337)

•

334

Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic
Alert (CTA)*
Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) can be activated/deactivated separately from Blind Spot Information
(BLIS).

Related information

•
•

Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* (p. 333)
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* On/Off
(p. 332)

CTA is activated/deactivated in
the center display's Function
view.

–

Tap Cross Traffic Alert in Function view.
> CTA activates/deactivates (the indicator
light in the button will be green/gray).

CTA is activated when the engine is started.

WARNING

Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* limitations (p. 335)

•

BLIS and CTA are information systems,
NOT warning or safety systems and do
not function in all situations.

•

BLIS and CTA do not eliminate the need
for you to visually confirm the conditions
around you, and the need for you to turn
your head and shoulders to make sure
that you can safely change lanes or back
up.

•

As the driver, you have full responsibility
for changing lanes/backing up in a safe
manner.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT

Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* limitations
CTA functionality may be reduced in certain situations.

Limitations
CTA has limitations in certain situations, for
example, the CTA sensors cannot "see" through
other parked vehicles or obstructions.
The following are several examples where CTA's
"field of vision" may initially be limited and
approaching vehicles cannot be detected until
they are too close:

In angled parking spaces, CTA may be "blind" on one
side

CTA's blind area
CTA's "field of vision"
However, as you back your vehicle out of a parking space, CTA's "field of vision" expands.

Keep the highlighted area clean (on both sides of the
vehicle)

For the system to function optimally, the area
over and around the sensors must be kept clean.
Do not attach any objects, tape, decals, etc., on
the surface of the sensors.

CAUTION

Examples of other limitations include:

The vehicle is pulled far into a parking space

•

Dirt, ice or snow obstructing the sensors may
reduce the system's function or make it
impossible to detect other vehicles or
objects.

•

CTA is deactivated if a trailer's wiring is connected to the vehicle's electrical system.

Maintenance
The CTA sensors are located on the inside of the
rear fenders/bumper.

Repairs to the BLIS/CTA systems and/or
repainting the rear bumper should only be
done by a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.

Related information

•
•

Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* (p. 333)
Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic Alert
(CTA)* (p. 334)
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 335

DRIVER SUPPORT
||

336

•

Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* with Cross
Traffic Alert (CTA)* symbols and messages
(p. 337)

•

Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* limitations
(p. 332)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT

Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* with
Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* symbols
and messages
In situations where Blind Spot Information
and/or Cross Traffic Alert are not functioning
Symbol

properly or if the function is interrupted, a symbol and a text message may be displayed in the
instrument panel. Follow the instructions provided.

Message

Explanation

Blind spot sensor

The system is not functioning properly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician

Service required
Blind spot sensor
Rear sensors blocked, cleaning needed
Blind spot system off
Trailer attached

One or more of the system's sensors are blocked. Check and clean the sensors as soon as possible.
BLIS and CTA have been deactivated because a trailer has been connected to teh vehicle's electrical system.

Related information

•
•

Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* (p. 333)
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* (p. 330)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 337

DRIVER SUPPORT

Driving lane assistance
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) and Lane
Keeping Aid (LKA)* functions are designed to
help reduce the risk of accidents in situations
where the vehicle unintentionally leaves its lane
on highways or other major roads.

Driving lane assistance systems: LDW
or LKA
There are two versions of the driving lane assistance system:

•

LDW (Lane Departure Warning): provides
an audible signal or vibrations in the steering
wheel.

•

LKA (Lane Keeping Aid): actively steers the
vehicle to help keep it in its traffic lane
and/or alerts the driver using an audible signal or through vibrations in the steering
wheel.

A camera monitors the road/traffic lane's marker lines

Depending on the version and settings used,
driving lane assistance functions in different
ways:

The driving lane assistance systems are active at
speeds from approx. 40 mph (65 km/h) up to the
vehicle's permitted top speed on roads with
clearly visible traffic lane marker lines.
On narrow roads, the systems may not function
and will go into standby mode. They will return to
active mode if the road becomes sufficiently
wide.

338

LKA attempts to steer the vehicle back into its lane

Both LDW and LKA provide vibrations in the steering
wheel6

•

If the system is activated (either LDW or
LKA): if the driver does not react and the
vehicle is moving out of its traffic lane, an
audible signal and/or vibrations in the steering wheel will be provided.

•

If the system is activated (LKA only): when
the vehicle approaches a traffic lane marker
line, LKA will provide active steering assistance to help steer it back into the lane.

The level of vibrations varies; the longer the vehicle is over a lane marker line, the greater the number of vibrations:

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT

Dynamic cornering

NOTE
If the turn signal is used, neither of the driving
lane assistance systems (LDW or LKA) will
provide an alert or steering assistance.

Related information

This feature is only intended to assist the
driver and does not function in all driving,
weather, traffic or road conditions.
As the driver, you have full responsibility for
operating the vehicle in a safe manner.

In order for LKA's steering assistance to function,
the driver's hands must be on the steering wheel,
which the system monitors continuously.
If this is not the case, this symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel and Lane Keeping
Aid Apply steering will appear
to alert the driver to actively
steer the vehicle.
If the driver does not take action, an audible signal will sound and LKA will go into standby mode.
The function will not become available again until
the driver actively steers the vehicle.

winter driving conditions
bad weather with reduced visibility

The driving lane assistance function use the vehicle's camera, which has general limitations. See
the article "Camera limitations."

WARNING

Steering assistance (LKA only)

•
•

•

Activating/deactivating Lane Departure
Warning (LDW) (p. 340)

•

Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Aid
(LKA)* (p. 340)

•

Camera limitations (p. 254)

The traffic lane assistance systems do not intervene in
sharp curves

In certain cases, such as during active driving or if
the turn signal is used, neither of the traffic lane
systems will react if the vehicle crosses a lane
marker line.

Limitations
In certain demanding driving situations, the driving lane assistance functions may not be able to
assist the driver. In these situations, it may be
advisable to turn the function off.
Examples of these situations:

•
•
•
•

road construction
poor road surfaces
edges or lines other than the lane's marker
lines
a very active driving style

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 339

DRIVER SUPPORT

Activating/deactivating Lane
Departure Warning (LDW)

LDW can be activated/deactivated.

Under Lane Departure Warning feedback,
select:

Activating/deactivating Lane
Keeping Aid (LKA)*

• Sound: an audible warning signal will be

LKA can be activated/deactivated.

provided

Activating/deactivating

• Vibrations: the driver will be warned by

Activating/deactivating

vibrations in the steering wheel

Related information

•

340

Driving lane assistance (p. 338)

The function can be activated/deactivated in the
center display's Function view.

–

Tap the Lane Departure Warning button.
> LDW is activated (GREEN indicator light
in the button), or is deactivated (GRAY
indicator light in the button).

Tap Lane Keeping Aid.
> LKA is activated (GREEN indicator light in
the button), or is deactivated (GRAY indicator light in the button).

Type of warning

Choose the type of warning that the driver will
receive if the vehicle starts to leave its driving
lane.

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

Tap My Car IntelliSafe
Departure Warning.

Tap My Car
Aid.

Lane

IntelliSafe

Lane Keeping

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

DRIVER SUPPORT
3.

Under Lane Keeping Aid Warning
Feedback, select:

• Sound: an audible warning signal will be
provided

• Vibrations: the driver will be warned by
vibrations in the steering wheel

Type of assistance
Select the type of assistance LKA should provide:
1.

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

Tap My Car
Aid.

Under Lane Keeping Aid Assistance
Mode, select:

IntelliSafe

Lane Keeping

• Steering: the system will provide steering
assistance but no warning.

• Both: the system will provide steering
assistance and warning

• Warning: the system will provide warning
but no steering assistance

Related information

•

Driving lane assistance (p. 338)

341

DRIVER SUPPORT

Driving lane assistance symbols
and messages

LDW/LKA are monitoring the driving lane's
marker line(s).

A number of symbols and messages relating to
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) and Lane Departure
Warning (LDW) may appear in the instrument
panel.

Not available

Steering/warning indicator

Symbols in the instrument panel
The driving lane assistance
systems use a symbol in the
instrument panel in different
situations.

Steering/warning: the side marker lines in the symbol
will be colored
When the driving lane assistance systems are not available, the marker lines in the symbol will be gray

Several examples of the symbol's appearance will
be given here:
Available

When the driving lane assistance systems are available,
the marker lines in the symbol will be white

342

This is because LDW/LKA cannot monitor
(detect) the driving lane's marker line(s) or the
vehicle's speed is too low or the road is too narrow.

LDW/LKA alerts the driver that the vehicle is
leaving its lane. LKA attempts to steer the vehicle
back into the lane. LKA also indicates if the system is attempting to steer the vehicle back into
its lane.

DRIVER SUPPORT

Symbols and messages
Symbol

Message

Explanation

Driver support system

The system is not functioning properly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

Reduced functionality Service required
Windscreen sensor

The camera's functionality is limited.

Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
Lane Keeping Aid
Apply steering

LKA's steering assistance does not function if the driver's hands are not on the steering
wheel. Steer the vehicle actively.

Related information

•
•
•

Driving lane assistance (p. 338)
Activating/deactivating Lane Departure
Warning (LDW) (p. 340)
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Aid
(LKA)* (p. 340)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 343

STARTING AND DRIVING

Starting and driving

Brakes

The vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission that also makes it possible to shift gears
manually.

The brake system is a hydraulic system consisting of two separate brake circuits. If a problem
should occur in one of these circuits, it is still
possible to stop the vehicle with the other brake
circuit.

Certain functions can also be used when the
engine is not running, depending on the ignition
mode being used.

Related information

•
•
•
•
•

Starting the engine (p. 372)
Ignition modes (p. 370)
Automatic transmission (p. 395)
Opening/closing the fuel filler door (p. 363)
Parking brake (p. 352)

Brake system
If one of the brake circuits is not functioning,
more pressure will be needed on the brake pedal
(and the pedal will go down farther) for normal
braking effect.
If the brake pedal must be depressed farther
than normal and requires greater foot pressure,
the stopping distance will be longer.
Pressure on the brake pedal is enhanced by the
power braking function.

WARNING
If vehicle does not have electrical current and
both the electric motor and gasoline engine
are switched off, the brakes cannot be used
to stop the vehicle.

346

mode can also be used to increase the engine
braking effect at low speeds.
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
The ABS system helps to improve vehicle control
(stopping and steering) during severe braking
conditions by limiting brake lockup.
When ABS is operating, there may be some
vibration in the brake pedal, which is normal.
The system performs a brief self-diagnostic test
when the engine has been started and driver
releases the brake pedal. Another automatic test
may be performed when the vehicle first reaches
a speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). The
brake pedal will pulsate several times and a
sound may be audible from the ABS control
module, which is normal.

Function check when the engine is
started
A Plug-in Hybrid is equipped with a "brake by
wire" brake system. A function check is performed each time the engine is started and the
driver depresses the brake pedal to move the
gear selector from P.

When the Hill Start Assist function is being used,
it will take slightly longer for the brake pedal to
return to its normal position if the vehicle is
parked on an incline or uneven surface.

In certain cases, a message may appear in the
instrument panel saying that pressure on the
brake pedal is too low. Press harder on the pedal.

When driving in very hilly areas or if the vehicle is
carrying a heavy load, using brake mode B to
augment the brakes or the Off Road* drive

When the brakes are applied lightly, the electric
motor's braking function is used, which converts

Light braking charges the hybrid battery

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

STARTING AND DRIVING
kinetic energy into electricity that is used to
charge the hybrid battery. This is indicated in the
instrument panel, see also the article "General
information about the XC90 T8 Twin Engine
Plug-in Hybrid".

Driving on wet or salted roads
Prolonged driving on wet or salted roads can
affect brake function and increase stopping distance. Be sure to keep a safe distance to the
vehicle ahead when driving under these conditions.

Brake pad inspection
On vehicles equipped with a jack*, the condition
of the brake pads can be checked by raising the
vehicle and performing a visual inspection of the
brake pads.

WARNING

•
Battery charging gauge in the instrument panel

This function is active at speeds from approx.
90 mph (150 km/h) down to 3 mph (5 km/h).
When braking at speeds outside of this range or
during harder braking, the hydraulic brake system
is used.

If the vehicle has been driven immediately
prior to a brake pad inspection, the wheel
hub, brake components, etc., will be very
hot. Allow time for these components to
cool before carrying out the inspection.

•

Apply the parking brake and put the gear
selector in the Park (P) position.

•

Block the wheels standing on the ground,
use rigid wooden blocks or large stones.

WARNING

•

Use the jack intended for the vehicle
when changing a tire. For any other job,
use stands to support the vehicle.

•

The jack should be kept well-greased and
clean, and should not be damaged.

•

Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, nonslippery surface.

•

No objects should be placed between the
base of jack and the ground, or between
the jack and the attachment bar on the
vehicle.

•

The jack must correctly engage the jack
attachment.

•

Never allow any part of your body to be
extended under a vehicle supported by a
jack.

Cleaning the brake discs
Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs
may result in delayed brake function. This delay is
minimized by cleaning the brake linings.
Cleaning the brake pads is advisable in wet
weather, prior to long-term parking, and after the
vehicle has been washed. Do this by braking gently for a short period while the vehicle is moving.

}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 347

STARTING AND DRIVING
||

Instrument panel symbols
Symbol

Explanation

If both symbols illuminate at the same time
and the brake level is normal (not below the
MIN mark in the reservoir) or if a brake system-related message is shown in the instrument panel: drive the vehicle carefully to an
authorized Volvo workshop and have the
brake system inspected by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.

Yellow symbol: there is a fault in
the brake pedal sensor.
Steady glow for more than
2 seconds: there is a fault in the
ABS system. The normal brake
system will still function but without ABS brake modulation.

Related information

If Brake pedalCharacteristics
changed Service required is
displayed, the Brake-by-Wire system is not functioning properly.
The brake pedal must be pressed
farther down and with more pressure for braking effect.

348

If both symbols illuminate at the same time
and the brake level is below the MIN mark in
the reservoir or if a brake system-related message is shown in the instrument panel: DO
NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician
and have the brake system inspected.

Red symbol: Check the brake fluid
level. If the level is low, top up and
have the system inspected to
determine the cause of the loss of
fluid.

A
B

WARNING

•
•
•
•

Brake functions (p. 348)
Brake assist system (p. 349)
Emergency brake lights (p. 350)
General information about the XC90 T8 Twin
Engine Plug-in Hybrid (p. 16)

Brake functions
The vehicle's standard braking features are augmented by a number of auxiliary help functions.
In addition to the wheel brakes and the parking
brake, the vehicle is equipped with several automatic brake assist functions. These systems help
the driver by e.g., keeping the vehicle stationary
when the brake pedal is not depressed (at a traffic light or intersection), when starting up a hill or
when driving down a hill.
These systems include:

•
•
•
•

Auto-hold brakes
Hill Start Assist
Braking assist after a collision
Hill Descent Control*

Related information

•
•
•
•

Brakes (p. 346)
Parking brake (p. 352)
Hill Descent Control (HDC) (p. 350)
Auto-hold brake function (p. 349)

US models
Canadian models

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

STARTING AND DRIVING

Auto-hold brake function
With the Auto-hold brake function, the driver can
release the brake pedal and the brakes will
remain applied, for example, when the vehicle
has stopped at a traffic light or intersection.

When Auto-hold is off, Hill Start Assist (HSA) will
be activated to help prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards when starting up a hill.

Instrument panel symbol
Symbol

When the vehicle is no longer moving forward,
Auto-hold applies the brakes automatically, either
using the normal brakes or the parking brake.
The brakes will be released when the accelerator
pedal is depressed.

Explanation
The symbol in the instrument
panel illuminates when this function is using the normal brakes to
keep the vehicle stationary.

If the driver's door is opened or the engine is
turned off, the parking brake will be applied automatically.

Auto-hold control

This symbol in the instrument
panel illuminates when Auto-hold
is using the parking brake to keep
the vehicle stationary

Brake assist system
The Brake Assist System (BAS) increases braking force, thereby helping reduce braking distance.
The system monitors the driver's braking habits
and increases braking force when necessary.
Brake force can be increased up to the point at
which the ABS system is activated. The function
is deactivated when pressure on the brake pedal
decreases.

Related information

•

Brakes (p. 346)

B
A
B

US models
Canadian models

Related information

•
•

Hill Start Assist (p. 351)
Brake functions (p. 348)

Auto-hold control and indicator light

Turn Auto-hold on or off by pressing the control
in the tunnel console. The indicator light illuminates when the function is on.

349

STARTING AND DRIVING

Braking effect after a collision

Emergency brake lights

Hill Descent Control (HDC)

In certain types of collisions, the vehicle's brakes
are applied to help prevent or mitigate a secondary collision.

The emergency brake lights activate in the event
of hard braking/rapid deceleration at most normal driving speeds or if the ABS system is activated. This function causes an additional taillight
on each side of the vehicle to illuminate to help
alert vehicles traveling behind.

HDC is a type of low-speed automatic engine
brake and makes it possible to increase or
decrease the vehicle's speed on steep downhill
gradients using only the accelerator pedal, without applying the brakes.

Maintaining control of the vehicle after a collision
may be difficult. To help avoid or mitigate the
effect of a secondary collision, the brakes are
applied automatically to help bring the vehicle to
a stop.
The brake lights and hazard warning flashers will
be activated and the flashers will remain on after
the vehicle has come to a standstill. The parking
brake will then be applied automatically.
In a situation where stopping the vehicle may not
be desirable, the driver can override this system
by pressing the accelerator pedal.
This feature can only function if the brake system
is intact after the collision.

Related information

•
•
•

Brake functions (p. 348)
Airbag system (p. 89)
Rear Collision Warning (RCW) (p. 292)

Once the emergency brake lights have been activated, if the driver releases the brake pedal, the
brake lights will return to their normal function.

Related information

•
•
•

Brakes (p. 346)
Hazard warning flashers (p. 147)
Brake lights (p. 146)

HDC is integrated into the Off Road drive
mode.
HDC is particularly useful when driving down
steep hills with rough surfaces, and where the
road may have slippery patches.

WARNING
HDC does not function in all situations, and is
a supplementary braking aid. The driver has
full responsibility for driving in a safe manner.

Function
HDC allows the vehicle to roll forward or in
reverse at very low speed with enhanced engine
braking. However, speed can be adjusted with
the accelerator pedal. When the accelerator
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to very
low speed.
The driver can use the brakes to slow or stop the
vehicle at any time.
HDC is activated along with Low Speed Control
(LSC), which together make driving on slippery
surfaces at low speeds easier.

350

STARTING AND DRIVING
When HDC and LSC are activated, this changes
the response from the accelerator pedal and
engine.

Activating HDC

Related information

•
•
•

Brake functions (p. 348)
Low Speed Control (LSC) (p. 399)
Drive modes (p. 390)

Hill Start Assist
Hill Start Assist (HSA) helps prevent the vehicle
from rolling backwards when starting up a hill. If
you are backing up a hill, HSA helps prevent the
vehicle from rolling forward.
HSA makes it easier to start or back up on a hill
by retaining pressure on the brake pedal for several seconds after the pedal has been released in
order to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
The brakes will be released after several seconds
or when the driver presses the accelerator pedal.
HSA is available even if the Auto-hold braking
function is turned off.

Related information
Select the Off Road drive mode to activate the
function.

•
•

Brake functions (p. 348)
Auto-hold brake function (p. 349)

Select any other drive mode to turn it off.

NOTE
When LSC with HDC is activated by the Off
Road drive mode, the feel of the accelerator
pedal and engine response will change.
The function is deactivated when driving at
higher speeds and must be reactivated at
lower speeds if so desired.

351

STARTING AND DRIVING

Parking brake
The electric parking brake helps to keep the
vehicle stationary when it is parked.

ted. If it is applied while the vehicle is moving, the
normal brakes are used on all four wheels. The
brakes will only be applied on the rear wheels
once the vehicle has stopped.

Related information

•
•
•

Parking brake control in the tunnel console between the
front seats

Applying the parking brake

Brake functions (p. 348)
Using the parking brake (p. 352)
Parking brake malfunctions (p. 354)

Put the gear selector in P.

NOTE

Press firmly on the brake pedal.

•

A faint sound from the parking brake's
electric motor can be heard when the
parking brake is being applied. This
sound can also be heard during the automatic function check of the parking
brake.

Pull up the control.
> The symbol in the instrument panel
flashes while the parking brake is being
applied and glows steadily when the parking brake has been fully applied.

•

The brake pedal will move slightly when
the electric parking brake is applied or
released.

Release the brake pedal and ensure that the
vehicle is stationary.

If the vehicle is not moving when the parking
brake is applied, only the rear wheels are affec-

352

Using the parking brake
The electric parking brake helps to keep the
vehicle stationary when it is parked.

STARTING AND DRIVING
Symbol in the instrument panel
Symbol

Releasing the parking brake

NOTE

Explanation

•

For safety reasons, the parking brake is
only released automatically if the engine
is running and the driver is wearing a seat
belt.

•

The electric parking brake will be
released immediately when the accelerator pedal is pressed and the gear selector
is in position D or R.

The symbol flashes while the parking brake is being applied.
A

If the symbol flashes at any other
time, this indicates a fault. See the
message in the instrument panel.

B
A
B

US models
Canadian models

Automatic function
The parking brake is applied automatically:

•

If the Auto Hold function is activated and the
vehicle has been stationary for approx.
5 minutes.

•

If the gear selector is moved to P on a steep
hill.

•

When the engine is turned off (this function
can be selected, see "Parking brake settings" below).

Emergency braking
In an emergency, the parking brake can be
applied when the vehicle is moving by pressing
and holding up the control. Braking will be interrupted when the control is released.
An audible signal will sound during this procedure if the vehicle is moving at higher speeds.

Parking on a hill
Put the gear selector in P.
Releasing manually
1. Press firmly on the brake pedal.
2.

Press the control.
> This releases the parking brake and the
symbol in the instrument panel will go out.

Releasing automatically
1. The driver must fasten his/her seat belt.
2.

Start the engine.

Press firmly on the brake pedal.

Move the gear selector to D or R and press
the accelerator pedal.
> This releases the parking brake and the
symbol in the instrument panel will go out.

•

If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the front
wheels so that they point away from the curb.

•

If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the
front wheels so that they point toward the
curb.

The parking brake should also be applied.

WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when parking
on hills or uneven surfaces.

}}
353

STARTING AND DRIVING
||

Heavy load uphill
A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the
vehicle to roll backward when the parking brake
is released automatically on a steep incline. To
help avoid this:
1.

Keep the electric parking brake control
pushed in.

While pressing the accelerator pedal to pull
away, release the parking brake control only
after the vehicle begins to move.

Parking brake malfunctions

•
•

Put the gear selector in P.

Automatically setting the parking brake can be
turned on or off in the center display's Top view.

•

If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the
front wheels so that they point toward the
curb.

•

Put the gear selector in P.

Tap Settings in Top view.

Tap My Car Electric Parking Brake and
deselect Auto Activate Parking Brake.

Related information

•
•
•

Low battery charge level

Parking brake malfunctions (p. 354)
Auto-hold brake function (p. 349)

Replacing brake pads
The rear brake pads have to be replaced by a
trained and authorized Volvo service technician
due to the design of the electric parking brake.

354

Explanation
If the symbol flashes, a parking
brake fault has been detected.
See the message in the instrument panel.

Fault in the brake system.

If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the front
wheels so that they point away from the curb.

If the battery is discharged, the parking brake
cannot be operated. Connect an auxiliary battery
to the vehicle.

Parking brake (p. 352)

Symbol

An audible signal will sound if the parking brake
is applied when the vehicle is being driven. If the
vehicle must be parked while the parking brake is
not functioning properly:

Parking brake settings

Symbols in the instrument panel

If it has not been possible to apply or release the
parking brake after several attempts, consult a
trained and authorized Volvo service technician
or retailer.

B
A
B

US models
Canadian models

Related information

•
•
•
•

Using the parking brake (p. 352)
Using the parking brake (p. 352)
Brake functions (p. 348)
Jump starting (p. 365)

STARTING AND DRIVING

Before a long distance trip
It is always worthwhile to have your vehicle
checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician before driving long distances. Your
retailer will also be able to supply you with bulbs,
fuses, spark plugs and wiper blades for your use
in the event that problems occur.
As a minimum, the following items should be
checked before any long trip:

•

Check that engine runs smoothly and that
fuel consumption and the oil level are normal.

•

Before leaving on a trip, fill the fuel tank and
make sure the hybrid battery is fully charged.
During the trip, make a habit of refueling regularly.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage.
Check condition of drive belts.
Check state of the battery's charge.
Examine tires carefully and replace those
that are worn. Also, check tire inflation pressure.

in countries where it may be difficult to
obtain the correct fuel.

•

Consider your destination. If you will be driving through an area where snow or ice are
likely to occur, consider using snow tires.

Driving economically
Better driving economy can be obtained by
thinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and stops
and adjusting the speed of your vehicle to immediate traffic conditions.

Driving economically with the XC90 T8
Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid
Plan your driving in order to utilize the electric
motor as much as possible.
An energy-conserving driving style lowers current
consumption from the hybrid battery and helps
increase electric driving range.
Charging
• Charge the hybrid battery regularly using the
charging cable. Whenever possible, begin a
drive with a fully charged battery.

•
•

Check the location of charging points.
Where possible, choose parking spaces with
charging points.

The brakes, front wheel alignment, and steering gear should be checked by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician only.
Check all lights, including high beams.
Reflective warning triangles are legally
required in some states/provinces.
Have a word with a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician if you intend to drive

}}
355

STARTING AND DRIVING
||

Preconditioning
• If possible, precondition the vehicle with the
charging cable before driving.

•

Avoid parking the vehicle so that the passenger compartment becomes too hot or cold.
Park, if possible, in a climate controlled parking garage.

•

For short drives after using the preconditioning function, turn off the climate system
blower if possible.

•

If preconditioning is not possible in cold
weather, use the seat and steering wheel
heating primarily. Avoid heating the entire
passenger compartment, which reduces the
hybrid battery's charge level.

Driving
• Choose the Pure drive mode to help minimize electric power consumption.

•

356

Maintain a constant speed and an adequate
distance to the vehicle ahead to minimize
use of the brakes.

•

Brake as gently as possible; doing so
charges the hybrid battery using the integrated regenerative braking function.

•

Balance energy requirements using the
accelerator pedal and utilize the gauge on
the instrument panel to see the amount of
power available from the electric motor. This
helps avoid starting the gasoline engine
unnecessarily. The electric motor is more
energy-efficient than the gasoline engine,
especially at lower speeds.

•

In hilly terrain, put the gear selector in mode
B to utilize the electric motor's braking function when the accelerator pedal is released.
This helps charge the hybrid battery.

•

Higher speeds increase energy consumption
and the vehicle's wind resistance increases
along with speed. Do not exceed posted
speed limits.

•

Select the Save drive mode for higher
speeds when driving farther than is possible
using the electric motor only.

•

Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extra load)
in the vehicle.

•

Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tire
pressure regularly (when the tires are cold).

•

Remove snow tires when threat of snow or
ice has ended.

•

Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc, increase
air resistance and also energy consumption.

•

Avoid driving with open windows.

Handling and roadholding

•

Vehicle load, tire design and inflation pressure all affect vehicle handling. Therefore,
check that the tires are inflated to the recommended pressure according to the vehicle
load. Loads should be distributed so that
capacity weight or maximum permissible axle
loads are not exceeded.

•

At the specified curb weight your vehicle has
a tendency to understeer, which means that
the steering wheel has to be turned more

than might seem appropriate for the curvature of a bend. This ensures good stability
and reduces the risk of rear wheel skid.
Remember that these properties can alter
with the vehicle load. The heavier the load in
the cargo compartment, the less the tendency to understeer.

Related information

•

Hybrid-related information in the instrument
panel (p. 130)

•

Parking climate (preconditioning) (p. 179)

STARTING AND DRIVING

Driving through standing water

CAUTION

The vehicle should be driven with extreme caution if it is necessary to drive through standing
water.

•

The vehicle can be driven through water up to a
depth approximately level with the floor at walking speed to help prevent water from entering
the differential and/or the transmission or damaging electrical components.

•

If possible, check the depth of the water
before driving through it. Take particular care
when driving through flowing water.

•

Before driving through water, always select
the Off Road drive mode to ensure that the
gasoline engine is running and to maximize
ground clearance.

•

After driving through water, apply the brakes
and check that they are functioning correctly.

•

Clean the electrical connections for trailer
wiring after driving in mud or water.

•

When driving through water, maintain low
speed and do not stop in the water.

Damage may occur to the engine, transmission, electrical components, etc. if the
vehicle is driven through water higher
than its floor level. Be aware that waves
created by other vehicles could cause the
level to temporarily be above the vehicle's
floor level.

•

Damage to any components due to water
above the floor level, vapor lock or insufficient oil is not covered under warranty.

•

If the engine has been stopped while the
vehicle is in water, do not attempt to
restart it. Have the vehicle towed out of
the water and inspected by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.

In demanding driving conditions, such as when
transporting heavy loads, driving in mountainous
areas or in very hot weather there is a risk of
overheating the engine or transmission.

•

The engine's output may be slightly limited if
there is a risk of overheating.

•

Remove e.g., auxiliary lights mounted in front
of the grille in hot weather.

•

If the temperature of the engine coolant
becomes too high, the warning symbol will
illuminate and the message Engine
temperature/Stop safely will be displayed.
Stop the vehicle as soon as possible in a
safe place and let the engine idle for several
minutes.
If the message Engine temperature/High
temperature Turn off engine or Engine
coolant/Stop safely is displayed, stop
safely and turn off the engine.
If the transmission begins to overheat, an
alternative gear shifting program will be
selected. An integrated protective function
will also by activated, the warning symbol will
illuminate and the message Transmission
warmHigh temperature Reduce speed
or Transmission warmStop safely, wait
for cooling will be displayed in the instrument panel.

WARNING

•

Avoid driving through standing or rushing
water. Doing so can be dangerous and it
may also be difficult to determine the
actual depth of the water.

•

If water cannot be avoided, after driving
through the water, press lightly on the
brake pedal to ensure that the brakes are
functioning normally. Water or mud can
make the brake linings slippery, resulting
in delayed braking effect.

Related information

•

Overheating the engine and
transmission

Towing recommendations (p. 360)

}}
357

STARTING AND DRIVING
||

•

The air conditioning may be switched off
temporarily.

•

After a prolonged period of driving, do not
turn off the engine immediately after stopping.

•

The engine cooling fan commonly continues
to run for several minutes after the engine
has been turned off.

Winter driving
Check your vehicle before the approach of cold
weather.
The following advice is worth noting:

•

Make sure that the engine coolant contains
50 percent antifreeze. Any other mixture will
reduce freeze protection. This gives protection against freezing down to –31 °F
(–35 °C). The use of "recycled" antifreeze is
not approved by Volvo. Different types of
antifreeze must not be mixed.

•

Volvo recommends using only genuine Volvo
antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator.

•

Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – this
helps prevent the formation of condensation
in the tank. In addition, in extremely cold
weather conditions it is worthwhile to add
fuel line de-icer before refueling.

WARNING
The cooling fan (located at the front of the
engine compartment, behind the radiator) may
start or continue to operate (for up to
6 minutes) after the engine has been
switched off.

Related information

•
•

Driving with a trailer (p. 367)
Before a long distance trip (p. 355)

•

358

The viscosity of the engine oil is important.
Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil) improves
cold-weather starting as well as decreasing
fuel consumption while the engine is warming up. Full synthetic 0W-30 oil is recommended for driving in areas with sustained
low temperatures.
The load placed on the battery is greater during the winter since the windshield wipers,
lighting, etc., are used more often. Moreover,
the capacity of the battery decreases as the
temperature drops. In very cold weather, a
poorly charged battery can freeze and be
damaged. It is therefore advisable to check

the state of charge more frequently and
spray an anti-rust oil on the battery posts.

•

Volvo recommends the use of snow tires on
all four wheels for winter driving.

•

To prevent the washer fluid reservoir from
freezing, add washer solvents containing
antifreeze. This is important since dirt is often
splashed on the windshield during winter
driving, requiring the frequent use of the
washers and wipers. Volvo Washer Solvent
should be diluted as follows: Down to 14 °F
(–10 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 4 parts
water Down to 5 °F (–15 °C): 1 part washer
solvent and 3 parts water Down to 0 °F
(–18 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 2 parts
water Down to –18 °F (–28 °C): 1 part
washer solvent and 1 part water.

•
•

Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks.
Avoid using de-icing sprays as they can
cause damage to the locks.

Related information

•

Snow tires and chains (p. 451)

STARTING AND DRIVING

Towing eyelet

CAUTION

When used, the towing eyelet should always be
securely attached in the openings on the right
side of the front and rear bumpers. There are
covers over these attachment points.

In certain conditions, the towing eyelet
may be used to pull the vehicle onto a
flatbed tow truck.

Remove the cover by pressing the mark with
a finger and folding out the opposite side/
corner with a coin, small screwdriver, etc.
> The cover turns along its center line and
then be removed.
Take out the towing eyelet, which is stored
under the floor in the cargo compartment.

Screw the towing eyelet into place, first by
hand and then using the tire iron, etc. until it
has been screwed in as far as possible.

•

The vehicle's position and ground clearance determine if it can be pulled up onto
a flatbed tow truck using the towing eyelet.

•

If the angle of the tow truck’s ramp is too
steep or the ground clearance under the
vehicle is insufficient, damage could
occur by attempting to pull the vehicle
using the towing eyelet.

•

If necessary, lift the vehicle using the tow
truck’s lifting device.

WARNING

After use, the eyelet should be removed and
returned to its storage location.

No person or object should be behind the tow
truck while the vehicle is being pulled up onto
the flatbed.

Reinsert the cover into the bumper.

Related information

•

Towing recommendations (p. 360)

359

STARTING AND DRIVING

Towing recommendations
Always check with state and local authorities
before attempting to tow another vehicle
because this type of towing is subject to regulations regarding maximum towing speed, length
and type of towing device, lighting, etc.

Towing your vehicle behind another
vehicle
The XC90 T8 Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid may
not be towed behind another vehicle. Doing so
would damage the electric motor and the threeway catalytic converter. If the vehicle cannot be
driven and must be moved, it must be lifted onto
a flat-bed tow truck.
If the XC90 T8 Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid is to
tow (pull) another vehicle, select the AWD drive
mode. This helps charge the hybrid battery and
improves the vehicle's road holding characteristics.

Tow trucks
CAUTION
In certain conditions, the towing eyelet
may be used to pull the vehicle onto a
flatbed tow truck.

•

The vehicle's position and ground clearance determine if it can be pulled up onto
a flatbed tow truck using the towing eyelet.

To do so:
1.

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

Tap My Car

Select Deactivate Suspension & Leveling
Control.

Suspension .

Jump starting
Do not attempt to start the engine by towing the
vehicle. This could result in damage to the threeway catalytic converter and the electric motor.
Use a 12-volt auxiliary battery or one in another
vehicle.

•

If the angle of the tow truck’s ramp is too
steep or the ground clearance under the
vehicle is insufficient, damage could
occur by attempting to pull the vehicle
using the towing eyelet.

•

If necessary, lift the vehicle using the tow
truck’s lifting device.

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!

WARNING

Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the state of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands
after handling.

No person or object should be behind the tow
truck while the vehicle is being pulled up onto
the flatbed.

WARNING

CAUTION
Vehicle with pneumatic suspension*
If the vehicle is equipped with the optional pneumatic suspension, this feature must be deactivated before the vehicle is lifted onto a tow truck.

360

Connect the jumper cables carefully to avoid
short circuits with other components in the
engine compartment.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

STARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING

•

Do not connect the jumper cable to any
part of the fuel system or to any moving
parts. Avoid touching hot manifolds.

•

Batteries generate hydrogen gas, which
is flammable and explosive.

•

Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin,
fabrics or painted surfaces. If contact
occurs, flush the affected area immediately with water. Obtain medical help
immediately if eyes are affected.

•

Never expose the battery to open flame
or electric spark.

•
•

Do not smoke near the battery.
Failure to follow the instructions for jump
starting can lead to injury.

Related information

•
•
•
•

Towing eyelet (p. 359)
Jump starting (p. 365)
Parking brake (p. 352)
Ignition modes (p. 370)

Fuel
Volvo recommends the use of detergent gasoline to control engine deposits.

Deposit control gasoline (detergent
additives)
Detergent gasoline is effective in keeping injectors and intake valves clean. Consistent use of
deposit control gasolines will help ensure good
drivability and fuel economy. If you are not sure
whether the gasoline contains deposit control
additives, check with the service station operator.

NOTE
Volvo does not recommend the use of external fuel injector cleaning systems.

Unleaded fuel
Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic converter
and must use only unleaded gasoline. U.S. and
Canadian regulations require that pumps delivering unleaded gasoline be labeled "UNLEADED".
Only these pumps have nozzles which fit your
vehicle's filler inlet. It is unlawful to dispense leaded fuel into a vehicle labeled "unleaded gasoline only". Leaded gasoline damages the threeway catalytic converter and the heated oxygen
sensor system. Repeated use of leaded gasoline
will lessen the effectiveness of the emission control system and could result in loss of emission
warranty coverage. State and local vehicle

inspection programs will make detection of misfueling easier, possibly resulting in emission test
failure for misfueled vehicles.

NOTE
Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines contain an
octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT). If such fuels are used, your Emission
Control System performance may be affected,
and the Check Engine Light (malfunction
indicator light) located on your instrument
panel may light. If this occurs, please return
your vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician for service.

Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers,
"Oxygenated fuels"
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing
"oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or
ethers. In some areas, state or local laws require
that the service pump be marked indicating use
of alcohols or ethers. However, there are areas in
which the pumps are unmarked. If you are not
sure whether there is alcohol or ethers in the
gasoline you buy, check with the service station
operator. To meet seasonal air quality standards,
some areas require the use of "oxygenated" fuel.
Volvo allows the use of the following "oxygenated" fuels; however, the octane ratings listed
must still be met.

}}
361

STARTING AND DRIVING
||

Alcohol – Ethanol
Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol by volume
may be used. Ethanol may also be referred to as
Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol".
Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to
15% MTBE may be used.

Octane rating

NOTE

Volvo requires premium fuel (91 octane or
above) for best performance.

Information about TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is available at www.toptiergas.com.

Minimum octane
NOTE
When switching to higher octane fuel or
changing gasoline brands, it may be necessary to fill the tank more than once before a
difference in engine operation is noticeable.

Methanol
Do not use gasolines containing methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice can
result in vehicle performance deterioration and
can damage critical parts in the fuel system. Such
damage may not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Fuel Formulations

Related information

•
•

Octane rating (p. 362)
Opening/closing the fuel filler door (p. 363)

Sample fuel pump octane label

TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
Volvo endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline” where available to help maintain engine
performance and reliability. TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline meets a new standard jointly established by leading automotive manufactures to
meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.
Qualifying gasoline retailers (stations) will, in
most cases, identify their gasoline as having met
the “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards.

362

Do not use gasoline that contains lead as a
knock inhibitor, and do not use lead additives.
Besides damaging the exhaust emission control
systems on your vehicle, lead has been strongly
linked to certain forms of cancer.
Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent.
Unburned benzene has been strongly linked to
certain forms of cancer. If you live in an area
where you must fill your own gas tank, take precautions. These may include:

•

standing upwind away from the filler nozzle
while refueling

•

refueling only at gas stations with vapor
recovery systems that fully seal the mouth of
the filler neck during refueling

•

wearing neoprene gloves while handling a
fuel filler nozzle.

STARTING AND DRIVING

Use of Additives

Opening/closing the fuel filler door

With the exception of gas line antifreeze during
winter months, do not add solvents, thickeners, or
other store-bought additives to your vehicle's
fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems. Overuse may
damage your engine, and some of these additives
contain organically volatile chemicals. Do not
needlessly expose yourself to these chemicals.

The fuel tank has a filling system that does not
have a cover.

WARNING
Never carry a cell phone that is switched on
while refueling your vehicle. If the phone rings,
this may cause a spark that could ignite gasoline fumes, resulting in fire and injury.

Opening/closing the fuel filler door
An arrow next to the fuel pump
symbol in the instrument panel
indicates the side of the vehicle
where the fuel filler door is
located.

Press the button on the lighting panel.
> Pressure equalization in the fuel tank causes a slight delay before the fuel filler
door opens. Fuel tank Fuel lid is
opening will be displayed in the instrument panel, followed by Fuel tank Ready
for refueling.

After refueling, close the fuel filler door by
pressing lightly.

WARNING
Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless,
and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaust
gases. If you ever smell exhaust fumes inside
the vehicle, make sure the passenger compartment is ventilated, and immediately return
the vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician for correction.

Related information

•

Fuel (p. 361)

}}
363

STARTING AND DRIVING
||

Refueling from a service station pump

CAUTION
Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling. In
addition to causing damage to the environment, gasolines containing alcohol can cause
damage to painted surfaces, which may not
be covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.

Emission controls
Three-way catalytic converter

•

Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain
engine malfunctions, particularly involving the
electrical, fuel or distributor ignition systems,
may cause unusually high three-way catalytic
converter temperatures. Do not continue to
operate your vehicle if you detect engine
misfire, noticeable loss of power or other
unusual operating conditions, such as engine
overheating or backfiring. A properly tuned
engine will help avoid malfunctions that
could damage the three-way catalytic converter.

•

Do not park your vehicle over combustible
materials, such as grass or leaves, which can
come into contact with the hot exhaust system and cause such materials to ignite under
certain wind and weather conditions.

•

Excessive starter cranking (in excess of one
minute), or an intermittently firing or flooded
engine can cause three-way catalytic converter or exhaust system overheating.

•

Remember that tampering or unauthorized
modifications to the engine, the Engine Control Module, or the vehicle may be illegal and
can cause three-way catalytic converter or
exhaust system overheating. This includes:
altering fuel injection settings or components, altering emission system components

Related information

•
•
To refuel:
1.

Open the fuel filler door. Do not refuel with
the engine running1

Insert the pump's nozzle into the fuel filler
pipe's opening as far as possible (see the
illustration).

Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do not press
the handle on the filler nozzle after it has
stopped pumping. Too much fuel in the tank
in hot weather conditions can cause the fuel
to overflow. Overfilling could also cause damage to the emission control systems.

364

Fuel (p. 361)
Octane rating (p. 362)

If the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle's performance will not be affected.

STARTING AND DRIVING
or location or removing components, and/or
repeated use of leaded fuel.

NOTE

Jump starting
Follow the instructions provided here to jump
start your vehicle or to jump start another vehicle.

If a fuse blows, Battery failure Battery fuse
Service required will be displayed in the instrument panel. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.
Use the following steps when jump starting your
vehicle to help prevent short circuits or other
damage.

Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with
three-way catalytic converters.

Heated oxygen sensors
The heated oxygen sensors monitor the oxygen
content of the exhaust gases. Readings are fed
into a control module that continuously monitors
engine functions and controls fuel injection. The
ratio of fuel to air into the engine is continuously
adjusted for efficient combustion to help reduce
harmful emissions.

Related information

•

Octane rating (p. 362)

Jumper cable connecting terminals

NOTE
The vehicle cannot be started if the hybrid
battery is discharged.

CAUTION
The vehicle's jumper cable connecting terminals may only be used to start your vehicle.
They are not intended to be used to help start
another vehicle. If they are used to start
another vehicle, a fuse may blow and the terminal will not function.
}}
365

STARTING AND DRIVING
||

Switch the ignition off completely (mode 0).

Ensure that the auxiliary battery to be used is
12-volt.

If the 12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is in
another vehicle, switch off that vehicle's ignition and be sure that the vehicles are not
touching each other.

Connect one of the red jumper cable's
clamps to the auxiliary battery's positive (+)
terminal (1).

CAUTION
Connect the jumper cables carefully to avoid
short circuits with other components in the
engine compartment.
5.
6.

Connect the red jumper cable's other clamp
to your vehicle's positive (+) jump start terminal (2).

Connect one of the black jumper cable's
clamps to the auxiliary battery's negative (–)
terminal (3).

366

Open the cover over the positive (+) jump
start terminal (2).

Connect the black jumper cable's other
clamp to your vehicle's negative (–) jump
start terminal (4).

Check that the jumper cables are securely
attached to help avoid sparks when the vehicle is started.

12. After the vehicle has started, carefully
remove the jumper cables in reverse order,
beginning with the black one.

10. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle and
run it for a short time at approx. 1,500 rpm.

Ensure that the black jumper cable's clamps
do not come in contact with the vehicle's or
the auxiliary battery's positive terminals or
the red jumper cable's clamps while it is connected.

11. Start the engine in your vehicle. If the vehicle
does not start, allow an additional
10 minutes of charging time and then try to
start the engine again.

NOTE
During normal starts, the electric motor is prioritized and the gasoline engine will not start.
This means that when the start knob has
been turned toward START and released, the
electric motor is activated ("started") and the
vehicle is ready to be driven. The warning and
information symbols in the instrument panel
will go out and the chosen theme will be displayed to indicate that the electric motor has
been activated.

CAUTION
Do not touch the jumper cable connections
while the vehicle is being started. This could
generate sparks.

WARNING

•

Do not connect the jumper cable to any
part of the fuel system or to any moving
parts. Avoid touching hot manifolds.

•

Batteries generate hydrogen gas, which
is flammable and explosive.

•

Never expose the battery to open flame
or electric spark.

STARTING AND DRIVING

•
•

Do not smoke near the battery.

Driving with a trailer

Failure to follow the instructions for jump
starting can lead to injury.

When towing a trailer, always observe the legal
requirements of the state/province.

Related information

•
•
•
•
•
•

•

Ignition modes (p. 370)
Starting the engine (p. 372)
Turning the engine off (p. 374)
Start battery (p. 479)
Opening and closing the hood (p. 504)
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 383)

All Volvo models are equipped with energyabsorbing shock-mounted bumpers. Trailer
hitch installation should not interfere with the
proper operation of this bumper system.

stop (check and observe state/local regulations).

•

Do not connect the trailer's brake system
directly to the vehicle's brake system.

•

More frequent vehicle maintenance is
required.

•

Remove the ball holder when the hitch is not
being used.

Trailer towing does not normally present any particular problems, but take into consideration:

•

Increase tire pressure to recommended full
pressure.

•

When your vehicle is new, avoid towing heavy
trailers during the first 620 miles (1,000 km).

•

Maximum speed when towing a trailer:
50 mph (80 km/h).

•

Engine and transmission are subject to
increased loads. Therefore, engine coolant
temperature should be closely watched when
driving in hot climates or hilly terrain. Use a
lower gear and turn off the air conditioner if
the temperature gauge needle enters the red
range.

•

If the automatic transmission begins to overheat, a message will be displayed in the text
window.

•
•

Avoid overload and other abusive operation.

•

It is necessary to balance trailer brakes with
the towing vehicle brakes to provide a safe

Hauling a trailer affects handling, durability,
and economy.

NOTE

•

When parking the vehicle with a trailer on
a hill, apply the parking brake before putting the gear selector in P. Always follow
the trailer manufacturer's recommendations for wheel chocking.

•

When starting on a hill, put the gear
selector in D before releasing the parking
brake.

•

If you use the manual (Geartronic) shift
positions while towing a trailer, make sure
the gear you select does not put too
much strain on the engine (using too
high a gear).

•

The drawbar assembly/trailer hitch may
be rated for trailers heavier than the vehicle is designed to tow. Please adhere to
Volvo's recommended trailer weights.

•

Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of
more than 15%.
}}
367

STARTING AND DRIVING
||

CAUTION

WARNING

The maximum trailer weights listed are only
applicable for altitudes up to 3,280 ft
(1000 m) above sea level. With increasing
altitude the engine power and therefore the
car's climbing ability are impaired because of
the reduced air density, so the maximum
trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly.
The weight of the vehicle and trailer must be
reduced by 10% for every further 3,280 ft
(1,000 m) (or part thereof). When towing
5,000 lbs (2,250 kg) hill inclination is restricted to 14%.

•

Bumper-attached trailer hitches must not
be used on Volvos, nor should safety
chains be attached to the bumper.

•

Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle
rear axle must not be used.

•

Never connect a trailer's hydraulic brake
system directly to the vehicle brake system, nor a trailer's lighting system directly
to the vehicle lighting system. Consult
your nearest authorized Volvo retailer for
correct installation.

•

When towing a trailer, the trailer's safety
chains or wire must be correctly fastened
to the attachment points provided in the
trailer hitch on the vehicle. The safety
chain or wire must never be fastened to
or wound around the towing ball.

Detachable trailer hitch
Volvo recommends the use of Volvo trailer
hitches that are specially designed for the vehicle.

Ball holder
Cotter pin

Trailer cable
An adapter is required if the vehicle's trailer hitch
has a 13-pin connector and the trailer has 7 pins.
Use an adapter cable approved by Volvo. Make
sure the cable does not drag on the ground.

Related information

•
•
•

368

Detachable trailer hitch (p. 368)

Hitch assembly
Locking bolt
Safety wire attachment

Installing the ball holder
1.

If necessary, remove the cotter pin from the
locking bolt and slide the locking bolt out of
the hitch assembly.

Slide the ball holder into the hitch assembly.

Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) (p. 369)
Weights (p. 525)

STARTING AND DRIVING
3.

Align the hole in the ball holder with the one
in the hitch assembly.

Slide the locking bolt through the hitch
assembly/ball holder.

Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end of
the locking bolt.

Stowing the ball holder

Function

Removing the ball holder
1.

Remove the cotter pin from the locking bolt
and slide the locking bolt out of the ball
holder/hitch assembly.

Pull the ball holder out of the hitch assembly.

Trailer Stability Assist (TSA)
Trailer Stability Assist is a system designed to
help stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailer
when the vehicle and trailer have begun to sway
and is part of the Electronic Stability Control system.
A vehicle towing a trailer may begin to sway for
various reasons. Normally this only occurs at high
speeds but, for example, if the trailer is overloaded or if the load is unevenly distributed in the
trailer, there is risk of swaying.

Compartment for the detachable trailer hitch

NOTE
WARNING

A cover for the hitch assembly is also
included in the kit.

When not in use, the detachable trailer hitch
should always be kept in its compartment in
the foam block under the cargo compartment
floor (see the illustration).

Related information

•
•

Driving with a trailer (p. 367)
Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) (p. 369)

Swaying may be caused by factors such as:

•

The vehicle and trailer are hit by a sudden,
strong crosswind

•

The vehicle and trailer are traveling on an
uneven road surface or drive over a bump

•

Sudden movements of the steering wheel

Facts about TSA

•

The stability system symbol in the instrument
panel will flash when TSA is working

•

If the driver switches off the stability system's
Spin Control function, TSA will also be
switched off (but will be on again the next
time the engine is started)

•

TSA may not intervene when the vehicle and
trailer begin to sway if the driver tries to compensate for the swaying motion by moving
the steering wheel rapidly

}}
369

STARTING AND DRIVING
||

How TSA works
Once swaying has begun, it can be very difficult
to stop, which makes it difficult to control the
vehicle and trailer.
The TSA system continuously monitors the vehicle's movements, particularly lateral movement. If
the system detects a tendency to sway, the
brakes are applied individually on the front
wheels, which has a stabilizing effect on the vehicle and trailer. This is often enough to enable the
driver to regain control of the vehicle.
If this is not adequate to stop the swaying motion,
the brakes are applied to all of the wheels on the
vehicle and on the trailer if it is equipped with
brakes, and engine power is temporarily reduced.
As the swaying motion begins to decrease and
the vehicle-trailer have once again become stable, TSA will now stop regulating the brakes/
engine power and the driver regains control of
the vehicle.
TSA is deactivated if the driver deactivates ESC
in the center display's menu system.
When the ESC symbol in the
instrument panel flashes, TSA
is active.

370

Related information

•
•
•

Detachable trailer hitch (p. 368)
Driving with a trailer (p. 367)
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) (p. 323)

Ignition modes
The vehicle's ignition can be put in various
modes (levels) to make different functions available.
The vehicle's ignition has 3 modes: 0, I, and II
that can be used to operate various functions
without starting the engine. The following table
shows examples of which functions are available
in the respective modes.

STARTING AND DRIVING

Mode
0

Functions available

•
•
•

The odometer, clock and temperature gauge are illuminated
Power seats* can be adjusted

•

The 12-volt socket in the cargo
compartment can be used

•

The center display is activated
and can be used

•

The infotainment system can be
used for a limited time

•

The laminated panoramic roof*,
power seats*/windows,12-volt
sockets in the passenger compartment, Bluetooth, navigation
system*, climate system blower,
windshield wipers can be operated

•

The infotainment system will start
(if it was started when the ignition
was switched off)

Using electrical current will drain
the start battery in this mode.

NOTE

Functions available

•
•
•

The power windows can be operated

In this mode, certain functions can
only be used for a limited time to help
minimize battery drain
I

Mode

To access ignition modes I or II without starting the engine, the brake pedal must not be
depressed when these modes are selected.

The headlights illuminate
Warning/indicator lights illuminate for 5 seconds
A number of other functions will
also be activated. However, the
heated seats* and heated rear
window functions can only be
activated when the engine is running.

This mode should only be used for
very short periods to help avoid
draining the battery.

Selecting an ignition mode

•

Ignition mode I: Turn the start knob to
START and release it. The knob will return
automatically to its original position.

•

Ignition mode II: Turn the start knob to
START and hold it there for approx.
4 seconds. Release the knob.

•

Returning to ignition mode 0: To return to
mode 0 from mode II or I, turn the start knob
to STOP and release it.

Related information

•
•

Starting the engine (p. 372)
Turning the engine off (p. 374)

Start knob in the tunnel console

•

Ignition mode 0: unlock the vehicle and
keep the remote key in the passenger's compartment.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 371

STARTING AND DRIVING

Battery drain

Starting the engine

To start the engine.

Your vehicle's electrical functions drain the battery to varying extents.

The engine can be started using the start knob
on the tunnel console if there is a remote key in
the passenger compartment.

A remote key must be in the passenger compartment. On models with the standard
Passive Start, the key has to be in the front
section of the passenger compartment. If the
vehicle is equipped the optional Passive
Entry system (keyless locking/unlocking) the
key can be anywhere in the vehicle.

Press firmly on the brake pedal2.

Turn the start knob toward START and
release it to start the engine.
> The starter motor will crank until the
engine starts or its overheating protection
is triggered.

Avoid using ignition mode II as much as posssible, or electrical functions that require a great
deal of electrical current when the engine is not
running.
Using ignition mode I whenever possible consumes less electrical current.
Functions that require a great deal of electrical
current include:

•
•
•
•

the climate system blower
headlights
wipers
infotainment system (especially at high volume).

If the battery's charge level is low, a text message
will appear in the instrument panel. The vehicle's
energy-saving function will then turn off or
reduce certain functions that are currently consuming electrical current.
If the battery needs to be recharged, start the
engine and let it idle for at least 15 minutes or
drive the vehicle (driving charges the battery
faster than letting the engine idle).

Start knob in the tunnel console between the front seats

WARNING
Before starting the engine:

•
•

Fasten the seat belt.

•

Make sure the brake pedal can be
depressed completely. Adjust the seat if
necessary.

Check that the seat, steering wheel and
mirrors are adjusted properly.

Related information

•
2

372

Ignition modes (p. 370)

If the vehicle is moving, it is only necessary to turn the start knob toward START to start the engine.

STARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING

•

Never use more than one floor mat at a
time on the driver's floor. Before driving,
remove the original mat from the driver's
seat floor before using any other type of
floor mat. Any mat used in this position
should be securely and properly anchored
in the attaching pins. An extra mat on the
driver's floor can cause the accelerator
and/or brake pedal to catch. Check that
the movement of these pedals is not
impeded.
Volvo's floor mats are specially manufactured for your car. They must be firmly
secured in the clips on the floor so that
they cannot slide and become trapped
under the pedals on the driver's side.

During normal starts, the electric motor is prioritized and the gasoline engine will not start. This
means that when the start knob has been turned
toward START and released, the electric motor is
activated ("started") and the vehicle is ready to
be driven. The warning and information symbols
in the instrument panel will go out and the
chosen theme will be displayed to indicate that
the electric motor has been activated.
However, in certain situations, such as in cold
weather or if the hybrid battery is not sufficiently
charged, the gasoline engine will start instead.

NOTE
The vehicle cannot be started if the hybrid
battery is discharged.

Back-up reader in the tunnel console

If Vehicle key not found is displayed in the
instrument panel, place the remote key in the
back-up reader in the tunnel console (see the
illustration) and try again to start the engine.

CAUTION
If the engine does not start after the third try,
wait for approximately 3 minutes before trying
to start it again to give the battery time to
recover its starting capacity.

WARNING

•

Always remove the remote key from the
passenger compartment when leaving the
vehicle and ensure that the ignition in
mode 0.

•

On vehicles with the optional Passive
Entry, never remove the remote key from
the vehicle while it is being driven or
towed.

•

Always place the gear selector in Park
and apply the parking brake before leaving the vehicle. Never leave the vehicle
unattended with the engine running.

•

Always open garage doors fully before
starting the engine inside a garage to
ensure adequate ventilation. The exhaust
gases contain carbon monoxide, which is
invisible and odorless but very poisonous.

NOTE
After a cold start, idle speed may be noticeably higher than normal for a short period. This
is done to help bring components in the
emission control system to their normal operating temperature as quickly as possible,
which enables them to control emissions and
help reduce the vehicle's impact on the environment.

}}
373

STARTING AND DRIVING
||

CAUTION

•

When starting in cold weather, the automatic transmission may shift up at slightly
higher engine speeds than normal until
the automatic transmission fluid reaches
normal operating temperature.

•

Do not race a cold engine immediately
after starting. Oil flow may not reach
some lubrication points fast enough to
prevent engine damage.

•

The engine should be idling when you
move the gear selector. Never accelerate
until after you feel the transmission
engage. Accelerating immediately after
selecting a gear will cause harsh engagement and premature transmission wear.

•

Selecting P or N when idling at a standstill for prolonged periods of time will help
prevent overheating of the automatic
transmission fluid.

Related information

•
•
•
•

Ignition modes (p. 370)
Turning the engine off (p. 374)
Changing the remote key's battery (p. 232)
Jump starting (p. 365)

Turning the engine off

Driving systems

The engine can be turned off using the start
knob on the tunnel console.

The XC90 T8 Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid is a
parallel hybrid, which means that it has two separate drive systems: an electric motor and a gasoline engine. Depending on the drive mode
selected and the amount of electric power available in the hybrid battery, the two systems can
be used in tandem or separately.

Two drive systems
A control system coordinates both of the drive
systems to help optimize driving economy.

Start knob in the tunnel console between the front seats

To turn off the engine:
–

Turn the start knob toward STOP and
release it to switch the engine off.

If the gear selector is in P or if the vehicle is moving:
–

Hold the knob in the STOP position until the
engine stops.

Related information

•
•

Starting the engine (p. 372)
Ignition modes (p. 370)

Hybrid battery
Gasoline engine
High voltage generator3
Electric motor

374

Combined generator and starter motor (Crank Integrated Starter Generator).

STARTING AND DRIVING
The gasoline engine and electric motor both generate power directly to the wheels. The gasoline
engine can also charge the hybrid battery using a
special high-voltage generator.

Related information

•
•
•

Charging the hybrid battery (p. 383)

•

Parking climate (preconditioning) (p. 179)

Hybrid battery charging cable
The charging cable is used to recharge your
vehicle's hybrid battery. Only use the cable provided with your vehicle or one purchased from a
Volvo retailer.

Drive modes (p. 390)

Charging cable specifications
Compliance
Permitted ambient temperatures for use

SAE J1772
–25 ºF to +122 ºF
(–32 ºC to +50 ºC)

General information about the XC90 T8 Twin
Engine Plug-in Hybrid (p. 16)

The charging cable is stowed in a storage compartment
under the cargo area floor

WARNING
Only use the charging cable provided with
your vehicle or a replacement cable purchased from a Volvo retailer.

}}
375

STARTING AND DRIVING
||

WARNING

•

376

The charging cable must be grounded
when in use. It is equipped with a cord
with a grounding conductor and a
grounding plug. The plug must be
inserted into an appropriate outlet that is
properly installed and grounded in
accordance with all local codes and ordinances and is not damaged in any way

•

Children should be supervised when in
the vicinity of the charging cable when it
is plugged in

•

High voltage is present in your electric
meter housing and power distribution
service panel. Contact with high voltage
can cause death or serious personal
injury

•

Do not use the charging cable if it is
damaged in any way

•

Always position the charging cable so
that it will not be driven over, stepped on,
tripped over or otherwise damaged, or
cause personal injury

•

Disconnect the charger from the wall outlet before cleaning it

•

Never connect the charging cable to an
extension cord or a multiple plug socket

•

If the hybrid battery needs to be replaced,
this may only be done by Volvo retailer or
authorized Volvo workshop
Also, refer to the manufacturer's instructions
for using the charging cable and its components.

Charging cable components

CAUTION

•

Never unplug the charging cable from a
120-/240-volt socket while the hybrid
battery is being recharged. This could
result in damage to the socket. Always
stop the charging process before unplugging the charging cable

•

To clean the charging cable, wipe it with
a clean cloth dampened with water or a
mild detergent solution suitable for use
on automobile paint. Do not use chemicals or solvents. Do not submerge the
charging cable

Charge module
240-volt adapter clip
240-volt adapter
Charge coupler
Release button

STARTING AND DRIVING

Hybrid charging cable circuit
breaker
The charging cable has a circuit breaker that
helps protect against current overloads and
electrical shocks.
If the charging cable's residual current breaker is
triggered, the blue indicator light in the charge
coupler will not illuminate when the cable is plugged into a 120-/240-volt socket or the red indicator light will glow steadily. Have the socket
checked by a licensed electrician or try using
another 120-/240-volt wall socket.

WARNING

•

Charging the hybrid battery may only be
done from approved, grounded 120-/
240-volt sockets. If the electrical circuit
or electrical socket's capacity is not
known, let a licensed electrician inspect
the electrical circuit's capacity. Using a
charge level that exceeds the electrical
circuit's or electrical outlet's capacity may
start a fire or damage the electrical circuit.

•

The charging cable's residual current
breaker helps protect the vehicle's charging system but cannot ensure that an current overload will never occur.

•

Never use visibly worn or damaged electrical sockets. Doing so could lead to fires
or serious injury.

•

Never connect the charging cable to an
extension cord.

•

Maintenance or replacement of the hybrid
battery may only be performed by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

377

STARTING AND DRIVING

Hybrid-related symbols and
messages
A number of symbols and messages relating to
the XC90 T8 Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid may
Symbol

appear in the instrument panel. They may also
be displayed in combination with general indicator and warning symbols and will go out when
the necessary action has been taken.

Message

Explanation

Battery charging fault

Battery fault. Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as
possible.

Service urgent Drive to workshop
Battery charging fault
Stop safely
Low battery charge

Battery fault. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
The hybrid battery's charge level is too low for optimal driving. Charge the battery as soon as possible.

Temporarily reduced functionality
Battery charging fault
Low battery Stop safely
Battery failure
Battery fuse Service required
Battery overheated
Stop safely
Reduced performance
Max vehicle speed limited

378

The hybrid battery is not sufficiently charged. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and charge the
battery.
Battery failure. Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as
possible to have the system checked.
Battery temperature too high/too low. Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine. If the message
remains after the engine has been restarted, contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.
The hybrid battery is not sufficiently charged for higher speeds. Charge the battery as soon as possible.

STARTING AND DRIVING

Symbol

Message

Explanation

Hybrid system

The hybrid system is not functioning completely properly. Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible to have the system checked.

Harsh behavior at low speed, vehicle ok to use
Hybrid system failure
Service required
Charge cable
Remove before start
Charge cable
Removed? Turn and hold start knob
7s

The hybrid system is out of order. Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician as soon as possible to have the system checked.
The charging cable has not been disconnected and the driver has attempted to start the engine. Disconnect the cable from the vehicle, put the cover back in place and close the charger door.
The driver has already attempted to start the engine with the charging cable still connected. Be sure
the cable is completely disconnected, the cover is in place and the charger door is closed.

Related information

•
•
•

Charging the hybrid battery (p. 383)
Charger status indicators (p. 387)
Hybrid battery charge status (p. 385)

379

STARTING AND DRIVING

Preparations for charging the hybrid
battery
Several preparatory steps should be taken
before starting to charge the hybrid battery.

380

WARNING

•

Children should be supervised when in
the vicinity of the charging cable when it
is plugged in

•

High voltage is present in your electric
meter housing and power distribution
service panel. Contact with high voltage
can cause death or serious personal
injury

•

Do not use the charging cable if it is
damaged in any way

•

Always position the charging cable so
that it will not be driven over, stepped on,
tripped over or otherwise damaged, or
cause personal injury

•

Disconnect the charger from the wall outlet before cleaning it

•

Never connect the charging cable to an
extension cord or a multiple plug socket

•

Prior to charging
The charging cable and any of its components
should not be wet or submerged in any liquid.
The charge module or its plug should not be
exposed to direct sunlight. This could cause the
unit's overheating protector to reduce or stop the
hybrid battery charging process.
Be sure the 120-/240-volt socket used has adequate current for charging electrically powered
vehicles. Have the socket checked by an licensed
electrician if you are uncertain.

Opening/closing the charger door

STARTING AND DRIVING
Press in the rear section of the door and
release it.
Open the door.
Pull off the charging socket's protective
cover and place it in the holder on the inside
of the door. Be sure that the protective cover's rubber plug faces down to help keep the
cover from falling out of the holder.
Put the cover back in position and close the door
in reverse order.

Stopping hybrid battery charging
Stop hybrid battery charging by unlocking the
vehicle, disconnecting the charging cable from
the vehicle's charging socket and then unplugging the cable from the 120-/240-volt socket.

NOTE
Always unlock the vehicle to stop the charging process before disconnecting the charging cable from the vehicle's charging socket
and then unplugging it from the
120-/240-volt socket.
The cable must be disconnected from the
vehicle's charging socket before it is
unplugged from the 120-/240-volt socket
to help prevent damage to the charging
system.

Press the release button on the charge coupler to release it and disconnect the coupler
from the vehicle's charging socket. Remove
the cable from the vehicle. Put the socket's
cover back in place and close the charger
door.

Disconnect the cable from the
120-/240-volt socket.
Unlock the vehicle with the remote key.

Stow the cable in the storage compartment
under the cargo area floor.
}}
381

STARTING AND DRIVING
||

Related information

•
•
•

Charging the hybrid battery (p. 383)
Hybrid battery charge status (p. 385)
Hybrid battery charging cable (p. 375)

Initiating hybrid battery charging
The hybrid battery is charged using a charging
cable connected to a 120-/240-volt socket.
Only use the cable provided with your vehicle or
one purchased from a Volvo retailer.

CAUTION
Never connect the charging cable if there is a
risk of thunderstorms/lightning.
Take out the charging cable, which is stored in
the compartment under the floor of the cargo
area.

Connect the charging cable to a
120-/240-volt socket. Never use an extension cord.

382

Open the charging door, remove the charging socket's protective cover and connect the
charging cable's charge coupler.

Place the charging socket's protective cover
on the holder provided on the charging
socket door.

STARTING AND DRIVING
4.

The charging cable's coupler will lock onto
the charging socket and charging will begin
within approx. 10 seconds. The approximate
remaining charging time and charging status
will be displayed in the instrument panel. See
also the article "Hybrid battery charge status."

CAUTION

Charging will be temporarily interrupted if the
vehicle is unlocked:

•

If a door is opened, charging will restart
within 2 minutes.

•

if no door is opened, the vehicle will automatically relock and charging will restart
after 1 minute.

NOTE
Charging status is shown in the instrument
panel, which goes dark after a period of time.
Reactivate the instrument panel by:

•
•
•

pressing the brake pedal

Never disconnect the charging cable from the
120-/240-volt socket while charging is in
progress. This could damage the socket.

In addition to the conventional fuel tank, the
XC90 T8 Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid is also
equipped with a rechargeable lithium-ion hybrid
battery.

Always stop the charging process (by unlocking the vehicle) and disconnect the charging
cable from the vehicle's charging socket
before disconnecting the other end from the
120-/240-volt socket being used.

The hybrid battery is recharged using a charging
cable located in a storage compartment under
the floor of the cargo area. See also the article
"Charging cable."

During the charging process, condensation may
form under the vehicle, which is normal and is
caused by cooling the hybrid battery.

Related information

•
•
•
•

Charging the hybrid battery

Hybrid battery charge status (p. 385)
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 383)
Hybrid battery charging cable (p. 375)
Stopping hybrid battery charging (p. 381)

WARNING
The hybrid electrical system in your vehicle
uses high voltage electrical current. Any damage to this system or to the hybrid battery
may result in the danger of overheating, fire,
or serious injury. If the vehicle is involved in a
collision or is subjected to flooding, fires, etc.,
have it inspected by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician. Prior to this inspection, the vehicle should be parked outdoors at
a safe distance from any building or potentially flammable materials.

opening one of the doors
putting the ignition in mode I (without
pressing the brake pedal, turn the start
knob to START and release it).

The hybrid battery's charging time depends on
the charging current used.

}}
383

STARTING AND DRIVING
||

NOTE
The capacity of the hybrid battery diminishes
somewhat with age and use, which could
result in increased use of the gasoline engine
and consequently, slightly higher fuel consumption.

be available at all (e.g., drive mode may not be
available).

Charging using the gasoline engine

The electric motor cannot be used if the hybrid
battery's temperature is too low or too high. If the
PURE drive mode is selected, the gasoline
engine will be used.

Temperature control
Charging is indicated in three ways:

•

Charge module (the unit that is plugged into
the wall socket): The blue indicator light on
the cable's charge module will flash red several times when the unit is plugged into a
wall socket while a safety check is being performed and will then glow steadily blue to
indicate that the charger is ready to use.
A green indicator light in the vehicle's charging socket will flash green while the battery
is charging and will glow steadily green when
the hybrid battery is fully charged. The blue
indicator light in the charge module will also
flash while charging is underway and will
glow steadily blue when charging is completed.
A gauge in the instrument panel will also
indicate the battery's charge level.

The hybrid battery charging process also charges
the vehicle's start battery.
If the hybrid battery's temperature is below –
13 ºF (–10 ºC) or above +104 ºF (+40 ºC), some
of the vehicle's functions may be reduced or not

384

During charging, if the temperature in the charging cable becomes too high and reaches a critical
limit, charging will be interrupted.

CAUTION
If charging is interrupted repeatedly, have the
charging cable and the vehicle's charging
system inspected by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.

Current is generated to charge the hybrid battery, such
as light braking and when engine braking on downslopes

Using the B gear mode when driving on downslopes will also recharge the hybrid battery.
The hybrid battery can also be charged by the
gasoline engine. During light braking, the battery
is recharged.

Related information

•
•

Drive modes (p. 390)
General information about the XC90 T8 Twin
Engine Plug-in Hybrid (p. 16)
Hybrid battery charging cable (p. 375)
Gear selector positions (p. 396)

STARTING AND DRIVING

Hybrid battery charge status
The hybrid battery's charge status (level) is indicated by an LED light in the vehicle's charging
socket and in the instrument panel.

Indicator LED in the vehicle's charging
socket

LED indicator light in the charging socket

The LED indicator light shows the current charge
status while charging is underway. White, red, yellow or yellow lights are activated when the passenger compartment lighting illuminates and
remain on for a short time after the passenger
compartment lighting has gone out.

LEDindicator light's
color

Explanation

White

Courtesy light

Yellow

Standby mode (e.g., after a door
has been opened or if the
charger coupling is not locked
in position in the charging
socket): waiting for charging to
begin

Flashing
green

Charging is in progress (the
slower the light flashes, the
closer the battery is to being
fully charged)

Green

Charging completed (the light
will go out after a short time)

Red

A fault has occurred

•

Turning the start knob to ignition mode I

Charge status in the instrument panel
Charging status is indicated in the instrument
panel using graphics and text. This information is
displayed for as long as the instrument panel is
active.
If the instrument panel is not used for a short
period, it will switch off to help save electrical current and can be reactivated by:

•
•

Pressing the brake pedal
Opening one of the doors

}}
385

STARTING AND DRIVING
||

386

Graphic

Message

Explanation

Fully
charged
at:
[Time] is
displayed
with an
animated
blue pulsing light
through
the
charging
cable.

Charging is in progress and the approximate time when the
battery will be fully
charged will be displayed.

Graphic

Related information

Message

Explanation

Charging complete is
displayed.
An image
will be
superimposed
over the
graphic of
the vehicle with a
greenLED
indicator
light in
the
charging
socket.

The battery is fully
charged.

Charging error
will be
displayed
and the
LED indicator light
in the
charging
socket
will be
red.

A fault has occurred.
Check that the charging cable is correctly
connected to the
vehicle's charging
socket and the
120-/240-volt socket.

•
•
•

Charging the hybrid battery (p. 383)

•

Stopping hybrid battery charging (p. 381)

Hybrid battery charging cable (p. 375)
Preparations for charging the hybrid battery
(p. 380)

STARTING AND DRIVING

Charger status indicators
The red and blue lights in the charging cable's
charge module give an indication of the charge
status.

Blue status indicator
• When the charge module is plugged into a
wall socket, the blue status indicator illuminates and glows steadily to show that the
charger is ready to use.

•

Charge module: 1. red warning light, 2. blue status indicator

Red warning light
When the charge module is initially plugged
into a wall socket, the red warning light will
flash once to indicate that a startup safety
check has been performed. When the safety
check has been completed, the blue status
indicator will glow steadily and the red warning light will be off.

•

If the red warning light continues to flash or
glows steadily, a fault has been detected and
the charger will not deliver power to the vehicle. Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.

When the charge coupler (the plug on the
other end of the charging cable) has been
plugged into the vehicle's charging socket,
the blue status indicator will flash once.

•

The blue status indicator will then flash
approximately every two seconds to indicate
that charging is taking place.

•

When the indicator light glows steadily, this
indicates that charging has been completed.
This will also be indicated by the charging
gauge on the instrument panel.

When charging is completed, press the release
button on the charge coupler and disconnect it
from the vehicle.
Unplug the charge module from the wall socket.

Related information

•
•
•

•

Hybrid battery charging cable (p. 375)

Hybrid battery charging current
Charging current is used to charge the hybrid
battery and to precondition the vehicle. Charging
is done through a cable connected between the
vehicle's charging socket and a
120-/240-volt socket.
When charging is in progress, an indicator light in
the charging socket illuminates to indicate the
charging status. Charging current is primarily
used to recharge the hybrid battery and to precondition the vehicle but is also used to recharge
the vehicle's start battery.

CAUTION
Never disconnect the charging cable from the
120-/240-volt socket while charging is in
progress. This could damage the socket.
Always stop the charging process (by unlocking the vehicle) and disconnect the charging
cable from the vehicle's charging socket
before disconnecting the other end from the
120-/240-volt socket being used.

Hybrid battery charge status (p. 385)
Hybrid charging cable circuit breaker
(p. 377)
Hybrid-related symbols and messages
(p. 378)

}}
387

STARTING AND DRIVING

NOTE

•

At very low or high temperatures, some of
the charging current is used to heat or
cool the hybrid battery and the passenger
compartment, which means that charging
may take longer.

•

Charging time is longer if preconditioning
has been selected. This time is primarily
affected by the ambient temperature.

Long-term storage of a vehicle with
a hybrid battery

To help keep the hybrid battery from degrading if
the vehicle is not driven for a prolonged period
(longer than 1 month), the hybrid battery charge
level should be kept at approx. 25% according
to the gauge in the instrument panel.
Do as follows:

If the vehicle has not been driven for at least
6 months or the charge level is noticeably
below the 25% level, charge the battery up
to 25% again to help compensate for natural
battery discharge. Check the charge level
regularly using the gauge in the instrument
panel.

See the article "Jump starting" for information
about charging the start battery.

NOTE

•

If the vehicle will not be driven for an
extended period, park it in as cool a location as possible to help minimize hybrid
battery aging. Park the vehicle indoors or
in a shady location in the summer, whichever is coolest.

Related information

1.
Charging coupler and charging socket

There are normally several 120-/240-volt power
consumers in a fuse circuit, which means that
more than one power consumer (lighting, vacuum
cleaner, electric drill, etc.) may use the same fuse.

388

If the hybrid battery charge level is high, drive
the vehicle until approx. 25% of the charge
remains. If the charge level is low, charge the
battery until the level is approx. 25%.

•
•
•

Jump starting (p. 365)
Initiating hybrid battery charging (p. 382)
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 383)

STARTING AND DRIVING

Using the electric motor in city
driving
A number of factors affect the electric motor's
driving range.
The driver can affect some of these factors while
others depend on outside conditions such as
temperature, road surface, etc.

Factors that determine the electric
motor's driving range
Factors outside of the driver's control
The following are examples of factors that the
driver cannot control:

•
•
•
•
•

The current traffic situation
Driving short distances
Topography
Ambient temperature and headwinds
Road conditions/road surface

The following table shows the approximate relationship between ambient temperature and driving range using the electric motor (with reduced
climate system functionality). Warmer temperatures increase driving range.

32°F (0°C)

80%

37 mph (60 km/h)

110%

23°F (-5°C)

75%

30 mph(50 km/h)

120%

14°F (-10°C)

70%

NOTE

Factors in the driver's control
The driver should be aware of the following factors in order to utilize the vehicle's electric motor
most efficiently:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Charge the hybrid battery regularly

•

The figures in the preceding tables pertain to a new vehicle.

•

None of the figures are absolute and are
affected by e.g., driving style, weather,
traffic conditions, etc.

Preconditioning
The Pure drive mode

Driving with the electric motor

Climate system settings

Use the Pure drive mode for the most energyefficient driving to help maximize driving range
using the electric motor only.

Speed and acceleration
The Save drive mode
Tires and inflation pressure

The following table shows the approximate relationship between constant speed and driving
range where driving at a lower constant speed
helps increase the electric motor's driving range.
62 mph (100 km/h)

70%

55 mph (90 km/h)

80%

77°F (25°C)

105%

50 mph(80 km/h)

90%

68°F (20°C)

100%

43 mph (70 km/h)

100%

50°F (10°C)

90%

40°F (5 °C)

85%

Use the Save drive mode for higher speeds
when driving farther than is possible using the
electric motor only.

Related information

•
•

Driving economically (p. 355)
Drive modes (p. 390)

389

STARTING AND DRIVING

Drive modes

Selecting a drive mode

Selecting a drive mode affects the vehicle's driving characteristics to help make driving more
enjoyable or easier in certain types of situations.

speed.

Steering
Engine/transmission/All Wheel Drive
Brakes
Suspension control
Instrument panel
Climate system settings

Press the DRIVE MODE control in the tunnel console.
> A pop-up menu will open in the center
display.

Roll the control upward or downward to scroll
to the desired drive mode.

Select the drive mode best suited to the current
driving conditions.
Please be aware that not all modes can be
selected in all driving situations. The selected
mode will be displayed in the instrument panel.

A drive mode can also be selected by tapping its button on the center display.
3.

Press the control again to select it.

When a driving mode cannot be selected, one of
the following messages may be displayed:

• Not possible to select due to gear in
manual

• Not possible to select due to low battery

390

temperature

• Not possible to select due to limitations
• Not possible to select due to high

The following systems are adapted to help provide the best vehicle performance in the respective drive modes:

•
•
•
•
•
•

• Not possible to select due to low

STARTING AND DRIVING

Available drive modes

When the hybrid battery's charge level is low, the
gasoline engine will start more often to help conserve electrical energy. Charge the battery with
the charging cable as soon as possible or switch
to the Save drive mode.

HYBRID
This is the default mode.
The vehicle normally starts in Hybrid mode 4. The
engine management system uses both the electric motor and gasoline engine (separately or in
tandem) and calculates the optimal levels of performance, fuel consumption and comfort. At
higher speeds, ground clearance is reduced
automatically to help reduce wind resistance.
The amount of driving done using only the electric motor in Hybrid mode is determined by the
hybrid battery's charge level and the need for
heating/cooling in the passenger compartment.
If sufficient electrical energy is available, only the
electric motor will be activated when the driver
presses the accelerator pedal up to a certain
level. Above this level, the gasoline engine will
start.

PURE
This mode activates the electric motor only with
as low energy consumption as possible and the
lowest possible carbon dioxide emissions.

The instrument panel gauge when both the electric
motor and gasoline engine are being used

The long needle in the gauge indicates the
amount of energy that the vehicle is currently
using. The short white line between the "lightning" and "oil drop" symbols indicates the
amount of energy available. See also the article
"General information about the XC90 T8 Twin
Engine Plug-in Hybrid" for additional information.
The gasoline engine starts when the response
required when the driver presses the accelerator
pedal cannot be provided by the electric motor
alone.
The gauge also indicates when the battery is
being recharged (regenerated) during light braking. See the article "Brakes" for additional information.

Unless the vehicle was switched off in Off Road mode. If so, it will restart in Off Road mode.

Ground clearance will be lowered to help reduce
wind resistance and certain climate system functions will be reduced.

Pure mode is available when the hybrid battery is
sufficiently charged. If the level gets too low, the
gasoline engine will start.
The gasoline engine will also start:

•

If the vehicle's speed goes above approx.
75 mph (125 km/h)

•

If the driver wants more response than the
electric motor alone can provide

•

If factors such as cold weather, etc., affect
the system or components

To restart the climate system functions that have
been reduced in the mode, press the, AUTO or
defroster buttons.

}}
391

STARTING AND DRIVING
||

SAVE
This mode makes it possible to save electrical
energy (hybrid battery charge) for times when
using the electric motor is more suitable (e.g., city
driving).

This drive mode can only be activated at low
speeds (the permissible speed range will be
shown on the speedometer). At higher speeds,
OFF ROAD mode will be cancelled and AWD will
be activated.

Using the electric motor only saves more fuel at
low speeds than at high ones. Therefore, use the
SAVE mode primarily when the hybrid battery's
charge level is high and driving will initially be at
highway speeds but will end with city driving
when electric driving is preferable.

This mode is not intended for normal street driving.

If the hybrid battery's charge level is low when
this mode is selected, the gasoline engine will
start and charge the hybrid battery up to approx.
33%. If the battery's charge level is already above
33%, this level will be maintained by the engine
management system, which will start/stop the
gasoline engine in the same way as in Hybrid
drive mode.
This mode increases fuel consumption because
the gasoline engine is used to conserve battery
charge for later use.
OFF ROAD
This mode helps maximize the vehicle's capacity
to traverse difficult terrain or poor roads.
In OFF ROAD, ground clearance is maximized,
the steering is light, All Wheel Drive and Hill
Descent Control are activated and a compass
and altimeter will be displayed in the instrument
panel.

392

CAUTION
OFF ROAD drive mode may not be used if
the vehicle is towing a trailer without an electrical connection. This could result in damage
to the pneumatic suspension system's bellows.
Due to the increased ground clearance, if the
OFF ROAD mode was selected when the engine
was switched off, it will also restart in this mode.
AWD
This mode offers improved traction using fourwheel drive and is intended primarily for lowspeed driving on slippery surfaces. However, it
also helps increase directional stability at higher
speeds.
In this mode, both the electric motor and the gasoline engine are used continuously, which results
in higher fuel consumption.
POWER
Power mode is intended for sportier, more active
driving.

This mode maximizes the combined effects of
the electric motor and the gasoline engine and
provides power to all four wheels. Response to
pressure on the accelerator pedal is more immediate and the transmission shifts up at higher
speeds. Steering response is also more immediate, the suspension is stiffer and lower ground
clearance reduces body roll when cornering.
In this mode, both the electric motor and the gasoline engine are used continuously, which results
in higher fuel consumption.

STARTING AND DRIVING
INDIVIDUAL
This setting allows you to adapt a driving mode to
your personal preferences.

The following settings can be modified:

•
•
•
•
•

Select one of the other driving modes as a basis
and change the settings to provide the driving
characteristics that you prefer. This driving mode
is only available if it has been activated in the
center display.
INDIVIDUAL is only available if it has been activated in the center display.

Driver Display
Steering force
Powertrain Characteristics
Brake Characteristics
Pneumatic suspension and shock
absorbers

Related information

•
•
•

Settings view5 for INDIVIDUAL driving mode

Select: Eco, Comfort or Dynamic.

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

Tap My Car Individual Drive Mode and
tap Individual Drive Mode.

•
•
•
•

Adjustable steering force* (p. 323)
Loading (p. 215)
General information about the XC90 T8 Twin
Engine Plug-in Hybrid (p. 16)
ECO drive mode (p. 394)
All Wheel Drive (AWD) (p. 400)
Hill Descent Control (HDC) (p. 350)
Brakes (p. 346)

Generic illustration.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 393

STARTING AND DRIVING

ECO drive mode

Selecting ECO mode

The Eco drive mode is a function designed to
give the driver the opportunity to drive more economically and to help reduce fuel consumption.

When the engine is switched off, ECO mode is
deactivated and must be reactivated each time
the engine is started. ECO will appear in the
instrument panel when the function is activated.

ECO gauge in the instrument panel

When this mode is activated, the following characteristics are modified:

•
•

The automatic transmission's shifting points

•

Climate system settings: certain functions
will be temporarily reduced or deactivated

•

The suspension's self-leveling function* lowers ground clearance to help reduce wind
resistance

•

Information is shown in an ECO gauge in the
instrument panel to help promote more economical driving

The engine management system and accelerator pedal response

Press the control again to select it. A drive
mode can also be selected by tapping its
button on the center display.

Via Function view
Select Driving mode ECO in
the center display's Function
view. A green indicator light in
the button shows that the function is activated.
With the drive mode control*

Eco gauge 12" instrument panel

NOTE
When Eco is activated, several climate system
parameters are changed and the function of
certain current-consuming systems will be
reduced.
Some of these functions can be restarted
manually but full functionality will not be
restored until Eco is deactivated.

394

Press the DRIVE MODE control.
> A pop-up menu will open in the center
display.

Roll the control upward or downward to scroll
to the desired drive mode and

Eco gauge 8 instrument panel

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

STARTING AND DRIVING
The ECO gauge in the instrument panel helps
improve driving economy.

•

A low reading in the green area indicates
economical driving.

•

A higher reading indicates higher fuel consumption.

The ECO gauge also has an indicator showing
how a "reference" driver would drive in the same
situation. This is indicated by a diamond in the
gauge.

Related information

•
•

Driving economically (p. 355)
Drive modes (p. 390)

Automatic transmission
The automatic transmission has 8 forward gears
and an electric motor that powers the rear
wheels. Steering wheel paddles* make it possible to shift manually. The gear indicator in the
instrument panel shows the gear currently being
used or gear shift mode.

Related information

•
•
•
•
•

Gear selector positions (p. 396)
Gear shift indicator (p. 396)
Shiftlock (p. 396)
Steering wheel paddles* (p. 398)
All Wheel Drive (AWD) (p. 400)

CAUTION
The transmission’s temperature is monitored
to help prevent damage to the transmission
or other drivetrain components. If there is a
risk of overheating, the warning symbol on the
instrument panel will illuminate and a text
message will be displayed. Follow the instructions provided there.

Symbols in the instrument panel
If a problem should occur with the transmission, a
symbol and a message will be displayed in the
instrument panel.
Symbol

Explanation
Transmission-related information.
Follow the instructions provided.
Hot or overheated transmission.
Follow the instructions provided.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 395

STARTING AND DRIVING

Shiftlock

Gear shift indicator

Gear selector positions

The automatic transmission's shiftlock feature
helps prevent inadvertently moving the gear
selector between different positions.

The gear shift indicator in the instrument panel
shows the current gear (in manual shifting
mode) and will prompt the driver to shift up or
down to help get the best possible fuel economy.

The shift-by-wire gear transmission shifts gears
electronically instead of mechanically for faster
and more distinct gear shifting.

Automatic shiftlock
From Park – P
In order to move the gear selector from the P
position, the brake pedal must be depressed and
the ignition must be in mode II.
From neutral – N
If the gear selector is in N and the vehicle has
been stationary for more than 3 seconds (regardless of whether or not the engine is running), the
shiftlock feature will lock the gear selector in this
position.

The gear shift indicator shows the current gear in
the instrument panel and uses an upward arrow
to recommend shifting to a higher gear. The indicator is also shown in mode B or if the steering
wheel paddles* are being used in while the transmission is in mode D.

Selecting gears
Select gears by moving the spring-loaded, nonlocking gear selector forward or rearward.

In order to move the gear selector from the N
position, the brake pedal must be depressed and
the ignition must be in mode II.

Messages in the instrument panel
If the gear selector is locked in position, a message such as: Gear lever Press brake pedal
to activate gear lever will be displayed.
There is no mechanical shiftlock function.

Related information

•
•

396

Gear selector positions (p. 396)
Automatic transmission (p. 395)

Gear shift indicator (generic illustration)

Related information

•
•

Gear selector positions (p. 396)
Steering wheel paddles* (p. 398)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

STARTING AND DRIVING

Gear selector positions

Park – P

In position P, the transmission is mechanically
locked. Always apply the parking brake when the
vehicle is parked.

WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when the
vehicle is parked, particularly when parking on
a hill. The transmission's P mode may not be
able to keep the vehicle stationary if it is
parked on an incline.

The following gear selector positions are shown
in the instrument panel:

Park is activated using a switch located next to
the gear selector.

P, R, N, D or B (brake).

Select P when the vehicle is parked or when the
starting the engine. The vehicle must be stationary when P is selected.

For manual shifting, the gear indicator in the
instrument panel shows the gear currently being
used (1–8).

To select another gear, the ignition must be in
mode II and the brake pedal must be depressed.
Help functions:
The system will automatically shift to P:

•

If the ignition is switched off while D or R is
selected.

•

If the driver unbuckles the seat belt and
opens the door while the engine is running if
P has not already been selected.

Reverse – R
The vehicle must be stationary before R can be
selected.
Neutral – N
No gear is selected and the engine can be
started. Always apply the parking brake if the
vehicle is not moving and the gear selector is in
the N position.
The ignition must be in mode II and the brake
pedal must be depressed before the gear selector can be moved from N.
Drive – D
D is the normal driving position and gear shifting
is fully automatic. The vehicle must be stationary
when the gear selector is moved from R to D.

}}
397

STARTING AND DRIVING
||

Brake – B
B can be selected at any time during a drive. In
this mode, the engine braking function is activated when the accelerator pedal is released,
which helps charge the hybrid battery. This
means that the hybrid battery is charged even if
the brake pedal is not depressed.

For smooth shifting and engine performance, the
transmission will shift down automatically if the
vehicle's speed becomes too low for the selected
gear.

Safety function
To help avoid excessive rpm that might cause
engine damage, the transmission control module
has a down-shift protection feature that in some
situations may prevent a down-shift or kickdown.
During kickdown, the transmission may shift
down one or more gears, depending on the
engine's rpm and will shift up again when max.
rpm is reached for a specific gear.

Steering wheel paddles*
In addition to the manual gearshift function using
the gear selector, the paddles make it possible
to manually shift gears from the steering wheel.

Activating the paddles
In order to shift gears with the paddles, they have
to first be activated. To do so:
–

Pull either paddle toward the steering wheel
and release it; the D in the instrument panel
will change to M and the number of the gear
currently being used will be displayed.

Related information

•
•
•

Steering wheel paddles* (p. 398)
Shiftlock (p. 396)
Gear shift indicator (p. 396)

B mode in the instrument panel

With B selected, manual shifting to lower gears
is possible. The gear indicator in the instrument
panel shows the gear currently being used (1–8).
Each time the gear selector is pulled rearward,
the transmission will shift down one gear.
In order to manually shift to higher gears, the
vehicle must be equipped with steering wheel
paddles*.

•

398

Press the gear selector forward to return to
D mode.

Manually shifting gears
In shift mode M, the paddles are automatically
activated.

Shifting
To shift one gear:

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

STARTING AND DRIVING
–

Pull either paddle toward the steering wheel
and release it.

Automatically
If the paddles are not used for a period of time,
they will deactivate automatically. The number of
the current gear in the instrument panel changes
to "D".
The paddles will remain active if engine braking is
currently being used.

Related information

•
•

"–": Shift down one gear.

Gear selector positions (p. 396)
Gear shift indicator (p. 396)

Low Speed Control (LSC)
Low Speed Control (LSC) helps make off-road
driving easier on slippery surfaces when towing
a trailer on grass, etc. This feature is part of the
Off Road drive mode.
When driving at low speeds, LSC prioritizes low
gears and all wheel drive to help avoid wheel spin
and to improve the vehicle's tractive force. The
accelerator pedal and engine react differently to
make low-speed driving easier.
It is activated along with Hill Descent Control
(HDC), which increases engine braking to help
keep vehicle speed low and smooth, even driving
down steep hills.

"+": Shift up one gear.
A gear shift will take place each time a paddle is
pulled if the engine speed (rpm) is within the permissible range for the selected gear.
The gear number shown in the instrument panel
will change after each gear shift.

Deactivating the paddles
Manually
– Pull both paddles toward the steering wheel
and hold them until the number of the current gear is no longer displayed in the instrument panel.
}}
399

STARTING AND DRIVING
||

Activating LSC

All Wheel Drive (AWD)8

Suspension and leveling control*

Your Volvo can be equipped with All Wheel
Drive, which means that power is distributed
automatically between the front and rear wheels.

The leveling control system adjusts the suspension and shock absorbers automatically to help
provide good comfort and control while driving.
Leveling can also be controlled manually to
make loading or getting in and out of the vehicle
easier.

Under normal driving conditions, most of the
engine's power is directed to the front wheels.
However, if there is any tendency for the front
wheels to spin, an electronically controlled coupling distributes power to the wheels that have
the best traction.
AWD reacts differently, depending on the drive
mode* selected.
Select the Off Road drive mode to activate the
function.
Select any other drive mode to turn it off.

Related information

•
•

Drive modes (p. 390)
Low Speed Control (LSC) (p. 399)

Pneumatic suspension and shock
absorbers
This system is linked to the selected drive mode
and is adapted to the vehicle's speed. The pneumatic suspension reduces the vehicle's ground
clearance at higher speeds to reduce wind resistance and increase stability. The shock absorbers
are normally set to provide the best possible
comfort and are adjusted continuously according
to the road surface, acceleration, braking and
cornering.
A message will be displayed in the instrument
panel when the suspension level is being
adjusted.
The level cannot be adjusted if one of the side
doors or the hood is open.

Related information

•
•
•

400

Brake functions (p. 348)
Hill Descent Control (HDC) (p. 350)
Drive modes (p. 390)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

STARTING AND DRIVING

Suspension leveling settings

Tap My Car

Easy entry
The vehicle can be lowered to entering and exiting easier.

Under Suspension Control, select Eco,
Comfort or Dynamic.

Select Settings Vehicle Easy Entry/Exit
Control via the center display's Top view to lower
the vehicle when getting in or out.
When the vehicle is parked and the engine is
turned off, the level is lowered (if a side door is
opened, the level adjustment will stop). When the
engine is started and the vehicle begins to move,
the level will be raised to the height set by the
selected drive mode.
Turning off suspension and leveling control
In certain situations, this function has to be
turned off, for example when lifting the vehicle on
a jack or garage hoist.
1.

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

Tap My Car

Suspension .

Select Deactivate Suspension & Leveling
Control.

Changing suspension control
Three different levels of suspension control can
be selected from the center display:
1.

Drive Mode.

Loading mode
Use the buttons in the cargo compartment to
raise or lower the vehicle to make loading or
unloading easier or when attaching a trailer.

Related information

•
•
•

Drive modes (p. 390)
Driving with a trailer (p. 367)
Loading (p. 215)

Parking the vehicle
When parking, be sure that there is adequate
space above and below the vehicle since its
ground clearance may vary, e.g., depending on
the ambient temperature, how the vehicle is loaded, if loading mode is being used or the drive
mode selected after the engine is started.
The level may also be adjusted for a certain time
after the vehicle has been parked to compensate
for possible height adjustments due to temperature changes in the pneumatic suspension when
the vehicle has cooled.

Transport
When transporting the vehicle on a ferry, train or
a tow truck, it may only be secured (lashed)
around the tires, not using any other chassis
components. Changes in the pneumatic suspension may occur during transport that could negatively affect the lashing and result in damage.

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

Standard equipment on certain models.

401

INFOTAINMENT

The infotainment system
The infotainment system consists of a radio,
media player and has the capacity to communicate with a Bluetooth-connected cell phone. It is
also possible to connect to the Internet to e.g.,
stream audio content via apps.
The system's functions can be controlled from
the right-side steering wheel keypad, the center
display or by using voice commands.

Infotainment overview

Related information

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Media player (p. 421)
Radio (p. 405)
Phone (p. 414)
Internet connected vehicle (p. 431)
Apps (applications) (p. 433)
Ignition modes (p. 370)
Symbols in the center display status bar
(p. 47)

•
•

Voice control (p. 120)

•

System updates (p. 474)

Infotainment system license information
(p. 437)

Sound settings
The infotainment system is precalibrated for optimal sound reproduction but these settings can
be changed to suit your personal preferences.
The system's volume is normally adjusted using
the right-side steering wheel keypad or the volume control below the center display.

Optimal sound reproduction settings
The audio system is precalibrated for optimal
sound reproduction using digital signal processing. This calibration takes into account the speakers, amplifier, cabin acoustics, listener position,
etc., for each combination of vehicle and infotainment system.
Dynamic calibration is also available, which monitors the setting of the volume control, radio
reception and the vehicle's speed.
Specific sound settings are described in the
respective articles/sections of this owner's information.

System updates
The infotainment system is constantly being
developed and improved. For optimal functionality, updates can be downloaded. See the article
"System updates" and the support site
support.volvocars.com.

1 Certain

404

models only.

To change a setting, pull down the center display's Top view and tap Settings Sound.

Active noise suppression1
The vehicle can be equipped with an active noise
suppression function that reduces engine noise
in the passenger compartment by utilizing the
infotainment system. The microphone(s) in the

INFOTAINMENT
ceiling liner react to engine noise and the infotainment system produces signals (white noise)
to counteract this.

Radio

Radio settings

Your vehicle's radio offers FM with HD Radio ™
Technology and SiriusXM® Satellite radio*.

The following information lists the settings that
can be made for the various wavebands.

The radio can be controlled
using the right-side steering
wheel keypad, the center display or by using voice commands.

Pull down the center display's Top view and
select Settings Media for the desired waveband. Tap to activate/deactivate.

• Show Radio Text: displays information
about program content, artists, etc.

Related information

Microphone in the ceiling liner. The number and position
vary, depending on the vehicle

NOTE
Avoid covering or obstructing the noise suppression speakers because doing so could
result in a rumbling noise.

Related information

•
•
•

Media sound settings (p. 428)
Voice control settings (p. 125)
Phone settings (p. 419)

•

Changing and searching for radio stations
(p. 406)

•
•
•
•

Radio settings (p. 405)

• Freeze Program Service Name: select to
stop excessive scrolling to freeze after
20 seconds.

•

SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 411)
HD Radio™reception (p. 407)
Changing and searching for radio stations
(p. 406)

FM HD Radio: - Enables HD Radio ™
Technology for audio comparable to CD
quality. See the article "HD Radio" for
detailed information.

SiriusXM® Satellite radio
With SiriusXM® Satellite radio activated, pull
down the center display's Top view and tap
SiriusXM Settings to display a list of available
alternatives. See the article "SiriusXM Satellite
radio settings" for detailed information.

Related information

•
•
•
•

SiriusXM® Satellite radio* settings (p. 413)
SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 411)
Radio (p. 405)
HD Radio™reception (p. 407)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 405

INFOTAINMENT

RBDS radio
RBDS radio
RBDS (Radio Data Broadcast System) enables
certain functionality2, such as:

•

Searches for program types or new broadcasts

•

Text information about currently broadcast
programs

For example, if news is broadcast, the currently
playing sound source will be interrupted so that
the news can be heard. The infotainment system
will return to the previous sound source when the
news broadcast has been completed.
butTo cancel the announcement, press the
ton on the right-side steering wheel keypad or
tap Cancel on the center display. This function
can be activated/deactivated in the center display's Settings menu.

Related information

•
•

Radio (p. 405)
Radio settings (p. 405)

Changing and searching for radio
stations
The radio automatically compiles a list of the
strongest stations that it is currently receiving.

Turning the radio on
1.

Open the app (e.g., FM, radio favorites) from
the center display's App view.

Select a station.

Changing a list in a waveband
1.

Tap Library.

Sect from Stations, Favorites or Genres.

Tap the desired station in the list.

406

Certain stations only.

If a favorite station from a list is currently available, the radio will automatically tune to that station.
See "Changing a list in a waveband" above for
information about selecting favorites on a waveband. See "Radio favorites" below for information
about selecting a station among all of your favorites.
–

Tap
to add or remove a station for the
waveband's list of favorites or Radio favorites.

Radio favorites
Radio favorites shows all of the
favorite stations that have been
saved for e.g., FM.

Favorites: only plays stations from the list of
favorites (see "Favorites" below).
Genres: only plays stations broadcasting the
selected genre or program type, e.g., pop, classical, etc.

Open the Radio favorites app in App view.

Changing stations in a selected list

Tap the desired station to listen.

–

Tap < > under the center display or on the
right-side steering wheel keypad.
> Move step-by-step through the selected
list.

The center display can also be used to change
stations.

Favorites

When a station is removed, it will also be
removed from the respective waveband's list of
favorites.

INFOTAINMENT

Changing wavebands3

2.
3.

.
Tap
> The search view with a keyboard will open.
Enter a search word(s).
> The search will start and change as characters are entered and the search results
will be categorized.

Searching for a station manually
Searching manually makes it possible to find and
tune to stations that are not on the automatically
compiled list of the strongest stations in the area.
–

HD Radio™reception
HD Radio is a brand name registered by the
iBiquity digital corporation4. They are the developer of a broadcasting technology called IBOC
or In Band On Channel, which refers to the
method of transmitting a digital radio broadcast
signal centered on the same frequency as the
FM station's present frequency.

Introduction

Tap Manual tuning, drag the control or tap
< > to go to the desired frequency.

Related information

•
•
–

Tap an app, e.g., FM in App view or open the
app menu from the right-side steering wheel
keypad to select.

Searching for a radio station
Searching is done differently, depending on the
waveband selected.

•
•

FM: stations, genres and frequencies.

Tap Library.

3 The

AM waveband is not available in hybrid models.

SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 411)
HD Radio™reception (p. 407)

Display when the radio is receiving an HD Radio broadcast (generic illustration)

NOTE
HD Radio volume may fade in and out at
times due to coverage limitations.

SiriusXM®: program types, genres, stations.

}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 407

INFOTAINMENT
||

The IBOC system is referred to as a "hybrid"
since it is both analogue and digital. During
hybrid operation, receivers still continue to
receive the analogue (non-digital) signal. HD
Radio receivers incorporate both modes of
reception, where the receiver will automatically
switch to the analogue signal if the digital signal
cannot be decoded or is lost by the receiver.
When you have tuned to an HD Radio station, the
symbol will appear in the infotainment system display. The symbol will be displayed in different colors:

•

Grayed-out symbol: NoHD Radio broadcast
reception

•

White symbol: the radio is actively receiving
an HD broadcast

•

Orange symbol: the radio is receiving an
HD broadcast with digital sound

More information about HD Radio and IBOC can
be found on Ibiquity's website, www.hdradio.com
and www.ibiquity.com.

be displayed immediately. Album art is synched
with the artist that you are currently listening to.

How HD Radio ™ Technology
broadcasting works

iTunes tagging

HD Radio works similarly to conventional radio
and broadcasts of this type are available in many
areas of the United States. However, there are a
few key differences:

This feature is common to both HD Radio and
SiriusXM® Satellite radio*. See the section
"iTunes tagging" in the article "SiriusXM satellite
radio settings" for more detailed information.

408

Instead of transmitting one analogue signal,
stations send out a bundled signal – both
analogue and digital.

•

An HD Radio receiver can receive both digital and analogue broadcasts. Depending on
the terrain and location of the vehicle (which
will influence the signal strength), the
receiver will determine which signal to
receive.

Ball game mode
This feature means that a main FM station (HD1)
will broadcast live events, where the content of
the programming is more important than sound
quality, in analog mode only to help prevent the
delay between analog and digital broadcasting.
The HD Radio symbol will be white during live
broadcasts and "Live" will be displayed next to
the symbol.

Benefits of digital broadcasting

•
•

Artist Experience™
A radio station's logo and album art can be displayed. If a station opts to provide this information, it is broadcast once every 12 minutes, which
means that there may be a delay before the
logo/album art appear on the screen. The radio
can store 100 station logos so the next time the
radio is tuned to the same station, the logo will

•

Better sound (FM sounds near CD quality).
Some FM frequencies offer a greater number of listening choices through “multicasting” (consisting of a frequency's main channel and any sub-channels that may also be
available on that particular frequency.)

Related information

•
•
•
•
•

Switching HD Radio on and off (p. 409)
HD Radio sub-channels (p. 409)
HD Radio limitations (p. 410)
Radio (p. 405)
Changing and searching for radio stations
(p. 406)

When receiving a digital signal there is no
multipath disturbance or hisses/pops/crackling due to outside influences.

HD Radio (TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INFOTAINMENT

Switching HD Radio on and off
The factory setting for HD Radio is off.

Switching HD on or off
When listening to an HD Radio station and driving through areas with weak HD signals (fringe
areas), you may experience that the radio repeatedly switches between analogue/digital and digital/analogue reception. If this happens, it may be
desirable to switch HD off.

Related information

•
•
•

HD Radio™reception (p. 407)
HD Radio sub-channels (p. 409)
SiriusXM® Satellite radio* settings (p. 413)

HD Radio sub-channels
In many cases, a main HD Radio station (FM
wavebands only) will also have sub-channels
offering additional types of programming or
music.

Sub-channels

To do so:
1.

Be sure the infotainment system is switched
on and in FM mode.

To access the settings menu from the center
display's Home view, pull down Top view and
tap FM radio.
Go to Adjust settings for media.

Tap the or FM HD Radio box to select/
deselect this function.

This will disable the radio's capability to receive
digital broadcasts but it will continue to function
as a conventional (analogue) FM receiver. Please
note that when HD is switched off, it will not be
possible to tune to sub-channels (see the article
"HD Radio subchannels" for a more detailed
explanation of sub-channels).

Example of an HD Radio station with sub-channels

If any sub-channels are available, they will listed
below the main channel on the screen. In this
example, "WRIF-FM HD2" is a sub-channel.

Please note that this will only switch HD Radio
on or off (selecting or deselecting the function)
only affects the selected waveband.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 409

INFOTAINMENT
||

Selecting sub-channels
To listen to a station's sub-channel(s), tap the
station on the screen or press the forward/back
arrow keys on the right-side steering wheel keypad or below the screen.

HD Radio limitations
Limitations

•

Sub-channels can also be stored as favorites, see
the article "Changing and searching for radio stations".
If you tap a sub-channel favorite, it may take up
to 6 seconds before the channel becomes audible. If you tap a station while you are out of digital
range of the transmitter, No reception will be
displayed.

•

Related information

•
•
•

HD Radio™reception (p. 407)
Switching HD Radio on and off (p. 409)
Changing and searching for radio stations
(p. 406)

•

410

NOTE
There may be a noticeable difference in
sound quality when a change from analogue
to digital or digital to analogue occurs, such
as:

Main channel vs. sub-channels (FM only):
The main channel is the only channel that
can receive in hybrid mode (both digital and
analogue). If a frequency has sub-channels,
they are broadcast in digital mode only. The
main FM channel will be displayed as, for
example, "WRIF-FM HD1". The sub-FM
channels will be displayed as"WRIF-FM
HD2", "WRIF-FM HD3", etc.
Reception coverage area: Due to current
IBOC transmitter power limitations, the
reception coverage area in digital mode is
somewhat more limited than the station's
analogue coverage area. Please be aware
that as with any radio broadcast technology,
terrain, time of day, foliage level and building
location can have positive or negative effects
on radio reception.
Analogue to digital/digital to analogue
blending: Analogue to digital blending will
occur as the signal strength reaches a preset
threshold in the receiver. This will be noticeable in fringe areas (areas with weak reception) and is normal.

•
•

Volume increase or decrease

•

Time alignment (Digital program material
in extreme cases can be as much as 8
seconds behind the analogue). This will
noticeable as a "stuttering" effect.

Equalizer settings, i.e., Bass/ Midrange/
Treble cut or boost

The above items are dependant on the
broadcaster's equipment settings and do
not indicate a fault in the vehicle's radio
receiver or antenna systems.

Related information

•
•

HD Radio sub-channels (p. 409)
HD Radio™reception (p. 407)

INFOTAINMENT

SiriusXM® Satellite radio*

function and display the channel list included in
your subscription.

SiriusXM®

The
Satellite system broadcasts from
of a number of high elevation satellites in geosynchronous orbit.

Related information

•

Listening to satellite radio

Using SiriusXM® Satellite radio radio*
(p. 412)

The digital signals from the satellites are line-ofsight, which means that physical obstructions
such as bridges, tunnels, etc, may temporarily
interfere with signal reception.
Avoid any obstructions, such as metallic objects
transported on roof racks or in a ski box, or other
antennas that may impede signals from the
SiriusXM® satellites.

Selecting SiriusXM® Satellite radio
mode
1.

From the center display's Home view, swipe
from right to left to come to App view.

Tap the SiriusXM® Satellite radio icon.

Home view with SiriusXM® Satellite radio activated

If there is no subscription activated, tap channel
1, where you will be prompted on the screen to
phone SiriusXM®.
If a cell phone is paired and connected to the
vehicle, you can also subscribe by:
1.

From Home view, pull down the Settings
menu.

Open the settings menu for SiriusXM® Satellite radio.

Tap Unsubscribed Services

Tap the phone number to call SiriusXM®,
who will activate the subscription of your
choice. This may take several minutes.

When the subscription has been activated, tap
the SiriusXM® Satellite radio icon to start the

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 411

INFOTAINMENT

Using SiriusXM® Satellite radio
radio*
SiriusXM® Satellite radio offers several features
for finding and listening to music, news, sporting
events, etc. being broadcast on satellite radio
stations.

SiriusXM® Satellite radio functions

Search
Tap the magnifying glass to display a screen
where you can enter text using the center display's keyboard or by writing in the free-text field
to search for e.g., a station number, an artist,
song title, etc.

•
•
•
•

Search (the magnifying glass icon)
Channels
Favorites
Categories

If you have used this view previously, you will be
returned to the most recently used one.

412

On the center display's Home screen, tap EPG
for information about e.g., when a program is
being broadcast and its name, description, artist,
etc. If no information is currently available, No
information will be displayed.

Channels
Tap to display a complete list of the channels
included in your subscription. Tap a channel
name to listen. If a subscription to a channel has
expired, its name will be grayed-out on the
screen.

If this feature has been selected under SiriusXM
Settings, the Alerts button will be displayed on
the Home screen.

For quick access to a channel that you often listen to, tap the star to the right of the channel's
name to add it to the list of favorites.

Tune to any channel that is broadcasting a
song, game, etc., of your choice.

Press the Alerts button.

A pop-up window will be displayed showing a
list of alerts (nothing will be displayed if the
selected channel does not support the alert
function).

Select one of the alternatives in list (only one
can be selected at a time).

The song/artist/team will now be added to
the list of alerts. Favorite sports teams can
also be added to the list using the "Game
Alert" setting as described in the article "SiriusXM satellite radio settings."
> When your choice is being broadcast on a
channel, you will be informed by a pop-up.

Favorites
Tap to display the channels that you have added
to this list. Tap a channel name to listen.
With SiriusXM® Satellite radio activated, tap
Library to display a screen offering the following
functions:

EPG (Electronic Program Guide)

Categories/Genres
Tap to display the categories available. Tap a category or genre name to display the channels that
it contains and then tap a channel to listen.
If an alert has been set (see the section "Alerts"
below) and an alert is active for an artist, song or
team, virtual categories will also be temporary
created and displayed. The channels currently
broadcasting the song, artist or broadcasting a
program with the selected team will be listed in a
virtual category.

Alerts

To add e.g., an artist's name, song title or a sports
team to the list of alerts:

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INFOTAINMENT

iTunes tagging
From the center display's Top view, tapSiriusXM
Settings. Tap theiTunes Tagging menu. Tap
the iTunes Tagging box to activate/deactivate
this function and tap Close to return to Home
view. Tap List Of Tags to display a list of all tagged songs.
If the function is activated, the iTunes tag button
will be displayed in Home view. If a song is played
that you would like to buy in the iTunes store, tap
this button while the song is playing to tag it. If a
song with iTunes Tagging information is available, the button will be selectable. Tap the button
to tag the song. If you would like to buy a tagged
song via iTunes, Tap the iTunes tag button.
To buy a song in iTunes, begin by connecting an
iPhone/iPod/iPad to the USB socket in the tunnel console. The iTunes tagging list will automatically be transferred to the device and removed
from the list in the vehicle. If the device is connected when a song is tagged, the data will automatically be saved in the device. To purchase the
song, consult the iTunes support page.

Related information

•
•
•
•

SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 411)
Using the center display keyboard (p. 35)
SiriusXM® Satellite radio* settings (p. 413)
Connecting a device via the AUX/USB
socket (p. 420)

SiriusXM® Satellite radio* settings
There are numerous settings that can be made
to enhance your SiriusXM® Satellite radio listening experience.

Settings
To access the settings menu from the center display's Home view, pull down Top view and tap
SiriusXM Settings. The following alternatives
will be displayed:

From the Home screen, tap JUMP to activate the
function. When traffic/weather information is
available from the selected city, the radio will
automatically tune to the channel providing the
information. When the information/announcement is finished, the radio will automatically
return to the channel that you were previously listening to.
During an announcement, tap JUMP to interrupt
the message and return to the station that you
were currently listening to.
Alert notifications
Tap the box to activate/deactivate. When activated, you will be notified if a song, artist, etc. that
you have selected is playing. You will be asked if
you want to listen.
Alert notifications sound
Opt to receive an audible alert when one of your
selected choices is being played.

Traffic Jump
Tap to display a list of cities from which you can
choose to get traffic/weather information (or
Traffic jump off to deactivate the feature). Tap
to select a city (JUMP will be displayed on the
Home screen next to Library). Tap Back to
return to the list of settings or Close to return to
the Home screen.

iTunes tagging
Tap to display a menu with the options: iTunes
Tagging and List Of Tags. With this feature
activated, songs can be tagged for later purchase
from the iTunes store.

}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 413

INFOTAINMENT
||

Game Alerts
Tap to display a list of sports.
Tap a sport to display a list of teams and tap a
box on the right side of the screen to select a
team as a favorite. An alert will then be provided
when information about the team is being broadcast.

Related information

•

Using SiriusXM® Satellite radio radio*
(p. 412)

Tap Confirm below the list to return to the list of
sports.

•

SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 411)

Tap Back to return to the list of settings or
Close to return to the main screen.
Unsubscribed services
If you have a SiriusXM® Satellite radio subscription, any channels not included in the subscription will be listed here. Call SiriusXM™ to subscribe. The phone number will be shown on the
screen. If a cell phone is paired and connected to
the vehicle, tap the phone number to make the
call.
Skipped stations
Tap to display a list of channels that you would
like to skip (hide). Hide channels from the channel list by tapping the boxes to the right of the
screen. Skipped (hidden) channels will not be
shown in the channel list. However, a channel
previously selected as a favorite will still be displayed in the list of favorites, even it has been
added to the skip list.

414

Skipped categories
Tap to display a list of categories. Tap a category
to skip (hide) it. It will not be displayed in the list
of categories.

Phone
A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone can be paired
and connected to the vehicle's integrated handsfree system.
The infotainment system offers hands-free functionality for remote-controlling a number of a cell
phone's features. The phone's integrated controls
can also be used, even when it is connected to
the vehicle.
When the phone has been paired and connected
to the infotainment system, it can be used to
make or receive calls, send or receive text messages, to stream music, etc., or as an Internet
connection.
The phone is controlled from
the center display but the App
menu (accessed using the
right-side steering wheel keypad) and voice commands can
also be used to control certain
functions.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INFOTAINMENT

Overview

Pairing a cell phone
A Bluetooth®-enabled cell phone or other device
can be paired and wirelessly connected to the
infotainment system.
When a cell phone or other device is connected,
audio can be streamed to the infotainment system. Toggle between the devices by pressing the
TEL and MEDIA buttons to access the respective
sources' functions.
Before a Bluetooth device can be used with
the infotainment system, it has to be paired
("registered").

Microphone
Cell phone
Center display
Keypad for controlling phone functions
shown in the center display and voice commands
Instrument panel

Related information

•

•
•
•
•
•

Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone
(p. 416)
Handling phone calls (p. 417)
Handling text messages (p. 418)
Pairing a cell phone (p. 415)
Phone settings (p. 419)
Text message settings (p. 420)

This procedure only needs to be done once for
each device (a maximum of 20 Bluetooth devices
can be paired to the system). Once a device has
been paired and its Bluetooth function is activated, it can then be selected for use (wirelessly
connected) to the vehicle's infotainment system.
Two Bluetooth devices can be connected at the
same time. However, if two cell phones are connected, only the most recently connected one
can be used as a phone. The other one can be
used to e.g., to stream audio or video. To change
what the phone will be used for, see the article
"Bluetooth settings."
A paired and connected cell phone can also be
used to connect the vehicle to the Internet. To do
so, its tethering/personal hotspot function must
be activated.

There are two ways of pairing a Bluetooth device
to the infotainment system:

•

Searching for the phone (or other device)
from the vehicle

•

Searching for the vehicle from the phone (or
other device)

The following instructions assume that a cell
phone is to be paired to the infotainment system
but the procedure is the same for any Bluetooth
device.

Alternative 1: searching for the phone
from the vehicle
1.

Make the phone discoverable/visible using
its Bluetooth function. Refer to the phone's
user guide if necessary.

Open the Phone view on the center display.
> • If no phones have been paired to the
vehicle, tap Add phone.

•

If a list of phones is displayed, tap
Change
and tap Add phone in
the pop-up window.

Tap the name of the phone to be connected.

Check that the code displayed in the vehicle
is the same as the one in the phone. Confirm
in both places.

For the phone selected, accept or cancel the
alternatives for the phone book (list of contacts), text messages, etc. Full functionality
may not be available in all cell phones.

}}
415

INFOTAINMENT
||

To connect the vehicle to the Internet via the
phone's Bluetooth function, activate the
phone's function for tethering/personal hotspot, etc.

Alternative 2: searching for the vehicle
from the phone
1.

416

If no phones have been paired to the vehicle, tap Add phone Make vehicle
discoverable.

•

If a phone has previously been paired to
and tap Add
the vehicle, tap Change
phone Make vehicle discoverable in
the pop-up window.

Activate the phone's Bluetooth function.

Search in the phone for Bluetooth devices.
> A list of Bluetooth devices will be displayed.

Select the vehicle's name in the list.

Check that the code displayed in the phone
is the same as the one in the vehicle. Confirm in both places.

NOTE
If your cell phone's operating system is updated, this may break the connection between
the phone and the vehicle. If this happens,
delete the phone from the list of paired
phones and repeat the pairing procedure
described in this article.

Open the center display's Phone view.

•

For the phone selected, accept or cancel the
alternatives for the phone book (list of contacts), text messages, etc. Full functionality
may not be available in all cell phones.

To connect the vehicle to the Internet via the
phone's Bluetooth function, activate the
phone's function for tethering/personal hotspot, etc.

Connecting/disconnecting a cell
phone
Once a cell phone or other Bluetooth device has
been paired to the infotainment system, it can be
connected, disconnected or removed from the
list of available devices.

Connecting automatically
1.

Before switching on the vehicle's ignition, be
sure that the phone's Bluetooth and personal
hotspot (tethering) functions are activated.

Switch on the ignition.
> The phone (or other device) will be connected to the system and can be used
wirelessly.

Compatible cell phones
Many of the cell phones available today have
Bluetooth functionality but not all of them are
fully compatible with the vehicle. Go to
www.volvocars.com for a list of compatible
phones or contact your Volvo retailer.

Related information

•

•
•
•
•

Connecting manually
1.

Be sure that the phone's Bluetooth and personal hotspot (tethering) functions are activated.

In the center display, open Phone view and
tap Change phone.
> A list of available Bluetooth devices (ones
that have already been paired to the infotainment system) will be displayed.

Tap the name of the phone or other device
to be connected.
> The phone (or other device) will be connected.

Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone
(p. 416)
Handling phone calls (p. 417)
Handling text messages (p. 418)
Phone settings (p. 419)
Bluetooth settings (p. 433)

INFOTAINMENT

Disconnecting a phone
–

Deactivate the phone's Bluetooth function.

If a phone is carried out of range of the vehicle, it
will automatically be disconnected.
If a call in progress when this is done, the call will
be transferred from the vehicle's speakers/microphone to the cell phone.

Tap Remove device and confirm.
> The phone or other device is no longer
paired to the vehicle. Before this device
can be used again, the pairing procedure
will have to be repeated.

Handling phone calls
Calls can be made to one or more parties.

Related information

•

Pairing a cell phone (p. 415)

Changing phones
1.

In the center display, open Phone view.

Tap Change
.
> A list of available Bluetooth devices (ones
that have already been paired to the infotainment system) will be displayed.

Tap the name of the phone (or other device)
to be connected.

Removing a phone (or other device)
from the list
1.

In the center display, open Phone view.

Tap Settings Communication
Bluetooth.
> A list of available Bluetooth devices (ones
that have already been paired to the infotainment system) will be displayed.

Tap the name of the phone to be deleted
from the list.

Making calls
1.

In the center display, open Phone view.

Initiate a call from: recently made calls, the
phone book (list of contacts) or enter a number. Search for or scroll to a contact in the
phone book. Tap
in the phone book to
add a contact to your list of Favorites.

}}
417

INFOTAINMENT
||

3.
4.

Tap Call or

Tap End call to end a phone call.

Incoming calls while another call is in
progress
1. Tap Answer/Reject.

Calls can also be made from the list of recent
calls using the App menu, which can be opened
using the right-side steering wheel keypad's
symbol.

Making multiple calls
While a call is in progress:

While a call is in progress:

Tap Add call.

Select from the list of recent calls or from
the phone book.

Tap a line in the list of recent calls or
call a contact in the phone book.

Tap Swap call to toggle between calls.

Tap End call to end a phone call.

Tap Join calls to merge ongoing calls.

Tap End call to end a phone call.

–

Information about incoming calls is displayed in
the instrument panel and the center display. Handle the calls using the right-side steering wheel
keypad or the center display.
Tap Answer/Reject.

Tap Privacy.
> The vehicle's integrated microphone will
be turned off.

• Switch to mobile phone: the hands-free

function will be disconnected and the call will
continue in the cell phone.

Incoming calls

Tap End call to end a phone call.

Privacy

• Driver focused: the microphone in the ceiling liner on the passenger's side will be
muted and the call will continue using vehicle's the hands-free function on the driver's
side.

Group (conference) calls
While multiple calls are in progress:

418

Tap End call to end a phone call.

Related information

•
•
•
•
•

Phone (p. 414)
Voice control for cell phones (p. 122)
Using the center display (p. 49)
Using the center display keyboard (p. 35)
Phone settings (p. 419)

Handling text messages
Text messages can be received and sent from a
connected cell phone.
Text message functionality has to be activated in
certain cell phones and not all phones offer full
compatibility/functionality. Go to
support.volvocars.com for additional information.

Reading text messages in the center
display

INFOTAINMENT

Sending text messages

Phone settings
The following settings can be made for a paired
and connected cell phone.

Cell phones
1.

From App view, tap Messages to open.

Tap the name of the contact who sent the
message.

–
1.

From App view, tap Messages to open.

Pull down the center display's Top view and
tap Settings Communication Phone
and choose among the following settings:

•

To reply to a message: tap the name of
the contact who sent the message and
then tap Answer.

• Ringtones: select a ring tone (tones from

•

To create a new message: tap Create
new +. Select the contact who will
receive the message or enter a phone
number.

Tap Read out to have the message read
aloud or tap the message to be displayed.

Reading new text messages in the
instrument panel
Text messages are only displayed in the instrument panel if this has been selected. See the
article "Text message settings" for more information.
–

Press the "down" arrow in the right-side
steering wheel keypad to display the message.
To have the message read aloud, select
Read out using the keypad.

Write the message.

Tap Send.

Message notification
See the article "Text message settings" for a list
of possible settings.

Related information

•

Text message settings (p. 420)

the cell phone or the vehicle can be
used). Not all cell phones are fully compatible and it may not be possible to use
their ring tones in the vehicle. Go to
www.volvocars.com for additional information.

• Sort order for contacts: select sort cri-

teria for the phone book (list of contacts).

To show call notifications in the head-up display*, see the article "Head-up display."

Related information

•
•
•
•
•

Text message settings (p. 420)
Bluetooth settings (p. 433)
Phone (p. 414)
Handling phone calls (p. 417)
Head-up display (HUD)* (p. 117)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 419

INFOTAINMENT

Text message settings

Connecting a Bluetooth® device

The following settings can be made for text messages received through a paired and connected
cell phone.

Bluetooth®-enabled

Text message settings
–

Pull down the center display's Top view and
tap Settings Communication Text
Messages and choose among the following
settings:

• Notification in center display: shows

text messages in the center display's status bar.

• Notification in driver display: shows

text messages in the instrument panel.
With this alternative active, incoming messages can be handled from the right-side
steering wheel keypad.

• Text message tone: select an audible
signal for incoming text messages.

Related information

•

•
•

420

Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone
(p. 416)
Pairing a cell phone (p. 415)
Handling text messages (p. 418)

devices can be paired and
connected to the infotainment system to stream
media and in some cases connect to the Internet.
Many cell phones and other devices currently on
the market offer wireless Bluetooth® technology.
Consult your Volvo retailer or go to
support.volvocars.com for any questions regarding a device's compatibility with the vehicle's
infotainment system.

Connecting a device via the
AUX/USB socket
External audio sources such as an iPod® or mp3
player can be connected to the infotainment system via the AUX and USB sockets in the tunnel
console.

The procedure for pairing and connecting a
Bluetooth®-enabled device is the same as for a
cell phone. See the articles "Pairing a cell phone"
and "Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone" for
details.

Related information

•
•

Pairing a cell phone (p. 415)
Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone
(p. 416)

AUX/USB sockets in the tunnel console

INFOTAINMENT

•
•
•

Media player
The media player can play audio from a CD*,
from external media devices connected to the
USB/AUX sockets or it can stream audio from
an external device connected to the infotainment
system through a Bluetooth connection.

Apps (applications) (p. 433)
CD (media) player* (p. 424)
Playing media through the AUX/USB sockets (p. 427)

Video can also be viewed from devices connected to the USB socket.
If the vehicle is connected to the Internet, it may
also be possible to listen to web radio, audio
books and to use various music services through
apps.

The media player is controlled
from the center display but certain functions can also be controlled from the right-side
steering wheel keypad or by
using voice commands.

Related information

•
•
•

Playing media (p. 424)
Voice control for radio and media (p. 122)
Radio (p. 405)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 421

INFOTAINMENT

Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay helps make it possible to listen to
music, make phone calls, get directions to a
destination, send/receive text messages and use
Siri while focusing on driving. Apple CarPlay
functions with certain Apple devices.

If a cell phone or a media player is connected via
Bluetooth, it will not be accessible while
Apple CarPlay is active because Bluetooth will be
disabled. To connect the vehicle to the Internet,
use Wi-Fi or the vehicle's integrated modem.
If navigation guidance is being provided by
Apple CarPlay, this will only be shown on the
center display (not on the head-up display* or the
instrument panel).
The Apple CarPlay apps can be controlled from
the center display or voice-controlled using Siri
(the same as for a cell phone). Certain functions
can also be controlled from the right-side steerbutton
ing wheel keypad. Press and hold the
to activate Siri.

If the vehicle is not already equipped with
Apple CarPlay, it can be retro-fitted. Contact a
Volvo retailer.
Information about the apps supported and compatible cell phones is available from Apple at:
www.apple.com/ios/carplay/.

NOTE
Please be aware that Volvo has no control
over the content of the Apple CarPlay app.

422

From an iPhone that is connected for the
first time
1. Connect the phone to the USB socket in the
tunnel console.
2.

Read the information in the pop-window that
appears and tap OK.

Tap Apple CarPlay in the center display's
App view.

Read the conditions and tap Accept to connect.
> The Apple CarPlay sub-view will open and
compatible apps will be displayed.

Tap the desired app.
> The app will start.

By using Apple CarPlay you acknowledge
the following: Apple CarPlay is a service
provided by Apple Inc. under its terms and
conditions. Volvo Cars is thus not
responsible for Apple CarPlay or its
features/applications. When using Apple
CarPlay, certain information from your car
(including its position) is transferred to your
iPhone. In relation to Volvo Cars, you are
fully responsible for your and any others
person’s use of Apple CarPlay.

Starting Apple CarPlay
Voice control using Siri must be activated in the
currently connected cell phone before using
Apple CarPlay.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INFOTAINMENT
From a previously connected iPhone
1. Connect the phone to the USB socket in the
tunnel console.
> If the automatic start setting has been
chosen, the Apple CarPlay sub-view will
open and compatible apps will be displayed.
2.

If the automatic start setting has not been
chosen, open the Apple CarPlay app from
the center display's App view.
> The Apple CarPlay sub-view will open and
compatible apps will be displayed.
Tap the desired app.
> The app will start.

Disconnect and reconnect the Apple device
to the USB socket.

Open the iPod app from App view.

Apple CarPlay settings
This article explains settings for a cell phone
connected through Apple CarPlay.

iPod to Apple CarPlay
1. Tap Apple CarPlay in the center display's
App view.

Automatic start
1.

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

Read the conditions in the pop-up window
that appears and tap OK.

Tap Communication Apple CarPlay and
select the following settings:

Disconnect and reconnect the Apple device
to the USB socket.
> The Apple CarPlay sub-view will open.

Related information

Apple CarPlay will run in the background if
another app is started in the same sub-view. To
return to Apple CarPlay, tap the Apple CarPlay
icon in App view.

Toggling between Apple CarPlay and
iPod
Apple CarPlay to iPod
1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.

Tap Communication

Deselect the Apple device's box that will no
longer start Apple CarPlay when it is connected.

Apple CarPlay.

•
•
•

Media player (p. 421)

•

Apple CarPlay settings (p. 423)

Playing media (p. 424)
Connecting a device via the AUX/USB
socket (p. 420)

•

Select the Apple CarPlay box for automatic start when the device's USB cable
is connected.

•

Deselect the Apple CarPlay box to disable automatic start when the device's
USB cable is connected.

A maximum of 20 Apple devices can be stored in
the list. When the list is full, the first (oldest)
device stored will be deleted.
To erase the entire list, a factory reset has to be
performed. See the article "Resetting the settings view."

System volume levels
1.

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

Tap Sound System Volumes and select
the following settings:

• Voice Control
• Navigation
• Ringtone

}}
423

INFOTAINMENT
||

Related information

•
•

Apple CarPlay (p. 422)
Resetting the settings view (p. 115)

CD (media) player*

Playing media

The CD (media) player can play commercially
purchased discs as well as ones that you have
burned yourself. See the article "Media player
technical data" for information about compatible
file formats.

The media player can controlled from the rightside steering wheel keypad, the center display or
by using voice commands.
The radio is also controlled from the media
player. See the articles relating to the radio.

Starting a media source

Location of the CD player in the tunnel console

Disc slot
Eject button

Related information

•

Media player technical data (p. 429)

Generic illustration

424

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INFOTAINMENT
CD
1. Insert a CD.
2.

Open the CD app in the center display's App
view.

Select a track.
> Playback will begin.

USB flash drive
1. Insert the flash drive in the USB socket.
2.

Open the USB app in the center display's
App view.

Select a track.
> Playback will begin.

Mp3 player and iPod®

NOTE
Use the iPod app ( not the USB app) to start
playback.
When an iPod is the media source, the infotainment system will use a menu structure
similar to the iPod's own menu structure.
1.

Connect the device.

Start playback in the connected device.

Open the iPod, USB, AUX) app in the center display's App view.
> Playback will begin.

Bluetooth-connected device
1. Connect the device.
2.

Activate Bluetooth in the device.

Start playback from the connected device.

Open the Bluetooth app in the center display's App view.
> Playback will begin.

Controlling and changing media
The media player can be controlled using voice commands,
the right-side steering wheel
keypad or the center display.

Internet media
1. Connect the vehicle to the Internet.
2.

Open the app in the center display's App
view.
> Playback will begin.

Video
1. Connect the device.
2.

Open the USB app in the center display's
App view.

Tap the title of the video content to be
played.
> Playback will begin.

Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay is described in a separate article.

Volume: use the buttons on the keypad or turn
the control under the center display to raise or
lower the volume.

}}
425

INFOTAINMENT
||

Play/pause: tap the track's image, press the
symbol on the keypad or press the button under
the center display.
Change tracks: tap the desired track on the center display, press the < > buttons under the center display or use the keypad.
Fast forward/reverse, move within a track: press
the time axis on the center display and drag from
side to side, press and hold the < > buttons
under the center display or use the keypad.
Change media source: Tap a media source under
Recents, tap the desired app in the center display's App view or use the keypad.

Library: tap to play a track from the library.
Shuffle: tap to play tracks in random order.
Similar: tap to use Gracenote to search for similar music on the USB device and create a playlist
based on the results. The playlist can contain up
to 50 tracks.
Change device: tap to toggle between USB
devices if more than one is connected.
Video settings
The following can be adjusted with the video
player in full screen or by opening the center display's Top view and tapping Settings Video:
Primary Audio Default Language, Subtitle
and Primary Subtitle Default Language.

426

Play DivX®
This DivX device must be registered in order to
play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD)
movies.
1.

Open the center display's Top view and tap
Settings Video DivX® VOD to get a
registration code.

Go to vod.divx.com for additional information
and to complete the registration process.

Media searches
Searches can be made for information such as
artists, composers, song titles, albums, video,
audio books, playlists and podcasts (digital
media on the Internet).

Related information

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

CD (media) player* (p. 424)
Media player (p. 421)
Voice control for radio and media (p. 122)
Apps (applications) (p. 433)
Connecting a Bluetooth® device (p. 420)
Connecting a device via the AUX/USB
socket (p. 420)
Gracenote (p. 428)
Connecting to the Internet (p. 431)
Media searches (p. 426)
Video (p. 429)
Apple CarPlay (p. 422)
1.

Tap
.
> The center display's Search view opens
and the keyboard will be displayed.

Enter a search word/phrase.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INFOTAINMENT
3.

Tap Search.
> The infotainment system will search
through all connected devices and any
results will be displayed by category.

Related information

•
•
•

Media player (p. 421)
Playing media (p. 424)
Using the center display keyboard (p. 35)

Playing media through the
AUX/USB sockets

Streaming media through a
Bluetooth connection

An external media device, such as an iPod or an
mp-3 player can be connected to the infotainment system.

The media player is equipped with Bluetooth®
for streaming audio files from external
Bluetooth®-enabled devices.

A device with rechargeable batteries can be
recharged when it is connected to the USB
socket (if the ignition is on or the engine is running).
To simplify the use of a USB flash drive, it is
advisable to only store files with compatible file
formats on it. It will take considerably longer for
the system to index the files on the drive if it contains anything other than compatible files.

Related information

•
•
•
•
•
•

Connecting a Bluetooth® device (p. 420)
Playing media (p. 424)
Voice control for radio and media (p. 122)
Media player (p. 421)
Ignition modes (p. 370)
Media player technical data (p. 429)

In addition to audio, the vehicle's media player
also supports video playback when the external
device is connected to the USB socket.
Certain mp-3 players have proprietary file formats
that are not supported by the infotainment system.

Related information

•

Connecting a device via the AUX/USB
socket (p. 420)

427

INFOTAINMENT

Media sound settings

System volumes for media

Gracenote

Sound settings for the media player can be personalized.

Open the center display's Top view and tap
Settings Sound System Volumes:

Gracenote identifies artists, albums, tracks and
any associated images that can be displayed
during playback.

• AUX: an external device (e.g., an mp3 player,

an iPod, etc.) connected to the AUX socket
may have a different volume level than the
one set for the infotainment system (e.g., for
the radio). This setting enables you to adjust
the AUX socket's volume. Please note that if
this volume is set too high, sound quality may
be affected.

• Speed and Volume Compensation: the

infotainment system will compensate for disrupting noises in the passenger compartment by increasing media volume in relation
to the vehicle's speed. This can be set to one
of several different levels.

Concert hall sound setting

1.
2.

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.
Tap Sound and select among the following:

• Sound Experience*: this feature offers several ways of adapting media sound settings
to replicate e.g., a concert hall or a recording
studio. These settings override any of the
ones below that may have been adjusted.

• Tone: personal settings for bass, treble,
equalizer, etc.

• Balance: adjust the front/rear and left/right
sound settings in the passenger compartment.

Related information

•
•

Playing media (p. 424)
Sound settings (p. 404)

Gracenote MusicID® is a standard for music recognition.

Activating/deactivating Gracenote
When activated, Gracenote data will replace original data.
1.

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

Tap Media

Activate/deactivate Gracenote by tapping the
Gracenote® box.

Select among the following Gracenote alternatives:

Gracenote®.

• Gracenote® Online Look Up: Gracenote
will search through its online database for
information about the currently playing
media.

• Gracenote® Multiple Results: select how

Gracenote data is to be displayed if there are
several search results.
1: the file's original data will be used.
2: Gracenote data will be used.
3: Gracenote or original data can be
selected.

• None: no results will be shown.
428

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INFOTAINMENT

Related information

•

Infotainment system license information
(p. 437)

•

Playing media (p. 424)

Video

Media player technical data

The media player can play video from USB-connected devices.

The following tables list compatible file formats
and other technical specifications for the media
player.

No video will be available when the vehicle is
moving. Video will resume playing when the vehicle is stationary.
See the article "Media player technical data" for a
list of video formats supported by the media
player.

Audio files
Format

File extension

Codec

MP3

.mp3

MPEG1 Layer III,
MPEG2 Layer III,
MP3 Pro (mp3
compatible),
MP3 HD (mp3
compatible)

AAC

.m4a, .m4b, .aac

AAC LC (MPEG-4
part III Audio),
HE-AAC (aacPlus
v1/v2)

WMA

.wma

WMA8/9,
WMA9/10 Pro

WAV

.wav

LPCM

FLAC

.flac

FLAC

Related information

•
•
•

Playing media (p. 424)
Media player (p. 421)
Media player technical data (p. 429)

Video files
Format

File extension

MP4

.mp4, .m4v

MPEG-PS

.mpg, .mp2, .mpeg, .m1v
}}
429

INFOTAINMENT
||

Format

File extension

.divx, .avi

AVI

.avi

Max. file size

4 GB

Tracks in a playlist

1,000

AVI (DivX)

.avi, .divx

Audio codec

MP3, AC3

Subfolders

No limit

ASF

.asf, .wmv

Subtitles

XSUB

.mkv

Special functions

Multiple subtitles, multiple
audio, resume play

Reference

Meets all requirements of
the DivX® Home Theater
profile. Visit divx.com for
more information and software tools to convert your
files into DivX® Home
Theater. video.

MKV
Subtitles
Format

File extension

SubViewer

.sub

SubRip

.srt

SSA

.ssa

DivX®
DivX Certified devices have been tested for high
quality DivX (.divx, .avi) video playback. When you
see the DivX logo, you have the freedom to play
your favorite DivX movies.

430

Profile

DivX Home Theater

Video codec

DivX, MPEG-4

Resolution

720x576

Audio speed
(bit rate)

4.8Mbps

Frame per second

30 fps

Max. number

Related information

•

CD (media) player* (p. 424)

Storing information on a USB device
In order for the system to read data stored on a
USB device, the following specifications must be
met. Any folder structures will not be shown in
the center display during playback.
Max. number
Files

15,000

Folders

1,000

Folder levels

Playlists

100

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INFOTAINMENT

Internet connected vehicle
Connecting to the Internet makes it possible to
e.g., use certain navigation services, listen to
web radio, stream music using apps, contact a
retailer and download software.
The vehicle can connect to the Internet using
Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, a cell phone connected by a
cable to the USB socket or via the integrated
modem.
When connected, it is possible to share (tether) a
Wi-Fi-hotspot to allow other devices to use the
connection5.
Connection status is shown in the center display's status bar.

Related information

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Connecting to the Internet (p. 431)
Apps (applications) (p. 433)
Booking service and repairs (p. 475)
System updates (p. 474)
Volvo ID (p. 31)
Symbols in the center display status bar
(p. 47)
Tethering (Wi-Fi sharing) (p. 435)

Connecting to the Internet
Connect the vehicle to the Internet using
Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, by connecting a phone through
a cable to the USB socket or via the vehicle's
integrated modem.
The cell phone and the network service provider
must support Internet sharing (tethering) and the
subscription must included data transfer.
See the terms and confidentiality information at
support.volvocars.com before connecting to the
Internet.

NOTE
When using Apple CarPlay, an Internet connection can only be established by using
Wi-Fi or the vehicle's integrated modem.

Connect using Bluetooth
See the article "Pairing a cell phone."

Connect using Wi-Fi

This does not apply to Wi-Fi connections.

}}
431

INFOTAINMENT
||

Activate tethering/personal hotspot in the
cell phone.

Connect using a cable connected to the
USB socket

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

Tap Communication

Connect the phone via a cable to the USB
socket in the tunnel console storage compartment.

Activate USB tethering in the cell phone.

Tap Wi-Fi to activate/deactivate.

Tap the name of the network to be used.

Enter the network password.

If a different connection was used previously,
confirm the connection change.
> The vehicle will connect to the network.

Wi-Fi.

Please be aware that certain cell phones disable
tethering when the connection to the vehicle has
been broken, e.g., when the phone has been
removed from the vehicle. In such cases, the
phone's tethering function will have to be reactivated the next time the phone is used to connect
to the Internet.

Connect using the vehicle's integrated
modem
When the vehicle is connected using the modem,
Volvo On Call services will use the connection.
1.

Insert a personal SIM card in the holder.

When a phone is connected to the vehicle, it is
saved for future use. When a max. number of 50
have been saved, the first one connected will be
deleted. To show the list of saved networks or to
manually delete a network, tap Settings Wi-Fi
Saved networks.
See the article "Wi-Fi technology and security"
for network connection requirements.

432

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

Tap Communication
Internet.

Tap Vehicle modem Internet to activate/
deactivate.

If a different connection was used previously,
confirm the connection change.

Enter the SIM card's PIN code.
> The vehicle will connect to the network.

Vehicle Modem

Related information

•
•

Pairing a cell phone (p. 415)
Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone
(p. 416)

•

Connecting a device via the AUX/USB
socket (p. 420)

•
•

Wi-Fi technology and security (p. 436)
Apple CarPlay (p. 422)

INFOTAINMENT

Apps (applications)
Apps (applications) are programs used to control some of the vehicle's features and functions.

Some apps are only available if the vehicle is
connected to the Internet.
–

In the center display's App view, tap an app
to start it.

Related information

•
•
•

Bluetooth settings
The following settings apply to a Bluetooth-connected cell phone.

Bluetooth
1.

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

Tap Communication Bluetooth and
select among the following settings:

Internet connected vehicle (p. 431)
Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
(p. 434)
Changing settings in different types of apps
(p. 48)

• Previously paired devices: lists the

devices that are paired and connected to
the vehicle.

• Internet connection: select to connect
to the Internet using the device's
Bluetooth connection.

• Add device: begin the procedure to pair
a new device.

• Remove device: remove a paired device.
• Allowed services for this device: select
the services that the device will be used
for.

Bluetooth compliance
The center display's App view (generic illustration)

Several basic apps are always available and others can be downloaded. Downloadable apps
include navigation services, web radio, streaming
music services, retailer contact and software
downloads.

United States
FCC CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or
}}
433

INFOTAINMENT
||

operated in conjunction with any other antenna
or transmitter.

Downloading, updating and
uninstalling apps

Canada

Apps can be added (downloaded), kept up-todate or deleted.

This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.

NOTE
Downloading data may affect other services
that transfer data such as web radio, streaming music, etc. If this occurs, a download in
progress can be cancelled or the other service can be temporarily turned off.

Related information

•
•
•
•
•

434

Internet connected vehicle (p. 431)
Pairing a cell phone (p. 415)
Phone (p. 414)
Media player (p. 421)
Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone
(p. 416)

Select Install to start downloading the app. It
will remain in the list and a new download
can be initiated if necessary.
> Download status will be indicated while it
is in progress.
A message will be displayed if a download
cannot be started immediately. The app
will remain in the list and a new download
can be initiated if necessary.

Cancelling (aborting) a download
– Tap Abort to cancel a download that is currently underway.

Apps are managed via the
Remote update service in
the center display's App view.

Only a download can be cancelled. If the installation phase has begun, it cannot be interrupted.

To download, update or delete
apps, the vehicle must be connected to the Internet.

If an app is being used while an update is in progress, it will be restarted to complete the update.

Downloading an app
1.

Open the Remote update service app.

Select Explore to open a list of apps that
are available but which are not installed in
the vehicle. Tap anywhere in a line for an app
to expand the list for additional information.

Updating apps

Update (install) all
1. Open the Remote update service app.
2.

Select Install all.
> The update will begin.

Updating certain apps
1. Open the Remote update service app.
2.

Select Application updates to open a list
of available updates.

Find the desired app and select Install.
> The update will begin.

INFOTAINMENT

Uninstalling an app

Internet connection troubleshooting

Tethering (Wi-Fi sharing)

An app being used must be closed before it can
be uninstalled.

The following are factors that may affect the
vehicle's Internet connection.

When the vehicle is connected to the Internet,
this connection can be shared (tethered) with
other devices6.

Open the Remote update service app.

Select Application updates to open a list
of apps that have been installed.

Find the desired app and select Uninstall to
begin uninstalling the app.
> When the app has been uninstalled, it will
be removed from the list.

Related information

•
•
•

Internet connected vehicle (p. 431)
Media player (p. 421)
System updates (p. 474)

The amount of data being transmitted depends
on the services or apps that are currently in use.
For example, streaming audio requires a great
deal of data to be transmitted, which requires a
good connection and a strong signal.

Cell phone to the vehicle
Connection speed may vary depending on the
location of the cell phone in the vehicle. Move the
phone closer to the center display to increase
signal strength. Be sure that there are no
obstructing/screening objects between the
phone and the screen.

Cell phone to the network operator
The speed of the mobile network may vary
depending on coverage/reception in the vehicle's
location. Reception is generally poorer in tunnels,
in mountainous areas, in deep valleys or indoors.
Connection speed may also depend on the type
of subscription that you have with the service
provider.
Contact your service provider in the event of data
transmission problems.

Related information

•
•
6

Does not apply for a Wi-Fi connection.

Internet connected vehicle (p. 431)

The network service provider (the SIM card) must
support tethering.
1.

Open the center display's Top view.

Tap Settings Communication
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot.

Tap Network name and assign a name to
the hotspot.

Tap Password and create a password to be
used by devices trying to connect (tether) to
the hotspot.

Tap Frequency band and select a frequency that the hotspot will use to transmit
data. This may not be possible in all markets.

Activate/deactivate by tapping the Vehicle
Wi-Fi Hotspot box.

If another connection has been used previously, confirm the change of connections.
> It is now possible for external devices to
connect to the vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspot.

Connection status will be indicated in a symbol in
the center display's status bar.

Connecting to the Internet (p. 431)
}}
435

INFOTAINMENT
||

Tap Connected devices to see a list of connected devices.

Deleting Wi-Fi networks

Wi-Fi technology and security

Networks that are not used can be deleted.

Related information

The following are types of networks can be connect to.

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

•
•
•

Wi-Fi technology and security (p. 436)

Symbols in the center display status bar
(p. 47)

Tap Wi-Fi

Tap Forget to remove the network.

•

Internet connection troubleshooting (p. 435)

Confirm the selection.
> The vehicle will no longer connect to the
deleted network.

Internet connected vehicle (p. 431)

Saved networks.

Deleting all networks
All networks can be deleted at the same time by
returning (resetting) to factory settings.
If this is done, all user data and settings will be
reset to their default settings.

Related information

•
•

436

Selecting a frequency is not possible in all markets.

Internet connected vehicle (p. 431)
Connecting to the Internet (p. 431)

It is possible to connect to the following types of
networks:

•
•
•

Frequency: 2.4 or 5 GHz7.
Standards: 802.11 a/b/g/n.
Security type: WPA2-AES-CCMP.

The vehicle's Wi-Fi system is designed to manage Wi-Fi devices in the vehicle.
If several devices are using a frequency at the
same time, this may result in poorer performance.

Related information

•
•
•
•

Internet connected vehicle (p. 431)
Connecting to the Internet (p. 431)
Tethering (Wi-Fi sharing) (p. 435)
Internet connection troubleshooting (p. 435)

INFOTAINMENT

Vehicle modem settings

Change PIN: enter max. 4 digits.

The vehicle is equipped with a modem that can
be used to connect the vehicle to the Internet. It
is also possible to share (tether) this connection
via Wi-Fi.

Disable
PIN: Allow access to the SIM card without
requiring a PIN code.

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

Tap Communication Vehicle Modem
Internet and choose among the following
settings:

• Send request code: this is used to download the balance remaining on a SIM card.
This is specific to your service provider.

Infotainment system license
information
The following license information pertains to Volvo's agreements with certain manufacturers/
developers.

Bowers & Wilkins

Related information

•
•

Internet connected vehicle (p. 431)
Connecting to the Internet (p. 431)

• Vehicle modem Internet: select to use the
vehicle's modem to connect to the Internet.

• Data usage: %s: Tap Reset to restart

(reset) the counter for the amount of data
sent/received.

• Network
Select
carrier: select a service provider automatically or manually.
Data
roaming: select to allow the vehicle to connect to another network if the standard network is not available (e.g., if you are driving in
another country). This could entail additional
charges, consult your service provider.

Bowers & Wilkins and B&W are trademarks of
the B&W Group Ltd. Nautilus is a trademark of
B&W Group Ltd. Kevlar is a registered trademark
of DuPont.

Dirac Live

• SIM card PIN
}}
437

INFOTAINMENT
||

Dirac Live technology has been used in the
development and tuning of the sound in order to
ensure a world-class sound experience. Dirac
Live and the D-symbol are registered trademarks
of Dirac Research AB.

Gracenote®

DivX®

Gracenote, Gracenote logo and logotype,
"Powered by Gracenote" and Gracenote MusicID
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Gracenote, Inc in the United States and/or other
countries.
DivX®, DivX Certified® and asociated logos are
trademarks of DivZ, LLC and are used under
license. och associerade logotyper är varumärken
som tillhör Rovi Corporation eller dess dotterbolag och används på licens.
Patent number
Covered by one or more of the following U.S. patents: 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710;
8,656,183; 8,731,369; RE45,052."

Gracenote® End User License Agreement
This application or device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) enables this application to perform disc and/or file identification and obtain
music-related information, including name, artist,
track, and title information (“Gracenote Data”)
from online servers or embedded databases (collectively, “Gracenote Servers”) and to perform
other functions. You may use Gracenote Data
only by means of the intended End-User functions of this application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for
your own personal non-commercial use only. You

438

agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to
any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use
the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate
these restrictions. If your license terminates, you
agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the
Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights.
Under no circumstances will Gracenote become
liable for any payment to you for any information
that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc.
may enforce its rights under this Agreement
against you directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to
track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is
to allow the Gracenote service to count queries
without knowing anything about who you are. For
more information, see the web page for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service.
The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.” Gracenote
makes no representations or warranties, express

INFOTAINMENT
or implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the
Gracenote Servers or to change data categories
for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient.
No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software
or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote
Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not
obligated to provide you with new enhanced or
additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE
RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR
USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR
FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.
© Gracenote, Inc. 2009

Sensus software
This software uses parts of sources from clib2
and Prex Embedded Real-time OS - Source
(Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994),
and Quercus Robusta (Copyright (c) 1990,

1993), The Regents of the University of
California. All or some portions are derived from
material licensed to the University of California by
American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix
System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced
herein with the permission of UNIX System
Laboratories, Inc. Redistribution and use in
source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met: Redistributions of
source code must retain the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution. Neither the name of the
nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission. THIS
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF

SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
This software uses parts of sources from
"libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL Sample
Implementation, Version 1.2.1, released January
26, 2000, developed by Silicon Graphics, Inc. The
Original Code is Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon
Graphics, Inc. Copyright in any portions created
by third parties is as indicated elsewhere herein.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000]
Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"),
to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use,
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions: The above copyright notice including
the dates of first publication and either this
permission notice or a reference to http://

}}
439

INFOTAINMENT
||

oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE
OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice,
the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be
used in advertising or otherwise to promote the
sale, use or other dealings in this Software
without prior written authorization from Silicon
Graphics, Inc.
This software is based in parts on the work of the
FreeType Team.
This software uses parts of SSLeay Library:
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com). All rights reserved

Linux software
This product contains software licensed under
GNU General Public License (GPL) or GNU
Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc.

440

You have the right of acquisition, modification,
and distribution of the source code of the GPL/
LGPL software.
You may download Source Code from the
following website at no charge: http://
www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/
download/TVM_8351_013
The website provides the Source Code "As Is"
and without warranty of any kind.
By downloading Source Code, you expressly
assume all risk and liability associated with
downloading and using the Source Code and
complying with the user agreements that
accompany each Source Code.
Please note that we cannot respond to any
inquiries regarding the source code.

camellia:1.2.0
Copyright (c) 2006, 2007
NTT (Nippon Telegraph and Telephone
Corporation). All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1.

Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer as
the first lines of this file unmodified.

Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list

of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY NTT ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL NTT BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.

Unicode: 5.1.0
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright c 1991-2013 Unicode, Inc. All rights
reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in
http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data
files and any associated documentation (the

INFOTAINMENT
"Data Files") or Unicode software and any
associated documentation (the "Software") to
deal in the Data Files or Software without
restriction, including without limitation the rights
to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Data Files or
Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a)
the above copyright notice(s) and this permission
notice appear with all copies of the Data Files or
Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s)
and this permission notice appear in associated
documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in
each modified Data File or in the Software as
well as in the documentation associated with the
Data File(s) or Software that the data or software
has been modified.
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE
PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS
INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER
IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE

OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR
SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a
copyright holder shall not be used in advertising
or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other
dealings in these Data Files or Software without
prior written authorization of the copyright holder.

Bluetooth® declaration of conformity

Terms, conditions and
confidentiality
See terms and conditions for services and customer privacy policy at support.volvocars.com.

Terms & Conditions for Services
Volvo offers the best possible services to make
owning and operating a Volvo safe, convenient,
comfortable and enjoyable. Volvo offers a wide
array of services, ranging from emergency assistance to navigation and infotainment.

United States

Customer privacy policy

FCC CAUTION

This policy applies to the way in which customerrelated and personal information are handled. Its
purpose is to provide our present, previous and
future customers a general understanding of:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or
operated in conjunction with any other antenna
or transmitter.
Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.

•

The circumstances under which we gather
and process your personal information.

•
•

The types of personal information gathered.

•

How we deal with your personal information.

The reasons for gathering your personal
information.

This policy can be read in its entirety at
support.volvocars.com.

441

WHEELS AND TIRES

Tires
Your vehicle is equipped with tires according to
the vehicle's tire information placard on the Bpillar (the structural member at the side of the
vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening).

CAUTION
Some Volvo models are equipped with an
Ultra High Performance tire and wheel combination designed to provide maximum dry
pavement performance with consideration for
hydroplaning resistance. They may be more
susceptible to road hazard damage and,
depending on driving conditions, may achieve
a tread life of less than 20,000 miles (30,000
km). Even if this vehicle is equipped with Volvo’s advanced AWD or stability system, these
tires are not designed for winter driving, and
should be replaced with winter tires when
weather conditions dictate.
The tires have good road holding characteristics
and offer good handling on dry and wet surfaces.
It should be noted however that the tires have
been developed to give these features on snow/
ice-free surfaces.
Most models are equipped with "all-season" tires,
which provide a somewhat higher degree of road
holding on slippery surfaces than tires without
the "all-season" rating. However, for optimum
1

444

Not available in all models.

road holding on icy or snow-covered roads, we
recommend suitable winter tires on all four
wheels.
When replacing tires, be sure that the new tires
are the same size designation, type (radial) and
preferably from the same manufacturer, on all
four wheels. Otherwise there is a risk of altering
the car's roadholding and handling characteristics.

New tires

Tire age
Tires degrade over time, even when they are not
being used. It is recommended that tires generally be replaced after 6 years of normal service.
Heat caused by hot climates, frequent high loading conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V.) exposure can
accelerate the aging process. The temporary
spare1 should also be replaced at 6-year intervals, even if it has never been used. A tire's age
can be determined by the DOT stamp on the
sidewall (see the illustration). A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discoloration should be replaced
immediately.

Tire economy

•
•

Remember that tires are perishable goods. As of
2000, the manufacturing week and year (Department of Transportation (DOT) stamp) will be indicated with 4 digits (e.g., 0715 means that the tire
illustrated was manufactured during week 7 of
2015).

Maintain correct tire pressure.
Avoid fast starts, hard braking and tire
screeching.

•
•

Tire wear increases with speed.

•

Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy and
driving comfort.

•

Tires must maintain the same direction of
rotation throughout their lifetime.

•

When replacing tires, the tires with the most
tread should be mounted on the rear wheels

Correct front wheel alignment is very important.

WHEELS AND TIRES
to reduce the chance of oversteer during
hard braking.

•

Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the
tires and/or wheels permanently.

Tires not mounted on rims should be stored on
their sides or standing upright, but should not be
suspended.

CAUTION

Tire rotation

Tires should preferably be stored in a cool,
dry, dark place, and should never be stored in
close proximity to solvents, gasoline, oils, etc.

Your vehicle has no required tire rotation. Tire
wear is affected by a number of factors such as
tire inflation, ambient temperature, driving style,
etc.

WARNING

NOTE

•

If the tires are rotated, they should only
be moved from front to rear or vice versa.
They should never be rotated left to
right/right to left.

•

Ideally, tire rotation should be done the
first time after approximately 3,000 miles
(5,000 km) and thereafter at 6,000-mile
(10,000-km) intervals. Some customers
find that tire rotation may help to get
extra mileage from tire life.

•

Tire rotation should only be performed if
front/rear tire wear is fairly even and
tread height is above 1/16" (1.6 mm).

Storing wheels and tires
When storing complete wheels (tires mounted on
rims), they should be suspended off the floor or
placed on their sides on the floor.

Tire sidewall designations
The following information can be found on a
tire's sidewall.

•

The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo
are specified to meet stringent stability
and handling requirements. Unapproved
wheel/tire size combinations can negatively affect your vehicle's stability and
handling.

•

Any damage caused by installation of
unapproved wheel/tire size combinations
will not be covered by your new vehicle
warranty. Volvo assumes no responsibility
for death, injury, or expenses that may
result from such installations.

Related information

•
•

Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers
place standardized information on the sidewall of
all tires (see the illustration).
The vehicle has been certified with certain combinations of wheels and tires.
The following information is listed on the tire
sidewall:
The tire designation:

Checking tire inflation pressure (p. 451)
Tread wear indicator (p. 449)

}}
445

WHEELS AND TIRES
||

NOTE
Please be aware that the following tire designation is an example only and that this particular tire may not be available on your vehicle.
1.

65: The ratio of the tire's height to its width
in percent.

R: Radial tire (the designation RF and the
symbol indicate that the vehicle is
equipped with optional self-supporting run
flat tires2.

15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in
inches).

95: The tire's load index. In this example, a
load index of 95 equals a maximum load of
1521 lbs (690 kg).

H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximum
speed at which the tire is designed to be
driven for extended periods of time, carrying
a permissible load for the vehicle, and with
correct inflation pressure. For example, H
indicates a speed rating of 130 mph
(210 km/h).

446

215: the width of the tire (in millimeters)
from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The
larger the number, the wider the tire.

Self-supporting run flat tires may not be available on all models

NOTE
The tire's load index and speed rating may
not appear on the sidewall because they are
not required by law.
7.

M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow, AT = All Terrain, AS = All Season

U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
(TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT" and
indicates that the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers or letters
are the plant code where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and
the last four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For example,
1510 means that the tire was manufactured
during week 15 of 2010. The numbers in
between are marketing codes used at the
manufacturer's discretion. This information
helps a tire manufacturer identify a tire for
safety recall purposes.

Tire Ply Composition and Material
Used: Indicates the number of plies indicates or the number of layers of rubbercoated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall.
Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply
materials in the tire and the sidewall, which
include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

10. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum
load in pounds and kilograms that can be
carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's tire
information placard located on the B-Pillar
for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
11. Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature
grades.
12. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure: the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire. This
limit is set by the tire manufacturer.

Speed Symbol
A tire's Speed Symbol (SS) indicates the maximum speed for which the tire has been certified
and should be at least equivalent to the vehicle's
top speed.
Winter tires, with our without studs, are exceptions and may use a lower SS. When winter tires
are installed, the vehicle may not be driven faster
than the tires' SS.
The vehicle's speed should always be determined
by the posted speed limit and traffic and road
conditions, not the tire's SS.
The following table indicates the maximum permissible speed for each SS.

WHEELS AND TIRES

Speed Symbol

Wheel (rim) designations

Tire terminology

81 mph (130 km/h)

Wheel and rim dimensions are shown in the following table.

The following is a glossary of tire-related terms.

100 mph (160 km/h)

118 mph (190 km/h)

130 mph (210 km/h)

149 mph (240 km/h)

168 mph (270 km/h)

186 mph (300 km/h)

•

The vehicle has been certified with certain combinations of wheels and tires.
The following table shows an example of wheel
dimensions: 8Jx18x42.5. This wheel may not be
available on your vehicle.
8

Wheel width in inches

Rim flange profile

WARNING

Wheel diameter in inches

42.5

Offset in mm (distance from the center
of the wheel to the wheel's contact surface on the hub)

The tire suppliers may have additional markings,
notes or warnings such as standard load, radial
tubeless, etc.

•

Tire information placard: A placard showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure, and the
maximum weight the vehicle can carry.

•

Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number
on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacturer.

•

Inflation pressure: A measure of the
amount of air in a tire.

•

Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric
tires designed to carry a maximum load at
35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this
pressure will not increase the tires load carrying capability.

•

Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric
tires designed to carry a heavier maximum
load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric
tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not increase the
tire's load carrying capability.

•
•

kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.

Related information

•

Tire sidewall designations (p. 445)

PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit
of air pressure.

}}
447

WHEELS AND TIRES

•
•

Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next
to the rim.

•

Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead
area and the tread.

•

Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when
mounted on the vehicle.

•

Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a
tire and tube assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.

•

Maximum load rating: a figure indicating
the maximum load in pounds and kilograms
that can be carried by the tire. This rating is
established by the tire manufacturer.

•

Maximum permissible inflation pressure:
the greatest amount of air pressure that
should ever be put in the tire. This limit is set
by the tire manufacturer.

•

448

B-pillar: The structural member at the side
of the vehicle behind the front door.

Recommended tire inflation pressure:
inflation pressure, established by Volvo,
which is based on the type of tires that are
mounted on a vehicle at the factory. This
information can be found on the tire inflation
placard(s) located on the driver's side B-pillar
and in the tire inflation table in this chapter.
Cold tires: The tires are considered to be
cold when they have the same temperature
as the surrounding (ambient) air. This temperature is normally reached after the vehicle
has been parked for at least 3 hours.

Tire direction of rotation
Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car's braking
properties and ability to force aside rain, snow
and slush.

The arrows shows the direction of rotation of the tire

•

The tires with the most tread should always
be on the rear axle (to help reduce the risk of
skidding).

•

When switching between summer and winter
tires, mark the tires to indicate where they
were mounted on the car, e.g., LF = left front,
RR = right rear

•

Tires with tread designed to roll in only one
direction are marked with an arrow on the
sidewall.

•

Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician if you are unsure about the tread
depth.

Related information

•

Tires (p. 444)

WHEELS AND TIRES

Tread wear indicator

Loading specifications

The tires have wear indicator strips running
across or parallel to the tread.

Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance.

Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
1.

Locate the statement "the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.

Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.

Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the "XXX" amount equals
1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs. (1400 – 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)

Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.

If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Weight designations
Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determining your
vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a trailer,
from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/CMVSS) label, and
the vehicle's tire information placard:
Curb weight
The weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.
The letters TWI are printed on the side of the tire.
When approximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is left on
the tread, these strips become visible and indicate that the tire should be replaced. Tires with
less than 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer very poor
traction.
When replacing worn tires, it is recommended
that the tire be identical in type (radial) and size
as the one being replaced. Using a tire of the
same make (manufacturer) will help prevent
alteration of the driving characteristics of the
vehicle.

Related information

•
•

Tire direction of rotation (p. 448)
Checking tire inflation pressure (p. 451)

Capacity weight
All weight added to the curb weight, including
cargo and optional equipment. When towing,
trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargo
weight.
Permissible axle weight
The maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the Federal/Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/CMVSS) label.
The total load on each axle must never exceed its
maximum permissible weight.
Gross vehicle weight (GVW)
The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passengers.

}}
449

WHEELS AND TIRES
||

WARNING

•

Exceeding the permissible axle weight,
gross vehicle weight, or any other weight
rating limits can cause tire overheating
resulting in permanent deformation or
catastrophic failure.
Do not use replacement tires with lower
load carrying capacities than the tires that
were original equipment on the vehicle
because this will lower the vehicle's GVW
rating. Use only tires with the correct load
carrying capacity. Consult your Volvo
retailer for information.

Related information

•
•

Label information (p. 520)
Weights (p. 525)

Uniform Tire Quality Grading
ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST
CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE GRADES.
Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between the tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:

WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on braking (straight-ahead) traction
tests and is not a measure of cornering (turning) traction.

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

TEMPERATURE

TREADWEAR

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a minimum level of
performance that all passenger vehicle tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one half (1 ½) times as
well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and many depart significantly from the norm due
to variation in driving habits, maintenance practices and differences in road characteristics and
climate.

TRACTION
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C, as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance. The traction
grade assigned to this tire is based on braking

450

(straight-ahead) traction tests and is not a measure of cornering (turning) traction.

WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
tire failure.

WHEELS AND TIRES

Snow tires and chains
The use of snow chains and/or winter tires can
help improve traction in winter driving conditions.
Snow chains can be used on your Volvo with the
following restrictions:

•

Snow chains should be installed on front
wheels only. Use only Volvo approved snow
chains.

•

If accessory, aftermarket or "custom" tires
and wheels are installed and are of a size different than the original tires and wheels,
chains in some cases CANNOT be used.
Sufficient clearances between chains and
brakes, suspension and body components
must be maintained.

•

Some strap-on type chains will interfere with
brake components and therefore CANNOT
be used.

•

All Wheel Drive models: Snow chains
should only be installed on the front wheels.

•

Certain size tires may not allow the assembly
of snow chains/traction devices.

Consult your Volvo retailer for additional snow
chain information.

CAUTION

Checking tire inflation pressure

•

Snow chains should not be used on
wheels larger than 19".

•

Always follow the chain manufacturer's
installation instructions carefully. Install
chains as tightly as possible and
retighten periodically.

Correct tire inflation pressure helps improve driving stability, save fuel and increase the service
life of the tires.

•

Check local regulations regarding the use
of snow chains before installing.

•
•

Use single-sided snow chains only.

•

Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns when
driving with snow chains.

•

The handling of the vehicle can be
adversely affected when driving with
chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as well
as locked wheel braking.

Never exceed the chain manufacturer's
specified maximum speed limit. (Under
no circumstances should you exceed
31 mph (50 km/h).

WARNING

•

Under-inflation is the most common
cause of tire failure and may result in
severe tire cracking, tread separation, or
"blow-out," with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury.

•

Under-inflated tires reduce the load carrying capacity of your vehicle.

Cold tires
Inflation pressure should be checked when the
tires are cold.
The tires are considered to be cold when
they have the same temperature as the surrounding (ambient) air.
This temperature is normally reached after the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours.
After driving a distance of approximately 1 mile
(1.6 km), the tires are considered to be hot. If you
have to drive farther than this distance to pump
your tire(s), check and record the tire pressure
first and add the appropriate air pressure when
you get to the pump.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire
inflation pressures also change. A 10-degree

}}
451

WHEELS AND TIRES
||

temperature drop causes a corresponding drop
of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your
tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the
proper pressure, which can be found on the vehicle's tire information placard or certification label.

of the factory-mounted tires on your vehicle, as
well as load limits and inflation pressure.

NOTE

•

If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot,
never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The tires
are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures
to increase above recommended cold pressures.
A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation
pressure could be significantly under-inflated.

•

Recommended inflation pressures

•

Tire inflation placard

A tire inflation pressure placard is located on the
driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the
side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door
opening). This placard indicates the designation

452

Not available in all models.

The placard shown indicates inflation
pressure for the tires installed on the
vehicle at the factory only.
A certain amount of air seepage from the
tires occurs naturally and tire pressure
fluctuates with seasonal changes in temperature. Always check tire pressure regularly.
Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation
pressure, including the spare3, at least once
a month and before long trips. You are
strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure
gauge, as automatic service station gauges
may be inaccurate.

•

Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear.

•

Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.

Checking tire pressure
1.

Remove the cap from the valve on one tire,
then firmly press the tire gauge onto the
valve.

Add air to reach the recommended air pressure.

Replace the valve cap.

CAUTION

•

After inflating the tires, always reinstall the
valve cap to help avoid damage to the
valve from dirt, gravel, etc.

•

Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to
remove.

Visually inspect the tires to make sure there
are no nails or other objects embedded that
could puncture the tire and cause an air leak.

Check the sidewalls to make sure there are
no gouges, cuts, bulges or other irregularities.

Repeat this procedure for each tire, including
the spare.

NOTE
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing
on the metal stem in the center of the valve.
Then recheck the pressure with your tire
gauge.

WHEELS AND TIRES

Changing tires
When changing wheels to another dimension,
always follow Volvo's instructions.

When changing to tires of another
dimension
If you mount tires with a dimension other than
the factory-installed tires, contact an authorized
Volvo retailer to update the vehicle's software.
This may also be necessary when changing from
summer to winter tires, or vice versa.

Related information

•
•
•

Snow tires and chains (p. 451)

Tools in the cargo compartment

Jack

Tools for e.g., changing wheels, etc. are located
under the cargo compartment floor.

The jack is used to raise the vehicle, for example
when mounting winter wheels, etc.

WARNING

•

The jack must correctly engage the jack
attachment.

•

Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, nonslippery surface.

•

Never allow any part of your body to be
extended under a vehicle supported by a
jack.

•

Use the jack intended for the vehicle
when changing a tire. For any other job,
use stands to support the vehicle.

•

Apply the parking brake and put the gear
selector in the Park (P) position.

•

Block the wheels standing on the ground,
use rigid wooden blocks or large stones.

•

The jack should be kept well-greased and
clean, and should not be damaged.

•

No objects should be placed between the
base of jack and the ground, or between
the jack and the attachment bar on the
vehicle.

Installing a wheel (p. 456)
Removing a wheel (p. 454)

}}
453

WHEELS AND TIRES
||

CAUTION

•
•

When not in use, the jack* should be kept
in its storage compartment under the
cargo compartment floor.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
intended to be used only in temporary situations such as changing wheels in the
event of a flat tire. Only the jack that
came with your particular model should
be used to lift the vehicle. If the vehicle
needs to be lifted more frequently or for a
prolonged period, using a garage jack or
hoist is recommended. Always follow this
device’s instructions for use.

Models with leveling control*
If the vehicle is equipped with the optional pneumatic suspension, this feature must be turned off
before raising the vehicle with the jack.
To do so, go to Settings Vehicle
Deactivate Suspension & Leveling Control in
the center display's Top view.

454

Wheel bolts

Removing a wheel

The wheel bolts hold the wheel in place.

Wheel changes should always be carried out
correctly.

CAUTION
Wheel bolts should be tightened to 103 ft.
lbs. (140 Nm). Over-tightening could damage
the threads.
Only use wheels/rims that have been tested and
approved by Volvo and are included in Volvo's
product range. Use a torque wrench to check
that the wheel bolts are tightened correctly.

Locking wheel bolts*
A tool for removing locking wheel bolts can be
found in the foam block under the cargo compartment floor.

Related information

•
•

Changing tires (p. 453)

Turn on the hazard warning flashers if the
wheel change has to be done near passing
traffic.

Apply the parking brake and put the gear
selector in P.

CAUTION
Models with suspension and level control*:
Turn this function off before raising the vehicle.
To do so, go to Settings Vehicle
Deactivate Suspension & Leveling Control
in the center display's Top view.

Installing a wheel (p. 456)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WHEELS AND TIRES

WARNING

•

The jack must correctly engage the jack
attachment.

•

Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, nonslippery surface.

•

Never allow any part of your body to be
extended under a vehicle supported by a
jack.

•

Use the jack intended for the vehicle when
changing a tire. For any other job, use
stands to support the vehicle.

•

Apply the parking brake and put the gear
selector in the Park (P) position.

•

Block the wheels standing on the ground,
use rigid wooden blocks or large stones.

•

The jack should be kept well-greased and
clean, and should not be damaged.

•

No objects should be placed between the
base of jack and the ground, or between
the jack and the attachment bar on the
vehicle.

NOTE
The jack provided with your vehicle is
intended to be used only in temporary situations such as changing wheels in the event of
a flat tire. Only the jack that came with your
particular model should be used to lift the
vehicle. If the vehicle needs to be lifted more
frequently or for a prolonged period, using a
garage jack or hoist is recommended. Always
follow this device’s instructions for use.
3.

Lug wrench and towing eyelet

Screw the towing eyelet into the lug wrench
as shown in the illustration.

Take out the jack*, lug wrench*, the tool for
removing the plastic covers on the wheel
bolts and the towing eyelet stowed under the
floor of the cargo compartment.

CAUTION
The towing eyelet must be screwed into the
lug wrench as far as possible.
6.

With the vehicle still on the ground, use the
lug wrench/towing eyelet to loosen the
wheel bolts ½ – 1 turn by exerting downward
(counterclockwise) pressure.

Tool for removing the plastic covers on the wheel bolts

Remove the plastic covers on the wheel bolts.
4.

Block the wheels that are on the ground with
wooden blocks or large stones.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 455

WHEELS AND TIRES
||

When hoisting the vehicle, it is essential that
the jack (or garage lift arms) are positioned
correctly on the underside of the vehicle.
There are two jack attachment points on
each side of the vehicle and there is a groove
in the plastic cover at each attachment point.
Position the jack under the attachment point
to be used on a level, firm, non-slippery surface and crank it up until it is correctly
aligned and seated in the attachment point.
The pin on the jack's head must be positioned in the hole in the attachment point.

Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be
changed is lifted off the ground. Remove the
wheel bolts.

Related information

•
•
•
456

Wheel bolts (p. 454)
Installing a wheel (p. 456)
Jack (p. 453)

Installing a wheel

CAUTION

It is important to install wheels properly.
1.

Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel and
hub.

Lift the wheel and place it on the hub.

•

After inflating the tires, always reinstall
the valve cap to help avoid damage to the
valve from dirt, gravel, etc.

•

Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to
remove.

Related information

•
•

Install the wheel bolts and tighten hand-tight.
Using the lug wrench, tighten crosswise until
all bolts are snug.

Lower the vehicle to the ground and alternately tighten the bolts crosswise to
103 ft. lbs. (140 Nm).

Press the plastic covers onto the wheel bolts.

Wheel bolts (p. 454)
Jack (p. 453)

WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
TPMS provides a warning if inflation pressure in
one or more tires is too low. It also uses a symbol (called a telltale) that will flash for
60 seconds and then glow steadily if there is a
system malfunction.
TPMS uses sensors mounted in the tire valves to
check inflation pressure levels. When the vehicle
is moving at a speed of approximately 20 mph
(30 km/h) or faster, these sensors transmit inflation pressure data to a receiver located in the
vehicle. If inflation pressure is too low, an indicator symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel
and a text message will be displayed.
Symbol

Explanation
The symbol illuminates to indicate
low tire inflation pressure.
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the tire pressure warning symbol will flash for approximately
1 minute and then remain illuminated.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires

of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended.

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement
or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's
handling and stopping ability. Please note that
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and
then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle

Messages in the instrument panel
When the TPMS symbol illuminates, the following
text messages may also be displayed:

• Tire pressure low: the tire(s) affected will
also be specified.

•

Tire needs air now: the tire(s) affected will
also be specified.

• Tire pressure system Service required.
If TPMS cannot determine which tire(s) have low
inflation pressure, general messages may be displayed, such as:

• Tire pressure low Check tires
• Tire needs air now Check tires
TPMS sensors can be installed on the valve hole
area, on the factory-installed wheels as well as on
optional ones.

}}
457

WHEELS AND TIRES
||

If a spare wheel or other wheel without a TPMS
sensor is used, a fault message will appear in the
instrument panel after driving for a few minutes.
After changing wheels, always check that the
new wheels have TPMS sensors to avoid a system malfunction warning.

WARNING
Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tire
failure, resulting in a loss of control of the
vehicle.

Turning TPMS off4

TPMS does not replace the need for regular tire
inspection and maintenance.

TPMS can be turned off in the center display's
Top view.

Recommendations

Park the vehicle and turn off the engine.

TPMS sensors should be mounted on all wheels
used with the vehicle, including winter wheels.

Activate ignition mode I.

Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Tire Pressure Monitor in the Top view
and deselect (tap) the button.
> The function will remain off until it is reactivated.

NOTE

•

If you change to tires with a different
dimension than the factory-installed ones,
the TPMS system must be reconfigured
for these tires. This must be done by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

•

If a tire is changed, or if the TPMS sensor
is moved to another wheel, the rubber
valve and valve core should be replaced.

•

When installing TPMS sensors, the vehicle must be parked for at least
15 minutes with the ignition off. If the
vehicle is driven within 15 minutes, a
TPMS error message will be displayed.

4 Certain

458

markets only.

Checking inflation pressure
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System makes it
possible to view the current inflation pressure of
all four tires.

Checking inflation pressure
Open the Car status app in
the center display's Application
view. Tap Status to see the
current inflation pressure of all
four tires.
The on-screen graphic displays the inflation pressure.

Related information

•
•

Checking inflation pressure (p. 458)
Reinflating tires equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(p. 459)

•

Tire Pressure Monitoring System type approval (p. 461)

•

Ignition modes (p. 370)
The illustration is generic and may vary from model to
model or after a software update

WHEELS AND TIRES
Color indications:

•

No color indicator: tire pressure is above
the threshold for a low inflation pressure
warning.

•

Yellow: low tire pressure. Stop and check/
reinflate the tire(s) as soon as possible.

•

Red: inflation pressure is very low. Stop
immediately and check/reinflate the tire(s).

•

When no tire pressure values or updated tire
pressure values are shown then system has
not learned the tire pressure values. It might
be necessary to drive at a speed of at least
20 mph (30 km/h) for several minutes.

•

If the TPMS symbol (telltale) flashes for
approx. 1 minute then glows steadily, and the
message Tire pressure system Service
required is displayed: this indicates that the
system is not functioning correctly. Have it
checked by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.

Please note that the sample tire pressures
shown in the illustration are in bar. The unit of
measure can be changed (e.g., to pound per
scare inch (psi) in the center display's Settings
menu, under System Units Tire Pressure.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System settings
The unit of measure for tire inflation pressure can
be changed in the center display's Top view by
selecting Settings System Units Tire
Pressure and tapping the desired unit.

Related information

•

Calibrating the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) (p. 460)

•

Reinflating tires equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(p. 459)

•

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(p. 457)

Reinflating tires equipped with the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
When low tire pressure has been detected, a
message will be displayed in the instrument
panel and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
symbol will illuminate.
Symbol

Explanation
Check and reinflate the tire(s)
when the TPMS symbol illuminates
and a message is displayed.

Use a tire pressure gauge to check the inflation pressure of the under-inflated tire(s).

Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pressure
(consult the tire pressure placard located on
the driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of
the driver's door opening).

In some cases, it may be necessary to drive
the vehicle for several minutes at a speed of
at least 20 mph (30 km/h) to erase the
TPMS telltale warning and the text message.
Please be aware that the TPMS telltale
warning will not go out until the low tire pressure has been corrected.

}}
459

WHEELS AND TIRES
||

NOTE
To help avoid incorrect tire inflation pressure,
if possible only inflate the tires when they are
cold. The tires are considered to be cold
when they have the same temperature as the
surrounding (ambient) air. This temperature is
normally reached after the vehicle has been
parked for at least 3 hours. After driving a distance of approximately 1 mile (1.6 km), the
tires are considered to be warm.

CAUTION
When inflating tires with TPMS sensors, press
the pump's mouthpiece straight onto the
valve to help avoid bending or otherwise damaging the valve.

CAUTION

460

•

After inflating the tires, always reinstall
the valve cap to help avoid damage to the
valve from dirt, gravel, etc.

•

Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to
remove.

Certain markets only.

WARNING

•

Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to
tire failure, resulting in a loss of control of
the vehicle.

•

Tire monitoring systems cannot indicate
sudden tire damage caused by external
factors (e.g., a blowout) in advance.

Related information

•

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(p. 457)

•

Checking inflation pressure (p. 458)

Calibrating the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)6
In certain situations, a text pertaining to calibration requirements may appear in the center display. This text is generic and does not apply
to North American models.

WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire Pressure Monitoring System
type approval
NOTE
USA
FCC ID: MRXVHSS4
Canada

WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressively
approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term “IC:” before the
radio certification number only signifies that
Industry Canada technical specifications were
met.

Tire sealing system
The vehicle is equipped with a tire sealing system that enables you to temporarily seal a hole in
the tread surface and re-inflate a flat tire, or to
adjust a tire’s inflation pressure.

IC:2546A-VHSS4
M :VHSS4
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with licence exempt RSS standards
of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.

Location in the cargo compartment (generic illustration)

Introduction
The tire sealing system consists of an air compressor, a container for the sealing compound,
wiring to connect the system to the vehicle’s
electrical system via one of the 12-volt sockets,
and a hose used to connect the system to the
tire’s inflation valve.

NOTE
The tire sealing system's compressor has
been tested and approved by Volvo.
}}
461

WHEELS AND TIRES
||

The 12-volt sockets are located in the front tunnel console, on the rear side of the center console in the rear seat and in the cargo area*.

WARNING

•

After using the tire sealing system, the
vehicle should not be driven farther than
approximately 120 miles (200 km).

•

Have the tire inspected by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician as soon
as possible to determine if it can be permanently repaired or must be replaced.

Accessing the tire sealing system
The tire sealing system is stowed under the floor
of the cargo area. To access it:
1.

Lift the floor hatch in the cargo area.

Lift out the tire sealing system.

•

The vehicle should not be driven faster
than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a tire
that has been temporarily repaired with
the tire sealing system.

•

After using the tire sealing system, drive
carefully and avoid abrupt steering
maneuvers and sudden stops.

NOTE

•

462

The tire sealing system is only intended
to seal holes on the tire’s tread area, not
the sidewall.

•

Tires with large holes or tears cannot be
repaired with the tire sealing system.

•

After use, stow the tire sealing system
properly to help prevent rattling.

NOTE

•

After use, the sealing compound bottle,
the hose, and certain other system components must be replaced. Please consult your Volvo retailer for replacement
parts.

•

If the sealing compound bottle’s expiration date has passed, please take it to a
Volvo retailer or a recycling station that
can properly dispose of harmful substances.

Sealing compound container
The sealing compound container must be
replaced if the tire sealing system has been used
to repair a tire or if the container’s expiration date
has passed (see the date on decal).

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WHEELS AND TIRES

WARNING
Please keep the following points in mind
when using the tire sealing system:

•

The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in the
illustration) contains 1) rubber latex, natural and 2) ethanediol. These substances
are harmful if swallowed.

•

The contents of this bottle may cause
allergic skin reactions or otherwise be
potentially harmful to the respiratory tract,
the skin, the central nervous system, and
the eyes.
Precautions:

•
•
•

•

Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting
unless directed to do so by medical personnel. Get medical attention.

•

Disposal: Dispose of this material and its
container to a hazardous or special waste
collection point.

Using the tire sealing system
Overview

Related information

•

Inflating a tire with the tire sealing system
compressor (p. 467)

•

Using the tire sealing system (p. 463)

Keep out of reach of children.
Do not ingest the contents.

Electrical wire

Avoid prolonged or repeated contact with
the skin.

Hose

•

Wash thoroughly after handling.
First aid:

Air release valve
Protective hose cover

•

Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with
soap and water. Get medical attention if
symptoms occur.

•

Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least
15 minutes, occasionally lifting the upper
and lower eyelids. Get medical attention if
symptoms occur.

Speed limit sticker (on the rear side of the
compressor)

•

Inhalation: Move the exposed person to
fresh air. If irritation persists, get medical
attention.

On/Off switch

Bottle holder (orange cover)
Air pressure gauge

Bottle with sealing compound

}}
463

WHEELS AND TIRES
||

Connecting

NOTE

Be sure the air release valve on the compressor's hose is completely closed. Remove
the valve cap from the tire’s inflation valve
and screw the tire sealing system’s hose
connector onto the valve as tightly as possible by hand.

Connect the electrical wire to the nearest
12-volt socket in the vehicle.

Do not break the seal on the bottle. This
occurs automatically when the bottle is
screwed into the holder.

WARNING
Contact with the sealing compound may
cause skin irritation. If contact occurs, wash
the affected area immediately with soap and
water.

Activate the vehicle's hazard warning flashers
if the tire sealing system is to be used in an
area with traffic.
If the flat tire was caused by a nail, etc., do
not remove it from the tire. It will help to seal
the hole.

464

Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix it to
the steering wheel hub where it will be
clearly visible to the driver. The vehicle should
not be driven faster than 50 mph (80 km/h)
while using a tire that has been temporarily
repaired with the tire sealing system.

Ensure that the on/off switch is in position 0
and take out the electrical wire and hose.

Unscrew the orange cover over the bottle
holder on the compressor and unscrew the
cap on the bottle of sealing compound.

Screw the bottle into the bottle holder as far
as possible.

WARNING
The bottle is equipped with a catch to keep it
securely in place and help prevent sealing
compound leakage. Once in place, the bottle
cannot be unscrewed. This must be done by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

NOTE
Be sure that none of the other 12-volt sockets is being used while the compressor is in
operation.

WHEELS AND TIRES
8.

Start the tire sealing system’s compressor by
pressing the on/off switch to position I.

WARNING

•

Never stand next to the tire being inflated
when the compressor is in operation.

•

If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire,
switch off the compressor immediately.

•

If there is visible damage to the sidewall or
the rim, the tire cannot be repaired. The
vehicle should not be driven if this occurs.
Contact a towing service or Volvo On Call
Roadside Assistance if applicable.

NOTE
The air pressure gauge will temporarily show
an increase in pressure to approximately
88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing compound is
being pumped into the tire. The pressure
should return to a normal level after approximately 30 seconds.
9.

Pump the tire for 7 minutes.

10. Switch off the compressor and check the
inflation pressure on the air pressure gauge.
Inflation pressure should be between
22—51 psi (1.8—3.5 bar). Use the air
release valve to release some air from the
tire if necessary.

WARNING
If the pressure remains below 22 psi (1.8 bar)
after approximately seven minutes, turn off
the compressor. In this case, the hole is too
large to be sealed and the vehicle should not
be driven.
11. Switch off the compressor and disconnect
the electrical wire from the 12-volt socket.
12. Unscrew the hose from the tire's inflation
valve and put the cover on the hose back into
place to help prevent seepage of residual
sealing compound from the hose.
13. Reinstall the valve cap.

WARNING
No one should stand closer to the vehicle
than approx. 7 ft (2 m) when it drives away to
help avoid being sprayed with sealing compound.

CAUTION
If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), the use of
the sealing compound may lead to incorrect
tire pressure readings or in rare cases, damage to the tire pressure sensor. Use the tire
sealing system to check and adjust the damaged tire's inflation pressure.

CAUTION

NOTE

•

After inflating the tires, always reinstall the
valve cap to help avoid damage to the
valve from dirt, gravel, etc.

•

Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to
remove.

Safely stow the tire sealing system in a
convenient place as it will soon be used
again to check the tire’s inflation pressure.

•

The empty bottle of sealing compound
cannot be removed from the bottle holder.
Consult a trained and qualified Volvo serv-

CAUTION
The compressor should not be used for more
than 10 minutes at a time to avoid overheating.

14. Immediately drive the vehicle for approximately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum speed
of 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute the sealing compound in the tire. During the tire's
first revolution, some sealing compound may
spray out of the puncture hole.

}}
465

WHEELS AND TIRES
||

ice technician to have the bottle removed
and properly disposed of.

16. Without starting the compressor, check the
inflation pressure on the air pressure gauge.

•
WARNING
If heavy vibrations, unsteady steering behavior,
or noises should occur while driving, reduce
speed and park the vehicle in a safe place.
Recheck the tire for bumps, cracks, or other
visible damage, and recheck its inflation pressure. If the pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar),
do not continue driving. Have the vehicle
towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
15. Rechecking the pressure
Reconnect the tire sealing system's hose to
the tire's inflation valve.

•

If the pressure is under 19 psi (1.3 bar),
the puncture has not been sealed sufficiently and the vehicle should not be
driven. Have the vehicle towed to a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician.
If the pressure is more than 19 psi
(1.3 bar), connect the electrical wire to a
12-volt socket, start the compressor and
inflate the tire to the correct pressure
(see the tire pressure decal on the on the
driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear
of the driver's door opening). Use the air
release valve to release some air from the
tire if necessary.

17. Switch off the compressor and disconnect
the electrical wire from the 12-volt socket.
Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation
valve and reinstall the valve cap.
Do not attempt to remove the sealing compound bottle from the tire sealing system. It
cannot be turned counterclockwise.
18. Fold the hose into the sealing system box
and return the components to the cargo
compartment.

466

CAUTION

•

After inflating the tires, always reinstall
the valve cap to help avoid damage to the
valve from dirt, gravel, etc.

•

Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to
remove.

NOTE

•

After use, the sealing compound bottle,
the hose, and certain other system components must be replaced. Please consult your Volvo retailer for replacement
parts.

•

If the sealing compound bottle’s expiration date has passed, please take it to a
Volvo retailer or a recycling station that
can properly dispose of harmful substances.

WARNING
Always check tire inflation pressure regularly.
Volvo recommends driving to an authorized Volvo
workshop to have the damaged tire repaired/
replaced. Inform the workshop that the tire contains sealing compound.

WHEELS AND TIRES

WARNING

•

After using the tire sealing system, the
vehicle should not be driven farther than
approximately 120 miles (200 km).

•

Have the tire inspected by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician as soon
as possible to determine if it can be permanently repaired or must be replaced.

•

The vehicle should not be driven faster
than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a tire
that has been temporarily repaired with
the tire sealing system.

•

After using the tire sealing system, drive
carefully and avoid abrupt steering
maneuvers and sudden stops.

Related information

•
•

Tire sealing system (p. 461)

Inflating a tire with the tire sealing
system compressor
The compressor can be used to inflate a tire.
1.

The compressor should be switched off.
Ensure that the on/off switch is in position 0.
Take out the electrical wire and hose.

Be sure the air release valve on the compressor's hose is completely closed. Remove
the valve cap from the tire’s inflation valve
and screw the hose connector onto the valve
as tightly as possible by hand.

Connect the electrical wire to the nearest
12-volt socket in the vehicle and start the
engine.

CAUTION
The compressor should not be used for more
than 10 minutes at a time to avoid overheating.
5.

Inflate the tire to the correct pressure (see
the tire pressure decal on the on the driver's
side B-pillar (the structural member at the
side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's
door opening). Use the air release valve to
release some air from the tire if necessary.

WARNING

•

The vehicle’s engine should be running
when the tire sealing system is used to
avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure the
vehicle is parked in a well ventilated place,
or outdoors, before using the system. The
parking brake should be securely applied
and the gear selector should be in the P
(park) position.

•

Children should never be left unattended
in the vehicle when the engine is running.

Checking tire inflation pressure (p. 451)

Start the compressor by pressing the on/off
switch to position I.
}}
467

WHEELS AND TIRES
||

Turn off the compressor (press the on/off
switch to position 0) when the correct inflation pressure has been reached.

CAUTION

•

After inflating the tires, always reinstall the
valve cap to help avoid damage to the
valve from dirt, gravel, etc.

•

Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to
remove.

Refilling coolant
Coolant helps keep the gasoline engine at the
proper operating temperature. The heat transferred from the engine to the coolant can be used
to warm the passenger compartment.
When refilling coolant, follow the instructions on
the package and use the recommended amount
of coolant. Never fill the cooling system with
water only; this could lead to freezing, corrosion
and engine damage.

WARNING
7.

Disconnect the electrical wire from the 12volt socket.

Related information

•
•

Checking tire inflation pressure (p. 451)

If the engine has been running, the coolant
will be very hot. Allow the engine to cool
before opening the coolant expansion tank. If
this is not possible, open the cap very slowly
to allow pressure to dissipate.

Tire sealing system (p. 461)
Lift the rubber strip by pressing it inward in
the engine compartment.
Remove the plastic cover by folding out the
catch and lifting the cover upward.
Remove the expansion tank and add coolant.
The level should be between the MIN and
MAX marks on the tank.
Put the other components back in place in the
reverse order.

468

WHEELS AND TIRES

CAUTION

•

High levels of chlorine, chlorides and
other salts may cause corrosion in the
cooling system.

•

Only use coolants with corrosion protection recommended by Volvo.

•
•

The ratio of coolant to water is 50/50.

•

If maintenance is performed on the cooling system or if the coolant is replaced,
flush the cooling system with clean water
before adding new a new coolant/water
mixture.

•

The engine may only be operated with a
properly filled cooling system. Otherwise,
high temperatures and cracks in the cylinders may occur.

Mix the coolant with tap water of drinkable quality.

Related information

•

Coolant specifications and volumes (p. 528)

469

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Volvo's service program
Periodic maintenance and service performed at
the intervals specified in your Warranty and
Service Records Information booklet will help
keep your vehicle running well.

Introduction
The maintenance services contain several checks
that require special instruments and tools and
therefore must be performed by a qualified technician. To keep your Volvo in top condition, specify time-tested and proven Genuine Volvo Parts
and Accessories.
The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S.
The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle manufacturers to furnish written instructions to the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper servicing
and function of the components that control
emissions. These services, which are listed in the
"Warranty and Service Records Information"
booklet, are not covered by the warranty. You will
be required to pay for labor and material used.
Maintenance
Your Volvo passed several major inspections
before it was delivered to you, in accordance with
Volvo specifications. The maintenance procedures outlined in the Warranty and Service
Records Information booklet, many of which will
positively affect your vehicle's emissions, should
be performed as indicated. It is recommended
that receipts for vehicle emission maintenance be
retained in case questions arise concerning

472

maintenance. Inspection and maintenance should
also be performed anytime a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
Applicable warranties – U.S./Canada
In accordance with applicable U.S. and Canadian
regulations, the following list of warranties is provided.

•
•
•
•
•
•

Periodic maintenance helps minimize
emissions

NOTE

•

Refer to your Warranty and Service
Records Information booklet for a comprehensive service and maintenance
schedule up to 150,000 miles (240,000
km). This program contains inspections
and services necessary for the proper
function of your vehicle and includes
components that affect vehicle emissions.

•

The Warranty and Service Records Information booklet also contains detailed
information concerning the warranties
that apply to your vehicle.

New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty
Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty
Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint Systems Limited Warranty
Emission Design and Defect Warranty
Emission Performance Warranty

These are the federal warranties; other warranties are provided as required by state/provincial
law. Refer to your separate Warranty and Service
Records Information booklet for detailed information concerning each of the warranties.

On-board Diagnostic System
OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized
engine management system. It stores diagnostic
information about your vehicle's emission controls. It can light the Check Engine light (MIL) if it
detects an emission control "fault." A "fault" is a
component or system that is not performing
within an expected range. A fault may be permanent or temporary. OBD II will store a message
about any fault.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Emission inspection readiness

required disconnecting the battery, a period
of driving is necessary to bring the OBD II
system to "ready" for inspection. Two halfhour trips of mixed stop-and-go/highway
driving are typically needed to allow OBD II to
reach readiness. Your Volvo retailer can provide you with more information on planning a
trip.

How do states use OBD II for emission
inspections?
Many states connect a computer directly to a
vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can then
read "faults." In some states, this type of inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission test.
How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission
inspection?
Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspection
for any of the following reasons.

•

Maintain your vehicle in accordance with your
vehicle's maintenance schedule.

Owner maintenance
Periodic maintenance requirements and intervals
are described in your vehicle's Warranty and
Service Records Information booklet.

•

If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your
vehicle may fail inspection.

•

If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit,
but went out without any action on your part,
OBD II will still have a recorded fault. Your
vehicle may pass or fail, depending on the
inspection practices in your area.

The following points can be carried out between
the normally scheduled maintenance services.

If you had recent service that required disconnecting the battery, OBD II diagnostic
information may be incomplete and "not
ready" for inspection. A vehicle that is not
ready may fail inspection.

•

How can I prepare for my next OBD II
emission inspection?
• If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – or was
lit but went out without service, have your
vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary, serviced
by a qualified Volvo technician.

•

If you recently had service for a lit Check
Engine light, or if you had service that

•

As needed:
Wash the car, including the undercarriage, to
reduce wear that can be caused by a buildup of
dirt, and corrosion that can be caused by salt residues.
Clean leaves and twigs from air intake vents at
the base of the windshield, and from other places
where they may collect.

NOTE
Complete service information for qualified
technicians is available online for purchase or
subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com.

Each time the car is refueled:
• Check the engine oil level.
Clean the windshield, windshield wipers,
headlights, and taillights.

Monthly:
• Check cold tire pressure in all tires. Inspect
the tires for wear.

•

Check that engine coolant and other fluid
levels are between the indicated "min" and
"max" markings.

•

Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass
cleaner and soft paper towels.

•

Wipe driver information displays with a soft
cloth.

Visually inspect battery terminals for corrosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose terminal
connector, or a battery near the end of its
useful service life. Consult your Volvo retailer
for additional information.

Related information

•

Climate system service (p. 479)

473

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

System updates

NOTE

Updates are available for infotainment-related
services and Internet connections. If system software updates are available, they can be to be
downloaded all at once or separately.

Downloading data may affect other system
features that share the Internet connection. A
download can be cancelled at any time or the
other features can be temporarily turned off
while the software download is underway.

System (software) updates are
handled through the Remote
update service app in the
center display's App view. Tap
once to start a download app in
Home view's lower sub-view. If
no search for updates has
been performed since the last time the infotainment system was started, a search will be initiated.
No search will begin if a software download is
underway.
An icon in the System updates button indicates
the number of updates that are currently available. Tap the button to display a list of updates
that can be installed in the vehicle.
For additional information and answers to commonly asked questions pertaining to the function
and downloading system updates, go to support.volvocars.com.
Background searches for software updates
is activated by default when the vehicle is
delivered from the factory.

474

NOTE
An update may be interrupted when the ignition is switched off.
However, an update does not have to be
completed when the ignition is switched off; it
will resume automatically when the ignition is
switched on again.

Updating all system software
–

Select Install all at the bottom of the list.

To avoid displaying a list, select Install all by the
System updates button.

Updating individual programs
–

Select Install to choose the software to be
downloaded.

Cancelling a download
–

Tap the activity indicator that replaced the
Install button on the screen when the download began.

Keep in mind that a download can be cancelled
but an installation that has already begun cannot
be interrupted.

Allowing background searches or
software updates
This function can be deactivated from the center
display:
1.

Go to the Settings in the center display's Top
view and select Remote Update Service.

Tap System

Tap to deselect Auto Software Update.

Remote Update Service.

If an update is available, New software updates
available will appear in the center display's status bar. Tap the message to start a download app
in Home view's lower sub-view. As soon as the
download app has started, an icon in the System
updates button will indicate the number of
downloads available.

Related information

•
•

Center display overview (p. 32)
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 42)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Remote updates

Vehicle status

Booking service and repairs

With the vehicle connected to the Internet,
updates for a number of the vehicle's systems
can be downloaded from the center display.

The vehicle's general status can be displayed in
the center display along with the possibility to
book service1

Connected Service Booking (CSB) makes it
possible to use the vehicle's Internet connection
to set up a time for service, maintenance and/or
repairs.

The Remote updates app is
started from the center display's App view and makes it
possible to:

•
•
•

search for and update system software
update the Sensus Navigation maps
download, update and uninstall apps

Related information

•
•

Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
(p. 434)
System updates (p. 474)

Certain markets only.

The Car status app is started
in the center display's App view
and has three tabs:

• Messages: stored messages
• Status: tire pressure and engine oil level
• Appointments: booking service or repairs1
Related information

•
•
•
•

Using the center display (p. 49)
Booking service and repairs (p. 475)
Checking inflation pressure (p. 458)
Checking and refilling engine oil (p. 507)

The information is handled through the Car
status app, which can be opened from the center display's App view.
Information about your vehicle is sent to your
retailer and you can book your workshop appointment directly in your retailer's workshop planning
system using the Volvo On-Line Service Scheduler with your smart phone. The system will also
send a reminder as the appointment approaches
and the Sensus Navigation system will provide
directions to the workshop if necessary.
This feature makes it convenient to book a workshop appointment directly from your vehicle.
Vehicle-related information is sent to your
retailer, who prepares your visit to the workshop.
The retailer will send an email to you're my Volvo
website including a link enabling you to connect
to the Volvo On-Line Service Scheduler where
you can book a workshop appointment at a convenient time. Information about your retailer is
also available in the vehicle so that you can contact the retailer/workshop at any time using the
Call my retailer menu option.

}}
475

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
||

NOTE
My Volvo can be found by going to www.volvocars.com and selecting the United States or
Canada.

Prerequisites for booking service from the
vehicle
In order to book an appointment from the vehicle:

•
•

Before the service can be used
Volvo ID
• The owner (primary driver) must create or
have a Volvo ID (see the article "Volvo ID").

•

Register your Volvo ID in the vehicle as
explained in the article "Volvo ID". If you have
already registered a Volvo ID, use the same
email address that you used to create the
Volvo ID.

Changing a Volvo ID email address
If you would like to register a different email
address, open the Volvo ID app and tap Change
Volvo ID. Follow the instructions provided. See
also the article "Volvo ID" for additional information.
Selecting a Volvo retailer on the My Volvo
website
By default, the retailer where you purchased your
vehicle will be your preferred retailer/Volvo
authorized workshop who will perform service
and repairs on your vehicle. To confirm or change
the preferred retailer, go to your personalized My
Volvo website.

476

The engine must be running
The vehicle must be connected to the Internet (see the article "Internet connected vehicle")

Using the service
When it is time for service or in certain cases if
repairs are necessary, a message will appear in
the instrument panel and in the center display.
This message is triggered by:

•

Sending an appointment request

the amount of time that has elapsed since
the last service

•

the number of hours the engine has run
since the last service

•
•

mileage since the last service.
Specific warnings or fault codes in the vehicle

Booking service or repairs
Submit a booking request whenever you need a
workshop appointment or when a message
regarding the need for service or repairs has
been displayed in the instrument panel and in the
center display.

Open the Car status app in the center display's App view.

Tap Appointments.

Under Appointments, tap Request
appoint..

Check that your Volvo ID is correct.

Check that the correct preferred retailer is
listed. If you prefer, simply tap the button to
initiate a call to the retailer.

Tap Send appointment request. Your
request and vehicle data will be sent to your
retailer through the vehicle's Internet connection.
> Volvo will send a booking invitation to your
email address.

Open the email and click the link to select an
appointment slot at your workshop. Enter
your Volvo ID to log in to My Volvo and proceed to book your workshop appointment at
a convenient time with your preferred service
advisor. Add any additional preferences and
free text to your booking.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
8.

When you have submitted your workshop
booking, your appointment will be confirmed
online directly by email and by a message in
the center display after a short delay.
One day prior to your appointment, you will
receive a reminder via email and a message
will appear on the center display. You can set
the interval for other reminders (e.g., two
days, three days) at your My Volvo website.

Under Appointments, tap Send vehicle
data.
> A message confirming that vehicle information has been sent via the Internet
connection will appear on the center display. Transmission of the vehicle information can be cancelled at any time by tapping the X in the activity indicator.

Viewing workshop information

10. On the day of your appointment, a reminder
will appear again on the center display.
Sending vehicle-related information
Information about the vehicle can be sent at any
time using its Internet connection.
Using this function does not send a workshop
appointment request to your retailer; only
vehicle data will be transmitted to Volvo. This
vehicle data can be accessed by any retailer if
you call the retailer and provide your Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).

1.
2.

Open the Car status app in the center display's App view.
Tap Appointments.

be sent using the Internet connection. Information about the vehicle includes:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

service requirements
time since service was last performed
function status
fluid levels
mileage (odometer reading)
VIN (Vehicle Identification Number)
The vehicle's software version
Diagnostic information

Related information

Open the Car status app in the center display's App view.

Tap Appointments.

Under Appointments, tap Workshop
information.
> A window with retailer information will
appear.

If you prefer, call the retailer, or select an
address or GPS coordinates to activate the
navigation system.

•
•

Internet connected vehicle (p. 431)
Volvo ID (p. 31)

Booking and vehicle information
When you make an appointment or send vehicle
information from you vehicle, this information will

477

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Wi-Fi connection to a workshop
The time a vehicle is in a workshop for service or
repairs can be reduced by transmitting troubleshooting information as soon as the car reaches
the workshop.
This is done most conveniently by selecting
Automatically connect when I arrive in the
center display's Settings menu.
Each time the vehicle slows down to a sufficiently
low speed, it begins searching for a Wi-Fi network. If an authorized Volvo network (at a retailer
or workshop) is found, a message will be displayed or a pop-up window will open in the center display (this applies to manual connections,
see the section "Manually connecting to a workshop" below).

Automatically connecting to a
workshop
Without driver confirmation
This is the most convenient way to transmit trouble-shooting data. The driver does not need to
confirm that the vehicle will establish a connection.
If the vehicle stops at a workshop and the engine
is switched off using the start knob, a message
will appear above the status bar in the center display. The vehicle will be automatically connected
when the driver's door is opened if the driver
does not tap the Cancel button in the message.

478

To help prevent the driver from being disturbed
by unwanted requests to connect (e.g., if the
vehicle is often parked near a workshop with an
authorized Volvo network), the vehicle will switch
to manual connection if the driver cancels a connection request twice within 5 days.
With driver confirmation
With this alternative, the driver must confirm a
connection.
If the vehicle stops at a workshop and the engine
is switched off using the start knob, a pop-up
window will open in the center display. The vehicle will be automatically connected when the driver's door is opened if the driver taps Connect in
the pop-up window. If the driver does nothing or
taps the pop-up window's Abort button, no
attempt will be made to establish a connection.

NOTE
To help prevent the driver from being disturbed by unwanted requests to connect (e.g., if
the vehicle is often parked near a workshop
with an authorized Volvo network), the vehicle
will switch to manual connection if the driver
cancels a connection request twice within
5 days.

Manually connecting to a workshop
Manual connections are handled by the service
technician.

Changing the way a connection is made
The type of connection (manual or automatic)
can be changed in the center display's Settings
menu.
1.

Pull down the center display's Top view and
tap Settings.

Tap Communication
Networks.

Select Automatically connect when I
arrive, Ask before connecting or Never
connect and never ask (manual connections).

Volvo Service

Related information

•
•

Internet connected vehicle (p. 431)
Settings view (p. 111)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Climate system service

Start battery

Service and repairs on the air conditioning system should only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

The vehicle's electrical system is single pole and
uses the body and engine block as conductors.

•

Never expose the battery to open flame
or electric spark.

The start (main) battery is used to power electrical components and systems. However, the
hybrid battery is used to start the gasoline
engine.

•
•

Do not smoke near the battery.

Troubleshooting and repairs
The air conditioning system contains a flourescent tracer substance. Ultraviolet light is used to
search for leaks in the system.
Refrigerant R134a

WARNING
The air conditioning system contains the
refrigerant R134a under pressure. Service
and repairs on the system should only be
done by a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.

Related information

•

Climate control system (p. 178)

The start battery should only be replaced by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
The start battery is an Absorbed Glass Mat
(AGM) 12-volt battery that is dimensioned for
use in vehicles to support electrical systems and
functions.
The service life of a battery is affected by factors
such as driving conditions/style, the number of
starts, climate, etc. Extreme cold may also further
decrease the battery’s starting capacity.

•

Never disconnect the start battery while the
engine is running.

•

Check that the start battery is correctly connected and that the clamps on its terminals
are properly tightened.

WARNING

WARNING
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the state of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands
after handling.
It is not possible to charge another vehicle's battery using the connection points in the engine
compartment. If the connection points are used
to charge another vehicle's battery it may cause a
fuse to blow, which means that the connection
points will not function.
If an external auxiliary battery is used to start the
vehicle, use the connection points in the engine
compartment. The start battery's terminals should
never be used. See the following illustration.
}}
479

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
||

CAUTION

•

NOTE

•

The service life of the start battery is
shortened if it becomes discharged
repeatedly.

•

The service life of the start battery is
affected by factors such as driving conditions and climate. Extreme cold may also
further decrease the battery's start
capacity.

•

Because the battery’s starting capacity
decreases with time, it may be necessary
to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven
for an extended period of time or if the
vehicle is usually only driven short distances.

Only modern battery chargers should be used to
charge the start battery. Quick charge functions
should not be used and could damage the battery.

•

Driving for at least 15 minutes a week or
connecting the battery to a charger with
automatic maintenance charging will help
keep it in good operating condition.

If both the start and hybrid batteries are fully discharged, both will have to be charged. Only
charging the hybrid battery in this situation is not
possible. Before the hybrid battery can be
charged, the start battery must be charged to a
certain level.

•

Keeping the start battery fully charged
will help maximize its service life.

•

The infotainment system's energy-saving
feature may not function correctly or at
all, and/or a message may be displayed if
a battery charger or jumper cables are
not connected properly.
The negative terminal on the battery must
never be used to connect a jumper cable
or a battery charger. Only the ground
point on the chassis may be used.

Positive connection point
Negative connection point

480

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Hybrid battery
The vehicle's electric motor is powered by a
rechargeable, maintenance-free, lithium-ion
hybrid battery.
The vehicle cannot be started if the hybrid
battery is completely discharged.

WARNING
The vehicle's hybrid battery may only be serviced or replaced by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.
The start battery is located in the cargo compartment

H8 AGM battery with strap

There are two versions of the start battery,
depending on the vehicle model.

•

When replacing the start battery an
Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM) must be used.

•

When replacing the start battery, a new battery with the same specifications and dimensions must be used. The battery should only
be replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.

Battery
H8 AGM
Current (V)
Cold start capacity
(Cold Cranking
Amperes - CCA)
(A)
Dimensions,
L×W×H in. (mm)
Capacity (Ah)

Battery coolant
The hybrid battery's cooling system has its own
expansion tank.

Related information

850

•
•

Jump starting (p. 365)
Battery symbols (p. 482)

13.9×6.9×7.5
(353×175×190)
95

The H8 AGM is held in place by a strap. Ensure
that this strap is pulled taut.

Filling the hybrid battery's cooling system should
only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.

}}
481

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
||

Related information

•
•

Hybrid battery specifications (p. 527)
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 383)

Battery symbols

Avoid smoking, open
flames, and/or sparks.

There are information and warning symbols on
the battery.
Wear protective goggles.

Risk of explosion

See the owner's manual for
additional information.
Recycle properly

Keep batteries away from
children.

NOTE
A used battery should be disposed of in an
environmentally responsible manner. Consult
your Volvo retailer or take the battery to a
recycling station.

Batteries contain corrosive
acid.

Related information

•

482

Start battery (p. 479)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Fuses

Location of the fuseboxes

The fuses help protect the vehicle's electrical
components from overloading or short circuits.

Fuse replacement

WARNING
Never use metal objects or fuses with higher
amperage than those stated on the lists of
fuses. Doing so could seriously damage or
overload the vehicle's electrical system.
Orange wires may only be handled by trained
and authorized Volvo service technicians or
licensed electricians.
A number of component in the vehicle used
high voltage electrical current and can be very
dangerous to touch.

See the list of fuse boxes for their locations.

Pull the fuse straight out and examine it from
the side to see if the curved metal wire in the
fuse is intact.

If the wire is broken, insert a new fuse of the
same color and amperage (written on the
fuse).

Engine compartment

WARNING
Never use metal objects or fuses with higher
amperage than those stated on the following
pages. Doing so could seriously damage or
overload the vehicle's electrical system.

Under the glove compartment

Do not touch any components that are not
clearly described in this owner's information.
If an electrical component fails to function, this
may be due to a blown fuse. If the same fuse
blows repeatedly, this indicates a problem with
the component, which should be inspected by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

Replacing fuses

Cargo compartment

Related information

•
•
•
•

Replacing fuses (p. 483)
Fuses in the cargo compartment (p. 493)
Fuses in the engine compartment (p. 484)
Fuses in the passenger compartment
(p. 489)

Related information

•
•
•
•

Fuses (p. 483)
Fuses in the cargo compartment (p. 493)
Fuses in the engine compartment (p. 484)
Fuses in the passenger compartment
(p. 489)

483

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Fuses in the engine compartment
The fuses in the engine compartment help protect electrical components such as engine and
brake functions.

484

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

There is a fuse removal tool on the inside of the
fuse box cover.

Positions
There is a decal on the inside of the cover with a
list of fuses.
}}
485

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
||

•

Fuses 1–13, 18–30, 35–37, 46–54 and
55–70 are called "Micro".

Function

[A]

Function

•

Fuses 14–17, 31–34 and 71–78 are called
"MCase" and should only be replaced by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

Converter for controlling feed to
the rear axle electric motor

–

Hybrid battery control module
for high-voltage converter for
combined high-voltage generator/starter motor with 500 V–12
V voltage converter

Front USB socket*

12-volt socket in the front tunnel console

12-volt socket on the rear side
of the tunnel consoleA

Function

486

[A]

Converter for controlling feed to
the rear axle electric motor

–

Charging module

–

Control module for engaging/
changing gears

Cut-off valve for hybrid battery
coolant; coolant pump 1 for
hybrid battery

High Voltage Coolant Heater
control module

Coolant pump for electric drive
system

Control module for: charge module, heat exchanger cut-off valve,
cut-off valve for coolant through
the climate system

Hybrid component cooling fan

Hybrid battery control module
for high-voltage converter for
combined high-voltage generator/starter motor with 500 V–12
V voltage converter

–

12-volt socket in the tunnel console between the rear seats B
12-volt socket in the cargo compartment

–

[A]

USB sockets for iPad holdersB
–

–

Heated windshield* driver side

Shunt

Heated windshield* driver side

Headlight washers*

Windshield washer

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Function
–

[A]
–

Function

[A]

Function

[A]

Passenger side headlight

7,5

Vacuum regulators; Valve

7,5

Horn

–

Spoiler shutter control module;
Radiator shutter control module;
Fuel leakage detection

Alarm siren*

–

Brake system control module
(valves, parking brake)

–

Windshield wipers

Air bags; Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS)

Heated oxygen sensors (front
and rear)

Tailgate window washer

Driver side headlight

7,5

Heated windshield*, passenger
side

Accelerator pedal sensor

Oil pump solenoid; A/C magnetic coupling; heated oxygen
sensor (center)

Transmission control module;
Gear selector control module

–

Engine control module

–

Transmission oil pump control
module

Engine control module; Turbocharger valve

Vacuum pump control module

Solenoids; Valves; Engine cooling system thermostat

Transmission actuator

–
Brake system control module
(ABS pump)
–

–
40
–

Heated windshield*, passenger
side

Shunt

Feed when ignition is switched
on to: engine control module,
transmission components, electrical power steering, central
electrical module

Exterior vehicle sound (certain
markets)

–

Engine control module

Ignition coil; Spark plugs

–

–
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 487

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
||

Function

A
B

–

Not XC90 Excellence
XC90 Excellence

Related information

•
•

488

[A]

Fuses (p. 483)
Replacing fuses (p. 483)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Fuses in the passenger
compartment
The fuses in the passenger compartment help
protect electrical components such as the 120volt socket, displays and door modules.

}}
489

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
||

490

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Positions

•

Fuses 1, 3–21, 23–36, 39–53 and 55–59
are called "Micro".

•

Fuses 2, 22, 37–38 and 54 are called
"MCase" and should only be replaced by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Function

–

120-volt socket between the rear
seatsA

Function

Heated steering wheel* module

Control module for driver support
functions

Panorama roof and sun shade*

Head-up display*

Courtesy lighting

–

Ceiling console display (seat belt
reminder, front passenger side airbag indicator)

–

Humidity sensor

Rear passenger-side door module

Fuses in the cargo compartment

Internet connection control module;
Volvo On Call control module

Rear driver-side door module

Infotainment control module
(amplifier)

Climate system blower module
(rear)

–

Climate system control module
–

10
–

–

On-board diagnostics (OBDII)

Alarm system movement sensorB

Center display

Media player

Instrument panel

Climate system blower module
(front)

Center console buttons

Sun sensor

–

Steering wheel module

Module for start knob and parking
brake

–
Instrument lighting; Courtesy lighting; Rearview mirror auto-dim function; Rain and light sensor; Rear
tunnel console keypad*A; Power
front seats*; Power rear seatsA;
Display for rear seat convenience
functionsA; Rear seat massage
functionA

–
7.5

}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 491

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
||

Function

Multi-band antenna module

–

Front seat massage function

Front passenger-side door module

–

Display for rear seat convenience
functionsA

–

Tailgate window wiper

Fuel pump control module

Relay windings for engine compartment electrical module; Relay winding for transmission oil pump

–

Circuit breaker for fuses 53 and 58

Driver side seat heating*

Passenger side seat heating*

Coolant pump

–

Active chassis control module*

Sensus control module
–

XC90 Excellence.
Certain markets only.

Related information

•
•

Fuses (p. 483)
Replacing fuses (p. 483)

–

Front driver-side door module

–

492

A
B

–
10
–

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Fuses in the cargo compartment
The fuses in the cargo compartment help protect electrical components such as power
seats*, airbags and seat belt tensioners.

}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 493

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
||

The fuse box is under the storage compartment on the right side

494

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Positions

•
•

Fuses 13–17 and 21–36 are called "Micro".
Fuses 1–12, 18–20 and 37 are called
"MCase" and should only be replaced by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Function

Heated rear window

Power rear seat (driver side)A

20A

Pneumatic suspension* compressor

Rear electric heater (passenger
side)

–

Rear electric heater (driver side)

Power rear seat (passenger side)A

20A

–
Power tailgate*

–
25

Power front seat (passenger side)*
module

Trailer hitch* control module

Seat belt tensioner module (passenger side)

Function

Internal relay windings

Heated rear seat (driver side)*

–

Foot movement detection module
for opening the power tailgate*

Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*

–

Seat belt tensioner modules

Emission system actuator

–

Trailer hitch* control module

Power front seat (driver seat*
module

Seat belt tensioner module (driver
side)

Heated rear seat (passenger
side)*

Parking camera*

–

–
Ionic air

–
cleanerA

Feed when ignition is switched on.

Airbag and seat belt tensioner
modules

Cooler; heated/cooled cup holder
(rear)A

15
–

XC90 Excellence.

Related information

•
•

Replacing fuses (p. 483)
Fuses (p. 483)

10A

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 495

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Replacing bulbs
The halogen headlight bulbs can be replaced by
the owner.
Before the bulbs can be replaced, that plastic
covering over the headlight housing has to be
removed.

Release the pins in the plastic covering's
four clips by pressing them down with a
screwdriver or similar object and remove the
covering.

NOTE

•

The turn signal, high/low beam, Daytime Running
Light and parking light bulbs will be accessible
when the plastic covering has been removed.

For information regarding any bulbs not
mentioned in this section, please contact
your Volvo retailer or a trained and
authorized Volvo service technician.

•

Always switch off the ignition before starting to replace a bulb.

Put the covering back in place in the reverse
order.

•

If an error message remains in the display after a faulty bulb has been replaced,
contact an authorized Volvo workshop.

•

Condensation may form temporarily on
the inside of the lenses of exterior lights
such as headlights, fog lights, or taillights.
This is normal and the lights are
designed to withstand moisture. Normally,
condensation will dissipate after the
lights have been on for a short time.

•

The optional Active Bending Light bulbs
contain trace amounts of mercury. These
bulbs should always be disposed of by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

NOTE
The pins in the clips have to be pressed back
completely before the clips are placed in the
plastic covering.
When the covering is put back in place, the
pins must be pressed so that their upper surface is flush with the surface of the clip.

CAUTION
To do so:
Lift the rubber strip by pressing in toward the
engine compartment.

496

Never touch the glass of bulbs with your fingers. Grease and oils from your fingers vaporize in the heat and will leave a deposit on the
reflector, which will damage it.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

WARNING

Turn signal

•

The ignition should be switched off completely (be in ignition mode 0) when
replacing bulbs.

(Not in use)

•

If the engine has been running just prior
to replacing bulbs in the headlight housing, please keep in mind that components
in the engine compartment will be hot.

Taillight bulbs

Front bulbs (vehicles with halogen
headlights)

Related information

•
•

Bulb specifications (p. 501)
Removing the rectangular headlight cover
(p. 498)

•
•
•

Replacing parking light bulbs (p. 500)

•

Replacing low beam headlight bulbs (p. 498)

Replacing front turn signal bulbs (p. 500)
Replacing High Beam headlight bulbs
(p. 499)

Brake light (LED)
Side marker light (LED)
Backup light2
Taillight (LED)
Side marker light
Low beam
High beam

Turn signal (LED)
Fog light (LED)
High-mounted brake light (LED)

Parking light/Daytime Running Light
2

Must be replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

497

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Removing the rectangular headlight
cover
Most of the bulbs in the headlight housing can
be accessed when the rectangular cover has
been removed.
Before the rectangular cover can be removed, the
plastic covering must be removed, see the article
"Replacing bulbs" for information.

Loosen the cover's four screws with a T20
Torx screwdriver (1) but do not remove them
completely (turning them 3–4 turns is
enough).

Push the cover to the side.

Remove the cover.

Put the cover back in place in the reverse order.

498

Related information

•

Replacing bulbs (p. 496)

Replacing low beam headlight bulbs
On models with halogen headlights, the low
beam headlight bulb can be replaced by the
owner.
Before the bulb can be replaced, the plastic covering over the headlight housing has to be
removed, see the article "Replacing bulbs."

Remove the round rubber cover from the
headlight housing.

Remove the bulb by turning the bulb holder
upward and then pulling it straight out.

Carefully pry the plastic sleeve by the connector's locking lug to release it.

Remove the connector from the bulb.

Insert a new bulb.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
6.

Insert the bulb in the socket and turn downward. It can only be inserted in one way.

Replacing High Beam headlight
bulbs

Put the rubber cover back into place.

On models with halogen headlights, the High
Beam headlight bulb can be replaced by the
owner.

Related information

•
•

Replacing bulbs (p. 496)
Bulb specifications (p. 501)

Related information

•

Removing the rectangular headlight cover
(p. 498)

•

Bulb specifications (p. 501)

Before the bulb can be accessed, the headlight
housing's rectangular cover must be removed,
see the article "Removing the rectangular headlight cover."

Remove the bulb by turning the bulb holder
upward and then pulling it straight out.

Carefully pry the plastic sleeve by the connector's locking lug to release it.

Remove the connector from the bulb.

Insert a new bulb.

Insert the bulb in the socket and turn downward. It can only be inserted in one way.

499

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Replacing parking light bulbs

On models with halogen headlights, the front
parking light bulb can be replaced by the owner.
Before the bulb can be accessed, the headlight
housing's rectangular cover must be removed,
see the article "Removing the rectangular headlight cover."
Remove the high beam bulb first by turning the
bulb holder upward and then pulling it straight
out. This makes it easier to access the parking
light bulb.

500

Pull the bulb holder straight out.

Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.

Insert a new bulb.

Insert the bulb holder in the socket and
press it into place.

If the high beam bulb was removed, insert
the bulb in the socket and turn downward. It
can only be inserted in one way.

Related information

•
•
•

Replacing bulbs (p. 496)
Bulb specifications (p. 501)
Removing the rectangular headlight cover
(p. 498)

Replacing front turn signal bulbs
On models with halogen headlights, the front
turn signal bulb can be replaced by the owner.
Before the bulb can be accessed, the headlight
housing's rectangular cover must be removed,
see the article "Removing the rectangular headlight cover".

Press the retaining catches together and pull
the bulb holder straight out.

The bulb holder and bulb must be replaced
as one unit.

Press the new bulb holder into the socket.

Related information

•

Removing the rectangular headlight cover
(p. 498)

•
•

Replacing bulbs (p. 496)
Bulb specifications (p. 501)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Bulb specifications
The following specifications apply to models
equipped with halogen headlights. If other bulbs
need to be replaced, contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Function

[W]A

Type

Low beam

H11

High Beam

Turn signal

PY24W

21/5

W21/5W

Daytime running light/
parking light
A

Watt

Related information

•

Replacing bulbs (p. 496)

501

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Hoisting the vehicle
When the vehicle is hoisted, the jack or garage
lift must be positioned correctly under the vehicle.
For vehicles equipped with leveling control*, if it is
also equipped with the optional pneumatic suspension, this must be deactivated before the
vehicle is hoisted. This is done from the center
display:

502

Tap Settings in Top view.

Tap My Car

Select Deactivate Suspension & Leveling
Control.

Suspension .

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Location of the jack attachment points (triangles)/lifting points (red areas)

WARNING

•

Ensure that the jack is positioned so that
the vehicle cannot slide off it.

•

Always use axle stands or similar structures.

Related information

•
•
•

Removing a wheel (p. 454)
Installing a wheel (p. 456)
Jack (p. 453)

503

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Opening and closing the hood

Closing

The hood is opened by releasing it from the passenger compartment and then by using the handle under the front edge of the hood.

Press down the hood until it begins to close
due to its own weight.

When the handle under the front edge of the
hood is in the lock, press down on the hood
to close it completely.

Opening

WARNING

Turn the handle under the front edge of the
hood counterclockwise to release it from the
lock and lift.

With the hood completely closed, pull the
control (located to the left of the brake
pedal).

Warning–hood not closed
When the hood lock has been completely released, this symbol and a
graphic will illuminate in the instrument
panel and an audible signal will be
given. If the vehicle begins to roll, the audible signal will be repeated several times.
For additional information, see also the article
"Door and seat belt reminders."

NOTE
If the warning symbol remains on or if the
audible signal is given even if the hood is
completely closed and locked, consult a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

504

•

Be sure the hood is completely unobstructed while it is being closed.

•

Check that the hood locks properly when
closed. It must audibly lock on both sides.

•

Never drive if the hood is not completely
closed and locked.

•

While driving, if there are any indications
that the hood is not locked in the closed
position, stop safely as soon as possible
and close it completely.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Engine compartment overview

Hood completely closed

Related information

•
•

Engine compartment overview (p. 505)
Door and seat belt reminders (p. 67)

WARNING

The engine compartment overview shows some
maintenance points.

•

Some of the components in the vehicle's electrical drive system are located in the engine compartment.

Orange cables should only be handled by
a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

•

A number of the vehicle's components
use high voltage and can be very dangerous if handled improperly.

•

Do not touch any components that have
not been clearly described/explained in
this manual.

•

Use caution when checking/refilling fluids in the engine compartment.

•

The cooling fan (located at the front of
the engine compartment, behind the radiator) may start or continue to operate (for
up to 6 minutes) after the engine has
been switched off.

•

Engine cleaning should only be done by a
workshop. If engine cleaning agents are
used when the engine has been running,
there may a fire risk.

•

Before performing any operations in the
engine compartment, the ignition should
always be completely switched off (in
mode 0) and there should be no remote
keys in the passenger compartment. The
gear selector should be in the P (park)
position. If the engine has been running,
wait until it has cooled before touching
any components in the engine compartment.

}}
505

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
||

•

The distributor ignition system operates
at very high voltages. Special safety precautions must be followed to prevent
injury. Always turn the ignition off when
replacing distributor ignition components
e.g. plugs, coil, etc.
Do not touch any part of the distributor
ignition system while the engine is running. This may result in unintended movements and body injury.

Air cleaner

Engine oil

Engine oil filler cap

The correct oil must be used for the stated oil
change (service) intervals to apply.

Related information

•
•
•

Ignition modes (p. 370)
Opening and closing the hood (p. 504)
Refilling the windshield washer fluid reservoir
(p. 511)

Volvo recommends:

The layout of the engine compartment may differ slightly
from model to model

Coolant expansion tank
Brake fluid reservoir
Washer fluid reservoir
Relay/fuse box

506

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

CAUTION

•

Not checking the oil level regularly can
result in serious engine damage if the oil
level becomes too low.

•

Oil that is lower than the specified quality
can damage the engine.

•

Volvo does not recommend the use of oil
additives.

•

Always add oil of the same type and viscosity as already used.

•

Oil changes should be carried out by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

•

Using oil of higher than the specified
quality is permitted and may be necessary for demanding driving.

Also, refer to the Warranty and Service Records
information booklet for information on oil change
intervals and oil specifications.

Checking and refilling engine oil
The oil level is checked electronically.

Checking and refilling engine oil (p. 507)

Models with an electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.

The oil level can be checked in
the center display when the
engine is not running.
From the center display's
Home view, swipe the screen
from right to left to open App
view. Tap Car status and then tap Status to
show the oil level.

Oil filler cap3

It may be necessary to top up engine oil between
regularly scheduled services.
No action is necessary until a message is displayed in the instrument panel.

WARNING

Oil level graphic in the center display

•

Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into
contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces.

•

If Engine oil level Service required is
displayed, have the vehicle checked by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician. The oil level may be too high.

The oil level should be checked at regular intervals, particularly during the period up to the first
scheduled maintenance service.

Related information

•

Checking the oil level

If the oil level sensor indicates that the level is
too low, using the correct oil, top up with the
amount of oil indicated as soon as possible.

}}
507

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
||

NOTE

•

The system cannot detect changes in the
oil level immediately. The vehicle must be
driven approximately 20 miles (30 km) or
have been parked on level ground with
the engine off for 5 minutes before the
oil level reading will be correct.

•

If the necessary conditions are not met
for checking the oil level electronically
(time interval after the engine was
switched off, if the vehicle is parked on
an incline, etc.), No values available will
be displayed. This does not indicate a
problem with the oil level sensor.

Windshield wipers in the service
position

The service position can be activated in two ways
from the center display:

The windshield wiper blades must be in the vertical (service) position for replacement, washing
or to lift them away from the windshield when
e.g., removing ice or snow.

Via Function view

–

Related information

•
•

Via Settings

Engine oil (p. 506)
Ignition modes (p. 370)

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

Tap My Car

Tap the Wiper Service Position box.
> The windshield wipers will move to the
vertical position.

Wipers in the service position

CAUTION
Be sure the wiper blades are not frozen in
position before attempting to move them to
the service position.

Putting the windshield wipers in the
service position
The service position can be activated while the
vehicle is stationary and the wipers are not activated.

508

From Function view, tap the Wiper Service
Position button. The indicator light in the
button will illuminate when the service position is activated.
> The windshield wipers will move to the
vertical position.

Wipers

Deactivating service position
The service position can be deactivated in two
ways from the center display:

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Via Function view

CAUTION
If the wiper arms have been folded out from
the windshield while in the service position,
fold them back against the windshield before
returning the wipers to the normal position to
help avoid scratching the paint on the hood.

–

From Function view, tap the Wiper Service
Position button. The indicator light in the
button will go out when the service position
is deactivated.

Related information

•
•

Replacing wiper blades (p. 509)

Replacing wiper blades
The wiper blades should be replaced regularly
for best effect.
The windshield wiper blades must be in the vertical (service) position for replacement, washing
or to lift them away from the windshield when
e.g., removing ice or snow.

Replacing the windshield wiper blades

Using the windshield wipers (p. 156)

Via Settings
1.

Tap Settings in the center display's Top
view.

My Car

Tap the Wiper Service Position to deselect
the box.

Wipers

The wipers will also leave the service position if:

•
•

The wipers are activated.

•

The rain sensor is activated.

The windshield/headlight washers are activated.

}}
509

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
||

Replacing the tailgate wiper blade

With the wipers in the service position, fold
out the wiper arm from the windshield. Press
the button on the wiper blade attachment
and pull the wiper blade straight out, parallel
with the wiper arm.
Slide in the new wiper blade until it clicks
into place.
Check that the blade is securely in place.
4.

510

Press the wipers back against the windshield.

The windshield wiper blades are different lengths

NOTE
The windshield wiper blades are different
lengths. The blade on the driver’s side is
longer than the one on the passenger side.

Fold the wiper arm outward.

Grasp the inner section of wiper blade (at the
arrow).

Turn the wiper blade counterclockwise to use
one end as a lever to help release it from the
wiper arm.

Press the new wiper blade until it clicks into
place and check that it seats securely.

Fold the wiper arm back toward the tailgate
window.

Cleaning
Keeping the windshield/tailgate window and
wiper blades clean helps improve visibility and
prolongs the service life of the wiper blades.
Clean the wiper blades with a stiff-bristle brush
and lukewarm soap solution or car washing
detergent.

Related information

•

Windshield wipers in the service position
(p. 508)

•

Refilling the windshield washer fluid reservoir
(p. 511)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Refilling the windshield washer fluid
reservoir
Washer fluid helps keep the windshield and
headlights clean.

Related information

•
•

Opening and closing the hood (p. 504)
Engine compartment overview (p. 505)

Cleaning the exterior
The vehicle should be washed at regular intervals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spots
adhere to the paint and may cause damage. To
help prevent corrosion, it is particularly important
to wash the car frequently in the wintertime.

Hand washing
The following points should be kept in mind when
washing and cleaning the car:

The windshield and headlight washers* share a
common reservoir. Open the blue cap to refill
washer fluid (see the illustration for the location
of the reservoir).
During cold weather, the reservoir should be filled
with windshield washer solvent containing antifreeze. Use Volvo Original Washer Fluid or the
equivalent with a recommended pH value
between 6 and 8 in a 1:1 solution.
When there is approx. 1 qt (1 liter) of washer
fluid remaining in the reservoir, a text message
and the
symbol will be displayed in the
instrument panel.

•

Avoid washing your car in direct sunlight.
Doing so may cause detergents and wax to
dry out and become abrasive. To avoid
scratching, use lukewarm water to soften the
dirt before you wash with a soft sponge, and
plenty of sudsy water.

•

Bird droppings: Remove from paintwork as
soon as possible. Otherwise the finish may
be permanently damaged.

•

A car washing detergent can be used to
facilitate the softening of dirt and oil.

•

Dry the car with a clean chamois and
remember to clean the drain holes in the
doors and rocker panels.

•

Tar spots can be removed with tar remover
after the car has been washed.

•

A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapy
water can be used to clean the wiper blades.
Frequent cleaning of the windshield and
wiper blades improves visibility considerably
and also helps prolong the service life of the
wiper blades.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 511

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
||

•

Wash off the dirt from the underside (wheel
housings, fenders, etc).

•

We do NOT recommend washing your car in
an automatic wash during the first few
months (because the paint will not have
hardened sufficiently).

•

An automatic wash is a simple and quick way
to clean your car, but it is worth remembering
that it may not be as thorough as when you
yourself go over the car with sponge and
water. Keeping the underbody clean is most
important, especially in the winter. Some
automatic washers do not have facilities for
washing the underbody.

In areas of high industrial fallout, more frequent washing is recommended.

CAUTION

•

During high pressure washing, the spray
mouthpiece must never be closer to the
vehicle than 13" (30 cm). Do not spray
into the locks.
Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights can
reduce lighting capacity considerably.
Clean the headlights regularly, for example when refueling.

Special laminated panoramic roof cautions:

•

Always close the laminated panoramic
roof and sun shade before washing your
vehicle.

•

Never use abrasive cleaning agents on
the laminated panoramic roof.

•

Never use wax on the rubber seals
around the laminated panoramic roof.

NOTE
When washing the car, remember to remove
dirt from the drain holes in the doors and sills.

512

Automatic car washes

CAUTION
When using an automatic car wash in which
the vehicle has to be able to roll freely, the
auto-hold brake function must be deactivated.
If this is not done, the brakes will automatically be applied when the vehicle is stationary.
To deactivate this function:
1.

Drive the vehicle into the car wash

Turn off the auto-hold function using the
control on the center console

Turn off the parking brake's automatic
function in the center display's Top view
(tap Settings, tap My Car Electric
Parking Brake and deselect Auto
Activate Parking Brake)

NOTE
Condensation may form temporarily on the
inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as
headlights or taillights. This is normal and the
lights are designed to withstand moisture.
Normally, condensation will dissipate after the
lights have been on for a short time.

Put the gear selector in N

Switch off the ignition by turning the start
knob to STOP and holding it in this position for at least 4 seconds

The vehicle will then be able to roll freely.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

CAUTION

•

Before driving into an automatic car
wash, turn off the optional rain sensor to
avoid damaging the windshield wipers.

•

Make sure that side view mirrors, auxiliary
lamps, etc, are secure, and that any
antenna(s) are retracted or removed. Otherwise there is risk of the machine dislodging them.

•

Chromed wheels: Clean chrome-plated
wheels using the same detergents used
for the body of the vehicle. Aggressive
wheel-cleaning agents can permanently
stain chrome-plated wheels.

WARNING

•

When the vehicle is driven immediately
after being washed, apply the brakes,
including the parking brake, several times
in order to remove any moisture from the
brake linings.
Engine cleaning agents should not be
used when the engine is warm. This constitutes a fire risk.

Exterior components
Volvo recommends the use of special cleaning
products, available at your Volvo retailer, for
cleaning colored plastic, rubber, or ornamental
components such as chromed strips on the exte-

rior of your vehicle. The instructions for using
these products should be followed carefully. Solvents or stain removers should not be used.

CAUTION

•

Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rubber components

•

Polishing chromed strips can wear away
or damage the surface

•

Polishes containing abrasive substances
should not be used

Cleaning the interior
Only use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and follow the instructions included with the car care
product.

CAUTION

•

Under no circumstances should gasoline,
naphtha or similar cleaning agents be
used on the plastic or the leather since
these can cause damage.

•

Take extra care when removing stains
such as ink or lipstick since the coloring
can spread.

•

Use solvents sparingly. Too much solvent
can damage the seat padding.

•

Start from the outside of the stain and
work toward the center.

•

Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in a
pocket) or Velcro fasteners on clothing
may damage the textile upholstery.

•

Clothing that is not colorfast, such as
new jeans or suede garments, may stain
the upholstery.

Related information

•
•
•
•

Paint damage (p. 516)
Corrosion protection (p. 516)
Polishing and waxing (p. 518)
Windshield wipers in the service position
(p. 508)

Fabric upholstery and ceiling liner
Clean with soapy water or a detergent. For more
difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream, shoe polish, grease, etc., use a clothing/fabric stain
remover. Consult your Volvo retailer.
}}
513

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
||

Leather* care
Volvo's leather upholstery is manufactured with a
protectant to repel soiling. Over time, sunlight,
grease and dirt can break down the protection.
Staining, cracking, scuffing, and fading can result.
Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasy leather
care kit formulated to clean and beautify your
vehicle's leather, and to renew the protective
qualities of its finish. The cleaner removes dirt
and oil buildup. The light cream protectant
restores a barrier against soil and sunlight.
Volvo also offers a special leather softener that
should be applied after the cleaner and protectant. It leaves leather soft and smooth, and
reduces friction between leather and other finishes in the vehicle.
Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and conditioning your vehicle's leather two to four times a
year. Ask your Volvo retailer about Leather Care
Kit 951 0251 and Leather Softener 943 7429.
Cleaning leather upholstery
1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp sponge and
squeeze it until the cleaner foams.
2.

Apply the foam to the stain by moving the
sponge with circular movements.

Dampen the stain thoroughly with the
sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain, do
not rub.

514

Dry the stain with soft paper towels or a
towel, and allow the leather to dry completely.

Protecting leather upholstery
1. Put a small amount of protectant cream on a
cloth and apply a thin coating of cream to the
upholstery with light circular movements.
2.

Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes.

This will help the leather resist staining and protect against sunlight's harmful UV rays.

Cleaning a leather-covered steering
wheel

•

Remove soil, dust, etc., with a damp sponge
and a neutral soap solution.

•

Leather should be allowed to breath. Never
cover the steering wheel with a plastic protector.

•

Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and
conditioning the steering wheel with Volvo's
Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather
Softener 943 7429.

If there are stains on the steering wheel:
Type 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat or blood)
–

Type 3 (dry soil or dust)
1.

Remove the soil/dust with a soft brush.

Same procedure as for type I stains.

CAUTION
Sharp objects, such as rings, could damage
the leather on the steering wheel.

Leather panels*
Leather should be allowed to breath. Never cover
the upper side of the dashboard or door panels
with a plastic protector. Ask your Volvo retailer
about Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather
Softener 943 7429.

Spots on interior plastic, metal, or wood
surfaces
Cleaning interior plastic components should be
done with a moist microfiber cloth. Consult your
Volvo retailer.

Use a soft cloth or sponge. Wipe the wheel
with a solution with 5% ammonia. For blood
stains, mix approx. 1 cup (2 dl) of water and
one ounce (25g) of salt and wipe the stain.

Type 2 (fat, oil, sauces, or chocolate)
1.

Same procedure as for type I stains.

Finish by rubbing the wheel with absorbent
paper or a towel.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

CAUTION

•

Do not use cleaning agents with high
alcohol content such as washer fluid to
clean instrument panel glass.

•

Never spray cleaning agents or water
directly onto components with electrical
buttons or controls. Clean components of
this type by applying the cleaning agent/
water sparingly to a cloth and wiping the
components so that no liquid penetrates
into these components.

WARNING

Cleaning the seat belts
Clean only with lukewarm water and a mild soap
solution.

Cleaning floor mats
The floor mats should be vacuumed or brushed
clean regularly, especially during winter when
they should be taken out for drying. Spots on textile mats can be removed with a mild detergent.
For best protection in winter, Volvo recommends
the use of Volvo rubber floor mats. Consult your
Volvo retailer.

•

Volvo's floor mats are specially manufactured for your car. They must be firmly
secured in the clips on the floor so that
they cannot slide and become trapped
under the pedals on the driver's side.

Related information

•

Cleaning the center display (p. 515)

Cleaning the center display
Marks, stains, etc., on the center display may
affect its performance and readability. Clean it
regularly with a microfiber cloth.

Center display's Home button

To clean the center display:
1.

Turn off the display by pressing and holding
the Home button.

Wipe the screen clean with the microfiber
cloth provided or use a similar one, using a
small, circular motion. If necessary, moisten
the cloth slightly.

Reactivate the display by pressing the Home
button briefly.

}}
515

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
||

CAUTION

•

The microfiber cloth used should be free
of sand, dirt or anything abrasive that
might scratch the screen.

•

Do not use rough cloths, paper towels or
tissues that could scratch the screen.

•

When cleaning the center display, apply
only light pressure on the screen. Pressing too hard could cause damage.

•

Do not spray any liquid or corrosive
chemicals directly on the screen. Do not
use window cleaning liquid, cleaning
agents (particularly ones containing abrasives), sprays, solvents, alcohol or ammonia to clean the screen.

Corrosion protection

Paint damage

Your vehicle is constructed with effective protection against corrosion.

Paint damage requires immediate attention to
avoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the finish
regularly, for instance washing the vehicle.
Touch-up if necessary.

Inspection and maintenance
The corrosion protection does not normally
require maintenance but keeping the vehicle
clean helps prevent the onset of corrosion. The
use of strong alkaline or acidic cleaning fluids
should always be avoided on shiny body components. Any stone chips in the paint should be
touched up as soon as possible.

Related information

•
•

Paint repairs require special equipment and skill.
Contact your Volvo retailer for any extensive damage.
Minor scratches can be repaired by using Volvo
touch-up paint.

Color code

Paint damage (p. 516)
Touching up paint damage (p. 517)

Related information

•
•

Cleaning the interior (p. 513)
Center display overview (p. 32)

Sample color code (1): US models

516

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

NOTE
When touching up the vehicle, it should be
clean and dry. The surface temperature
should be above 60 °F (15 °C).

Touching up paint damage
Stone chips or other minor paint damage can be
repaired by the vehicle's owner.

Repairing stone chips

Related information

•
•

Label information (p. 520)
Touching up paint damage (p. 517)

Sample color code (1): Canadian models
Make sure you have the right color. See also the
article "Label information" for the location of this
label.

Minor stone chips and scratches

Place a strip of masking tape over the damaged surface. Pull the tape off so that any
loose flakes of paint adhere to it.

Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it with a
small brush.

When the primer surface is dry, the paint can
be applied using a brush. Mix the paint thoroughly; apply several thin paint coats and let
dry after each application.

If there is a longer scratch, you may want to
protect surrounding paint by masking it off

After a few days, polish the touched-up
areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount of
polish.

Material:

•
•
•
•
•

Primer – can
Paint – touch-up pen
Brush
Masking tape
Emery cloth

If the stone chip has not gone down to the bare
metal and an undamaged color coat remains, you
can add paint immediately after removing dirt.

}}
517

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
||

518

Related information

•
•

Paint damage (p. 516)
Cleaning the exterior (p. 511)

Polishing and waxing

CAUTION

Normally, polishing is not required during the
first year after delivery, however, waxing may be
beneficial.

•

Before applying polish or wax the vehicle
must be washed and dried. Tar spots can be
removed with kerosene or tar remover. Difficult spots may require a fine rubbing compound.

•
•

After polishing use liquid or paste wax.

•

Waxing alone does not substitute for polishing a dull surface.

Several commercially available products contain both polish and wax.

•

A wide range of polymer-based waxes can
be purchased today. These waxes are easy to
use and produce a long-lasting, high-gloss
finish that protects the bodywork against oxidation, road dirt and fading.

•

Do not polish or wax your vehicle in direct
sunlight (the surface of the vehicle should
not be warmer than 113 °F (45 °C).

Volvo does not recommend the use of longlife or durable paint protection coatings, some
of which may claim to prevent pitting, fading,
oxidation, etc. These coatings have not been
tested by Volvo for compatibility with your
vehicle's clear coat. Some of them may cause
the clear coat to soften, crack, or cloud. Damage caused by application of paint protection
coatings may not be covered under your vehicle's paint warranty.

Related information

•
•

Paint damage (p. 516)
Touching up paint damage (p. 517)

SPECIFICATIONS

Label information
The labels in your vehicle provide information
such as the chassis number, paint code, tire
inflation pressure, etc.

520

SPECIFICATIONS

Location of labels

}}
521

SPECIFICATIONS
||

List of labels
Vehicle Emission Control Information. (A)
US models, (B) Canadian models. Your Volvo
is designed to meet all applicable emission
standards, as evidenced by the certification
label on the underside of the hood. For further information regarding these regulations,
please consult your Volvo retailer.
Engine oil. This label contains the recommended engine oil specifications.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). The
VIN plate is located on the top left surface of
the dashboard. The Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) should always be quoted in all
correspondence concerning your vehicle with
the retailer and when ordering parts.
Tire inflation pressures. This label indicates
the correct inflation pressures for the tires
that were on the vehicle when it left the factory.

522

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS) specifications (USA) and Ministry of Transport (CMVSS) standards
(Canada). Your Volvo is designed to meet all
applicable safety standards, as evidenced by
the certification label on the driver's side Bpillar (the structural member at the side of
the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door
opening). This label also includes codes for
paint color, etc. For further information regarding these regulations, please consult your
Volvo retailer. U.S. models have the upper
decal; Canadian models have the lower one.

SPECIFICATIONS

Dimensions
The following table lists your vehicle's most
important dimensions.

Dimension

In.

Dimension

(mm)
A

Ground clearance
(curb weight + 2
people)A

9.1 (232)

Wheelbase

117.5 (2984)

Length

194.9 (4950)

In.

Dimension

(mm)
D

Load length, floor,
seatback downB
Load length, floor

Height

(mm)

80.3 (2040)

Load height

49.6 (1260)C

Track, front (models
without pneumatic
suspension)

65.9 (1673)E

Track, front (models
with pneumatic
suspension)

66.0 (1677)E

21.8 ( 554)
30.0/35.4
(761/898)D

In.

69.9 (1776)

32.1 (816)

65.6 (1665)F

65.7 (1669)F
}}
523

SPECIFICATIONS
||

Dimension

In.
(mm)

Track, rear (models
without pneumatic
suspension)

65.8 (1675)E

Track, rear (models
with pneumatic
suspension)

66.1 (1679)E

Load width, floor

Width

66.1 (1667)F

65.8 (1671)F
46.9 (1192)
75.7 (1923)G
76.0 (1931)H
77.1 (1958)I

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I

524

Width incl. door
mirrors (folded out)

84.3 (2140)

Width incl. door
mirrors (folded in)

79.1 (2008)

Varies slightly depending on tire size, chassis options, etc.
Not 4-seat models
From the second row of seats*.
4-seat models
Models with 20, 21 and 22 in. wheels.
Models with 18 and 19 in. wheels.
Chassis width.
Width on models with 18 and 19 in. wheels.
Width on models with 20, 21 and 22 in. wheels.

SPECIFICATIONS

Weights
The following table lists important weight data
for your vehicle.
Category
Gross vehicle weight
7-seat, 4-cyl.

USA

Canada

6,635 lbs

3,010 kg

6,140 lbs

2,785 kg

1,210 lbs

550 kg

1,000 lbs

450 kg

3,130 lbs

1,420 kg

2,975 lbs

1,350 kg

3,590 lbs

1,630 kg

3,305 lbs

1,500 kg

5,010 - 5,100 lbs

2,270 -2,310 kg

5,120 - 5,130 lbs

2,320 -2,330 kg

220 lbs

100 kg

4-seat, 4-cyl.
Capacity weight
7-seat, 4-cyl.
4-seat, 4-cyl.
Permissible axle weights, front
7-seat, 4-cyl.
4-seat, 4 cyl.
Permissible axle weights, rear
7-seat, 4-cyl.
4-seat, 4 cyl.
Curb weight
7-seat, 4-cyl.
4-seat, 4 cyl.
Max. roof load

}}
525

SPECIFICATIONS
||

Volvo 2016 XC90 T8 Twin Engine Plug In Hybrid Owner's Manual XC90T8 Plugin Owners V1

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation